Detailed What's New List ( Previous Changes)

Go Back to List of FAQs  Previous 

 

Jewelry Shopkeeper New Features, Modifications, Irmprovements

 

Jewelry Shopkeeper is constantly being improved so it runs better and so your business runs better.

 

Here are some of the more older changes. However, if you weren't aware of an "old" update, then it's new to you !

 

 

Version 4.140                                                 12/30/2019

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 275 new items for early 2020 including

 Valentines and Mothers Day items.

 (This feature requires the Maintenance Plan)

 

On the sales screen, you can modify the usual tax status by unchecking

 checking the Tax boxes on the right edge of the sales Sku lines.

 In previous versions, the tax and sale total calculation at the bottom

 of the screen were not updated until you saved that Sku line and went

 to the next line. Even though that would only be a few seconds, starting

 with this version, the tax totals are recalculated and redisplayed

 instantly for a more responsive reaction.

 

The data-entry boxes on the Receive Inventory screens

 have been changed to use an easier-to-read color combination.

 (Black on white now, not black on fuchsia.)

 

The email form in Shopkeeper (for emailing receipts, appraisals, reports, etc.)

 Now has a button to fill in email settings for many of the most

 common email platforms such as Gmail, Outlook-Online, AOL, Comcast, AT&T, etc.

 Also, it will change certain technical settings depending on which

 email method you use. E.g. in most cases, if you use the "dotNet" email

 method, it's best to use "port 587", otherwise "port 465" is best for the

 "direct CDO" method.

 However, it's still best if you check your email system's configuration

 guide for the technical settings such as SMTP server, Port, SSL, etc.,

 because the email systems do change their requirements periodically.

 

When you choose to email a report or a receipt and if there is no pre-filled-in

 email address, previous versions of Shopkeeper would create the PDF file

 but would *not* proceed to the email screen; it would ignore that option as being

 impossible. Starting this version it will open the email screen in such a case.

 (But of course, you still can't actually send the report until you type in an email

 address        in the email screen.)

 

Some Windows printer drivers occasionally print doubled half-height lines and a previous

 VJS update added the "80" option so you can choose to use an alternative print engine

 for such printers. However, the "80" option was not compatible if you periodically

 chose to send a receipt or report to a PDF file or email, so you'd have to manually

 turn the "80" option off temporarily. Starting this version, the "80" option will

 be ignored when you are sending the report or receipt to a PDF file so you don't have

 to turn the "80" option off and back on.

 

When receiving inventory the usual setting for the Quantity box is to allow numbers up

 to 9999 - without any decimals. In previous versions, in Preferences, you could change

 the Quantity format to 99.9 or 9.99 in case you need to receive fractional quantities.

 Note that for space reasons, you lost some digits for hundreds or thousands if you

 wanted space for decimals.

 Starting this version, you can choose an input format of 9999.99 in case some items

 need hundreds or more and other items need fractions.  You select this option on

 the Inventory page of Preferences.

 (Note: This is *not* related to weights; for items sold by the weight, you have

 always been able to enter many decimals.)

 

 [susp/demo/live]

 

Version 4.131                                                 12/04/2019

===============================================================

 

Adds a pause after updating the cost or retail of an assembled item

 so you can see which cost and retail were applied.

 

Adds an additional receipt layout "31 - Full Page Receipt - Raised Summary"

 which may be of use for long receipts if pagination problems occur.

 

 * A fix to accept large payments, over 500,000

 

 * A fix for a miscellaneous intermittent error message 1231 on the checkbook screen

 

When you change the description of a major code, the description of the dummy

 Sku (-00001) for that major code will now also change starting with this update.

 (But it will not change if the description of the dummy Sku was previously

 different than the prior major code description - i.e. if it was not "hard-linked.")

 

 

Version 4.130                                                 11/26/2019

===============================================================

 

You can now require filling in customers' addresses. In the Customer

 Defaults page of Preferences, you can choose ACSZ to require the

 Address and the City and the State and the Zip, or you could choose

 to require just some of those address elements - e.g. Z for Zip alone.

 

Updates to enable adding images to archived appraisals.

 (in some cases this was not possible before)

 

Updates to Interstore inventory transfer to transfer the extended details

 such as pre-appraisal notes, etc.

 

When you use the SMS-Texting features and employ the template merging

 such as including the customer's name in the message, previous

 versions would include the name as typed-in even if it were in

 all-capitals such as JONATHAN. Starting with this version, the SMS

 text will make that upper and lower like Jonathan.

 

If you use integrated credit card processing and attempt to erase/void an

 authorized credit card payment from a previous date, VJS will now

 not attempt the void as that's almost always problematic; instead it

 will suggest that the user try to do a negative/return charge to the card.

 

 On the same topic, if you use integrated credit card processing, and if you

 use a generic Cash Sale name on the sale, that can make voiding the charges

 awkward - because voids have to be linked to the original charge authorization

 and with a generic Cash Sale name, you'd have to sift through a large number

 of transactions. The current version adds an alert to avoid this situation.

 

 

A new security option allows you to prevent certain users from modifying the

 extended notes area of the customer profile while still allowing

 them to add new notes. You can find the option "Edit Customer Profile Notes"

 on the More Security Settings page of Preferences. For users who are

 affected by this security lock-out, a "plus sign" icon above the Notes

 box will appear which will allow adding additional notes.

 

 * A fix to accept large payments, over 500,000

 

 * A fix for a miscellaneous intermittent error message 1231 on the checkbook screen

 

 

 

 

Version 4.128                                                 11/14/2019

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 75 new items.

 (Requires the Maintenance Plan)

 

If you use the new screen resize feature and significantly enlarge the sales

 or credit slip screen, previous versions would not always scroll through

 the entire list of payment types. This problem has been resolved in this update.

 

Includes a fix for some credit slips being marked as "Used"

 prematurely. (Occurred only in the one prior update version.)

 

 

Version 4.127                                                 11/11/2019

===============================================================

 

The newest David Geller / Jeweler Profit Repair Blue Book

 is now available to add to Jewelry Shopkeeper.

 This is a catalog of over 6,300 repair tasks with

 revised pricing which helps ensure you don't under price

 your services. The increases can range from 10 to 100% over the

 last major revision.

 To use this feature, you will need to request Jeweler Profit

 to send us the OK for the most current Blue Book Digital License.

 

 http://www.jewelerprofit.com/contact_us.html

 

 

A program module to add the Lafonn Catalog of over 3000 items

 (including pictures) has been added to this Shopkeeper update.

 

 

 

 

Version 4.126                                                 11/01/2019

===============================================================

 

In previous versions there were occasional problem with in-house credit slips

 which had long numbers (over 10 digits long.) This has been resolved

 

The credit slip and gift certificate report now simultaneously creates an

 Excel version of the report information and puts it in the file

 Credit-Slips.xls in the VJS Reports folder. This may be useful if you

 intend to do mailings or emailings to certain customers with outstanding

 credit slips and gift certificates

 

 

 

Version 4.125                                                 10/24/2019

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 200 new new items and over 100 additional

 price and cost changes beyond those of the August and September updates.

 

 

Version 4.123                                                 10/11/2019

===============================================================

 

 

The minimize button on the Inventory Entry screen wasn't active in

 previous versions, but now is.

 

On the sales screen, an unhelpful alert about a missing sales clerk

 has been removed.

 

The report screen would be too short in certain cases in prior versions

 and this has been fixed in this update.

 

The Inventory Web Site Export has always had an option to put the image

 files in a "staging folder" ready for upload to the website.

 In this update a new option is to copy just the files that are not

 already in the staging folder.  This can save time in preparing

 the export for cases where there are a large number of pictures,

 but where most are already in the staging folder.

 

 

Version 4.121                                                   09/18/2019

===============================================================

 

A more thorough search for an unused sale number in case the

 next suggested sale number was already used.

 

[blockupdate zmisc]        

 

 

Version 4.120                                                   09/07/2019

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has a small number of new items and

 additional price and cost changes since the bigger August update.

 

If form resizing is active (see v 4.115 notes below), the reports

 selection screens can now remember different resizing and positions for

 different types of reports, whereas previously the resizing for

 one type of report selection screen affected all other types.

 

 

 [bonusrtn, 1SNS ]

 

Version 4.120                                                   08/28/2019

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 250 new items for Fall 2019.

 About 50 previous items have price and cost changes which are to

 go into effect on August 29.

 This update adds about 220 new image files.

 

 

New options have been added for credit card integration with support

 now available vis PAX Technology and Heartland.

 

 

Version 4.116                                                   08/23/2019

===============================================================

 

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over

 215 new items for Summer, Fall and Holiday 2019

 

Different computers can now maintain different sale number sequences.

 You can activate this option by assigning a sale number prefeix letter

 in Local Defaults page 2 of Preferences. While this prefix option was

 available in previous versions, using it didn't maintain a separate

 sequence number.

 

Misc adjustments

 

 [det_inv->Notes, skulistrcont, convert2repair, receiptposcprinter, shorteremvsn]

 

Version 4.115                            07/22/2019 - 08/01/2019

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 250 new items for early summer 2019.

 There is a small number of items with price and/or cost changes.

 This update adds about 50 new image files.

 

 

On the Sales Screen, on rare occasions, you may want to modify the Style

 box for non-inventory Sku's such as repairs. In previous versions this

 box would allow lower-case letters which could lead to inconsistent results.

 Starting this version, the style is automatically made upper-case.

 This box also has updated keyboard support such that pressing Enter or Tab

 will both save the changes and will land on the Save button in the Sku line.

 

Some jewelers have received gift cards with 16-digit numbers embossed on them.

 While that's not preferred, Shopkeeper has accepted such numbers for over a year.

 What's new in this update is that if you type or scan a number that long, it will

 automatically Not increment the next regular number in the sequence. E.g. after

 registering such a gift card number, it won't update the credit number sequence,

 even if you don't uncheck the Increment Next Number button.

 

A new Un-Archive utility can move a sale from the Archive sales file to the Current

 sales file if it (somehow) got into the Archive file. It can also do the reverse;

 move a sale from the Current File to the Archive file. (utility: unarchive.)

 

The resize window feature remembers the preferred enlargement and positioning of each

 resizable window. Starting with this version, there is the option of remembering

 resize-down settings. (This is expected to be rarely useful and is not active

 by default. Ask for instructions if interested.)

 

 Resizing enlarges the entire Shopkeeper form, including fonts, for easier reading

 and easier selection of buttons - especially on high resolution monitors.

 When resizing is activated, not only is the enlargement of each screen remembered,

 but also the position is remembered, which is helpful on large monitors.

 This feature can be activated via the Local Defaults p.3 page of Preferences.

 

 

 

Version 4.10                                        07/11/2019

===============================================================

 

The Internet Customer Search by Phone Number has been updated. Because changes

 were made to the www.411.info website, the search results were organized

 differently than before, which hindered VJS's ability to extract the name

 correctly - especially in cases where there was a middle name. The current VJS

 can now correctly select the first, middle and last-name portions of the results.

 

The Alternative Second Currency option for price tags has two changes.

 

 - Normally, the second currency is the selling price multiplied by the conversion

 factor. In this update, you can optionally choose to present it as the MSRP

 multiplied by the conversion factor. To do that, add the keyword

 ALTCURRENCYMSRP anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

 - The second currency can now be rounded to a multiple of any number, such as

 5, 10, 25, 50 or 100. E.g., instead of $149 x 19.5 resulting in 2905.50, you could

 make it round to 3000. To do this, In Preferences on the Inventory Tags page under

 Inventory preferences, in the Round box, type UP 10 or UP 50, etc.

 (Less likely, but you could also round down, by typing DOWN 10 or DOWN 25, etc.)

 

The small calendar icons next to Date boxes have been more reactive, to reduce

 the frequency with which you might have to click a couple of times before

 they react.

               

The option to press Ctrl while you click the Print a Tag button on the Inventory

 Status screen has been restored. This instantly        send the tag print request to

 the printer, bypassing a few dialog boxes which would normally appear before

 printing.

 

When you restock a particular merchandise style, the basic inventory information

 such as description, cost, price and picture have always been copied to the

 new Sku of that style. Starting with this version, the extended Notes / pre-appraisal

 will also be copied to the new Sku of the same style.

 

When recording an invoice of received merchandise, if you type a new vendor name

 but the vendor name is similar to a previous one, the Enter Inventory

 screen in previous versions would not let you add the new vendor at that time.

 I.e. you'd have to add it first  via the Vendor Maintenance screen.

 Starting with this version, you can add such a vendor on the fly from this same

 invoice screen. This also applies to Memos, Purchase Orders, Non-Inventory payables.

 

When you receive an invoice of inventory, there is an option to print out the invoice

 details. There are two changes in that area in this update: Previously there was not

 a layout that included the retail price but excluded the cost and now there is.

 Previously, the version which included the cost and retail totaled the cost value

 but not the retail value; now the retail total is printed at the bottom of the report.

 

 

 

Version 4.000                                        05/31/2019

===============================================================

 

Resizing of VJS windows is introduced

 

In previous versions of Shopkeeper, certain combinations of receipt

 options, combined with a slower network, could cause significant

 delays before receipt started printing. This version has additional optimization

 to avoid such delays.

 

When retrieving and unlocking an existing layaway or special order or repair

 sale, the cursor now initially lands on the first unused Sku line.

 This is more convenient than in previous versions where the cursor initially

 landed on one of the existing Sku lines. (This also applies to Cash Sales,

 though it's fairly uncommon to modify Cash sales.)

 

The Assemble Disassemble screen has a one-touch feature to both remove an assembled item

 from stock and to return to stock all the components.

 In the Assemble screen, type/select the master/assembled Sku

 then click the Delete trash icon at the top of the screen.

 

 You will have options as to whether the components will continue to appear

 in the list for that item but with zero quantity, or if they should be

 removed from the component list. (In either case, they will be added

 back to the on-hand inventory count.)

 

 You will also have the option as to whether to delete the assembled

 item entirely, or to zero the quantity, so that it can be looked up

 later.

 

The Physical Inventory Exception report by location has a new option

 to show only those items which were scanned as being in a location,

 say XX, which was not expected to have any in that location.

 

 Such items would have appeared on the regular physical inventory

 exception report by location, but the regular version also shows

 items where fewer were scanned than were expected. I.e. this typically

 highlights the excess / unexpected items.

 

 

The Physical Inventory by Trac Tech RFID has a new option whereby you can

 save the memory of the RFID to a text file on disk and then import that list.

 This would be useful if you use the wand at a location which does not have the

 Shopkeeper installed locally. E.g. if a remote store were running Shopkeeper

 from the main store via remote control, the Wand may not work by remote desktop

 or LogMeIn, etc., but the list file method does work over remote connections.

 

 

The Chart of Accounts screen now makes it harder to accidentally reassign an account

 to a different number. I.e. the Account Number box is now "double-locked"

 and you have to Ctrl-click it in order to unlock it and change the account number.

 

 

When you click on a date field, the cursor will jump to the most logical point to

 make it easier to adjust the date.

 If you click in either of the digits for the day, the cursor will jump

         to the beginning of the day.

 If you click in either of the digits for the month, the cursor will jump

         to the beginning of the month.

 If you click in either of the digits for the year, the cursor will jump

         to the beginning of the year.

 

 As before, unchanged is the behavior that if the date is empty (or, in fact

 if you click anywhere in a non-date box) then clicking anywhere in the box

 will jump the cursor to the beginning of that box.

         

The Google Image Search feature of Shopkeeper was no longer working correctly

 in many cases because the Google Images site had changed. This VJS update

 makes changes in that area to remain compatible with Google Images.

         

 

After issuing a donated gift certificate (with no payment), in previous versions the

 gift certificate screen didn't show a confirmation message and not every box was

 emptied. Also, the screen didn't immediately wait for the next customer name.

 So it might have been unclear to the user whether or not the certificate

 was actually created. This update adds a prompt and more clarity so that the

 user doesn't wonder if the certificate was created or not.

         

         

Previously, the SMS / Texting screen would set the message to all upper-case

 if you had set a Preference for customer names + addresses to be upper-case.

 Now the message will be left as originally typed - upper and lower case.

         

         

The Itemized Sales Report now has an option to filter the report to just a single

 Sku Number.

         

Version 3.910                                        03/22/2019

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 650 new items for Spring 2019.

 There is a large number (over 200 of price and cost changes.

 This update adds about 200 new image files.

 

 NB: The U.S. price changes go into effect on April 2, 2019 so one should

         wait until that date before updating the catalog.

         (For Canada, the price chnages are effective March 14.)

 

A new feature allows creation of in-house Accounts Receivable installment

 contracts. This uses a Microsoft Word document file as a template so

 that you can create a contract with any wording and formatting that you need.

 Shopkeeper will fill in the sale details including customer name and address,

 interest rate, monthly payment plan, interest rate. etc.

 From the sales screen, chooose Options, More Options, Installment Contract.

 

The Entire Customer History Report could be too slow in some cases after the

 last update. This update resolves that speed issue.

 

The Print Tags screen has a new option to print tags for just those

 items in one particular location. Choose "Full Selection" at the top

 of the Print Tags screen to access this option.

 

When adding new unbilled repair jobs (i.e. not from within a sales ticket)

 VJS checks for duplicate repair numbers. Previously, VJS would accept

 a previously-used repair number if it was several years old and already

 in the archived data. Starting with this update, even numbers from the

 archived repair file will not be allowed to be reused.

 

[906030519]

 

 

The Customer History Report can be run via the Customer X-Tra Search

 screen and a new option is to select only Accounts Receivable

 transactions. I.e. you can exclude cash sales, layaways and special orders

 to focus on just the in-house charge account transactions.

 In addition, the Excel file that is created at the same time of the customer

 history report is now more complete, such as including sales tax amounts.

 

The Return to Vendor inventory report was previously supposed to

 have an option to sort and group by Brand (Mfg), but that sort

 option was not active. Starting with this update that sort option

 it is now available.

 

The Go! button to access a vendor's website from the vendor profile

 screen became unresponsive in a recent update. This update restores

 that Go! button.

 

In the summary area of the Sales Payment Spreadsheet report,

 some wording has been clarified.

 What was "Labor" is now "No Tax Services" for non-taxable

 items in class codes for repairs, custom work and appraisals.

 What was "Repair" is now "All Services" for non-taxable

 items in class codes for repairs, custom work and appraisals.

 

Occasionally, one may inadvertently send a gigantic print job or many copies

 of a print job to the Windows printer queues, which can be difficult to clear

 from Windows. Visual Jewelry Shopkeeper has long had a shortcut to clear these

 printer queues, but recent versions of Windows may have prevented VJS from

 clearing the queues. This update includes changes to request Windows Administrator

 rights in order to clear the queues. This option is found via the VJS File Center

 by choosing Options, then Clear Printer Queues.

 

The Activity page of Inventory Status has the option to show Wish-List / Quote

 records for the currently select item. Previous versions would show

 Wish-List / Quote records just for the current Sku Number, but starting

 this version Wish-List / Quote records will be shown for all Sku's sharing

 the same Brand Code and Style. I.e. if a customer wants Style XYZ, it doesn't

 matter whether that's Sku 100-10022 or Sku 100-10758.

 

The Multi-Year Sales Comparisons Report previously had a quirk where you

 had to specifically select a starting month before it would consider

 a specific month-range selection. That has been resolved in this update.

 

Improvements to the Google Image search option for adding pictures

 to finished inventory from established vendors.

 

 

Version 3.902                                        02/21/2019

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over

 540 new items for Valentines, Mothers Day, Sprint and Summer 2019

 

The Podium integration program was updated to support the new, longer

 Podium transaction ID numbers.

 

 

Version 3.900                                        02/11/2019

===============================================================

 

 

Within the past year, the preferred method of adding images to Shopkeeper

 inventory and repairs with a webcam has been to use a screen-grab

 program such as GreenShot, then to right-click the No-Image box on-screen

 in Shopkeeper, to pop down a small menu from which one chooses Paste.

 However, on many computers, the right-click behavior is not always very

 "direct" - i.e. it could take 2 or 3 right-clicks before kicking in.

 

 With this update, the right-click on the image behavior should be much more

 reliable than before for first-time recognition.

 

 Also, most image boxes are accompanied by a "Paste" button on-screen to

 further make pasting images quicker and easier.

 

 Further, in the inventory take-in screen, next to each item within the inventory

 grid, there is a small camera icon which used to be only to open the picture

 manager screen from which you could then add or view a picture. Starting this version,

 if you click that icon at a time when you have just used GreenShot to capture an image

 to the Windows clipboard, it will immediately paste that image into that inventory item.

 I.e. one-click instead of several.

 

Many screens in Shopkeeper have small green "Go!" arrow-buttons next to data boxes to activate

 a related task. For example, the Go! button by the Email box on the customer

 profile opens a Send Email window. Clicking the Go! button by the SMS/Text

 option on certain screens starts sending an SMS/Text.

 

 However, on many computers, it could take 2 or 3 clicks, or careful click-speed

 before kicking in. With this update, the click action of such Go! buttons should

 be much more reliable than before for first-time recognition.

 

Similarly, the "Print a Tag" icon at the bottom right corner of the Inventory Status

 screen should be much more reliable than before for first-time recognition.

 

The Sales Payment Spreadsheet has an adjustment to the sales tax breakdown

 in the summary area, which helps for cases where there are multiple

 taxes that apply at different price-points.

 

The Itemized Sales Report has a new Report Organization option:

 "3 Taxables" to show 3 separate taxable amount columns which can help

 if you have multiple sales tax rates. (The normal Sales Tax layout option

 shows the 3 separate sales tax amounts per item, but not the taxable amount

 per item.)

 

You can now temporarily turn off the automatic pop up of the Podium review

 request screens when finishing sales or repairs.  To do that, go to

 the Web Services Settings screen, which is towards the bottom of the list

 categories in the Preferences screen. There, add the word OFF to the beginning

 of the Podium Options box. Remove the word OFF when you want to resume

 auto pop-ups. Even with this set to OFF, you can still send requests

 manually from the customer profile screen by choosing Options, Podium.

 Note that this affects *all* computers if you have more than one.

 

If you want to turn the off the automatic pop up of the Podium review request screens

 at just *certain* computers, from the Local Defaults page in Preferences, in the box

 "Miscellaneous Options for Just This Computer", add the following words

 (before or after any other words already in the box:

         PODIUM OFF

 For example, you may want to turn off automatic pop-ups from the accounting computer

 but leave them on at the register and repair take-in computers.

 

As you receive an invoice / shipment of merchandise, within the Inventory Entry

 screen it's possible to print a price tag for each line. In previous versions

 the item line had to be saved already before you could print the tag. (i.e., you'd

 have to save it and then re-click on that line.) Starting this update, you ca

 click Options Print a Tag for a new item even before clicking the Save button.

 

The size of the job picture on the repair tracking screen has been increased

 a bit. (About 50% more area.)

 

The date-stamp on reports will now include the time the report was printed

 and, further, it will include the initials of the person logged-in.

 

 

Version 3.868B                                        01/21/2019

===============================================================

 

Typing 19 into the year part of a date field would typically result

 in the year looking like 1919 (prior to pressing Enter). Previous

 versions of Shopkeeper had auto-adjust for odd dates, but 1919 was

 previously interpreted as 2000, for historical reasons. Going forward,

 this will be auto-adjusted to 2019.

 

 

A standard option you can activate in Preferences for sales is to require

 the entry of the clerk's / sales person's initials. A new, non-standard,

 option allows you to require two sets of initials per sale.

 

 To use this feature, at any computer that needs to use alternative

 credentials, in Preferences, on p.1 in the box "Miscellaneous Options"

 box        add the following word, before or after any other words already in the box:

         REQ2CLERKS

 

Version 3.868                                        12/29/2018

===============================================================

 

The Sales Reports by Clerk has many different layouts and in previous versions

 the layout with subtotals by major class code within each vendor

 had problems with the turnover (# of days to sell) on the major class subtotal lines.

 That problem has been resolved in this update.

 

Also in the Sales Reports by Clerk, starting this version, the Turnover

 # of days to sell) now leaves out of the calculations the service and repair

 items. That's because such items would typically show unhelpful numbers

 which could be 1000's of days because the repair Sku could have been

 created        5 or 10 years ago. These values are left out of individual

 lines and of the subtotals per clerk.

 

When taking physical inventory with an RFID reader or if importing a list

 of Sku's from a portable barcode reader data collector, in previous versions,

 if multiple people were taking physical inventory at the same time, occasionally

 VJS would show a 'conflict' error message. While this alert was benign and could

 be safely ignored, it was unhelpful and has been resolved in this update.

 

 

Version 3.867                                        12/27/2018

===============================================================

 

Various updates for credit card processing as needed to remain current.

 

A new utility can reposition the accounts. E.g. If you have a new

 bank account in the fourth position, you could move it to the

 top line position.

 

Miscellaneous updates.

 

[tf.cap dpath-UN; crslipzcomp; preprect; sectoactivate; tablevalidate0

 

 

Version 3.866                                        11/27/2018

===============================================================

 

When you run an itemized inventory report, or when you receive or edit

 an invoice of merchandise or a batch of inventory without an invoice,

 or enter a purchase order, Shopkeeper now simultaneously creates

 a small file containing just the Sku number and the quantity in stock.

 The file format is suitable for importing the entire list into certain

 inventory management screens.

         Return to Vendor, Interstore Transfer, Relocate, Deduct from Inventory,

         Assemble & Disassemble, Physical Inventory

 This can speed up your work if you need, for example, to return to

 vendor an entire invoice, or you want to remove from inventory all

 items over 5 years old from vendor XXX. (I.e. you'd choose those criteria

 from the Inventory Reports screen.)

 

 Note that if you edit a received invoice without making changes, the list

 is recreated again. Every time the list is recreated, the prior copy of the

 file is replaced.

 

 The name of the file created is SKU-LIST.TXT and it is put into the VJS Reports

 folder which is on the Windows Desktop. To import the list into the screens above,

 you click the "Import a List" button then select "A List of Sku Numbers."  If the list

 is not precisely the list you need, you can easily remove or add Sku's before you choose

 to Save and continue your work. You can also Cancel if the list is entirely wrong.

 

 

When you choose to print tags for a received invoice of merchandise, when you

 get to the list of items to be tagged, by default all lines are selected.

 For cases where you just added a line or two at the end of the invoice a new

 option can save you time.  If you Right-click the checkbox, that unchecks

 (deselects) all other items in the list and selects just that item.

 

[podium off+]        

 

Version 3.865                                        11/20/2018

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 160 new items for Fall/Holiday 2018.

 There is a small number of price and cost changes

 This update adds about 260 new image files; - i.e. in addition to pictures for

 new items, it adds images for some prior summer items for which the picture was not

 previously available.

 

The Image area of inventory (or repairs, etc.) can now accept video files in .MOV or .MP4

 format. Of course, such files take up a lot more storage space and will not print

 on reports or tickets.

 

[editsarlast5]

 

 

Version 3.860                                        10/19/2018

===============================================================

 

There is now an option to delete a non-inventory payable.

 (Previously, you could zero the amount, but not remove a non-inventory payable.)

 This is accessed via the Non-Invent Payables tab after choosing

 Add or Change Accounts Payable from the Accounting Menu.

 

Podium Review Request integration updates:

 From the top of the repair detail tracking screen, when you click

 on Options there is a new choice to manually pop up the review

 request screen. (I.e. the same choice as available from the sales

 screen and from the customer profile screen.)

 You can now make VJS automatically pop up the review request screen

 when you fill in a repair's customer pick-up information. To do that

 add the keyword PICKUP in the Podium Options box in Preferences.

 (In most cases, this is not necessary, because the request screen

 would appear when you print the sales ticket for the completed repair.

 However, you might want to use this option if you don't generally

 print a sales receipt at repair pick-up time.)

         

In previous versions, the Inventory Web Export option could drop the last letter

 of the description in a small number of cases.

 (Only when every letter of both the short description lines were completely

 filled and when the export format included both description lines combined into one.)

 This has been resolved in this update.

 

         

Version 3.850                                        10/9/2018

===============================================================

 

The Podium integration module has a new option whereby you can have

 more than one set of credentials for different locations even

 if those stores share the same set of books as the main store.

 To use this feature, at any computer that needs to use alternative

 credentials, open the Local Defaults p.2 page of Preferences

 and in the box "Miscellaneous Options for Just This Computer", add the following

 words (before or after any other words already in the box:

 

         PODIUM KEY "XXX-YYY-ZZZ" PODIUM ID "123456"  

 Where you add your own Podium authorization key and Podium Location Id

 between the quotes.

 

For times where you return all the items on an incoming invoice or memo

 a new option makes it easy to transfer the shipping charges to a separate

 payable. Retrieve the invoice or memo and proceed to the inventory list.

 At the top, click Options, then choose Transfer Freight to Another Invoice.

 You can type or select an existing payable for that vendor or you can type

 a new invoice number.

 

The Physical Inventory screen is primarily destined to produce a Physical Inventory

 Exception report - with just the problems. However, it has had the option

 to send your physical count list to an Excel spreadsheet file.

 This update adds additional columns to that XLS file, notably, the cost,

 the replacement cost, the extended cost value, the extended replacement

 cost value and the extended retail value. (Extended meaning quantity or weight

 multiplied by the unit cost or the unit retail.) Including the cost values in the XLS file

 is optional and is available only for users with sufficient security clearance.

 [As a reminder, note that simply entering the physical counts and exporting them,

 does not correct the quantities in Shopkeeper.]

         

         

Version 3.849                                        09/19/2018

===============================================================

 

 

You have long been able to change the appearance ("skin") of VJS by choosing,

 from the Main Menu, Options, Screen Graphics. Starting this version,

 if you change the appearance for one set of books, that does not change the

 appearance for the other books. (E.g. you could set a different appearance

 for the DEMO / Evaluation books compared to the Main / real books, which

 can facilitate awareness of which set of books are being used.)

 

 

The Cash Register Journal Report has additional options.

 - Previously the payments were reported in the order they were

 entered. You now have the option to sort Date and Time.

 This will keep all transactions of the same date in the same grouping even

 if they were not entered in a strictly date-ordered sequence.

 - You can now select different combinations of payment types,

 of which certain aren't exactly payments. E.g. Accounts

 Receivable Adjustments, Charges to in-house A/R accounts,

 or only bank-depositable payments.

 -This report now automatically creates an Excel file (RegisterJournal.xls

 in the VJS Reports folder on the Windows Desktop ) of the report results

 in case you want to        create other presentations, sorts or calculations.

 

 [cstmcapscusteditspwork]

 

 

Version 3.848                                        09/12/2018

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 70 price changes beyond the change of

 August. These changes are primarily to set the retail price of promotion

 items back up to the normal price, but with the expectation that retailers

 will discount them 30 % at point of sale during the promotion.

 There are also a few other price and cost changes

 

 There are no new items beyond the August 2018 catalog update.

 

 

Version 3.845                                        08/27/2018

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 1150 price and cost changes that

 need to go into effect on August 30, 2018.

 

 There are very few new items beyond the June 2018 catalog update.

 

 

Version 3.841                                        08/10/2018

===============================================================

 

On the Inventory Cont. page of Preferences, you can now set, or reset

 the next Purchase Order number. Previouisly this number was

 not user-changeable.

 

 

An adjustment was made on the Podium Review Request screen to better

 handle the (unusual) case where there is only a spouse's mobile

 phone number, not a primary mobile phone number.

 

 

[reputationstacker]

 

 

Version 3.840                                        08/01/2018

===============================================================

 

This update adds the multi-year and multi-month comparison sales

 and purchases reports. Going beyond the previously-available  

 Compare Two Date Ranges Report, this report can compare sales

 figures from ten different years or twelve separate months.

 

 Another available version of this report compares inventory purchases for

 each of the past twelve months. These reports may not be available

 if you have a lite version of VJS (without advanced sales analysis.)

 

In Preferences, you can optionally set a rule to require that repair customers

 have a phone number recorded. In previous versions, having just the Spouse's

 Mobile number alone wasn't enough - another phone number was required.

 Starting this version, the Spouse's Mobile alone is sufficient to

 satisfy that rule.

 

The Podium Review Request screen has a change whereby it's now possible

 to select the spouse (secondary) name with the primary mobile number

 and vice-versa. Depending on the situation, you may not always want a

 "hard-link" between the primary name and the primary mobile number.

 

The Large customer export Excel / CSV option from the mailing label report screen

 now includes a column for the Spouse's Mobile phone number.

 (This is in the Merge1.CSV file which is typically created in the VJS Reports

 folder which is on the Windows Desktop.)

 

The cost of sales line-items for repairs and service can now be typed in by lower-security

 users even if they can't normally adjust the cost for inventory items.

 

 

Version 3.830                                        07/24/2018

===============================================================

 

A previous VJS update added the ability to send, using your Podium account,

 internet review requests to customers when recording sales or repairs.

 This update adds the ability to send SMS-text messages to customers

 on any subject or for repair status updates - i.e. unrelated to reviews.

 This SMS-texting feature was available in previous VJS versions, but only using

 an account with a company called Red Oxygen. So, if you already have a Podium account,

 you can get a second use out of it. See this FAQ help topic on texting:

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?sms_texting.htm

 

 See the Version 3.810 update notes below for more information on Podium integration

 in general.

 

In addition to the Podium SMS-texting addition, this update adds a new SMS-texting

 option whereby you can type each SMS-text message from scratch.

 In previous versions, you needed to create one or several SMS-text template

 messages ahead of time from which you picked one for each send.

 Starting from this version, you can start with a blank message and compose

 it on the fly. You can also select a template message and have the option

 to adjust or add to it for each message.

 

The inventory export to website file feature now includes the ability

 to include more than 254 letters of the Alternative Extended Description

 on the Style Detail page of Inventory status.

 

The Customer Reports by Special Events (Anniversaries, etc.) has previously

 had the option to include only those customers *with* items on their

 wish lists. This update adds the further option to include only

 those customers with special events and *without* a wish list item.

 This allows you to separate the lists in order to send more personalized

 mailings to those with particular items on their list, and more general

 mailings to those without.

 

 

 

Version 3.825                                        07/02/2018

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 570 new items for Summer/Fall 2018.

 There are very few price changes, but there are quite a few  cost changes

 since the last update so you may want to update the prior catalog

 information - including the cost.

 So far, most of the new image files are not yet available, but we hope

 to receive those soon in order to integrate them in a forthcoming update.

 

 

The Itemized Sales Report has a new layout option to compare sales

 by year with one line per year. Choose: Sort By Year. In order

 to see many years at once, be sure to choose Full Selection

 then choose: Both for the Current vs Archive sales file.

 

 

Version 3.820                                        06/27/2018

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over

 300 new Summer and Fall 2018 items.

 

The Podium Online Review integration option added in Version 3.810

 now adds the option to select either the primary name or the spouse's

 name, along with the choice of which mobile phone number or email to use.

 

The Enter Existing Inventory screen now has an option to run a report

 of the batch of items that were just entered. This can be run either

 immediately after entering the items, or retroactively, if you re-open

 this screen and type a previous batch number.

 

The menu graphics have been updated.

 

[ccTerminalID]

 

 

Version 3.810                                        06/08/2018

===============================================================

 

A new feature is integration with the Podium Online Review and Online

 Customer Interaction Management system.

 

 Right at the point of sale a good time to propose sending a review request,

 Just when the customer most remembers the good experience shopping with you.

 To prevent missing out on these opportunities, Shopkeeper can automatically prompt

 you to initiate a Podium review request when you print receipts - or at any time

 you work with a customer.

 

 See this FAQ help topic for more details:

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?podium_on-line_review_requests.htm

 

 

You can now use the keyboard Escape-Escape shortcut to exit out of

 the repairs job billing selection screen, whereas previously you

 had to click Cancel or the [X] with the mouse.

 (As a reminder, in the Sku No. box of the sales screen, pressing Ctrl-R

 is the shortcut to pop up the Job Billing screen to show jobs

 that were entered loose/unbilled.)

 

 

 [TTUSBupdt]

 

Version 3.800                                        05/23/2018

===============================================================

 

The repairs and custom job screen now allows you to add a list of

 components from inventory. Choose the Parts tab at the bottom

 of the Job tracking screen, then choose Update Parts above the list.

 

 Notes: Sku's added to jobs are removed from stock immediately

 even if the job is not finalized and delivered.

 Sku's are not included in sales figures (The entire amount

 of the job will once it's finalized.)

 You can report a list of used parts by running the Itemized Sales Reports

 and selecting "Job Parts" for the "Components" option.

 

Some HP printers exhibit a symptom whereby certain text lines

 are printed in a stack of two half-height lines. The real solution

 is to install a new or a different Windows printer driver. However,

 this isn't always easy so this update adds a workaround. In the

 Print Options dialog box, type the number 80 in the "Options" box.

 To reiterate, this is just a workaround and the resulting printing

 may not be formatted quite right, and finding a better printer driver

 remains the real solution.

 

On the Inventory Status screen, the Print a Tag button at the bottom

 right previously had a ctrl-click option to simultaneously select

 a Sku and proceed to the tag printing. (Whereas a regular click

 added the Sku to the tag list and waited for the addition of

 further items.) The click and ctrl-click behavior could sometimes

 take a few clicks to register. As part of the adjustment to help that,

 in this update, the select-and-print-in-one option is now selected

 by pressing the middle button.

 

In previous versions, by design, miscellaneous bank adjustments and bank

 deposits had separate number sequences could overlap. Starting

 this version, a deposit and an adjustment cannot have the same number.

 

In previous versions, when you clicked with the mouse in certain empty date

 boxes, the cursor would start where you clicked so you'd have to arrow left

 before starting typing. In this update, clicking anywhere in an empty date

 box will move the cursor to the beginning so you can start typing immediately.

 

If you find that certain drop-down lists disappear a bit too quickly for

 you when you move the mouse out of them, this version has a "sensitivity"

 adjustment option. (Email us for details if you think this applies to you,

 it's not something we'd expect most people to tinker with.)

 

 

 [salecommplswait]

 

Version 3.792                                        05/08/2018

===============================================================

 

It's fairly common to create special Sku numbers which result

 in a credit on sale, such as Sku's for Trade-Ins, or Sku's

 for donated gift certificates or Sku's for promotion coupons,

 etc. On the sales screen, such sku's need to be entered with

 a positive price and a negative quantity.

         

 To save you from manually typing minus-one each time you use

 such a Sku, this version adds the feature for you to specify

 a Standard Sale Quantity for any Sku number. This is available

 on the Notes page of Inventory Status.

         

 This could also be used for positive quantities, such as items

 that are usually sold in twos - but where the price is entered

 as the per-individual value.

 

 

 Technical update for higher security ftp passwords.

 

 Adjustments to credit card processing timeout settings for smoother

         EMV credit card processing.

         

 Adjustments to lookup of inventory by Part Number for cases where

         there are similar part number but with different lengths.

 

[206.188 nDelayChk3, vjsclient8,vjsincoming]

 

 

 

Version 3.790                                        05/02/2018

===============================================================

 

A new module, Interstore Inventory Transfer, has been added with this update.

 If you have two stores with Shopkeeper inventory control, this allows

 you to record a list of items to be transferred to be deducted

 from one inventory and added to the other.

 It's important that the Sku numbering system for both stores

 be carefully coordinate and you'll need to ask Compulink for

 instructions before considering using this feature.

 

 This includes transfer of associated images.

 It can send a payable to the receiving store.

 Reports on outgoing and incoming transfers are available.

 The transfer files can be sent on a USB memory stick that accompanies

         the inventory items.

 Or the transfer files can be sent by Internet.

 

 This module is available for those with two or more licenses for

 the Full Version of Jewelry Shopkeeper.

 For smaller versions of Shopkeeper this module could possibly be purchased.

 

 

 

Version 3.782  ( incl. 3.775 a-k)                                         04/20/2018

===============================================================

 

This version includes internet security updates that are necessary

 for integrated credit card processing which now has higher

 security requirements.

 

The Itemized Sales Report has a new sort option: by Part Number.

 

 

Version 3.780  ( incl. 3.775 a-k)                                         04/16/2018

===============================================================

 

Shopkeeper has previously had a few methods of sending emails to

 customers (e.g. simple messages or sales receipts or appraisals or repairs.)

 Because email systems (e.g. Gmail, Yahoo, etc.) periodically change their

 security or protocol requirements, this update includes a new connection

 method which may help if the other methods don't work. This has been tested

 with Gmail, Yahoo and Outlook.com (the on-line Outlook.)

 

 When you get to the email screen, switch to the Settings page

 and you'll see the new option: Direct dot-Net. This does support

 the Secure SSL/TLS option, which, if used, would typically be used with Port

 587 or 465.

 

Some people may have experienced a problem looking up Sku numbers in inventory

 status in the prior version. This update addresses that.

 

The Slate and Tell catalog import program has been updated with over

 100 new Spring and Summer 2018 items. A second update in April added 15

 further new items which are shipping.

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over

 700 new Spring and Summer 2018 items.

 

 

[lockdefaultsaletype, ww6, rfidinvck]

 

 

Version 3.774                                        03/19/2018

===============================================================

 

Just days after the huge cost and reprice update that went into effect on March 15, 2018,

 we have received a *further* catalog update.

 *) 150 new Styles (logo rings, letter charms, regular charms, bracelets, college jewelry bundles)

 *) Over 380 images that were previously missing from recent catalog updates.

 

 

Version 3.772                                        03/14/2018

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program includes over 300 retail price and wholesale cost updates.

 Even if further changes that need to go into effect on March 15, 2018. If you haven't

 updated the catalog recently, then about 600 new spring items will also be added.

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program adds about 60 more Spring items

 (beyond Mothers Day 2018) - most with accompanying images.

 

Miscellaneous changes for credit card processing to keep in synch with the

 changes in the processors' systems.

 

A new utility allows you to retroactively apply a Dept Code to sales

 based on the presence of certain items on the sale. E.g. if you have

 previously applied promotion or discount sku's to sales, by applying

 Dept Codes to all items on those sales, you could report all the items

 on such sales to validate the result of the promotion.

 (The utility is u_dept_assign - in case of intereste ask Compulink for more details.)

         

 *AddLastOnly

 

 

Version 3.771                                        02/26/2018

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program adds about 50 Mothers Day 2018

 items - most with images.

 

On the Inventory Status screen, certain "more sensitive" data boxes

 are "double-locked" so they remain protected even if the padlock at the

 top is unlocked. To unlock them you need to Ctrl-Click them. E.g., the

 Part Number, Style and Major Code have previously been double-locked.

 In this update, the Price by Weight vs. Price by Piece selection is

 also double-locked. This is because an accidentaly change of that field

 would have a serious effect on the price on the sales screen or the cost

 in the inventory cost total.

 

 

Version 3.770                                        02/15/2018

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 600 new items for early 2018.

 Note: this does NOT yet include the new prices for March.

 Those price changes may not be applied before March 15, 2018.

 

VJS has has features for applying automatic discounts at the sales screen

 based on the major code, the minor code and the customer.

 A sneaky new option in this version allows you to round the resulting

 price up to the nearest dollar. E.g. $149.99 minus 15% = $127.49

 and you have the option to make the result round up to $149.00

 To do this, set the discount value to end in .01 such as 15.01% or 10.01%

 

You can now reorder the list of bank accounts within the accounting module.

 E.g. Perhaps your new/current bank account is #4 on the list, but it

 would make things easier if it were the default / #1 on the list.

 From the Checkbook Setup screen, choose Options, Change Order of Accounts.

 

The Chart of Accounts screen within the accounting module has a new feature

 to report the accounts along with a value from one of the prior 49

 months. This report also simultaneously creates an Excel XLS file of

 the results. From the Chart of Accounts screen, choose Options at the

 top then choose Report COA with Values.

 

The Adjustments list on the Activity page of Inventory Status will

 now hide most information if the person signed-in to Shopkeeper

 does not have security access to run an inventory adjustments report.

 

A new security feature allows you to restrict access to the report

 "Entire Customer History." However, note that this does not prevent

 users reviewing sales history in various on-screen grid-lists; it

 limits access just to the full-page report-style listing.

 

In certain cases where a sale has no Sku line, or only non-printing

 Sku lines, a receipt would print without the customer name. This

 has been addressed in this update.

 

In previous versions, when receiving an invoice of merchandise,

 in certain cases, when you type the major code and press <Enter>

 and very quickly start typing the minor code, the second digit

 of the minor code could overwrite the first - so you'd have to retype it.

 That has been resolved in this update.

 

 

Version 3.761                                        01/30/2018

===============================================================

 

 The Alex and Ani catalog import program adds the new early 2018 / Valentines

 Harry Potter items and other new items for early 2018

 

 

 

Version 3.760                                        01/17/2018

===============================================================

 

The sales activity list in Inventory Status now defaults to showing the

 most recent sales at the top rather than at the bottom.

 (Since regular inventory typically has a quantity of just one, this mostly

 affects generic Sku's which are re-used repeatedly.)

 

In previous versions, an invoice payable's discount date could get

 set to the due date in certain cases. That has been resolved.

 

Entering addresses with compass additions such as SE will remain

 as SE and not Se as was the case before. (In previous versions

 directionals like s.e. [with dots] already were being converted

 do capitals.)

 

The Repair Quick Status Update screen now adds the ability to update

 the Insurance Value for each job. To see this extra column, you'll need

 to increase the width of the screen (by dragging the corner with the mouse.)

 In addition, you can now increase the height of this screen to view extra rows

 of repairs. That's helpful if you update long lists of jobs, and if your

 monitor is tall enough.

 

 

 

Version 3.759                                        12/27/2017

===============================================================

 

The sales receipt change in the previous version prevented the

 customer number from appearing on receipts in some cases.

 That has been fixed in this update.

 

The PDF version of some layouts of the inventory report did not

 include the minor code column. Starting this version, that column

 will be shown.

 

When adding the in-house charge account option to a customer records

 the options to turn OFF statements, finance charges and statements

 for this customer default to do not turn off, but in previous versions

 these options initially appeared blank so it wasn't always clear

 to users what the status was. Now these options are checkboxes so

 the status will be clearer.

 

Starting this version, VJS will check the status of Windows "network caching" and

 will warn you if it's on - since that can cause data problems. A fix for

 this Windows setting will be suggested.

 

[p.o. reporting/lt]        

 

Version 3.758                                        11/17/2017

===============================================================

 

 

The Pandora catalog program has about 200 new items for the holiday season.

 

If an Entire Customer History report is more than one page, starting

 with this update, the customer name will print in the header of

 each page - not just the first page.

 

The sales receipts and appraisals will now print the customer name

 including the spouse's last name. If the spouse's name is not specified,

 then it will print the same way as before (e.g. Jack & Jill Hillsworth)

 

 Actually, to be more precise, these receipts and appraisals will use

 the salutation format that you specify in the customer page of

 Preferences. Note that if you specify a format that uses titles (Mr. /Mrs.)

 then for customers without those titles, that aspect will be ignored.

 

 This change may be extended in subsequent updates to repair tickets.

 

         

[shopify] [myreport]

 

 

Version 3.751                                        11/03/2017

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has a small number of new items -

 the Moon and Star items.

 

The Accounts Receivable balance audit utility has a new option to select

 an individual customer. When you choose just one customer, the results

 show the details of the transactions for that customer. (Normally,

 the utility shows just the total value of purchases and total of payments.)

 

 

 

Version 3.750                                        10/26/2017

===============================================================

 

A new Managed Customer Alert system has been added in this version.

 You can create pop-up alerts or messages that appear when you record

 customer sales. These can be reminders to salespeople to ask customers

 questions or to inform customers of events. For example:

 

 - Remind customers of a Gent's Night event

 - Inform customers of a new line you carry

 - Ask customers if they have recently noticed your advertising

 - Ask customers if they need parking validation

 - Ask customers if they want to contribute to a Charity drive

 - Ask customers if they need a gift receipt or gift wrapping.

 - Ask customers if you have their current address, phone and email

 - Ask customers if they would like any jewelry item they are wearing to be cleaned

 - Etc.

 

 Using these alerts can improve customer service, learn more about customer awareness

 of your store's offerings, promote special events, increase add-on sales, etc.

 

 See this page in the online FAQ help pages for more details:

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?sales_screen_customer_alerts.htm

 

 

 

The X and Z reports will be shorter and tidier in many cases

 because the large number of Accounts Receivable lines and the

 Paid Out and Received lines are removed if there is no

 activity in those areas.

 

The Itemized Sales reports with tax columns have been adjusted

 to fix a problem which could have occurred before in certain

 rare situations. (Where the sales tax rate is multi-tiered

 based on price, and where two or more identical, very high-price

 items are sold on the same sales ticket.)

 

If you want all merchandise items added via a Memo type of invoice

 to be set to a specific        minor class code, add the keyword

 MEMOMINOR=XXX anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences,

 where you replace XXX with the desired minor code.

 Note that this should be rarely necessary, as inventory and sales

 reports can report memo inventory without needing a specific

 minor code.

 

The Alex and Ani Ugly Sweater item has been added to the Alex and Ani

 utility: u_alexanisep2017

 

{cdoattach}{impcsvinvxls1234}{bprecalcbackup}

 

 

Version 3.740                                        09/25/2017

===============================================================

 

A new customer mailing list option allows you to select customers

 based on Male / Female notations in the customer profile screen.

 

 This is a powerful new option to enable you to more easily do Ladies' Night

 or Gents' Night mailers.

 

 On the Customer Reports and Labels screen, choose Full Selection

 and in the Male/Female box you could type M or F  or MF or FM.

 

 Choosing F will pick only customers where either the First Name

 or the Spouse's Name was set to F. If the Spouse's Name is F

 then in the list, the First name will be set to the Spouse's Name

 E.g. John Smith would be ignored, Jane Smith would be included

 and Jack and Judy Smith would become Judy Smith.

 

 Similarly, Choosing M will pick only customers where either the First Name

 or the Spouse's Name was set to M.        E.g. Jane Smith would be ignored, John

 Smith would be included, and Judy and Jack Smith would become Jack Smith.

 

 If you select MF or FM then only customers which have both an M name and an F name

 are included - so you get only couples. MF would reorganize the results

 so that the Male name is first and the Female name is second, and FM would

 put the Female name first.

 

 E.g. for MF Jane Smith would be ignored, John Smith would be included, Bob & Mary Smith

 would be included as-is and Sally & Rich Smith would be included but with Rich in the

 first name and Sally in the Spouse's name.

 

         

 Note that the results for this selection apply only if you choose the

 Large Customer CSV export to create the Excel file MERGE1.CSV in the VJS Reports

 folder which is on the Windows Desktop. This version of the export file contains

 many, many columns, but you can erase any columns if that makes it easier to work with.

 Using that list, you can merge with Word or with your email program or create a call sheet.

 

 Note that in the resulting file, the spouse's name will still be included

 in the spouse column. Also note that if the first and spouse name are switched

 then so are the title and the email addresses.

 

 This way, if you do mail-merge and were doing a gent's night, you could make

 the letter or email say something like:

 Dear Rich,

 Come to our Gents' Night to find something special for Sally.

 

 Of course, this ability works only if you have put M or F next to the first and/or

 spouse's name in the customer profile screen.

 

 You don't have to use M or F specifically; you could use W or L or G, etc.

 

 

The Alex and Ani catalog program has been updated with 150 new

 items and corrected prices (or filled in prices) for hundreds

 of other fall items.

 

When running the Itemized Sales Report an Excel XLS file is simultaneously

 created. A difference in this update is that when that report is

 sorted by customer, the XLS file now includes an additional column

 for the customers' mobile phone number. (Along with all the other

 columns that were included in previous versions).

 

When you receive a shipment of inventory and some of the items are

 on pending special order sales, if the cost changes, that will change

 the cost in the pending special order sales record - this has been the

 case in previous versions. Starting this version, if you change the

 description as you receive such items, the description in the pending

 special order sales will also change.

 

When you receive a shipment of Loose Stones and you add extended detail

 at the same time you log it in, previous versions had a display quirk

 where if you added the stone details (e.g. MM, Clarify, etc.) then returned

 back to the invoice screen then went back to the stone details screen

 then the details wouldn't immediately show until you clicked in a detail box.

 This wasn't "dangerous" and only appeared with this limited combination. However,

 it could have been disconcerting if you happened to encounter that.

 

 This has been resolved in this update.

 

 

         

 

Version 3.732                                        08/31/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora program has over 100 new items and includes over 400

 retail price and wholesale cost updates. Even if further changes may

 be released in the next few days, this release will help log

 in new Pandora shipments.

 

 

Version 3.730                                        08/17/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora program has 3 more items - some dangles and a heart that

 have shipped recently.

 

The Appraisal feature can now print multiple appraisals together.

 Depending on the length of the appraisal text, multiple appraisals

 may print on one sheet or they may wrap to a second page, but still

 as a continuous appraisal.

 For this to be applicable:

 *) The multiple appraisals would have to be linked to line items

 on a single sale.

 *) Not all appraisal print formats support this option because they have

 limited space for appraisal text.

 *) The appraisal print format should be 'Appraisal for Letterhead,

 Multiple Per Page" or "Appraisal with Logo File, Multiple Per Page"

 *) From the Appraisal screen, choose Options, Appraisal Print Layout

 and check the box 'Print Multiple Appraisals Per Page"

 Note that if this checkbox does not appear, you'll need to choose from

 the VJS File Center "More" then "Update Data Files" - which requires

 all users to be out of Shopkeeper for a few minutes.

 

The Repair Status Quick Update screen, now allows you to

 see and update the Notes field - the one which is on

 the second page of the repair details screen. To enable

 that, click on the Edit Notes checkbox. Because that takes

 a certain amount of space, there is a bit less screen room

 available for other elements.

 

The Slate and Tell catalog import program has been updated with the current

 line and now includes over 3000 items and pictures.

 If you request your invoice files in Excel format, Shopkeeper can add

 the received quantities to stock.

 

One of the advantages of the Trac Tech RFID system is that

 Shopkeeper can simultaneously print a price tag, and

 encode the RFID number in the tag. That's instead of

 having a separate chip that you have to sandwich in the

 tag and then link to a Sku.

 

 However, there may be cases in which using the pre-made

 reusable RFID chips/wafers would be useful and VJS now

 also supports the Trac Tech re-usable tags.

 

 You can use a combination of both tag types: reusable and

 printer-"burned". Or, you could start with the reusable tags

 as an economy measure because you wouldn't immediately require

 the expensive RFID printer. (You could also forego the RFID

 wand to start; however, the wand reading is the main reason

 to use RFID in the first place.)

 

This update also adds support for the small "thumb-sized" USB

 RFID reader by Trac Tech. This can be used in the Inventory Status

 screen or any screen which accepts a list of Sku's (physical inventory,

 return to vendor, etc.)

 It can also be used to select items during sales. When the Sales screen

 is waiting for a Sku number, press Ctrl-I to switch into RFID lookup mode.

 The thumb-sized RFID readers (except the RDP model) require that you be

 running the        TracTech keyboard emulation driver program and that it be

 configured to "Use RETURN" and configure to not use TAB or DASH or PREFIX

 nor POSTFIX. TracTech will provide this driver and instructions.

 

                 

 

Version 3.720                                        07/31/2017

===============================================================

 

In some cases, you may want to flag a sales ticket for a repair

 as Special Order so that if it is pre-paid before pickup, it

 does not finalize automatically. In previous versions, if the

 sale total were zero (i.e. you hadn't yet any repair estimate)

 VJS wouldn't let you flag the associated sales ticket as

 special order, but starting this version, you can.

 

The inventory report version which is grouped and subtotaled by

 the invoice number in previous versions had a running total

 for the vendor after each invoice instead of just the per invoice

 subtotal. Starting this version, the subtotal after each invoice

 is the subtotal for just that invoice alone.

 

Shopkeeper has a Wholesale Pricing option whereby certain customers

 can receive one of four different levels of Wholesale pricing.

 In previous versions, the wholesale pricing would be set on a

 per style basis. Starting in this version, the Wholesale pricing

 can also be set on a per major class basic - where the wholesale

 price is cost plus different percentages.

 Contact Compulink for more details if interested.

 

In Version 3.71 the Shopkeeper menu icons were updated.

 You now have the option to display the old-style icons on the menus

 add the keyword 2004ICONS anywhere in the box

 Miscellaneous Options for Just This Computer Settings

 box on the Local Defaults page 2 of Preferences.

 I.e. this setting doesn't change the preference for all computers

 on a network; each computer can change the option individually.

 

As you enter new inventory, a character counting feature shows the

 length of the character as you type it. This might help in case

 you try to optimize the use of tag spaces by making word breaks

 at certain lengths. The counter is in the header of the

 description column of Inventory Entry.

 

In previous versions, for the inventory report combination where you select

 to show images and the replacement cost, the regular cost shown

 next to each item. With this update the actual replacement cost will show.

 (Unless it's zero in which case, as always, the regular cost will show.)

 

         

Version 3.718                                        07/17/2017

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani Catalog utility has been updated with additional styles and

 pictures for Summer 2017.

 

In Preferences, there is a new option to disable printing inventory

 pictures on month-end accounts receivable statements.

 

In the Cash Register Paid-out and Received screen, in previous

 versions you could alternate between Paid-Out mode and Received

 mode by moving the mouse over the selection icons. However,

 starting this version you have to click the icons or the buttons

 not just move the mouse over them.

 

Now, if you change an invoice's vendor code, previously entered checks

 will be assigned the new vendor code too, in order to keep the checks linked

 to the invoice. You'll be given a choice of leaving the Payee Name on

 the check as it was originally entered (probably best if the check has

 already been printed and sent out), or changing the Payee Name on the

 checks to match the new vendor code.

 

Month-End Accounts Receivables Statements can now print a watermark of

 "Past Due" in very large letters. This option is activated in

 the Accounts Receivables Statement Layout page of Preferences.

 

The Fast Seller Report (Sales and Inventory Report Summarized by Style)

 has two additional columns: Price of Each Item and Cost of Each Item

 of the articles in stock inventory. This not necessarily the same

 as the price those items sold for.

 

Version 3.715                                        06/30/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program has a further 90 new items.

 Some of the new items are shipping, but this update also

 includes new items to come that will not ship until Fall 2017.

 It also includes a number of price and cost changes and

 adds over 400 pictures for items that previously didn't have

 an image.

 

Now, if you change an invoice's number, previously entered checks

 will be renumbered too, in order to keep the checks linked

 to the invoice.

 

Includes a fix for receipt printing Totals area, a problem that

 affected some copies of Version 3.710

 

 v1icon

 

Version 3.710                                        06/16/2017

===============================================================

 

This version introduced changes in the menu icons and graphics.

 

This update includes the addition of a rewards dollars system to help promote

 customer loyalty and repeat visits. The accumulation of Loyalty Points

 or Rewards dollars can be earned at different (or zero) percentages

 differently depending on the type of merchandise or service. The rewards

 can be used at point of sale as partial payments either at a rate of $1

 per point or at a percentage you configure.

 

 It's not extremely complicated, but there are enough details to consider and

 configure that you'll want to carefully read the guide, which is available on

 the online help / FAQ pages:

 www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?loyalty_rewards_program.htm

 

The inventory report has a new layout which summarizes the inventory by

 minor class code.

 

The customer reports screen has a new report option:

 "Special Events+Wish List Only." This choice is almost the

 same as "Special Events+Wish List" except that only those                                

                 

 customers who have items on their wish list are reported.

 This makes for a much shorter, more focused report on customers who

 both have a special event coming up and who have registered

 specific wish list items.

 

The sales screen item list now shows negative amounts in red to make

 them stand out more.

 

Under certain conditions in previous versions, there was a difficulty

 adding Part Numbers to inventory in the inventory-entry grid. That

 has been resolved in this update.

 

Under certain conditions in previous versions, the repair QuickUpdate

 screen could replace the sales screen price with the repair screen

 estimate. That has been resolved in this update.

 

 

Version 3.700                                        05/30/2017

===============================================================

 

In previous versions, on occasion some drop lists of selection

 items (e.g. a pick list of invoices, or class codes or clerks, etc.)

 would remain on-screen when it should have disappeared, and

 that could clutter the screen.

 Starting this update, that should not occur any more.

 

The Customer X-Tra Search screen within the Sales screen, has an

 adjustment such that when you edit a customer profile and make changes,

 it doesn't immediately assume to add a new sale when you've finished editing.

 

In previous versions, using the Undo button on the Sales screen

 and then selecting a different sale from X-Tra search could

 result in an error message. That is resolved in this update.

 

The repair report adds the option to sort the list by the date

 the jobs were sent to a Shop (or to a vendor or to a jeweler -

 depending on how you use that data field.)

 

Adjustments were made to the Vantiv / Blackline credit card processing.

 

Version 3.689                                        05/10/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program has a further 550 new items.

 Some of the new items are shipping, but this update also

 includes new items to come that will not ship until summer 2017.

 It also includes a number of price and cost changes.

 

The Aging Snapshot version of the inventory report has had

 the wording changed to be more clear. The first line was

 Under 3 Months, but the second and subsequent lines showed

 "Under 6 Months", "Under 12 Months", etc. Now they read

 "3 to 6 Months", "6 to 12 Months", etc.

 

The Non-Inventory Payables entry has been tweaked to allow the

 invoice date to not default to seven days prior. I.e. it now

 has the same options available as inventory payables and memos.

 For details, see the version 3.386 update notes below.

 

 

 

Version 3.688                                        05/05/2017

===============================================================

 

In previous versions, a timing issue in certain inventory adjustment

 screens could cause the picture to be one behind - i.e. it could

 show the picture of the last item in the list, not the one you're currently

 adding. Screens: Relocate Inventory screen, Add to Existing Inventory,

 Deduct from Inventory. That has been resolved in this update.

 

 

Version 3.687                                        04/29/2017

===============================================================

 

A new product catalog import program has been added: The

 Slate and Tell line of over 680 items and pictures can now

 be imported. Also, Slate & Tell will provide invoice files

 in Excel format so Shopkeeper can add received quantities.

 

In the customer X-Tra Search screen, when you have the repair

 list selected at the bottom right corner, now the image of

 each repair shows as you highlight each repair line. This can

 help you more positively select the right line based on the picture.

 If the image doesn't appear, you'll need to widen the X-Tra Search screen

 slightly to allow the extra room for the picture. Just drag the

 right edge of the X-Tra Search screen to widen it.

 

In the customer profile page, if you change the last name, a reminder

 note indicating the old name, the new name and the date of change is

 now automatically added to the customer notes

 

A few optimization changes when you add a new customer and change the state.

 You don't have to delete the default state; the default city and the zip

 code will self-erase because they couldn't be the same if the customer

 is out of state.

 

 

 

Version 3.683                                        03/31/2017

===============================================================

The Pandora Catalog program has a *further* 140 new items (some of

 which might not be shipping yet.)

 It also includes the Canadian dollar values for the 100's of

 price and/or cost changes for March 2017

 

When receiving merchandise invoices, a running cost invoice total

 is shown at the bottom right corner of the screen. Added to that

 in this update is a running total of the retail value. That can help

 you keep an eye on the overall markup which could prevent accidental

 retail price errors.

 

When you assemble inventory component items into another item, the quantity

 of the components is deducted from stock. However, components which are

 in a labor or service category are not deducted. This version adds an

 alert in such cases because sometimes users are puzzled when certain

 items are not deducted from inventory.

 (In case you often assemble service and labor components, you can disable

 this alert by adding the keyword ASSEMBLESVCALERTOFF anywhere in

 Miscellaneous Settings on the first page of Preferences)

 

 When processing EMV/Chip credit cards via the Vantiv/Mercury

 processor, some on-screen prompts have been made clearer and more helpful.

 

When receiving merchandise invoices, the invoice date automatically

 defaults to seven days before the received date. The exact invoice

 date doesn't matter much as the received date is used for accounting

 but if you'd like to change the default invoice date to today, you can add

 the keyword INVOICEDATE anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings on the

 first page of Preferences. If you make the keyword INVOICEDATE1, that

 would set it to one day prior to the received date which may be handy

 if you get a lot of overnight shipments. You can change the number 1

 to another number such as 2 for two days earlier.

 

 invcchg-blnkdate

 

Version 3.682                                        03/16/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program has a *further* 137 price and or cost

 changes

 

The position of the notes box on the customer profile screen got altered

 in the previous version. This update fixes the position.

 

On the sales screen, it is now possible to type in the cost of

 any sales line with a cost code. Activate this option

 via the Sales Screen Cont page in Preferences.

 

[Fix for negative/return charge processing with Vantiv Blackline ]

 

 

 

 

Version 3.680                                        03/09/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program will apply about 650 price and cost changes

 that are due to go into effect on March 16, 2017.

 Note that you probably *do* want to activate the option to Change

 Existing Costs because of the large number of cost changes.

 However, this does retroactively change the cost value

 of existing items in Shopkeeper, so you may want to print a summary

 inventory report for Pandora before and after the catalog change

 so you know what cost difference was caused.

 

 There are also about 30 new Pandora styles added.

 

*Note*

 The order of the data fields on the customer profile screen        has changed in

 that the Email address is now right after the customer's first name.

 This is to reflect the importance of registering email addresses.

 (The secondary email address box is still on the right-hand side.)

 

The Price Tag Designer allows additional data fields to be printed

 on the tags: Quantity in Stock, Quantity Received and Weight Received.

 By default, these data fields won't appear in the palette so if you want

 to use them, choose Modify Palette in the Tag Designer, then use the

 check boxes to select the fields you want to enable.

 

A new option can warn you if the repair ticket number sequence has "jumped"

 up or down. This feature is not active by default - ask Compulink if you

 think you may need it.

 [JOBSEQWARN]

 

 

Version 3.675                                        02/16/2017

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with hundreds

 of the latest additions to their catalog - including items Mothers day 2017

 Many of the additions also include a picture - but some of the pictures

 won't be available until after the display date.

 

The basic mailing list report didn't include the spouse's

 name in previous versions, but starting with this update it does.

 

When sending the customer purchase report to a PDF file in previous

 versions, very long customer names (first and last) would

 be blank. This is resolved in this update.

 

When running a Return to Vendor report, an Excel export file

 is simultaneously put in the VJS Reports folder. The change in

 this update is that the minor class code column has been added

 to the XLS output file.

 

In previous versions the itemized sales report would show the cost

 regardless of one's security level. That might have required you

 to prevent certain users from accessing this sales report screen.

 The current update is modified such that the cost value will not

 show any more for lower-level login ID's.

 

The Cash Register Journal payment report now allows you to choose

 to show only layaway payments or just special order payments or

 just charge account payments or just cash sale payments.

 

The Itemized Sales Report sorted by customer shows sales details

 grouped by customer. In previous versions there was a synch problem

 such that the phone number printed by the name was the phone number

 for the customer above. That is fixed in this update.

 

[chg_maj chg]        

 

Version 3.670                                        01/24/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds ~70 additional items - including

 Mothers Day 2017. In addition, some of the items added earlier

 this month didn't previously have a price in the Pandora catalog data

 and this update adds many of the missing prices - so you'll want to run

 the Update step to fix those prices.

 

 50 additional image files for early 2017 and Valentines items are included

 in this update. (Further images will be included in later updates as

 they become available.)

 

A new security option allows you to restrict access to the ability

 to delete customer records. You can set the required security level

 on the More Security Settings page within Preferences.

 

A new security option allows you to restrict access to the ability

 to delete repair. You can set the required security level

 on the Sales Security page within Preferences.

 

It is now possible to require users to access the repair screen drop-down pick

 lists of canned wording and phrases. This can be helpful if you want people

 to be more consistent and complete with the descriptions and instructions.

 

 To enable this option the keywords REQREPDROPDOWND   and or REQREPDROPDOWNI

 anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings on the first page of Preferences

 The first one requires that the Description drop-down be activated

 and the second one requires that the Instructions drown-down be activated.

 

 Note that VJS will not require the users to actually select entries from the

 lists - but at the minimum they have to click in the drop-down pick list.

 

The Equifax / Metro export utility for accounts receivable reporting to

 credit bureaus has been updated and includes some additional required fields.

 It now additionally creates an XLS export file at the same time - beyond the

 previously created DBF and TXT export files.

 

 [err12]

 

Version 3.665                                        01/12/2017

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds ~400 additional items.

 

The Rank column was not included in the PDF version of

 the customer purchase report in previous versions, but

 is there now starting with this update.

 

The Advanced Customer Analysis options of the customer report

 now include the option to select customers based on sales

 in lists of brands and lists of major codes - instead of

 just by ranges. See the related notes in Version 3.660 for

 more details

 

The customer analysis export of customer purchases by zip code

 now no longer includes the zero-purchases customers.

 

Version 3.660                                        01/05/2017

===============================================================

 

The Itemized Sales Report and the Inventory Report screens have

 some significant new selection options:

 

 Previously these reports have allowed you to select a *range* of

 major codes (e.g. 100-199) and a range of vendor codes (e.g. 001 to PAN)

 The new version still has these options but adds the ability to

 select a list of vendors or major class codes to include or exclude.

 For example you could select vendors ANA and PAN and CHA and END

 or you could run the reports for all vendors *Except* ANA, PAN, CHA, END.

 Similarly, you could run a report for just major codes 50 and 175 and 800 and 850

 or you could run a report for all major codes *except* 50, 175,800 and 850.

 Note that currently not all sales and inventory reporting choices have

 this option - just "Itemized Sales Reports" and "Inventory Reports." Other

 reports could see the addition of these options if there is demand for that.

 

 For example these options could allow you to run reports for just your

 charms vendors (or all *but* your charms vendors) or for reports for any major

 code containing pearls (or to exclude them.)

 

 Note that on the Itemized Sales Report the list option is for Brands whereas

 on the Inventory Reports the list option is for Vendors. In most cases these

 refer to same thing - the supplier.

 

 Note that in both cases, to access the option for the list of major codes

 selection criterion, you need to choose Full Selection at the top of the report

 screen.

 

When you start a sale of type "Special Order" when you land on the        

 Sku number line, VJS defaults to highlighting the Add Inventory

 option because special orders generally expect you to order a new

 item which has to be added to the inventory file.

 In case you do special order sales, but don't use this Add Inventory

 approach, a new option in the Sales screen configuration pages

 of Preferences allows you to NOT default to adding inventory. Instead

 the sales screen will wait in the Sku number box as with Cash Sales.

 

A new option in the Sales screen configuration pages of Preferences

 allows you to remove the Quick Sale option from the sales screen.

 If you don't use that feature, this will tidy the screen up a bit.

 

The Sales Payment Spreadsheet can now optionally include ZZ sales, either

 exclusively or all together with other sales. Unlike the X & Z reports,

 which cannot do so, the Sales Payment Spreadsheet can retroactively report

 ZZ sales. Contact Compulink if you need details on this report option.

 

The XLS export from the Commission Report / Sales Report by Clerk will now

 always be put in the VJS Reports folder. In previous versions, it could

 have been sent to an alternative folder - the one you select for the customer

 export. This change simplifies things.

 

 

Version 3.655                                        12/17/2016

===============================================================

 

The repair envelopes used to print the Home phone number first.

 Now the primary Mobile phone number prints first to match

 the customer profile screen, where the mobile number was

 moved into the "pole position" in a previous update.

 

When you choose to edit a customer profile via the X-Tra Search

 screen (via the sales screen) , after you've closed the customer

 profile screen,        previous versions would immediately start with the new

 sale routine - i.e. it'll pop up the Sale number prompt and possibly

 any credit slip and wish list screens. Starting this version, VJS will

 return back        to X-Tra Search without assuming a new sale. This can

 reduce unwanted popups if you often edit or view customer profiles

 this way without necessarily wanting to start a new sale.

 

When you use the Repairs Quick Status Update screen, a new option allows

 you to store a log of any location changes. If you apply a new

 location and check the Log Location Changes box, then movements

 among locations are added to the repair Notes pages.

 

While unusual, it's possible to apply a zero-dollar payment to a sale.

 In previous versions the reference attached to such a payment would

 not appear on the Payment Spreadsheet report, but starting this

 version it will. One possible reason you might add a $0 payment

 record is to add a more explicit pickup record for a repair

 or a special order that was pre-paid but not previously finalized.

 Also, if you use Cash Register codes, adding a $0 payment is a way

 to make a sale appear on the Payment Spreadsheet report when you

 run the report for *only* a particular cash register code.

 

You can now make the sales screen pop up an alert message based on the

 major code of the item being sold. On the Major Class code screen,

 on the Other tab, add to the Class Code Notes <<MSG: Message Here >>,

 including the angle-brackets, and the "Message Here" words will

 appear on screen when you sell items in this major code. You can use

 this to remind staff about certain requirements, information or

 promotions to inform customers of when selling items in that category.

 If this feature becomes popular this message area may be moved to a

 dedicated sales pop-up message instead of being in the Notes box.

 

As with major codes, you can make the sales screen pop up an alert based on

 the vendor of the item being sold. Use the same  <<MSG: Message Here >>

 approach - adding this to the Notes area on the vendor profile screen.

 

The GMROI report has a subtle change in the calculation of the cost of sales figure.

 If it comes across an item with a zero cost in the sales records, previous

 versions would use the cost in the master inventory file. While there's

 a logic to that, it can make the report different from the itemized

 sales report.

 

[GMROIUSEINVCOSTIFZERO / z_saledesc2repair ]

 

Version 3.650                                        12/1/2016

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog program will now download and link over

 1200 catalog images. Download and run the u_alexaninov2016b utility.

 Note the b at the end of the name and when it starts, be sure

 the title includes "With Pictures"

 Email Compulink to request more detailed instructions if needed.

 

The Sales Payment Spreadsheet report has a "Depositable" recap line

 at the bottom which, in previous versions, did not deduct the

 cash register Paid-Out total. Starting this version, the net Paid-Out

 amount will be deducted from that line of the summary.

 

The Cash Register Journal Report is a simplified listing of payment

 activity. What's new in this update is the option to select

 just Cash or just Checks or just credit cards or just credit slips.

 The default, as before, is to show all types of payment.

 

If you primarily use the Cayan Genius terminal for credit card

 processing, but you may want the option to sometimes have

 the on-screen pop-up processing screen to either swipe using a

 simple magnetic swipe reader or to type in a card number

 (in case the card cannot be chip-read or swiped.)

 A new option allows for this if you add a new payment method called:

         Cayan

 on the Payment types page of Preferences and check the box for

 magnetic swipe/chip. This way, when you select Visa or Amex,

 etc., the transaction will be passed to the Genius, but when

 you select the Cayan payment type the on-screen processing

 screen will appear which gives you the ability to swipe or

 type a card number. The pop-up processing screen defaults

 to swipe mode and allows you to switch to keyed (typed) mode

 but if you want the screen to start out in keyed mode,

 name that new payment method:

         Cayan Keyed

 

The Sales Screen will prevent applying a price that is lower than

 your discounting and security rules allow. Starting this version

 it will allow a lower price if the item is a return (has a negative

 quantity) This can help if certain returns are subject to a lower

 return value for credit, or if you use promotional "coupon" Sku's

 which are entered with a minus-one quantity and which you may want

 to be able to reduce in value if they are limited to the total of

 the sale.

 

Sales receipts can print an extra message at the end of the item

 description based on the major codes and the minor codes of the

 items sold. Because these messages can be quite long, by default

 they do not repeat if you sell multiple        items with the same

 major code or with the same minor code.

 This version adds the option to force certain messages to

 repeat for each item even if the message was already printed

 by another item on the same receipt.

 To enable this, start the extra receipt message/description

 on the major or minor code maintenance screen with the word

 REPEAT  - the word REPEAT will not print on the receipt, of course.

 

The inventory adjustment report simultaneously creates an Excel XLS

 list, but in previous versions, the Excel list included ALL

 the adjustments, not just the selection based on the report

 criteria. Starting with this update, the XLS list contents

 will be restricted by the report criteria.

 

A new utility can import spreadsheet files of vendor shipments

 of merchandise, even if the vendor is not one of the

 prepared catalogs in Shopkeeper (such as Pandora, Endless,

 Alex and Ani, Chamilia, etc.)

 Request details from Compulink on how to use this program module

 and how the spreadsheet file must be formatted.

 

When you send an email via the customer profile screen, a record

 of that email can be added to the customer notes  - if you turn

 that option on in Preferences. However, in previous versions,

 if you sent an email to the customer's alternative email address,

 the record was not made, but starting this version it will be.

 

[u_imp_inv_csv]

 

Version 3.640                                        11/02/2016

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program includes the pricing changes that need to go

 into effect on November 3, 2016 both in the U.S. and in Canada.

 Around 100 items have changes to the wholesale cost, the retail price or both.

 The changes are a mix of reductions and increases

 

 Note: If you *have* run the Pandora catalog in VJS version 3.635

 (e.g. since October 26), then this update includes no additional styles. But if

 you have *not* run this Pandora catalog program within the past week then there

 will be many new items (I.e., see updates 3.365 and 3.615 and 3.600, etc., below.)

 

A previous update added the option to store .DOC, .DOCX, .XLS,

 .XLSX and .PDF files in addition to the more usual image files

 (such as .JPG) to inventory and repairs and customers and appraisals.

 In some cases in previous versions it wasn't possible to open those

 documents via Shopkeeper.

       Those files are now always viewable in VJS by double-clicking the place-

 holder PDF or DOC or XLS icon, or by right-clicking that place-holder

 and choosing View Image File.

 

The Inventory Status Notes search option is now available

 even to users logging in at a lower security level. In

 previous versions it was available only to users who

 could make changes in Inventory Status.

 

When receiving memo items, you should generally have a quantity of

 just 1 per Sku line because when you convert a memo item to invoiced/owned,

 you have to convert the entire quantity of that Sku. I.e. you can't convert

 just 1 out of 3 of a single Sku. Starting with this version, VJS will

 warn you if you attempt to enter 2 or more when receiving memo items

 in order to prevent problems down the road.

 

The customer report export file "Large CSV" can include

 the description        of the last Sku purchased. Starting

 this version, double quotes (often used for inches) in that

 description are stripped out because they can interfere

 with other programs reading in a CSV file.

 

[ u_rpm_expenses ]

 

 

 

Version 3.635                                         10/26/2016

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds ~130 additional items including

 the Disney Iconic Bracelet Gift Set

 

 Note: If you run this catalog update, you will still need to download

 and run a *further* download and update on or after November 2, 2016

 because of the numerous price changes due to take effect November 3.

 

 

[moreblackline]

 

Version 3.630                                        10/10/2016

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with hundreds

 of the latest additions to their catalog - including items for        Holiday 2016.

 The Canadian price feature has the option to allow you to accept the

 US wholesale cost multiplied by a value that you choose.

 

New features have been added to enable emailing month-end accounts receivable

 statements in bulk.        From the month-end statements screen, choose Full Selection

 then check the Email One-by-One choice. This would require that you

 have previously configured your email credentials in Shopkeeper.

 See this FAQ topic for that:

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?email_configuration.htm

 

The previous accounts receivable statement "print one-by-one" choice has been

 renamed "Enable Separate PDF's"        because the usual goal of this choice is to

 create a separate PDF statement file for each customer, rather than one large

 PDF encompassing all statements.

 

In previous versions, the largest value that could display for accounts receivable

 account balances on the Charge Account status screen was $999,999.99. Further,

 for balances over $10,000 there was not enough room to show the cents.

 Starting this version, the largest value is $9,999,999.99 and the cents will always show.

 

Note that both of the above statement choices produce an Excel XLS list

 of customer name, email and PDF details in case you or your computer

 tech want to set up your own custom method of sending statements in bulk.

 

From the Purchase Order tab of Inventory Entry, a new button, "Next P.O. No.",

 allows you to reset the purchase order numbering to your preferred sequence.

 

If you specifically choose for quantities in most screens to allow decimal places, then

 the physical inventory screen will allow now you to enter fractions for on-hand counts,

 which it didn't before.

 

In some previous versions, in the right-most column of the  

 Return to Vendor Report, the cents portion of the return

 value was partially falling off the edge of the report.

 This is corrected in this update.

 Also - previous versions of the RTV report had the option

 to include returns of memo items, but that option was on

 the Full Selection page. Starting this version, that option

 is on the first, Quick Selection page.

 

The Return to Vendor Reports now have the additional option to sort

 by style number within brand and to have subtotals per brand name.

 The previous options to sort and group by invoice or by return

 ticket number, are still available.

 

In previous version, the security setting for the credit card reports

 was via the setting "Cash Register Reports." Starting this version,

 it will be via the security option "Credit Card Payments Report."

 to make things clearer.

 

In the screens where you specify the G/L Code (accounting expense code)

 breakdown of invoices payable or checks, when you start typing a

 G/L code, the drop list will continuously search and navigate

 the list to help you find the right G/L code. (in previous versions

 you could drop down and navigate the list, but it didn't do a

 continuous automatic search.)

 

In the screen where the security level and password is assigned to clerks,

 previous versions listed the clerks in the order they were originally

 added. Starting this version the list is sorted by name. Where the list

 of clerks is long, this will make it easier to manage.

 

The time cards reports will now print at the top of each page the date range

 selected for the report.

 

When you start to make a sale, the next-sale-number-counter is incremented.

 But sometimes you may start to record a new sale, but then cancel out of it,

 or you may record a layaway then later cancel it. If the sale being canceled

 has a recent number, Shopkeeper will re-use that number for a new sale to avoid

 too many holes in the sales ticket sequence.

 However, some jewelers might prefer that sale numbers always march forward and

 don't want the unused numbers being used slightly out of sequence. This update

 adds that capability if you add the key word DONTRECYCLESALENO anywhere in the

 Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

When running a customer report and creating the large (more columns) export file

 and when you choose to calculate purchases, one of the columns in the export

 file is the Sku of the most recent item purchased. In previous versions only

 the current sales file was considered for this column; starting with this

 update, the archive file will be considered. Of course, this would make a difference

 only for customers who had not made a purchase in several years.

 

 misc-log txt / sales / inv

 

 

Version 3.620                                        09/01/2016

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog program has five more styles that weren't

 in the early August update.

 

You can now paste a Cut-n-Paste type Windows Clipboard image into

 Shopkeeper. Using the Windows Snipping Tool (or any similar

 utility program) you can grab any part of any image from the

 computer display which copies the image to the Windows Clipboard.

 Then in Shopkeeper, right-click any No Image Saved box to paste into

 inventory, repairs, appraisals, etc.

 

 For example, this can be used to grab an image from the "viewfinder"

 of any Webcam program or from any website. I.e. this gives you

 another way to use a Webcam in cases where the Webcam doesn't

 "play nice" with Shopkeeper with your computer's installation of Windows.

 

 When you start VJS, it can ensure that your preferred screen capture

 program is always running and if you don't have a third-party program

 it can activate the Snipping Tool which is built-in to most installations

 of Windows. You can find this option in the Local Defaults p.3 in

 Preferences via the Maintenance Menu.

 See this help topic in the FAQ pages for more help:

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?adding_images_via_screen_captu.htm

 

The Picture Manager has a new button "Show in Windows Folder."

 which will open a Windows File Explorer window to the folder

 in which the original image file is stored and will select

 that image file.

 This makes it easy for you to drag the picture file to email or

 to Twitter or FaceBook or eBay, etc.

 In many cases, you access the Picture Manager screen by double-

 clicking an image in Shopkeeper, and from there choose

 "Picture Information" where you will see the "Show in Windows Folder"

 button.

 You can also access this option by right-clicking the image box

 within the Picture Manager.

 

 

The credit card report allows you to select a criterion to

 report just a single type of card. ( This also refers to any

 new payment type you might add such as Gold because new

 payment types are included in the credit card column of

 the payment spreadsheet report.)

 In previous versions, this selection of a single payment

 type worked only if the payment name were all capitals.

 Starting this version it will work even for card names

 including lower case letters - such as MasterCard.

 

The Repair Quick Update screen now allows you to assign a billing

 Sku No in the grid/list of jobs. (No drop list of Sku's is

 available in this grid so you'll need to know the valid

 billing Sku's.)

         

This version adds an improvement when searching for a Geller Blue Book

 task by the book's stock number. Previously it could be awkward

 landing on the right number when typing a number such as BB1017 when

 similar numbers exist such as BB10170 and BB10171, etc. and when

 they all had zero in stock.

 

 

Version 3.615                                        08/11/2016

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds ~250 additional items. This is beyond

 the 600 new items that were added on VJS update 3.600. Some of

 these additions are new items and some are a little older but

 were missing from previous downloadable catalogs.

 

On the Sales Tax page of Preferences is an option to retroactively

 change the sales tax on existing but open layaways in

 case you change the sales tax rates. Previously this option

 did not adjust changes to the tax cut off limits,

 but starting this version, it will do that.

 

If you choose to allow mixed case customer names and addresses,

 the customer screen may help fix some formatting, such as

 correcting "john" to "John"   Previous versions would also

 format the country which was problematic when it "fixed"

 USA to Usa. This version resolves that issue and will recognize

 the abbreviated country names: US, USA, UK, UAE, PRC,

 with or without periods between letters.

 

Version 3.610                                        08/08/2016

===============================================================

 

The newest David Geller / Jeweler Profit Repair Blue Book

 is now available to add to Jewelry Shopkeeper.

 This is a catalog of over 6,000 repair tasks with

 revised pricing which helps ensure you don't under price

 your services.

 To use this feature, you will need to request Jeweler Profit

 to send us the OK for the Blue Book Digital License.

 

 http://www.jewelerprofit.com/contact_us.html

 

 

The Endless Jewelry Catalog program can register in Shopkeeper over

 200 new inventory items for Summer 2016 along with their pictures.

 In addition, Endless has significantly changed the pricing of over

 700 previous items - by over 20% in many cases. The Endless catalog

 program update in Shopkeeper can retroactively apply the new prices

 to your old inventory records.

 This includes both U.S. and Canadian prices.

 

The Chamilia Catalog program has been updated with the Season 4 2016

 changes. This includes both U.S. and Canadian prices.

 

The daily backup from the VJS File Center now skips

 the backup of certain month-end files when the

 USB backup memory stick already has the same files.

 This will save a bit of time during most backups.

 

On the "Listing" page of Major Class Codes Maintenance,

 in some previous versions not all of the columns of

 information, such as the taxable status or category, etc

 was showing. That is resolved in this update.

 

In previous versions, after making a change to a pre-existing

 time card entry, exiting the time card screen was a bit

 awkward, with some unnecessary alert prompts. That has

 been improved in this update.

 

In all previous versions, if the preferred Windows printer driver

 for any print task was not found (or was renamed) the Print Options

 dialog box selects the overall default Windows printer.

 What's new in this version is that the Print Options screen will

 warn you that your preferred printer is not available.

 

 

 

Version 3.608                                          07/22/2016

===============================================================

 

When using Add to Existing Sku numbers, you might want to

 print price tags for the list of items you added. In

 previous versions there were issues in printing price

 tags and the list of items if you'd simultaneously changed

 some of the prices or costs. That has been resolved

 in this update.

 

One previous version showed a (benign) error message at the end

 of the Cleanup. This is resolved in this update.

 

Version 3.606                                          07/15/2016

===============================================================

 

The Commission Report / Sales by Salesperson report now creates

 an additional export XLS file with a summarized number of

 sales tickets per clerk per day. Beyond being a handy summary

 for yourself, the format can be used with the TraxSales

 company if you subscribe to their analysis services.

 

The Inventory Web Export is primarily summarized by style

 but it can include the most recent Sku number of each style.

 In previous versions, the Sku number included in the export

 files always used the number-only version of the Sku number.

 E.g. 125-12325 and not LSR-12325 if LSR were the mnemonic

 for major code 125. Starting this version, the export file

 will use whichever version is your usual default as per

 your selection in Preferences.

 In addition, the Web export file can now include a separate

 column for the 3-letter Mnemonic code - in case that's useful

 for your website formatting.

 

One page of the major class code maintenance screen has a grid

 listing of the major codes. In previous versions it wasn't

 intended that you could add new major codes via the grid, but

 it did let you. However, it let you use lower case letters

 for major code descriptions which is non-standard. Also, if

 you did add a major code via the grid, a dummy Sku number was

 not simultaneously generated.

 Starting this version, adding major codes via the listing / grid

 screen is ok and both of the above issues are addressed.

 

When you choose to delete the old physical inventory count list,

 Previous versions had an extra unnecessary (and possibly confusing)

 message indicating that the count file couldn't be opened. That

 unneeded prompt is removed in this update.

 

Under certain rare cases the Vendor X-Tra Search could take unusually

 long to open in previous versions. The cause was identified and

 resolved.

 

 

Version 3.600                                          06/30/2016

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds ~600 additional items for

 summer 2016.

 (You may need to request a new Maintenance Plan Code )

 

The Itemized Sales Report with picture option active was not

 previously completely suitable for the PDF output version as

 certain subtotals and totals were not formatted for the PDF file.

 It has been updated in this version.

 

On the Inventory Status screen, it's not very hard to add,

 blank stones detail record for items which don't need it.

 Normally you wouldn't notice them because your criteria

 would exclude blank entries. However, in case you run an

 entire stones report you'd see a few blank entries.

 In this update, when you run a cleanup with the condense

 option, any such blank records will be removed.

 

The repair report allows you to select based on a vendor/trade shop

 or a location. Previous versions allowed you to type in lower

 case criteria, even though that's not valid for this filter.

 This update makes sure that those criteria are typed in.

 upper-case only.

 

You can now print a price tag directly within the sales screen.

 This could be useful for cases where you are accepting

 a customer return or a trade-in and need to tag or retag

 the item.

 From within the Sku line of the sale, choose Options then

 Print Price Tag.

 

Running the Z report sometimes requires you to exit Shopkeeper back

 to the VJS File Center. Changes in this update will make that

 extra step much less frequent.

 

[AltGenius / EMV Timeout / TTwandFind]

 

 

Version 3.596                                                  05/28/2016

===============================================================

 

In any Date box (field) new shortcuts are available. Pressing

 the Letter B will fill in the beginning of the month and

 subsequent presses of B will fill in the beginning of the

 previous month.

 The Letter E will fill in the end of the month and

 subsequent presses of E will fill in the end of the

 subsequent month.

 (Not new, but as always, pressing T will fill in today's date.)

         

A previous update added the option for an on-screen pop-up

 when adding a new sale to alert you if the customer has

 available credit slips.

 This version adds a further Open-Credit-Slip alert any

 time you make a payment on a sale - even a layaway.

 This secondary alert is not a pop-up, just a small message

 near the payment amount box.

 This feature is turned on or off with the sale option within

 Preferences

 

 

Version 3.595                                                  05/20/2016

===============================================================

 

The Purchase Order Reports now allow you to filter

 the results of the report by the Cancel Date.

 This way, your report won't show $10,000's in outstanding

 orders that are effectively obsolete now. By default the

 report will omit orders that are beyond seven months

 after the cancel date. So, if your purchase order reports

 contain many outstanding obsolete orders, you can assign

 them a cancel date to omit them from the report.

 

On a related matter, when you add a new purchase order,

 the Cancel Date will now default to a date three months in

 the future; you can, of course, change this cancel date.

 

 

This version adds changes needed to support the most recent program

 update for the RFID Wave wand reader from Trac Tech.

 [I.e. it detects WaveConnector.exe as well as the previous

 WandRFIDreader.exe]

 

[invckmouseenter-picrefresh / only1attach]

 

 

Version 3.590                                                  05/12/2016

===============================================================

 

If you add the comment "SMS Warning" in the notes or comments

 area of a customer's profile, then at a later date, if you

 were to attempt to send a text / SMS to that customer

 you would get a warning that the customer may not want to

 receive text messages. You would then be able to decide whether

 to continue sending the text or not - based on the

 circumstances.

 (See this FAQ topic for general notes on texting: http://goo.gl/ExSM22 )

 

A new option on the Customer page of Preferences allows you to

 require that customer type be filled in for each customer.

 ( For pre-existing customers, this requirement would kick in

 if/when you access a name on the customer maintenance screen. )

 

Another new option on the Customer page of Preferences allows you to

 require that the customer-specific clerk be filled in for each customer

 on the customer profile screens. ( This is separate from the option

 to require that a clerk be added to each sale.)

         

The Itemized Sales Report adds the option to sort and subtotal

 by Minor Class Code.

 

The Itemized Sales Report when sorted by Brand (which sorts by style

 within brand) previously did not show the full name of the associated

 vendor - it just showed the brand code. Starting this version the

 full name is included in each brand group's title.

 

Many drop-down pick-lists of items to choose from have been made taller

 so that you can see more options at first glance - without having to

 scroll down. This includes, (but certainly not limited to) the lists of

 sorting options in reports, the list of printers, etc.

 

The option to select inventory reports by size now has an additional option

 to select a *range* of sizes, not just a single size.

 In addition, if you select NONE for the size, you'll report all the inventory

 items that don't yet have a size.

 (see version 3.580 comments for more background on this option.)

 

 

[AmountCharged]

 

Version 3.580                                                  04/30/2016

===============================================================

 

The Size data field was a recent addition to the inventory

 records, but it was not previously available as a selection

 criterion for inventory or sales reports.

 Starting this version you can select a specific Size when

 run the (regular) inventory reports and the Itemized Sales Reports.

 Note that if you want several sizes which have the same beginning

 you can add an asterisk to the criterion. E.g. selecting Size 18*

 would select sizes 18 or 18" or 18.5  etc.

 

When you add sales or repairs, VJS prompts you to confirm the sale

 or job number and gives you the chance to change the number.

 Previous versions had 'secret' ways of suppressing these prompts

 if you wanted to prevent people from assigning out-of-sequence numbers.

 Starting this version, these are standard options in Preferences.

 The options to look for are "Skip the Prompt for the Sale Number" in Sales

 Defaults and "Skip the Prompt for the Repair Number" in Repair Defaults

 in Preferences.

 

A long-available option for sales receipts is to print (or not) the

 regular price or the discount next to discounted sales items.

 The regular price was always the higher value of the normal selling

 price or the MSRP (if it was filled in.)

 This update adds the option to print the regular price (or discount)

 on the receipts but to consider only your normal selling price, and

 not the MSRP. You'll find the option "Use the MSRP as Regular Price?

 (if present" on the Receipts Options page of Defaults.

 

Previous versions had a 'less detailed' option for the

 Quick Layaway report. However, such a layout doesn't

 exist so selecting that option showed an error message

 in the past. Starting with this update, that less detailed

 version will not show as a choice.

         

 

Version 3.571                                                  04/20/2016

===============================================================

 

When printing sales receipts for inventory items that have the

 loose stones details page filled in, previous versions

 used the word "Certificate" for the grading report.

 However, trade groups stress that the word "Report"

 is legally more suitable. This update includes this change.

 

When opening The Purchase Order Report, previous versions

 had the typo "Accounts Payable Report" in the title.

 That has been corrected in this update.

 

 

 

Version 3.57                                                  04/11/2016

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with

 the latest additions to their catalog - including items for

 Mothers Day and Summer 2016.

 

In the sales screen locating a previous sale by typing a sale number

 would search in just the current sales file (past 2 to 3 years.)

 Starting this version it will search both the current sales file

 and the archive sales file.

 

In previous versions on the Clerk Maintenance screen, when you clicked

 Add a New Clerk, the new clerk record was initialized with XXX

 in the Clerk initials box and <Type Name Here> for the name

 and you were to replace both with right entries. However, this

 approach wasn't intuitive to everyone, so now, when adding a new

 clerk a pop up window appears on top with just the initials

 and name to focus on. This should be simpler and clearer.

 

The Inventory Search window has a Word Search option which

 allows you to search for text anywhere in the description

 or style. The change in this version is that there is now

 a keyboard shortcut of Alt-W to select the Word Search option

 (i.e. as well as being able to click Word Search with the mouse.)

 This will be welcome to keyboard fans and will speed things up if

 you use this option frequently.

 

The VJS FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions and Answers ) web page is

 available by choosing Options at the top of any menu.

 

The web export feature from the Inventory Reports by style

 summarizes multiple Sku's with the same style into just

 one line. The export file contains the Last Sku (most recent

 Sku) of that style for information, but there could be other

 Sku's. This update has a small change such that when you

 select a single location to include, the Last Sku will now

 be the last Sku of that style in that location, whereas before,

 it was the most recent Sku of that style regardless of the location.

 

The web export feature from the Inventory Reports by style has a new

 export field option: Desc_Notes. This is a combination of

 the first and second basic description lines *and* the Sku's

 notes from the Notes page. These are all together in one field

 but this is limited to 254 total letters. ( exporting the entirety

 of very long notes is still possible in the export, but those are

 in the export fields Detail1 through Detail30.)

 

The Itemized Sales Report has a "Sort by Month" option which summarizes

 the sales to one line per month. The formatting of this version of

 the sales report has been adjusted to work better when sending

 the report to a PDF file. (previously the retail column was not included

 in the PDF version.)

 

A relocated inventory report was previously using the cost-access security setting

 from JS-Classic which made it awkward to prevent access to printing the cost

 on that report. That is resolved in this update.

 

When running the Inventory Report or the Itemized Sales Report where you select

 just one vendor, a recent update included the change such that the Excel

 XLS output version of the file (in the VJS Reports folder) would include

 the vendor code in the file name. This was done to help those who run many

 vendor-specific reports and who may send them off to the vendors.

 This update includes a small change to help avoid errors in cases where

 the vendor code includes characters that are "illegal" in filenames.

 

[203/bkupinst/dblage]

 

Version 3.564                                                  03/30/2016

===============================================================

 

In Customer Reports & Labels there is a choice to select

 customers by any "keyword" you have typed in the customer

 notes. Previous versions allowed you to report customers

 *with* certain keywords, starting this version you can

 also *Exclude* based on certain key words

 

 For a primer on selecting customers by keywords, see this FAQ page:

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?customer_type.htm

 

[ignoregeniusver]

 

Version 3.562                                                  03/23/2016

===============================================================

 

In previous versions Sales Receipt Layout #11, on the right-hand

 copy, the negative dollar figure next to each negative or zero

 dollar item did not show (though the total did factor them in,

 of course.) Starting this version, that value will print on

 the right copy (in red when using a color printer.)

 

Version 3.561                                                  03/20/2016

===============================================================

 

From the Customer X-Tra Search, when you choose to Add a New Customer,

 depending on the previous circumstances, Shopkeeper might, at times,

 assume you want to add a customer with the same name as the last-searched

 customer, so your choices were to Add that as the First Name or as

 the Last Name. In case neither is wanted, there is a specific

 "Add Blank Customer" button that you can click.

         

If you inadvertently choose to Add a New customer, then try to exit

 the customer screen, there are now no prompts warning you about

 the blank customer name.

 

VJS logs a limited amount of auditing of changes to inventory and other

 data files. However, since 'dummy' Sku's and repair Sku's can be

 used 100's or 1000's of times, the tracking of all the changes can

 take a fair amount of disk space. Given that adjustments to dummy

 Sku's is not very interesting (compared to adjusting diamond inventory_

 a list of changes to dummy Sku's is no longer logged.

 

 This change does not affect any reports or item history. All sales

 and repairs records will be in place just as before

 (as would be adjustments, returns to vendors, etc. -  although those

 would be rare for dummy Sku's.)

 

On a related note, when the cleanup is run without the Condense

 option ( which is normally used just a couple or so times per year)

 a partial condensing step is done to save disk space.

 

 

[packmemo]

 

 

 

 

Version 3.560                                                  03/16/2016

===============================================================

 

When creating a new special order inventory record during a sale

 in previous version, the Location box pick list was not a

 managed look-up list. Now this location box is linked to

 the same inventory location lookup list as in other screens.

 

The credit card breakdown report now allocates enough room for totals over $1M

 which is helpful when running the report for a large number of months.

 

The improvement to Return to Vendor lookup added in 3.553 (see below)

 introduced a problem making it difficult to retrieve a previous

 return. This is resolved in this update.

 

The pop-up inventory search screen now includes both of the two

 main inventory description lines. However, under normal circumstances

 the description column isn't wide enough to show very long

 descriptions. If you have a wide enough monitor, you can widen

 the description column by dragging the separator line in the column heading.

 It will likely be necessary to also widen the entire Inventory Search screen

 by dragging the window edge or corner.

 

When you run an inventory report, an Excel XLS version of the report

 is simultaneously put in the VJS Reports folder. A minor change

 in this version is that the MSRP column has been added to the XLS

 output file.

 

When you change the Mnemonic on the Major Class Code Maintenance

 screen, any existing item will now be automatically updated

 To help tidy up any pre-existing inconsistencies from the Major Class

 Code Maintenance screen, you can choose options, "Update Mnemonics in

 Inventory List" which updates for *all* major class codes.

 

In the Customer X-Tra Search, the sales grid on the bottom left corner

 didn't previously have room to show all digits of a Layaway

 balance over $100,000 and starting this version it does have enough

 room for balances that large.

         

In some cases the "managed lookup" list file could get unnecessarily large

 which would slow down certain screens in Shopkeeper. Starting this

 version, the cleanup does an extra step to make sure this file is

 cleared of unnecessary records.

         

In the Inventory Entry screen, when selecting to retrieve a previous invoice

 via the drop-list of invoices, in certain situations, VJS would respond

 "Already been recorded so another can't be added" - even though you were

 trying to retrieve an old invoice, not add a new one.

 This is resolved in this update.

 

 

Version 3.554                                                  02/29/2016

===============================================================

 

The accounts payable cash requirements reports adds the option to

 show the details of all checks applied against each invoice.

 

[ftpupdatecorrchk]

 

Version 3.553                                                  02/22/2016

===============================================================

 

Adds a further adjustment to the Not-Applicable Style behavior.

 (see recent changes in 3.550m below)

 If you type a style as *only* the non-applicable style prefix,

 then even the previous major code is not applied to the new item.

 

In the Return to Vendor screen, if you do not type a return number

 but simply click the drop-arrow to see previous returns, they

 will be presented in order of the most recent returns at the top.

 This is contrast to being sorted alphabetically/numerically as

 in previous versions. This makes it easier to find the recent

 returns - even if you have numbered them completely out of

 sequence (e.g. if you used return numbers provided by the vendors.)

 

[zrptnoexcl, editglichk]

 

Version 3.552                                                  02/19/2016

===============================================================

 

In certain cases, previous versions of VJS would generally not allow

 a payable to be added if the invoice number were the same

 as another invoice from a different vendor.

 That has been resolved in this update.

 

When dragging and dropping pictures into VJS, the source picture

 is left alone as and just a copy is made in the Shopkeeper

 data folders.

 It's now possible for the original picture file to be deleted

 (in order to keep the "staging folder" clear.

 To enable this option the keyword DELETEDRAGGEDPICTURE

 anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings on the first page of Preferences

 (for all computers on the network) or in the Miscellaneous Options

 box on the Local Settings Cont. page (if you want this to affect

 just one computer.)

         

When viewing an item on the Inventory Status screen, if the item was

 originally entered via a purchase order, a new "Go" button by

 the P.O. number will allow you to pop up the corresponding

 purchase order entry screen.

 

 Further, still in Inventory Status, you can right-click the Style

 box to see a list of purchase orders for that vendor so you can

 either add this style to an existing P.O. or you can add it to

 a new one. Note that the style number is added to the Windows

 clipboard, so that once in the purchase order entry screen you can

 press Ctrl-V to paste it into the style box.

         

[salenotesallbands]

         

Version 3.551                                                  02/12/2016

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds 100 additional items for

 Valentines and Mothers Day 2016 and other early 2016

 Disney items, etc.

 

Adds three 3-part receipt options for when printing

 sales quotes / wish list tickets.

 

Adds 3-part version of the credit slip / gift certificate

 for printing on letter size paper with 2 perforations.

 This helps if you already use that type of paper for

 all other receipts so you don't have to change paper.

 

[z_na_style->*;]

 

Version 3.550                                                  02/11/2016

===============================================================

 

The Endless jewelry catalog registration utility program has been

 updated with 117 new items and 200 new pictures

 [From the Main Menu, choose Options, Utilities,

 On Web Site, then download u_endlessfeb2016  ]

 

The Cash Register Journal Report has a new option

 to ignore the date and show only the un-Z'd payments

 so that the report matches the X-Report. This can

 help identify the outliers if new payments are added

 with a date *other* than today's date.

 

The Cash Register Journal Report previously had a column

 showing the sale subtotal without tax, but now

 that column is the sale total including tax. This makes

 it more intuitive since the next column over is the

 customer's payment amount - which would be tax-inclusive.

 

When receiving inventory with no style where you use style

 N/A (not applicable) previous versions would start the

 new item completely blank on purpose so that you could enter

 the new item information without erasing inherited details.

 starting this version, the major and minor code are inherited

 from a previous Sku. This saves some steps because if you receive

 an estate watch, you will likely want to assign it the same major

 code as a previous estate watch (but not the previous description,

 of course.) See Version 1.28 notes for more information on the

 N/A style.

 

When using the Trade-In option added to the Sales Screen

 (see Version 3.54 notes below) previous versions did not

 support the N/A (not applicable) style prefix so in previous

 versions, if you used a generic N/AWATCH or *WATCH style it

 would have copied the description and price etc from a previous

 Sku. Starting this version the Trade-In option (and Add-Inventory)

 from the Sales Screen will support the not applicable prefix.

 (See Version 1.28 notes below.)

 

The Accounts Payable Cash Requirements report now lets you select a from-and-to

 date range to be included for the Due Dates and for the

 Discount Date. In previous versions only a due date

 before, or a discount date after were available as

 selections.

 

Version 3.544                                                  02/05/2016

===============================================================

 

The Endless catalog registration utility program has been

 updated with the Valentines Twin Hearts Charm.

 [From the Main Menu, choose Options, Utilities,

 On Web Site, then download u_endlessjan2016  ]

 

Version 3.543                                                  02/02/2016

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds six Iconic Bracelet Gift Sets.

 See 3.542 notes below for other Valentines 2016 items.

 

A new catalog registration utility has been added for MantraBand

 (Ask Compulink for details if interested.)

 

A new catalog registration utility has been added for Thortiuda

 (Ask Compulink for details if interested.)

 

In the Return Inventory to Vendor screen, in the list

 of items, in previous versions the delete line check

 box was not enabled but it is starting this version.

 

If you notice a large number of duplicate entries in the

 "managed lookup lists" (the drop down lists for various

 data entry boxes such as location, customer type, etc.)

 a new utility can remove the duplicates.

 (Ask Compulink for details if interested.)

 

 

Version 3.542                                                  01/29/2016

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds the Valentines 2016 items

 and a large number of prior-release items that were not

 previously in the download.

 You may need to request a new Maintenance Plan Code if

 you don't have a recent one.

 

Even if you have already imported or typed new styles for

 Valentines 2016, about 150 picture files which were not previously

 available are now included and will be added.

 

 

Version 3.541                                                  01/27/2016

===============================================================

 

Fixes a Webcam problem that arose in version 3.540

 

Version 3.540                                                  01/27/2016

===============================================================

 

In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the bottom left corner

 grid shows previous sales and there's a column for

 the balance due on layaways, repairs and special orders.

 In previous versions the balance was shown rounded to the

 nearest dollar (to save space.) Starting this version, the

 entire balance including cents is shown.

 

From the Inventory Status Screen you can click the drop-down

 arrow by the Sku number box to pop up the Inventory Search

 screen. By default the Inventory Search screen does not

 show zero-quantity inventory items - but you can click a

 check box to make them appear. Starting this version, you

 can make this Inventory Search screen default to showing

 the zero-quantity items. (when called from Inventory Status

 screen.) You can change this setting on the Inventory Cont.

 page of Preferences.

 

In the Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks screen, previous

 versions would default the date to today's date.

 starting this version, you will be prompted to either

 type a date or accept today's date. This may help you

 better control which dates are assigned to those checks.

 

If you accept a resalable Trade-in item during a sale you will

 want to create a new inventory item with a Sku number. In

 previous versions you would choose the in-Sku-line Options

 button then select either New Inv Item or Add Special Order

 which pop-up an Add Inventory Item screen.

 Starting this version, when you click on that Options button

 there is a specific Add Trade-in Item choice.

 This pops-up the same screen as with those other items, but

 with several helpful differences:

 - The P.O. information is removed;

 - The quantity is removed and assumed to be zero

   (previously the quantity defaulted to 1 and you had to change it to zero)

 - When the item is added to the sales screen, a selling quantity

   of minus-one is automatically filled in. (because you're buying

   the item, not selling it.)

 - If you enter both a cost and a price, the cost is used as the

   "selling" price for this sale because you won't give full retail

   credit on trade-in - just the wholesale value.

                 

When selling a Sku on the Sales Screen, the inventory picture

 can be shown in the bottom left corner of the screen. In

 previous versions you could click the image to access the

 Picture Manager where you could add a picture at the time

 of sale. Starting this version, you can add a picture at

 the time of sale by just dragging and dropping a picture

 file within the sales screen.

 (This can be helpful when creating a Sku on the fly for a trade-in

 item - as above.)

 

A new program module is available to help export in-house charge-

 account credit information to the national credit bureaus

 using the new Metro 2 reporting standards. (If interested, ask

 Compulink for more details on the availability and details of

 this program.)

 

The backup from the File Center may take some extra space on your

 USB memory sticks because where previous versions did *not*

 backup certain Month-end files, VJS now does.

 

 In general, this will NOT cause extra backup time. . .

 . . .except that just the first time you backup to any particular

 memory stick that does not yet have these files, it will take an extra

 step just that onetime. It also might take some more space on the

 backup memory sticks, so if you have low-capacity memory sticks, you may

 need to use larger ones (e.g. 16GB or more.)

 

[bkmonthend \ invfptsz \ custxml \ highbal \ blackline \ geniusv5msg ]

 

 

 

 

Version 3.53                                                  01/13/2016

===============================================================

 

Some changes on the Physical Inventory Status screen.

 In many cases, clicking the checkbox to delete a line

 was unresponsive.

 Clicking the "X" header of the delete checkbox column

 means "Select All" - now you will be prompted to confirm

 that you want to select all items to delete.

 

The basic customer name and address and phone number report

 previously included the home and work phone number.

 Now it also includes the mobile number and the spouse's

 mobile number

 

A previous update improved the appraisal form by giving it a

 rust-colored decorative border. This version keeps this new version

 but        adds back, as an option, the version with the black decorative

 border. See the list of options by expanding the list of layouts when

 at the Print Options screen.

 

When adding a new sale, VJS verifies that the sale number selected

 has not been used before. Previous versions did not check

 the archived file of sales (more than 2 or 3 years old) so it

 could let you use a sale number that was already used a number

 of years ago. Starting this version, even old sale numbers

 cannot be re-used.

 

 

[except-deleted2  invckdebugv2, custmrgelastcust]

 

 

Version 3.525                                                  01/08/2016

===============================================================

 

The Itemized Sales Report has the option to sort and organize

 by customer. This way, you can run a sales report for, say,

 a week or a month grouped by customer. The customer's full

 name and address and phone numbers and email are included and

 this sort version can be combined with the Show Pictures option.

 This report can be very helpful for reviewing sales and follow-up

 messages. The XLS copy of this report (put in the VJS Reports Folder)

 now also includes the email address.

 

The Sales Summary - Compare Two Date Ranges report now adds the

 option to restrict the report based on the sales Dept code

 (This is the optional 3-letter code at the top of sales that can

 be used for flagging different types of sales such as responding

 to adverts, out of state, bridal registry, etc.)

 By default the ZZ Dept code sales are excluded.

 This option has previously been available on the Itemized Sales Reports.

 

 [invckdebug]

 

 

Version 3.52                                                  12/30/2015

===============================================================

 

The version of the appraisal form with a decorative border

 now has the border in a rust color.

 

The Customer Purchase Report now includes the email address below

 the address and phone numbers.

 

The Hot Seller Report has a new option to limit the results

 to only those items which you have received more than

 a certain quantity.

 This can be particularly useful when running reports for

 Pandora or Endless where you may have 1000's of styles

 registered in Shopkeeper but that you have never received.

 Selecting a Quantity of 1 or more received will prevent

 those "no-show" items appearing - even when you choose to

 see both items that have sold and those that have not sold.

 

In the Print Options dialog screen, the Selected Printer box

 has been widened and the font made smaller so that longer

 printer names can be seen fully. This can help ambiguity

 when you have long and similar printer names such as

         HP LaserJet 2300Series PCL 6 MFP     and

         HP LaserJet 2300Series PCL 6 MFP (Copy 1)

 In previous versions you might only see a part of the

 name and not know for sure which one was selected

 

 

Version 3.511                                                  12/22/2015

===============================================================

 

The Loose Stones Report now allows you to select items based

 on the date they were received.

 

If you made use of the change in version 3.51 to default the customer

 search to Last Name or First Name, then when Customer X-Tra

 search opened up, it would not initially select the most recently

 used customer. This update resolves that issue.

 

If using a EMV/Chip-Enabled Genius terminal from Cayan, starting with

 this update, VJS will include the Terminal ID value that you

 enter in the Local Defaults Cont page of Preferences. Note that

 the regulations require that each of your computers should specify

 a different Terminal ID number - just digits - from 1 to 3 digits long.

 

In previous versions, the Discount Dollars column of the sales report

 and commission reports by clerk was not reduced in the case of

 split sales. Starting this version, the Discount Dollars figure

 on those reports will be divided in the case of split sales.

 

Version 3.51                                                  12/18/2015

===============================================================

 

In the Payment Amount box in the Sales screen, if you accidently

 swipe a credit card at that moment all the credit card data

 is fed as keyboard entries and the result can be problematic.

 Starting this version if an unusually high payment amount

 is entered, VJS stops and requests confirmation.

 

In certain search boxes if you type a name or word

 that is not found, then press the Backspace key to correct

 the word, previous versions would no longer do the drop-list

 lookup to help you find the item. In this version, pressing

 the Backspace after a misspelling will now continue the searching.

 

The Customer X-Tra Search screen defaults to "Automatic" search

 where it simultaneously searches by last name, first name,

 and spouse's name. This is often the most helpful, but if you

 find it helpful to specifically search just by the Last Name

 or just the First Name, you can change the search option.

 Starting with this version, if you change the sort option

 to Last Name or First Name, VJS will remember that preference

 for you. This preference can be separate for each computer.

 

The Credit Slip report now has the option to separately report

 the gift certificates and credit slips (from return sales.)

 This report is accessed via Options on the Credit Slip screen.

 

In the "Large" customer export file (with many columns)

 where you also include purchase information, previous

 versions didn't include the Spouse's Gender column and

 this update adds that in.

 

This update adds additional status checks for Genius terminals.

 [MWGXPING]

 

The Cayan / Merchant Warehouse report in previous versions

 would show Discover instead of MasterCard - this is resolved

 in this update.

 

Adds an additional option to prevent any change to the date

 in the sales screen (both the sale date at the top and

 the payment dates at the bottom.) To enable this add

 the keyword LOCKSALEDATE anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings

 in Preferences - and set a high security level for

 "Override Date Restrictions on Sales."

 

When processing credit cards, if the customer address screen

 has a foreign country the zip/post code is not sent to

 the credit card processor. (actually, the zip code 12345

 is sent which is recommended for foreign addresses.)

 

Version 3.504                                                  11/28/2015

===============================================================

 

Includes a resolution for a problem that could occur in certain

 circumstances when processing a negative credit card charge.

 

 

Version 3.503                                                  11/25/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Catalog program adds the 2015 Limited Edition Snowflake Ornament.

 

The Cash Register Paid-Out / Received screen and Z-Report Date

 now employ the Working Date if it's set.

 (see version 3.500 notes below for information on Working Date.)  

 

Version 3.502                                                  11/24/2015

===============================================================

 

The previous version caused the Wish-List/Quotes "receipts:

 to not print. This update resolves that.

 

The previous version could show an irrelevant disk error message

 when exiting VJS. This update resolves that.

 

In the previous version, if you didn't totally exit VJS

 in the evening, then the next day, Shopkeeper could

 default new sales to the previous day. This update

 prevents that. (Of course, it's still best to exit VJS

 before leaving.)

 

Version 3.500                                                  11/20/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program adds a further 5 new items        

 for including the Black Friday Wonderland charm and

 Heart of Mickey, etc. In addition, included in this update are 160

 images that were not previously available for some of the August

 through October        2015 drops (and a few older ones.)

 

Further to the new Inactive option for vendors (See version

 3.480 below) this version adds the option to print a

 report of *only* those vendors which are marked as inactive.

 

If you sometimes batch-enter sales or inventory at a later

 date, Shopkeeper will assume today's date for each entry and

 you have to be careful to re-date each entry to        match the

 transaction date. Trying to change the computer's date can

 cause all kinds of problems ( with Windows in general, not

 particularly with Shopkeeper.)

         Starting with this version, you can set a "Working Date"

 in the Local Defaults Cont page of Preferences to, say, three

 days ago. This way when you enter a stack of sales VJS will assign

 the 3-day old date to each sale        and all the corresponding payments.

 Note that every time you exit VJS the "Working Date" is set

 back to the actual date - it will *not* remember the Working Date

 from the previous VJS session.

 

When you create Web Export files of inventory items, you have the

 option of copying the related image files to a "staging" folder

 so you can upload them to the website. Previously this copy

 would copy all the related picture files (i.e. some inventory

 items could have several pictures.) Starting this version, you can

 select all pictures or just the first (default) picture or just

 the first two pictures.

                 

A recent update to VJS included a change such that declined

 credit card charge attempts can be reported. This update

 includes a change so that cash register reports in

 JS-Classic do not show an error message when encountering

 one of these decline entries.

 

Includes a fix for an erroneous message that could appear

 when doing a negative amount credit card charge.

 

Version 3.49                                                  10/30/2015

===============================================================

 

The addition of the Dept Code criteria to the Simple Layaway

 Report in version 3.480 (see below) had an unintended

 side-effect which was that sales without a Dept code

 would not show unless you typed ALL for the dept code

 to include.

 With this update, if you don't select anything in the

 Dept Code criterion then all sales will show.

 Note that if you specifically want to show *just*

 the layaways *without* a Dept code, type three

 dashes (---) for the dept code. Or, if you type

 three dashes and choose Exclude then the sales

 with no Dept Code will be excluded.

 

The customer reports / labels export feature includes

 an additional format "Large - Tab Delimited"

 which may be preferred by some mailing houses - especially

 if there are certain characters in the report which

 can "confuse" the CSV file format.

 

If, in Preferences, you choose the option to show the cost

 in code on the Inventory Status screen, you can make

 the inventory status screen show the value in numbers

 by double-clicking the cost box. So far, that is not new;

 what is new is that in previous versions, if you then wanted

 to edit the cost, you had to lock then unlock the screen's

 padlock. Starting this version, if the padlock were already

 unlocked then you won't have to lock and then unlock in

 order to change the cost. This applies to the Replacement Cost

 as well. Of course, users who don't have security clearance to

 the cost cannot use this option.

 

 

         [minor1000]

 

Version 3.485                                                  10/30/2015

===============================================================

 

This version includes a changed needed in VJS to handle

 a change in the Cayan / Merchant Warehouse mainframe

 for jewelers using the "MWSECURE4" processing option

 with the simple magnetic card readers.

 (Without this update, the Cayan processing screen has

 been recently taking up to 40 seconds before it will accept

 the card swipe or the keyed card number.)

 

The Pandora catalog program adds a further 51 new items        

 for Holiday 2015 including some sets.

 Only three previous items have new retail prices but there

 are several Cost updates to prior items.

 

 The new picture files are not yet included. You can import

 the catalog changes now in order to log in new shipments

 and a subsequent update will add the pictures

 

Each Major code can be assigned an extra sales receipt message

 to print with the sold items. For example watch major codes

 might have an extra message indicating "1 year in-store warrantee."

 

 This update adds optional extra sales receipt messages for

 Minor Class codes. E.g. certain minor codes for treated

 stones might require an additional disclaimer on the receipt.

 

The Price Tag Designer previously had the option to print

 the details from the loose stones detail page, but

 not from the grid-like Extended details page.

 Starting this version, the details from first two center

 stones and the first two side stones are available

 to Tag Designer.

 Since the palette is limited in length, to access these

 details you'll need to choose Modify Palette and deselect

 some tag fields in order to then select these addition

 stones details fields

 

 

 

Version 3.480                                                                   10/26/2015

===============================================================

 

You can now mark Vendors as Inactive. This is done

 on the Other Addresses and Notes page of Vendor Maintenance.

 Most lookup lists will not show Inactive vendors.

 

 Marking vendors as inactive has no effect on any inventory or payable

 or QB transfer. It simply removes them from certain vendor lookup lists

 so that they are less cluttered with essentially obsolete vendors.

 

 Since the X-Tra Search screen will not show the inactive

 vendors, the only way to retrieve such a vendor's profile

 is using the Search box at the top right of the

 Vendor Maintenance screen.

 

Credit slips can now have up to 16 digits for the

 number. This is useful in case you obtain gift cards

 that are pre-assigned long, credit-card style numbers.

 

Running customer reports based on purchase histories can

 be slower than other reports as the buying histories

 and customer files are reviewed. If your computer/network is

 particularly slow, a new option can help speed this

 report if you are considering sales only within the past

 2 or 3 years. The option does this by not looking in

 the Archives sales file.

 Choose Full Selection and set the Recalculate option to

 Yes - Current Sales File Only. Note: The current sales

 file typically contains the past 2 full prior calendar years

 plus the current calendar year.

 (of course, if your computer/network is very slow, you'd

 also want to have it improved.)

 

The Inventory Web Export can now include the Weight field.

 This is done via the Inventory by Style Report

 screen where you choose Web Export. To add this field

 to the export, also check the Config Export option.

 If a style has multiple Sku's, this weight field is not

 summed - it's the weight of one item.

 

When receiving inventory, the Size data field/box is now

 available directly on the inventory entry screen

 in the Inv. Details box at the bottom of the screen.

 I.e., you no longer have to click on the Extended Details

 button to pop up the full Inventory Status screen to

 access this field.

 

The Simple Layaway Report now lets you select results

 based on the sales Dept code; i.e. you can include or exclude

 sales with certain sales Departments codes. (Which is not

 related to the inventory major code/category.)

 

Choosing the "Delete" option at the top of the Inventory Status

 screen could in some cases generate an error message.

 (This was for certain cases where and old inventory list

 or a charm list was converted and imported into Shopkeeper.)

 That has been resolved in this update.

 

 

[repairupdateprivatedata/notsuccessfailed]        

 

Version 3.470                                                                   10/02/2015

===============================================================

 

The OpenEdge/XCharge/Accelerated payments credit card processing

 features have been updated for EMV/Chip credit cards.

 Chip-card receipts include more transaction codes - this is a

 en EMV requirement.

 Email Compulink if you need the details on this development.

 

You can now add images to the Appraisal Screen by drag-n-drop

 even when the appraisal is tied to a specific inventory Sku.

 (In previous versions drag-n-drop of pictures was possible

 for non-stocked items such as customers' own items, but

 appraisal images for in-stock Sku's had to be added via

 the inventory screen.)

 

The Appraisal Screen's "New" button at the top is now active.

 (in previous versions you could choose to add an appraisal

 only via the Xtra-Search screen.)

 

A new utility program is available to update the Endless

 line of charms and bracelets. In addition to being

 able to revise the prices of your existing inventory

 (due to price increases) the new program will

 add over 400 new items for Fall and Holiday 2015.

 

The Inventory Reports by Style and the Inventory Web Export

 now let you select items based on the Web Status code and

 based on the Web Category code. (These codes are added via

 the "Style Det." page of Inventory Status.)

 In the report screen, if you don't remember all the codes,

 you can view a list of possible codes by right-clicking the

 selection criteria box.        If you want to select only items

 with *no* web code, type --- (three dashes.)

 

 You might use Web Status codes or Web Category Codes as a

 way of including or excluding items from your web export -

 because you may not want to send all of your inventory to the website.

 Or the status code may be a 'flag' on the website to indicate

 something 'special' about the item such as 'Call to Verify Stock',

 or 'Extra Shipping Time Needed', etc. ( Your web person would

 have to display the appropriate words based on the code

 on each item.)

 

The Inventory Web Export in prior version had the option to include

 in the export file the Web Status and the Web Category

 but previously only the short, 5-character, version was

 included. Now, you can choose to include in the export file the

 short code version or the longer description of the Web Status

 and Web Category, or both.

 

When you select the "Lower" or "Least" On-Screen Graphics

 setting in Shopkeeper, a large number of "data selection"

 lists will now be black text on a white background

 instead of the usual coloring.

 

When you add unbilled repairs (i.e. repairs added not

 via the sales screen and which start out not linked to

 a sales ticket) the next repair number is suggested

 which you can accept or change. A new option allows you

 to *not* have a suggested number appear. This would be useful

 if you have pre-printed repair tickets that you may not

 use in strict sequential order and so you may not want to

 erase the suggested number before typing your own one.

 To activate this option add the keyword NOAUTOJOBNO anywhere

 in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

Choose Full Selection on the Checkbook Reports screen to access

 the new "Summary" option which results in reports showing

 just the subtotals and totals for shorter versions of the reports.

 The layout varies depending on the sort option selected.

 

 

 

 

 

Version 3.461                                                                   08/28/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program adds a further 58 new items        

 mostly Pandora Rose (tm) items but also some Disney

 Charms and some Limited Edition Bangles and

 Holiday 2015 items.

 

 [skipxreport]

Version 3.460                                                                   08/27/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog program adds the Olaf Disney Charm.

 

On the Repair and Custom job tracking screen the second

 page is for extended notes and this is accessed by

 clicking on the "Notes" tab at the bottom. Starting in

 this version this "Notes" tab at the bottom will include

 an asterisk ("Notes *") if there are actually notes to

 be seen. I.e. by having this indicator you can know

 when to check that page for extra information and when

 you don't have to bother.

 

On the Inventory Entry screen and on the Payables Entry

 screen, there is a new button "Checks Paid" which shows

 the list of checks paid against the selected payable.

 

The Cash Requirements (accounts payable) report now includes

 the Notes/Description of the invoice. This may help with

 payment scheduling information, etc.

 

The Return to Vendor screen would not previously save

 or print a return ticket if it had no items.

 It is now possible to add a ticket (with a description)

 and print it without having any items. E.g. you

 may want a return ticket even without previously having

 had an official sku number in stock.

 

One version of the Cash Register Payment Spreadsheet previously

 had some stray square brackets ] in the total line; these

 are removed in this update.

 

 

[u_findpx]

 

Version 3.450                                                                   08/20/2015

===============================================================

 

Some pictures from the August Pandora Collection were not

 previously linked to the new items in the inventory list

 To get those pictures linked, In the Pandora for VJS utility

 run the Start Updating option on the first page. There is no

 need to run the Add Catalog items if you've already done that

 in the last week.

 

 A late addition, the Disney Olaf charm data has not been

 received yet - but it should be available soon.

 

In Preferences you can specify that certain customer types

 will cause a pop-up alert when retrieving customers.

 In this update, the alert box will also show you the customer

 comments and extended notes which can provide you with more

 information about what special case you're being alerted to.

 

When you select the PDF version of reports, the same file name

 is used every time so that you don't end up with 1000's of

 different files. E.g. Inventory-Report.pdf. Starting this

 version, if you select a single vendor for the report, a

 vendor-specific file is created - e.g. Inventory-Report-ABC.pdf.

 This applies to inventory reports, itemized sales reports,

 checkbook reports and accounts payables reports. The Excel XLS

 files that these reports create will also have a vendor-specific

 name. This can help when you have to send data to several vendors

 of just their product.

 (Reminder - the XLS files are put in the VJS Reports folder which

 is on the Windows Desktop and the PDF files [if selected] are put

 in the PDF folder which is inside the VJS Reports folder.)

 

When you prepare checks using the Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks

 screen, you can now select a check number of up to nine digits

 compared to 8 digits maximum in previous versions.

 

The Itemized Sales Report format for the combination of sorted by

 location and summarized is now compatible with the PDF output

 option.

 The various layouts of Itemized Sales Report have been updated

 with enough room to show total costs at the end of the report

 above ten million. (e.g. this is useful if you run the report for

 many years.)

 

 

 

Version 3.442                                                             08/10/2015

===============================================================

 

The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with

 the latest August 2015 additions to their catalog. It also includes

 Canadian pricing for styles sold in Canada.

 

The format of the Payment Spreadsheet report has been adjusted        

 to have a smaller bottom margin so it may take fewer

 pages for busy days or for reports covering more than one day.

 

 

Version 3.441                                                             08/04/2015

===============================================================

 

Some copies of Version 3.440 yesterday would cause the Sales Screen

 to minimize to the Windows Task bar, requiring an extra

 click to make it appear. This update resolves that problem.

 

Yesterday's Version 3.440 contained various Pandora additions

 and price changes (see 3.440 information below for details)

 

 However, 46 more price changes were needed and which are included

 in this update. To get the price changes choose the "Start Updating"

 button on the first page of the Pandora Catalog program in order to

 reprice your inventory (and fix some descriptions.)

 

 [ftptimeout45]

 

Version 3.44                                                             08/03/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has

 two types of important update.

 

 *) The retail prices of about 220 *previous* items have been

 retroactively changed effective Monday August 3, 2015.

 These are mostly increases of $5 to $10.

 The catalog program will change them for you but if you need

 a list of specific items and your Pandora rep hasn't provided

 it, you can view the list of changes via the Compulink website:

 

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/misc/pandora-aug-2015-reprice-list.pdf

 http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/misc/pandora-aug-2015-reprice-announcement.pdf

 

 

 *) Note that you have to choose the "Start Updating" button on the first page

 of the Pandora Catalog program in order to reprice your inventory (and fix

 some descriptions.)

 

 *) The catalog program includes 100's of *new* items for Autumn

 and Holiday 2015 which will ship in August and October 2015 (but orders

 for these 'Drop 5' and 'Drop 6' can be placed with Pandora starting now.)

 This requires using the "Start Importing" button on the Add Catalog Items

 page of the Pandora Catalog program.

 

 * If you have not already updated the Pandora catalog since July 1, 2015

 you may need to request your updated maintenance plan code from Compulink

 - - -

 

A sale number change loophole has been found and closed.

 In previous versions it was found that retrieving an

 old quote sale, then making a change to it, then exiting

 by pressing the red [X] button then choosing the Delete

 option would reset the sale number sequence.

 (in order to recycle the number.) Starting this version, this

 combination will not reset the sale numbers if the change

 in number is more than 25. This is the same procedure that was

 in effect for when the Delete button (at the top of the

 sales screen) is used.

 

When running month-end Accounts Receivable statements and choosing

 the option to create PDF files (instead of printing to paper)

 some layouts did not print the account balance at the bottom.

 This has been addressed in this update.

 

Also on statements, some versions have the words "Due Date" at the

 bottom. Starting this version these words are removed if you

 haven't actually specified a due date. (where previously

 "Due Date" would print but there would be a blank by it.)

 

Some parts (The Description parts) of the side-by-side repair ticket layouts were

 not included in previous versions when creating the PDF version

 and this has been addressed in this update.

 In addition, since making a PDF version is primarily for emailing a

 copy to customers, a new full page (one per page) repair ticket layout has

 been added in this version. (emailing side-by-side duplicates is a bit odd.)

 

You can retroactively change the vendor code or invoice number of a

 vendor payable (vendor invoice) by clicking the padlock next to

 the vendor code or invoice number in the Inventory Entry screen.

 In some cases in previous versions this change could take a fair amount

 of time and this has been optimized and sped up in this update.

 

A further change in this area is that a loophole that could let you

 try to merge two vendor invoices together has been closed; trying

 to merge two inventory invoices would have been a problem.

 

The Itemized sales report has previously had a version

 which included only sold items that still have a quantity

 in stock. This version actually showed only items that

 specifically had just one (1) received and ignored

 any repair/service items [because it's a type of audit report]

 This update keeps that version and adds a similar version

 which includes any item with a quantity in stock.

 

The Itemized Sales reports with the Quantity Left option

 now can be combined with the Show Picture option.

 [The picture option still doesn't apply to *all* versions of

 the sales reports.]

 

In rare instances, when repair jobs entered unbilled (without a sales

 ticket) weren't saved, they may have remained in the 'scratch' pad

 where they could neither be retrieved nor removed. Starting this

 version, such jobs can be retrieved by typing the number in the

 repair screen and once retrieved they can be saved or deleted.

 

The TracTech P100 RFID tag printer layout screen has a fix

 such that any special font code entered before would

 not show in the designer when the layout was re-edited.

 

A minor change in the receive inventory from a purchase order makes

 the sequence easier when receiving a lower quantity than the

 quantity ordered. [previously you had to check the box on the left

 *before* selecting the quantity received - now you can select the

 quantity or check the box first or vice-versa.]

 

[salecomm/lcks/pmtck]

 

 

Version 3.43                                                             07/14/2015

===============================================================

 

A new program is now available to import the Alex and Ani

 Catalog including the style number, description, cost

 retail, UPC barcode number. The pictures are not

 currently available yet - probably later.

 You can also import the quantities if you request an

 Excel version of your invoice

 * ask Compulink for instructions and more details.

 

On the Major Class Codes maintenance screen

 the dollars and cents parts of the markup were

 available for editing in the Listing Page, but

 the cents were not in previous versions. (The

 cents were changeable only on the Pricing page)

 Starting this version the cents are also available

 on the listing page, which can make it easier

 to update the markup formulas for many major

 codes in succession.

 

In Return Inventory to Vendor, when you return an item that

 is *not* valued based on the weight, entering a weight

 to return in previous versions has not deducted that

 weight from inventory. This was by design because for

 non-weight valued items, the weight is often of a

 descriptive nature. However, starting this version if

 you enter a weight to return, it will deduct from the

 in-stock weight - but you'd have to manually select

 this weight to return because for non-weight-valued items

 the suggested return weight will be zero.

 

Previous versions would handle 30 different payment types

 and starting this version 100 payment types can be

 accommodated.

 

The appraisal screen now accommodates values up to $99,999,999.99

 whereas previous versions were limited to $999,999.99

 

 

 

Version 3.42                                                             06/26/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has

 been updated to include about a dozen new "Drop 4" items

 with Pets and Travel themes.

 

When searching by phone number in the Customer X-Tra Search

 screen the most common method is to type a 10-digit number

 without punctuation. It has also been possible to search

 for a 7-digit phone number if you add the dash in the middle.

 Starting with this update you can also search for a 7-digit

 number without typing the dash. This adds consistency

 between the 10-digit and 7-digit search method.

 

A new sales report layout groups all of the items by the customer

 so you can see the details of what each customer bought.

 Even if you don't apply commissions, this report is found

 in the Sales by Clerk - Commission Reports screen if you

 change the Sort option to "Customer"

 The clerk is shown next to each sale, but there is no subtotaling

 by clerk.

         

Vendors can now be assigned a sales commission rate which will

 override the clerk's standard rate (and even the major

 class code's special rate if one exists.)

 This is set on the Payment Terms screen of the vendor

 profile.

 

JS-Classic (DOS Shopkeeper) has a fix for a problem the commission

 area that could arise when retroactively adding items to

 prior sales.

 

Version 3.413                                                             06/16/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora catalog import program adds the 791359CZN spacer.

 

In the Sku line of the sales screen you can click on

 the in-line Options button and select Discount to

 pop up the Discount calculator. That was present before

 but the changes in this version are a) that you can use

 the Ctrl-D keyboard short cut from the price box to pop up  

 the Discount Calculator, b) In the discount calculator

 you can change or set the quantity of items. (previously

 the qty, if not 1, had to be set before invoking the

 Discount Calculator.)

 

Some users experienced a long delay when using the

 "Manager Override" feature from the sales screen.

 Some adjustments there appear to have eliminated

 those cases of slowness.

 

Some users experienced some screen "painting" issues

 recently. Some adjustments may help in those cases.

 

[single3411pr]

 

 

 

Version 3.411                                                             06/11/2015

===============================================================

 

What used to be identified as the Spouse's Work phone number box

 has been re-titled the Spouse's Mobile phone number.

 None of the information will change, this is just a recognition

 that this data field is much more likely to be used for a mobile

 phone than a work phone.

 

The PDF version of the inventory report with pictures didn't

 have the total cost value at the bottom in previous versions

 but that does appear starting with this version.

 

[dontpopdrawer]

 

Version 3.411                                                             06/10/2015

===============================================================

 

The Credit Slip / Gift Certificate Report now defaults to sorting

 by the customer last name (instead of by order entered.) It also

 now allows you to select which sort method will be used from:

 Last Name, Customer No., Credit Slip No., Date entered.

 

The % of Gross Profit column of the GMROI Report (sorted by Vendor)

 was misaligned in some previous versions and is adjusted

 in this update.

 

Version 3.41                                                               06/09/2015

===============================================================

 

There have been some layout changes on the Main Menu and

 File Center to streamline the titles and the background.

 

In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the default order of

 the columns has been adjusted so that less-used columns

 are further to the right making room for more useful columns.

 As before, you can resize X-Tra search and you can change

 the column widths if you want to hide or widen certain

 columns. If you want to set the columns back to the standard

 settings, right-click the mouse anywhere in the main customer

 grid.

 

When a phone number is typed in the Customer X-Tra Search screen

 VJS will now search the Spouse's Mobile phone number box in

 addition to simultaneously searching the other phone numbers.

 (home, work and primary mobile.)

 

 

When you modify items via the Relocate Inventory or the Deduct

 Inventory screen or Add to Existing Inventory screens, previous

 versions always dated the log file with the current date.

 Even though there was a date box, it was used only for searches

 and not applied to new "batches" of changes. Starting this version,

 you can set your own date (such as a prior date if needed) for

 new batches. This also applies to batches of inventory reductions

 and additions.

 

In previous versions, new customers were always assigned a number

 which was one higher than the largest customer number in your

 list even if that is beyond the sequence number you'd prefer to be

 at. Starting with this version the sequence can be set to a number

 lower than that (provided it's not used yet.)

 

 

Version 3.40                                                               05/18/2015

=======================================================

 

When adding sales the Open Credit Slips listing screen

 or the open Wish List screen may appear and these

 screens now show additional notifications about the

 customer such as missing address, missing email address,

 outstanding repair jobs.

 [Future versions may well have options for these Notifications

 to appear even for when neither the Open Credit Slip nor

 Wish List screens show.]

 

Inventory items have a new Size field. This can be useful if you

 want to keep the size out of the Style so that reports

 summarized by Style ignore the size. Also, you may want this

 information to be included when you export your inventory

 to a web site. When you export, even though there is just

 one record per style, there is new SizeList field which

 contains a list of all the different sizes available.

 The Size can also be added to the price tag layouts.

 If you add it to the tags,k you may also want to use one

 of the Message fields on the tag to say "Size" or "Sz" and

 put it just before the actual Size field.

 The new Size field doesn't currently appear on any inventory

 report,        but it could be made to appear if needed.

 

The Sales Summary Report: Compare Two Date Ranges has six

 sort/organize options. In previous versions, the last three

 listed (Vendor by Sales, Vendor by Profit, Vendor by Units)

 were not actually active, but starting this version they are.

 

The Return on Investment (GMROI) Reports were not compatible

 with the Save-to-PDF option in previous versions but

 starting with this update they are compatible with

 PDF output.

 

On the Time Card entry screen, when you type in initials

 previous versions would not update the box showing

 the full name. (That didn't affect the time cards, however.)

 Starting this version, the full name will be updated

 and shown when the initials are changed and this will

 avoid any confusion there.

 

A miscellaneous error message when editing and re-saving

 credit invoices from returned merchandise has been

 cleared up.

 

[invckcat3er]

 

Version 3.391                                                 05/06/2015

===============================================================

 

The Endless Jewelry import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has

 been updated. About 200 new items and images will be added.

 From the VJS Main Menu choose "Options", "Shopkeeper Utilities"

 From the utilities Toolbox select "On Web Site" and download

 u_endlessmay2015.  Email a request for more detailed instructions

 if needed.

 

The update earlier today made the an Options button in

 the sales inactive (the one near the Save button in the Sku Line.)

 This update resolves that.

 

Previous Single-Computer versions of VJS could not use

 the "Manager Override" feature of the sales screen.

 (network versions always could use this feature)

 Starting with this update, Single-Computer VJS

 installations also have access.

 

[kltv10]

 

Version 3.390                                                 05/06/2015

===============================================================

 

The Itemized Sales Report now has a layout which

 includes a column for the quantity remaining

 in stock next to each item. Choose Full Selection,

 then set the choice Qty Left Report to "Yes"

 

 This option used to appear but in previous versions,

 it would restrict the report to show *only * those sold

 skus that had one or more left in stock. This was a

 type of Audit report because if you stock only one of

 each Sku then any item you sell you would expect zero

 left in stock. This Audit version is still available

 if you choose "Yes (only Items w/Qty Left)

 

Categorizing a Wish List / Quote sale as Layaway or

 Special Order is "dangerous" because that makes

 it too easy to accidentally convert to an actual

 saved sale. They should be Cash Sale, because

 if you accidentally save as a sale, since there

 is no payment you'll be warned.

 

 In this update, saving a ticket as a Wish/Quote

 will automatically make it a Cash Sale type

 to avoid that problem when retrieving it later.

         

In previous versions on the Appraisal screen, if you drag

 and drop an image immediately after typing some text

 (with the cursor still in the text box) the text could

 be removed. That undesireable loophole has been resolved

 in this version.

 

When the X-Tra Search: Customer form appears, the most recently

 accessed customer name is pre-selected in the search box.

 This is almost always useful. However, if you prefer that

 X-Tra Search starts with an empty search box, you can

 activate a new bypass option starting with this version by adding

 the keyword XSBLANKCUSTOMER anywhere in the Miscellaneous

 Options box in Preferences.

 

The Main Menu has some font changes to use the more current        

 Segoe UI font.        If the Main Menu choices don't look clear

 you may        need to activate ClearType in Windows

 (Google: Activate ClearType Windows)

 If you have Windows XP, you may need to install all the

 Segoe UI fonts from Microsoft

 http://www.microsoft.com/typography/fonts/family.aspx?FID=331

 The change on the Main Menu is a just a "shot over the bow" because

 other screens will likely follow. So do resolve it soon if the text

 on the Main Menu buttons is not crisp.

 

Under rare circumstances, the Sales Screen may have inccured

 some "shifting up" of screen elements making the form

 unclear. A change has been made in this version to solve that.

 

[menutextsegoe/triplelineicon]

 

 

Version 3.380                                               05/01/2015

===============================================================

 

A new feature added is that when you add a new sale a

 a list will pop up showing all outstanding Wish List / Quote

 items for that customer. This can help save sales

 for wish list items that may have been forgotten.

 You can turn this feature off from the "Sales Cont." page

 of Preferences.

 

The feature to optionally *not* print the .00 cents

 part of prices is now active.

 You can activate this feature by choosing "More"

 on the Tag Designer / Layout screen

 or via the Inventory settings page in Preferences

 

The Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks screen previously

 would warn you if you were about to prepare a checks

 with a negative totals but it would allow you to

 override/allow it if you confirmed it.

 ( You may have your reasons e.g. when using a

 credit card as a bank account)

 However, previous versions of VJS would not continue the

 session unless at least one invoice had a positive payment.

 That limitation has been removed in this update.

 

 

[OrphanedSalesSkus]

 

 

Version 3.376                                                 04/21/2015

===============================================================

 

A (benign) error message during the backup procedure

 appeared in the previous version. This update

 resolves that problem.

 

 Note that the backup routine now

 backs up a useful station-specific settings file

 (visualjs.ini) both from the workstation and

 from the server.

 

Version 3.375                                                 04/20/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has

 been updated. The previous Spring update include about 60

 Disney collection items, this update adds 25 additional Disney items.

 

 Note that if you previously imported the Spring catalog last month

 you would have imported some of the Disney items and since then some

 costs have changed. In that case before importing the new items

 you'll also want to run the Start Updating step on the Update Existing Items

 page and *do check the Change Existing Costs option*

   (which is not normally pre-checked for you.)

 

The Inventory Snapshot Aging Summary report now has some

 additional measurements in the report footer.

         Average Cost of each item

         Average Retail of each item

         Unit-Weighted Overall average inventory age

         Cost-Weighted Overall average inventory age

         

The Alternative / Web Description area of inventory

 status now permits the description to be

 mixed upper and lower case even if you have

 chosen for the Regular inventory description

 (e.g. for tags) to always be upper-case

 

 

Version 3.370                                                   04/03/2015

===============================================================

 

This update fixes a formatting problem on the box for the

 Rep's name on the vendor profile screen.

 

On the Sales Screen, you can select the default sale

 type such as Cash Sale, Layaway, Special Order,

 Repair or House Charge.

 In previous versions, the default you selected

 applied to all computers on a network. Starting this

 version, you can select a different default sale type

 at each workstation. For example, your repair take-in

 computer could default to Repair type, while other

 computers default to Cash Sale.

 

When you delete a customer, VJS will require that you

 close the charge account (if it exists) first.

 This is to prevent orphaned charge accounts.

 

The invoice number column on the accounts payable

 cash requirements report has been widened to reduce

 the number of cases where the invoice number wraps.

 

When printing Layaway Statements, under very infrequent

 circumstances, the sales for some customers would

 appear twice. This has been resolved in this update.

 

Version 3.360                                                   03/27/2015

===============================================================

 

If you have network version of VJS, on the sign-in screen

 you can now select a different default clerk/ID at each

 computer. Previously there was one default that applied

 to all computers. As before, to select the default

 Clerk/ID, choose "More" on the Sign-in screen,

 highlight the desired default clerk and check the

 "Default to This Name" box in the lower half of the

 screen then choose "Save Changes."

 

Version 2.88 (see below) added the option to store .DOC,

 .XLS and .PDF files in addition to the more usual

 image files (such as .JPG) to inventory and repairs.

 This update makes the same option available for

 appraisal images ( was not only incompletely available before)

 

When entering new inventory or editing items from

 the Inventory Status screen, an alert will show

 for any item that has a blank inventory location code.

 (This warning will not appear if you have chosen, in Preferences,

 to not enter inventory locations.)

 

When the Customer Profile screen includes a Country, the U.S. phone number

 formatting will not be enforced. I.e. you could put an international

 phone number such as +52 4 784 571

 The same change applies to the Vendor Profile screen.

 

When you print price tags it has been possible to change the

 price printed on the tag without changing the price

 in the inventory file (this is subject to security

 restrictions, of course.)

 Starting with this update, it is also possible to

 change the costcode that prints on the tag without

 affecting the inventory file cost. (this requires

 security level 10) Note that this option doesn't verify

 that you enter a valid cost code. I.e. you could even

 simply add extra letter codes to the normal cost code

 to indicate "something special" to the sales people.

 

From the Inventory Status Screen, you can access the Vendor

 Profile screen via the green "go" arrow by the vendor code.

 Previously this access method did not check security settings.

 Starting this version, access to the Vendor Profile screen

 from here checks the same security settings as needed

 to get to the vendor Profile screen via the Maintenance Menu.

 

When adding physical inventory counts with a wand RFID reader,

 duplicate reads of the same Sku are usually ignored

 and added to an error list.

 Starting this version, you can allow multiple reads of

 the same Sku by adding the keyword RFIDMULTIPLESOK anywhere

 in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

Misc: a stray  "]" has been removed from the subtotal lines

 of the Payment Spreadsheet reports.

 

 

Version 3.350                                                   03/11/2015

===============================================================

 

The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has

 been updated. There are two aspects to this:

 *) The Disney Collection with about 60 new items and images

         has been added. ( Merchandise shipments expected April 2015)

 *) The prior catalog update with about 300 new items for spring 2015 and

         Mothers Day 2015 contained some incorrect descriptions. So, if you

         imported that previously, you will want to run the "Update" step of

         the Pandora catalog program to correct the descriptions. (in addition

         to running the "Add Catalog Items" step for Disney)

 

 See the Version 3.10 & 3.11 notes below on new options for

 automatically logging in quantities from a Pandora Excel invoice file.

 

Some computers need to use a "simplified interface" to

 webcams if they can't handle the "advanced interface".

 The usual way to use the simpler approach is to add

 the keyword ALTWEBCAM1 anywhere in the Miscellaneous

 Options box in Preferences. However, this affects

 all computers on a network.

 In this version, there is a new This-Computer-Only

 version of the Miscellaneous Options on the Local

 Defaults Cont. page of Preferences. If you add

 the ALTWEBCAM1 keyword on this page, the change will

 affect just this computer, and the other computers

 can continue to use the regular (advanced) interface

 for webcams.

 

When paying invoices payable, the current version will

 warn you, before the checks are generated, if any

 of them would result in a negative total.

 

When editing old, outstanding layaways, cancelling them

 and issuing a credit slip for the initial down-payment,

 previous versions would assign the initial date to the

 credit slip. The current version will assign today's

 date.

 

In update version 3.33 when the price or cost or MSRP

 on the Inventory Status screen is changed, VJS would check

 the inventory for similar items and prompt if all Sku's for that

 style should be updated. (see 3.33 notes below for more details.)

 However, if you changed the Price *and* the Cost *and* the MSRP,

 that would be 3 separate prompts.

 In this update, whichever answer you choose for the Price

 update will be assumed for the Cost and MSRP, to reduce

 the number of on-screen prompts.

 Further, if you *never* want to be prompted to possibly

 update all Sku's of the same style, you can add this key word

 anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences

         SKIPISSKUSTYLEUPDATEPROMPT

 

 

Version 3.34 included significant improvements in the Customer X-Tra Search

 screen (see 3.34 below) but had a flaw in that if you checked the box

 to see only those customers with an in-house accounts receivable account,

 it sometimes also showed customers without an in-house account.

 That has been resolved in this update.

 

[dropn/aprefix]        

 

Version 3.343                                                   03/01/2015

===============================================================

 

Adjustment to the Merchant Warehouse reports by Date.

 In previous versions the last date of the date

 range you selected was not included. That problem

 is resolved now.

 

 

Version 3.342                                                   02/26/2015

===============================================================

 

The last update caused layaway receipts to incorrectly

 show a zero balance.

 

The updated customer search features introduced in

 Version 3.34 failed with names including apostrophes

 such as O'Brien. This update resolves that problem.

 

Version 3.34                                                   02/23/2015

===============================================================

 

The Customer X-Tra Search screen has been updated to

 greatly facilitate searching by customer names.

 

 Previously, you  could search by first name or last name or

 spouse's name, however, the search results were not altogether

 complete. For example, if you searched for DAVID, VJS would have

 probably found customers with last DAVID and DAVIDS and

 DAVIDSON but it wouldn't *also* show you customers whose

 first name was DAVID unless you specifically switched from

 Automatic Search to First Name Search, or if there were no

 customers with last name DAVID.

 

 Similarly, if you searched for SMITH,JOAN, VJS would have

 shown you Joan Smith, but wouldn't show the customer record

 Bob Smith with Joan in the spouse's first name box.

 

 Starting this version, all combinations of customer last name,

 first name, spouse's last name and spouse's first name will be

 searched and all matching results will be shown. In addition, the

 Last,first search method will work whether or not you put

 a space after the comma.

 

An additional 3-part repair ticket layout has been added.

 This one is for the Impact Specialties Repair Card, part

 number #LRC. It's heavy paper/thin card and offers the

 same three (differently sized) repair tickets as the

 other 3-part tickets. The difference here is that the

 entire sheet is letter-sized which makes it easier to

 load in printers. Because it's a little taller than the

 previous repair tickets, the top inch or two tears

 off. These stubs are printed on and so they can

 serve as mini-repair tickets. e.g. they can easily

 be stored in the wallets of customers.

 

A new optional feature will add to a customer's notes area

 a log of emails sent (the subject line, date and time)

 This can be turned on in the Customer page of Preferences.

 

A small adjustment to the "Require Customer Email" feature

 stops VJS from asking for the email address on a new

 customer before you have even filled in the customer name.

 Now it will wait until you actually continue to the sales

 screen before checking and warning about a blank email field.

 [see version 3.13 notes below for more details on that

 feature.]

 

Adjustment to image backup routine needed in case there is a

 space in the folder name. (data path)

 

Version 3.33                                                       02/12/2015

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has

 been updated with about 300 new items for spring 2015 and

 Mothers Day 2015 including images. This is beyond the additions

 for Valentines 2015

 

 See the Version 3.10 & 3.11 notes below on new options for

 automatically logging in a Pandora invoice from an Excel file

 

In X-Tra Search, the quantity column in the list of items doesn't

 normally appear, a) because there's not much room, b) because

 the quantity is overwhelmingly just 1.  Starting this update

 if you widen the X-Tra Search screen sufficiently, then the

 Quantity column will now appear.

 

The inventory report has a new sort option "Major-Style" which

 has the primary sort and grouping by major class code and

 within each class code sort by vendor style number.

 

When you change the cost or MSRP of an item in the Inventory Status

 screen, starting in this update, VJS will check if you

 have other Sku's of the same style number (still in stock)

 and will ask you if you want to change the MSRP price

 and/or the Wholesale Cost of just this one Sku or all Sku's

 with the same style. This can help when you receive new prices

 from your suppliers or when you change prices due to gold-price

 fluctuations.

 [This is analogous with the selling price feature change in

 Version 3.325 below - but this change adds MSRP and Wholesale Cost.]

 

 

Version 3.325                                                       02/07/2015

===============================================================

 

Jewelers using the encrypted credit card reader for Merchant

 Warehouse (now called Cayan) credit card processing recently

 noticed that it was necessary to click the processing

 screen before the card could be swiped. Compulink assumes

 this was a change in the Cayan computer, but this VJS

 update adds an "auto-click" so you won't need to do that.

 Another minor change is that you can Maximize the Merchant

 Warehouse processing screen. This may be useful, if you ever

 need to key a credit card and some of the help bubbles (e.g. for

 Zip Code) are not fully visible.

 You can even make this screen automatically maximize, in case

 you decide it's "cleaner" to hide everything else on the monitor

 until the card is processed.

 This option is activated by adding the keyword MAXCCPROCESSING in

 Miscellaneous Options in Preferences

 

When you change the selling price of an item in the Inventory Status

 screen, starting in this update, VJS will check if you

 have other Sku's of the same style number (still in stock)

 and will ask you if you want to change the retail price

 of just this one Sku or all Sku's with the same style.

 This can help when you receive new prices from your suppliers

 or when you change prices due to gold-price fluctuations.

 

Certain 'bulk' inventory screens such as Return to Vendor

 Physical Inventory , Relocate, Deduct or Add to Inventory,

 could occasionally be extremely slow for some users.

 It was found that a "timing" issue would affect a small

 number of computers, probably if the computer and the

 network had a particular speed. This is expected to

 be resolved for all computers starting with this update.

 

 

 

Version 3.321                                                       01/30/2015

===============================================================

 

The optional Endless Jewelry  Import program has been updated

 with a large number of new items including the

 Valentines 2015 items and gift sets - including images.

 [contact us for an updated Maintenance Plan Code

 and instructions.]

 

 

In the Time Card screen in older versions, a certain uncommon

 keyboard sequence would result in two copies of the timecard

 entry being saved. This is resolved in this update.

         

 [trackroa][picomp]

 

 

Version 3.32                                                       01/22/2015

===============================================================

 

The option to print the A/R account balance on sales

 receipts (for customers with an in-house charge account)

 has long been available. In previous versions, printing

 the balance would prevent the customer phone numbers from

 printing. Now, the A/R balance and the phone numbers

 can both print on receipts.

 

A couple more reports were found that were not optimized in

 previous versions for the save-as-PDF output option.

 The Itemized Sales Report summarized by major code and

 the Return on Investment Report by Major Code.

 Those reports layout have been updated now.

 

The accounting P&L report previously did not show the

 gross sales figure lines - just the net sales.

 Starting this update, the Gross sales (merchandise

 and service) lines will appear.

 

From the Inventory Status screen, by the invoice number

 there is a green "drill down" arrow to bring

 up the payables/inventory entry screen for that

 invoice. If you have some items without an invoice

 [such as bead or charm inventory entered without

 a payable] in previous versions, clicking that arrow

 would *create* a payable which was awkward. Starting

 with this invoice, an alert message will appear instead

 in such a case.

 

The Add to Existing Sku Number screen and the Deduct from Inventory

 screen now require that a Reference be entered. Previous

 versions didn't require this, which would then make

 it difficult to re print a list. Further, having no

 reference in the items' adjustment activity log isn't desirable.

         

When you run the Itemized Sales Report, in addition to getting the

 report formatted for printing, an Excel XLS file of the results

 is created in the VJS Reports folder. That has always been the case;

 what's new in this update is that in addition to the Selling Price column

 there are the columns Retail (which is your ticketed selling price) and

 the MSRP (the optional suggested price of the manufacturer.)

 These additional fields can enable you to do further calculations in Excel

 involving discounting.

 

 [assb/wt; ]

 

Version 3.31                                                       01/09/2015

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 with a large number of new items including the

 Valentines 2015 items and gift sets - including images.

 

 [currently just 2 images are not yet available: USB792900, USB794018]

 

 This is for Maintenance Plan subscribers and you'll

 need to email us to request an updated "Maintenance Plan Code."

 

 See the Version 3.10 & 3.11 notes below on new options for

 logging in a Pandora invoice from an Excel file

 

-->        It's unrelated to the Pandora update, but note that if

 you have not done a Shopkeeper update yet in 2015

 then your first update in 2015 may take a couple of

 extra minutes - see the Version 3.30 notes below.

 

 

When you run a Cash Requirements report, an Excel XLS

 version of the results is put in the VJS Reports folder.

 What's new in this update is that two extra columns

 are included: Freight & Other Expense.

 

 

In previous versions, in the itemized inventory report by Sku number

 the Quantity Ordered and Quantity Received columns were not

 included in the send-to-PDF version of the report.

 That has been resolved in this update.        

 

 

 

Version 3.301-2                                                   01/07/2015

===============================================================

 

Minor adjustments relating to the Data Structure update

 of version 3.30.

 

In the Physical Inventory Exception reports in previous versions

 certain columns were not completely compatible with the

 send-to-PDF option. That has been resolved in this update.

 

[Physical Inventory 'Force' utility updated to support

 Vendor selection in conjunction with Location selection.]

 

Version 3.30                                                   01/05/2015

===============================================================

 

 * Note For All Users

 ---------------------

         Unlike most updates, this update will require a

         "Data Structure Update" which means that a

         backup will be requested first. For those running

         a network version of VJS, all computers will need

         to be out of VJS while the first computer runs this

         backup and Structure Update. After this first computer

         runs the update, all additional stations must also run

         the update. However, the additional stations*can* run the

         update while others are in VJS.

 

         I.e. This update might require a few extra minutes compared

         to 'regular' updates.

         ------------

 

Adding pictures via webcams.        

 This update has an update to the "engine" used for capturing

 images from webcams. This should be better for most computers.

 Unfortunately, there may be some computers which don't "get along"

 with the new webcam interface. ( Which ones is impossible to predict

 given the infinite combinations of Windows versions, Windows patches,

 installed software, installed hardware, installed drivers. etc.)

 

 If your computer doesn't "like" the new webcam update, let us know.

 As a workaround you can revert to a simpler webcam engine by adding

 the word ALTWEBCAM1 anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

 It's possible that you already reverted to the simpler webcam engine

 in the past. In that case, we suggest you see if the new webcam engine

 works for you now. To do that, *remove* any ALTWEBCAM word from

 the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

 

When locating customers in Customer X-Tra Search, there are

 several methods of searching for customers (phone, last name,

 first name, customer number, etc.) There are two search improvements in this update:

 

 When searching by last name        *and* first name you now would type

 SMITH,ZACH *without* typing a space after the comma. In Previous

 versions it was necessary to type the space after the comma which might

 not have been intuitive. This is useful when searching with common

 names such as Smith        or Fernandez.

 

 When searching by customer number a problem in the past has been that

 you might type a number such as 2125 and Shopkeeper would favor

 the phone number lookup and show you a customer with a 10-digit phone

 number starting with (212) 5 or a 7-digit phone number starting with 212-5

 In this version, adding a period after the number, e.g. "2125." forces Shopkeeper

 to search by customer number.

 

 

 

Version 3.14                                                   12/31/2014

===============================================================

 

The security settings for the Customer Profile screen have been updated.

 In previous versions you could prevent access to the

 customer screen but if you granted access it was always for both

 lookup *and* making changes. Starting this version, you can set

 one security settings for lookup and a different (e.g. higher)

 required level in order to update the customer profile.

 

Some reports or tickets have both a full-sheet layout for

 letter-size paper and a 40-column layout for a roll-of-paper

 receipt printer. Sending a 40-column layout to a letter-size

 printer or vice-versa will cause an error 1298.

 Starting in this version most inappropriate combinations

 are detected before printing and a clearer warning is displayed

 rather than a semi-obscure error.

 

 

The "Hand-check" feature (writing a check *not* against an invoice

 payable) previously did not use the alternative "Remittance Address"

 which is available in the Vendor profile screen. This is resolved

 in this update.

 

The checkbook report now allows you to search / filter by a specific

 invoice number. This way you can more quickly identify when and

 with which check you paid a suppliers invoice.

 Choose Full Selection from the checkbook report        screen to see

 this new option.

 

If an inventory item is deleted via the "Inventory Status" screen

 starting this version, the Sku will be blanked, but not 100% removed

 and an audit entry will be added to note when it was "deleted."

 This matches the behavior when you delete an item via the

 invoice entry screen.

 

 

 [prtqt/dtinvrec1]

 

Version 3.133                                                   12/24/2014

===============================================================

 

On sales receipts payments are identified as "Cash", "Check"

 or "Charge." Starting this version, the word "Charge" is

 removed because when you add other payment types, such as

 Scrap Gold or PayPal, they may not be really "charge."

 Actual Charge payments will still look ok because they'll

 include the card type such as Visa.

 

A miscellaneous error situation has been resolved - one that

 occurred after trying to add a new gift certificate

 with a previously used number.

 

Version 3.132                                                   12/19/2014

===============================================================

 

When issuing a gift certificate, if you fail to enter

 the payment a warning message now appears.

 Further, a new security option in the Sales Security

 page of Preferences can allow you to disallow

 ignoring the payment (e.g. for donated or promotional

 gift certificates.)

 

You can add an extra sales receipt message based on

 the type of item sold - which is added via the major class codes

 screen. This feature has been available before but what's

 new in this update is that the message can be

 upper and lower-case where previous versions made

 it upper-case only, so now it can look better.

 

 

Version 3.131                                                   12/16/2014

===============================================================

 

 

To help with busier computer networks where other computers

 may momentarily lock some data files, VJS will now

 wait another couple of seconds before giving up.

 [The delay can also be customized with REPROCESSxx

 in Miscellaneous Options - ask for details if needed.]

 

Fixed miscellaneous error message when selecting amount

 different tag layouts.

 

The inventory adjustment report resulted in an error message        

 in rare circumstances - which is resolved in this update.

 

Version 3.13                                                   12/11/2014

===============================================================

 

Email marketing is very important for many jewelers

 so a new option on the Customer page of Preferences allows

 you to show a warning whenever you pull up a customer

 whose email address is not recorded. You can choose

 option S to just Suggest that an email address be filled

 in, or you can choose option R to Require that an email

 address be filled in.

 Either way, if a customer declines to give you one, you

 can stop that prompt reoccurring for individual customers by entering

 an invalid email address such as "N/A" or "None" or "Decline."

 

From the Vendor X-Tra Search screen, a list of prior invoices

 shows at the bottom left corner. You can double-click

 a merchandise invoice to select and edit that invoice.

 With this update, this "drill down" feature also

 works for non-inventory payables.

 

 

Version 2.97 added the feature to print price tags based

 on the list of inventory additions made via the

 "Add to Existing Sku Numbers Screen."

 However, the feature could be used only before you saved

 the list, not later on.

 This update adds the ability to print the tags retroactively.

 Open the Add to Existing Sku Numbers Screen, type in

 the original Reference/Explanation and original Date

 and click on "Tags" at the top of the screen.

 

The Repair details screen has a Parts Used tab. Currently

 this doesn't allow *adding* parts but it does show

 the list of Sku's / parts that were added via JS-Classic.

 [a future update can be expected to allow adding parts.]

 

 [CrSlip]

 

Version 3.122                                                   12/03/2014

===============================================================

 

Some previous versions would not let you manually modify

 or delete the list of image files associated with an

 inventory (or repair item). This has been resolved in

 this update.

 

 From Inventory Status, double click the image zone

 to pop-up the Picture Manager. From there, click on

 "Picture Information" where you can directly edit the list

 of pictures linked to the current item.

 

From the Checkbook entry screen, the look-up list

 for the vendors had problems in the last update.

 That has been resolved. In addition, there are now

 more columns in the vendor list which may help

 you select the right vendor in cases of similar or

 same names (i.e. the phone and account number show now.)

 

The Customer Reports and Labels screen allows you to select

 customers based on purchases - which you can fine tune

 by date, major code, etc. A new criteria now available

 is the sale location. I.e. you can select only those

 customers who have purchased from location, say, CC.

 

In previous versions, the Credit Card Payments Report

 could show you multiple subtotals for one card type

 if you had entries with different cases - e.g.

 some with VISA and some        with Visa.

 Starting this version the case will be ignored

 so such variations would be subtotaled together as the same card.

 

 

 

Version 3.121                                                   11/29/2014

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 with a small number of new items - some additional size 48

 items plus a Holiday 2014 ornament, including images.

 

 

 * Note that there is no pre-defined major code for the

 ornament so on the import page select a major code for

 "Pandora Other"

 

 

The Customer Reports and Labels screen has always had the

 option to create export files for use with mail-merge,

 mailing houses, email marketing.

 

 "Constant Contact" is a commonly use email marketing tool

 and we found it had difficulty importing the Shopkeeper

 export file. In this update the format of the "Export List Small CSV"

 file has been adjusted so that it is more easily imported

 into Constant contact.

 

 In addition it combines the first name and spouse's first name

 into a single field which can help with other mailings in addition

 to Constant Contact.

 

 In addition (not for Constant Contact) the Salutation column in

 this export list now will include the spouse's last name if present,

 e.g. John Smith & Jackie Jones. This can help improve formatting

 other mailings performed with the Export file.

 The Carrier route was removed from this format too.

 

 If you happen to need the old format - say your mail merge depends on

 the old layout - you can still access that by choosing the

 "Export List Small Orig."

 

 

[TracTechP100]

 

Version 3.12                                                     11/14/2014

===============================================================

 

In the Customer Mailings / Reports screen you can export

 the resulting customer list in a few ways. In this

 update the additional export option "Export List Small TAB"

 creates a "Tab Delimited" file called custlist.txt in

 the VJS Reports folder. This was added in case your

 mail house or email program (such as Constant Contact)

 has difficulties reading the other formats.

 

 

On the repair screen, the Cost box will not appear if

 the logged in person does not have access to view

 inventory costs. Starting this version, there is a

 separate security setting for the cost on the repair screen.

 This way, you can grant access to the repair cost box

 but disallow viewing the inventory cost.

 This option is on the "Other Security Settings" page

 in Preference.

 

In the sales screen, the "New" button at the top would simply

 clear the screen without any questions which could be awkward

 if it were clicked accidently after entering 10 Sku's.

 Starting this version it will ask what you want to do with

 the current sale if there is one on-screen already.

 

From the Vendor Maintenance screen, a list of payables shows

 on the "Buying History" page. In previous versions

 you could retrieve a particular payable by double-clicking

 it in the grid - but only for merchandise invoices.

 Starting this version you can also retrieve non-merchandise

 invoices this way.

 

On the Cut Checks for Accounts Payable, a running total appears

 at the bottom of the Selected Net Payment column. In previous

 versions if you resize this screen (e.g. to see more columns or

 more rows) this total would be hidden. That has been resolved

 in this update.

 

The program module which imports the Endless bead and bracelet

 catalog and imports the quantity on the Endless invoices

 has been updated to include the option for Canadian pricing.

 [This option is on the Misc page of the import program.]

 

[reporthist]

 

Version 3.11                                                     10/29/2014

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 so that it will import new items for Fall / Holiday 2014

 into Jewelry Shopkeeper, including images

 

 * See Version 3.10 for information on the new option

 to read in the Pandora invoice Excel file.

 to update quantities in Shopkeeper by

 

 

* New option for Processing Pandora Invoices *

 

After you have updated the Pandora Catalog in VJS

 many jewelers received the inventory not via

 the Receive Invoice screen (which creates new Sku

 numbers even for re-orders), but via the screen

 "Add to Existing Sku Numbers."  This is fast

 because you can scan the Pandora Barcodes.

 

 A new feature can make it even faster by reading in

 the Pandora invoice file. Recently it has become possible

 to ask your rep for an Excel version of your invoice.

 

 Save your Excel file to the computer, then from the

 Add to Existing Sku Numbers screen, add a Reference such as

 "Invoice 12345" and choose "Ok - Edit List"

 then click on Import a List, select "A List of Style Numbers"

 

 If you don't yet have an Excel version of your invoice, but you

 have a Word (.DOCX) file, you can copy n paste the Shipped and

 Style columns from the grid in the Document to an Excel file

 (then your Style and Shipped will likely be in columns B & A

 rather than the expected E & C

 

 

A new option available on the Repairs page of Preferences

 allows you to require that the Insurance Value box

 of repairs be filled in.

 

A new security option on the Security Inventory page of

 Preferences allows you to limit the ability to delete

 inventory and repair pictures.

 

 

 

 

 

Version 3.10                                                     10/27/2014

===============================================================

 

 

Question boxes in VJS ask you a question such as "Add

 as Last Name or as First Name." If any of these

 got covered by another window or another program

 in previous versions, it could appear that Shopkeeper

 was locked as you couldn't see what it was waiting for.

 Starting in this update if such a question box were

 covered it would pop itself to the 'front' after

 15 seconds so you'd be sure to see it.

 

When you choose "Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks" you

 can now select the vendor by name or by vendor code

 where in previous versions you could select only

 by vendor code.

 

In the sales screen, you can change the tax rate for

 the sale by choosing Options (at the top) Sales

 Tax Rates.

 A new option here in this version is the option

 "Mark All Items as Non-Taxable"

 Which un-checks the tax box on all items on a sale.

 This would only be worthwhile for a sale with many items.

 

 The effect is roughly the same as changing the tax

 rate for the sale to %0, but it's  a bit different

 in that a) you visually see the tax boxes next to

 each item unchecked, b) if there were a sale of, say,

 20 items, but 1 should be taxable, you would want to

 mark all items non-taxable, but you could check one

 item as taxable.

 

 

 

Version 3.00                                                     10/21/2014

===============================================================

 

For jewelers who have the Accounting Module of Jewelry

 Shopkeeper, version 3 adds a number of important checkbook

 functions that were previously available in JS-Classic.

 On the Accounting Menu there is now the option

 "Checks, Deposits, GJ Entries." Unlike the previously

 available option "Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks"

 The new screen can create "hand-checks" 0 check entries

 that are *not* written against pre-recorded payables.

 

 This same screen provides access to searching, editing

 deleting any checkbook or GJ entry and also printing

 checks.

 

 The Reconcile Checkbook to Statement option is the tool

 used to verify bank statements against Shopkeeper records.

 

 (These were previously in beta for a few weeks and are

 more officially released in version 3.)

 

 

* * * Endless Jewelry Charms and Bracelet Import * * *        

 

A new program module enables you to import the new Endless Jewelry

 catalog of bracelets and charms. All the costs, retails,

 descriptions and images can be imported saving a lot

 of data-entry time.

 

 In addition, this program can save you additional time by

 importing the invoices from Endless. This logs in

 the correct quantity of each item.

 

 This is available for subscribers to the Maintenance Plan.

 Email Compulink for your access code and instructions.

 

 

The Pandora Catalog import program now has the option for

 the Canadian Dollar price-list.

 

The Sales Summary - Compare Two Date Ranges report

 has a number of sort options including grouping by

 vendor, sorting by name alphabetically or grouping by vendor

 sorting by vendor code, or sorting by the most to least

 sales or most to least units or most to least profit etc.

 

 The sort selection is now indicated in the report title, unlike

 in previous versions. The change helps better understand which

 report version you're looking at.

         

 

For jewelers who use Merchant Warehouse integrated credit card processing

 at point of sale, VJS now sends just the last eight characters / digits

 of the sale number in case you ever have a nine-character sale

 number. This is because M.W. will not accept more than eight characters

 and a nine-digit number would cause processing problems.

 

         

Version 2.983                                                     10/16/2014

===============================================================

 

Many data entry fields in Shopkeeper have "Managed Lookup Lists"

 where you define the list of selections. Some of the

 selections can include long text such as for repair descriptions

 appraisal wording or messages for SMS texting. In previous

 versions, these text selections would be forced to be

 upper-case only if you have selected in Preferences that

 customer names be upper-case only.

 Starting this version the look-up text and messages can

 be mixed-case even if customers are upper-case only.

 

 

A program module to identify possible duplicate customer entries

 has been added to the utilities area.

 

 

Version 2.982                                                     10/13/2014

===============================================================

 

When typing a vendor code or major code and other criteria

 for reports, a list of options appears. In previous versions

 you had to type quite fast e.g. S-T-U quickly in succession.

 If you typed slowly then when you got to the T the list

 would jump to the T's (ditto the U)

 Starting this version, you don't have to type such

 selections quite as fast - now up to 2 seconds between keys.

 [if this change doesn't work for your typing style or you prefer

 a different inter-key delay limit, request instructions from Compulink]

 

When you search for a customer by phone number and Shopkeeper

 finds that customer via an Internet search, previous

 versions would fill in the State of the address in

 mixed case like Ny instead of NY This update resolves that,

 making it upper-case only.

 

The printed report from the Relocate Inventory screen

 didn't print the entire reference No./ ID in previous

 versions if the ID was long. This version will

 print the entire ID.

 

For clarity, the wording of the title of the printed Sales Payment Spreadsheet

 has been changed to 'Sales Payment Spreadsheet.'

 (previously it read 'Posting Report to Match X Report')

 

During inventory entry, in each line of the grid of all the items

 there is an 'Options' button. In previous versions you had

 to click the small drop-arrow to the right of the word 'Options'

 but starting this version you can click either the arrow

 or the word 'Options' which makes it easier.

 

When using a credit slip that is under the name of a different customer

 you have to type the slip number. It is intended that you

 press <Enter> or click the green 'Go' button to search and

 the OK button is to continue once you have found and selected

 a slip. Starting this version, you can use the OK button to

 both 'Go Search' and to select from the list. This can avoid

 the case where typing a number and clicking OK did nothing in

 previous versions.

 

Starting this version it is now possible to record a cash register

 "Paid Out" for $0. Of course, it's not a real paid out, but it's

 a way to enter short comments on the Cash Register Journal

 Reports and on the Sales Payment Spreadsheet

 

 

 [emptyclerksale / editafterfindck / ckvencode / ckprintreset ]

 

Version 2.98                                                     09/23/2014

===============================================================

 

The Inventory Search screen is now customizable.

 You can change the height and width in order to view

 more rows of items and more columns of data fields.

 Further, you can move the columns by dragging the heading

 of each column. For example, you could move the More

 Description column next to the Description column.

 

 The changes you make are remembered for the next time.

 

 In addition, a new column, the location, is now viewable

 in the Inventory Search screen.

 

 FYI, the Inventory Search screen is the one which appears

 when you click the "drop arrow" by the Sku number box

 on various screens including the Inventory Status screen

 and the sales screen. [or when you type an incomplete

 Sku number]

 

The repairs detail screen will now hide the job cost when

 security settings restrict viewing the inventory cost.

 

In previous versions, certain combinations of criteria for the

 customer special event report (e.g. selecting a specific event

 code and a month and a year) could bypass some customers.

 That has been resolved in this update.

 

[bkrec, chg ckno]

 

Version 2.973                                                     09/05/2014

===============================================================

 

In the Charge Account profile screen, you can choose

 for certain accounts to be skipped during month-end

 statement printing.

 In previous versions, deactivating statements

 for one customer could also stop the next customer

 in the list from having a statement printed.

 This has been resolved in this update ]

 

For multi-computer versions of Shopkeeper an new option

 can do more frequent checking for changes

 made by other computers. This is to ensure that

 each computer is seeing the most current data.

 

 However, since this can slow down certain networks

 it is NOT the default setting.

 If you want to try this setting, add the keyword

         REFRESH0,-1  

 anywhere in miscellaneous Options in Preferences

 [that's  a zero before the comma ]

         

[lockcommsale / refreshbuffers 1,-1]

 

Version 2.97                                                     09/04/2014

===============================================================

 

The Add to Existing Sku Numbers screen has a new option to

 Print tags for the list of items you just added.

 This is also possible from other similar screens such

 as Deduct from Inventory, Return to Vendor, etc, but

 the feature is most useful from the Add screen.

 

The printed Return to Vendors slip now includes the vendor's

 fax number.

 

The feature Add to Existing Sku numbers is sometimes

 used for low-value untagged items such as charms

 instead of the more official Inventory Entry screen.

 In previous versions, adding to the quantity of an

 existing Sku would update the cost of the Sku to the

 new Cost.

 Starting in this update, you have the choice to accept

 the new Cost (as before) or to average the cost based

 on the previous quantity, previous cost,

 and the new cost and quantity added.

 E.g. if you had 2 @ $100 and add 3 @ 125 the, cost could

 be averaged to $115.

 

It is now possible to select an alternative ID number for

 MMF brand cash drawers. The default and suggested ID

 is 1, but sometimes drawers are shipped set to 0 (zero)

 To change the ID, enter a single digit number in

 the box for Cash Drawer code on the Local Defaults of

 Preferences.

         

From the screen Add to Existing Sku Numbers, newly added

 is the option to import a text-file list of items by Part Number.

 (There are limited cases where you could use this. Ask

 Compulink for details if you think you have a use for it.)

 

         

 

Version 2.96                                                     08/27/2014

===============================================================

 

When running customer reports based on purchase history

 one of many selection options is by vendor. In previous

 versions if you selected a vendor code with one or two

 letters, the results would include all sales for vendor

 codes        *beginning* with those letters. E.g. if you selected

 vendor "GO" the results would include purchases from

 vendor codes GO, GOL, GOX, etc. [This distinction was

 rarely an issue since most vendor codes are three-long.]

 Starting this version, only the exact match will be included

 in the results unless you specifically select a range of

 vendor codes such as GO to GOX. This can help you more

 accurately focus on a particular vendor in case you have

 vendor codes of less than three letters.

 

In some previous versions, clicking the red [X] (close)

 from the X-Tra Search from the Gift Certificate screen,

 the Appraisal screen and the Payment on Account screen

 would not close X-Tra search. Instead you had to hit the

 Escape key. That has been resolved in this version so the

 [X] to close works.

 

In the Gift Certificate screen, clicking the down-arrow by the

 "Slip No." box brings up a window where you can select from

 a list of "most recently used" slips. In previous versions

 clicking here would also pop up X-Tra Search, which was

 awkward. This has been resolved in this update.

 

In some previous versions, closing the Gift Certificate screen

 would simultaneously open the X-Tra Search screen which was

 awkward. This has been resolved in this update.

 

In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the email column

 has been moved from one of the right-most positions

 (which often would not be seen) further to the left.

 By default it's just a very narrow column so you won't

 see the        entire address, but at the least, this way you

 will immediately notice any customer which doesn't

 yet have an email address entered.

 As before, you can resize X-Tra search and you can change

 the column widths if you want to hide or widen certain

 columns. In previous versions you could make columns narrow

 but not too narrow. Now you can even make some columns

 disappear (by setting them to a zero width)

 

 If you want to set the columns back to the standard settings,

 right-click the main customer grid.

 

A new security option can prevent the display of the running total of

 the total value during physical inventory entry.

 The previously  existing security option to prevent viewing the

 cost already limited viewing cost on the physical inventory screen.

 This new option also prevents showing the running total of the

 retail. I.e. even though staff are generally allowed to see the

 retail prices (!) you may not want the accumulated total to be

 so evident.

 You will find this new security option on the Inventory Security

 page of Preferences.

 

If you prefer that VJS screens be less colorful,

 you can choose Options, Screen Graphics from the Main Menu.

 Previously the Graphics selection you made was generally remembered

 except that the two simplest / most stripped-down options were

 not save-able. Starting this version the 'Fewer' and

 'Least' options *can* be saved. In addition, there are

 some layout improvements when the 'Least' or 'Fewer' option

 is in effect.

 

The utility which forces the Shopkeeper inventory levels

 to match the physical inventory counts has been updated

 to have the option to also update the location codes

 to match the physical count location codes.

 In addition, starting this version, this utility will

 create a log of any quantity changes made.

 (This utility is one that is best not run in most case

 because it is more usual to correct physical inventory

 discrepancies individually)

 

 [prodcarddetail]

 

Version 2.952                                                     08/14/2014

===============================================================

 

On the Time Card screen in previous versions, if you went to the

 List page and selected a date range, you couldn't exit the

 screen without going back to the Main Time card

 page and choosing Cancel. That requirement has

 been removed in this update.

 

An audit report for in-house accounts receivable accounts

 is now available in the Utilities area.

 [this corresponds to the chgbal utility in the older

 JS-Classic program.]

 

The Payment Spreadsheet Report now includes the customer

 account number for lines with accounts-receivable transactions.

 

 

Backups should be done daily to a rotating collection

 of USB memory sticks. However, if on rare occasions

 you need to make a quick backup to the local C: drive

 because you don't have a memory stick, some installations

 of Windows don't allow files to be put in the root

 folder of the C: drive so such a backup would fail. Starting

 this version, if you encounter that situation, VJS will put the

 backup in the folder "Backups" off the root of the drive instead

 of failing.

 

Choosing the Bank Account Set up screen in previous versions would

 store the wrong bank name for the sixth and seventh bank accounts.

 This has been resolved in this update.

 

[bktranpmupdt]        

 

Version 2.951                                                     08/08/2014

===============================================================

 

The last update caused an unnecessary warning/error

 when retrieving a repair job by double-clicking

 the job number via the X-Tra Search screen.

 This update resolves that.

 

Improvements in the Clerks screen

 In previous versions, there were some awkwardness's

 such as the clerk name and profile not updating immediately

 when using the keyboard to search for a clerk.

 Also, the drop list of clerks had colors which made

 reading difficult.

 This update has improvements in those areas.

 

In previous versions, certain return memo credit invoices

 could not be retrieved on the Non-Inventory Invoices

 page of Inventory Entry. (quite possibly credits

 that were created via DOS Shopkeeper)

 This update makes that type of credit find-able.

 

 

Version 2.95                                                     08/07/2014

===============================================================

 

When you sell a repair-type Sku on the sales screen

 a button called "repair" shows on the right edge

 to allow access to the repair tracking details screen.

 Otherwise (for inventory-type Sku's) the "Appraisal"

 button appears.

 A new option in this version allows you to add a repair

 tracking screen even on an inventory-type of Sku.

 To access, this, click on the in-line "options"

 (not the Options button at the top) and choose Repair Details.

 

 This may be useful if you are doing work on an item

 you are selling. Or, you may want a repair type of

 envelope for a layaway item.

 

 

During inventory entry you select your major code which

 you can select by number or by name or by clicking

 from a list.

 If you type a major code number such as 6, starting

 this version the major code number six is prioritized.

 In previous versions, if you had a major code whose

 description started with "6" would have been prioritized.

 This speeds up entry if you are familiar with your major

 code numbers.

 

During inventory entry, there is a new camera icon

 by the Save button. This makes it a bit quicker

 to access the screen to add pictures to the

 new item. You can click with the mouse but

 you can also tab past the 'Save' button to the

 camera button and press <Enter> if you prefer the Keyboard.

 After you have taken or viewed the pictures, the focus

 returns to the Save button in that line so that

 pressing <Enter> saves the new Sku line and prepares

 the next line. This can speed up entry of inventory.

 

During inventory entry just the essential data fields are requested

 initially in order to speed up the process. Other fields

 can be accessed via Extended Details or Inv Details at the bottom.

 The field "Alternative Part Number" may be used for the

 manufacturer's UPC barcode number (not style) and for pre-tagged

 items this is a common field. Starting this version it is possible

 for this field to be one of the first items available - immediately

 under the second description line. If you use it for the

 manufacturer's UPC code - you should read the UPC barcode

 instead of typing in the number.

 You can activate this option via the Inventory Defaults page

 of Preferences.

 

The sales entry grid and the inventory entry grid

 have a small button to save the *current line* and

 continue to the next line. In previous versions

 the buttons had the word "ok" and now they have

 the word "Save" to make their function clearer.

 (In the past, some users have clicked the "Save" button

 at the top of the inventory entry screen which means

 Save and exit the entire invoice, which would waste

 time if used after every item!)

 

 Note that in the Inventory entry grid, the ok/Save button

 and options have now been moved to the right side of the

 line. a) this is closer to the last inventory field entered

 (either quantity or location) b) this leaves room for

 the Part Number (see above)

 

Time Card entry changes:

 After the first box where you select the initials, the next

 box is now the confirmation initials box after that,

 the focus goes to the Save button. In previous versions

 you would tab through the time and date boxes first.

 

 If you open the Time Card screen, but wait a long time

 before actually saving a time card entry, the time the

 Time Card screen was opened could be saved with the time card

 resulting in a clock out time that is too early.

 Starting this version the time is updated after you confirm the

 initials.

 

On the Other Security Settings page of defaults, the

 box for the setting for Customize Menu Settings was

 previously a bit narrow making it hard to see the

 correct setting if were set to a two-digit number

 (e.g. 10 or 11)

 

TeamViewer Remote Assistance option is more easily

 accessible now from the Options button of the

 Main Menu and of the File Center.

 

 

When you make a memorized report the *Default* report

 for a certain report screen then that memorized combination

 is loaded automatically when you open that report

 screen again. In addition, the report screen opens

 first to the Full Selection page instead of teh

 Quick Selection page.

 However, in previous versions, even though the

 Full Selection page was selected, the Quick Selection

 button remained highlighed at the top. Starting

 this version, the correct button will be highlighted.

 

 

 

Version 2.941                                                     07/30/2014

===============================================================

 

The customer history reports now include the accounts

 receivable balance for customers with in in-house

 charge account.

 

When you open the Sales screen, most often the X-Tra Search

 screen appears on top to help you find customers and

 sales by name. For the cases where you want to find an

 existing sale by sale number, you need to close X-Tra Search

 and type or search by a number.

 Starting this version, when you close X-Tra Search when

 there is not already a sale retrieved, the cursor will

 land in the sale number box instead of the customer name

 box. This will make it quicker with fewer keystrokes or

 fewer mouse movements to search for the sale.

         

You can now reset the customer number sequence.

 Go to the customer page of Preferences and check the

 box to "Assign your own customer numbers" and Save.

 This option has been there before, but what is new

 is that when you add a customer and are prompted

 for the customer number to use there is an option

 to "Reset the ext Customer Number" and if you both

 select a number and check that box, you will reset

 the sequence for subsequent customers.

 Note that after you have reset the numbering you will

 probably want to turn off the "Assign your own customer

 numbers" option in Preferences.

 

 

         

Version 2.94                                                     07/29/2014

===============================================================

 

The feature Add to Existing Sku numbers is sometimes

 used for low-value untagged items such as charms

 instead of the more official Inventory Entry screen.

 In previous versions, adding to the quantity of an

 existing Sku would not change the date of the item.

 Starting in this update, you have the choice to leave

 the date as-is, to update the date to today or to average

 the date based on the previous quantity and previous date

 and the new date and quantity received.

 

When you retrieve an existing sale, by default it is

 locked and you have to unlock the padlock before you can

 make changes (except for a payment on an outstanding layout

 repair or special order.)

 When locked, you also couldn't scroll down the list of payments

 if you had more than five payments.

 Starting this version, you can scroll down the list of payments

 beyond five even with the padlock closed. (Though you still

 can't change payments when locked.)

 

When a part of a credit slip is used as payment on a sale, you are

 prompted if the balance should remain on the credit slip.

 The usual answer is Yes, so if you choose No, that is less common

 so starting this version a No answer will request reconfirmation

 to help avoid a keyboard/mouse mistake.

 

 

In previous versions, retrieving a pending special order

 sale by typing the sale number (e.g. not by clicking

 the sale on screen or searching by name, etc) would

 result in an unneeded warning about the sale being locked.

 This has been resolved in this update.

 

 

 

 [bktran.#/fnd/tt20 ]

 

Version 2.933                                                     07/24/2014

===============================================================

 

The "Small" customer export file now adds the customer

 number column. This way the small export file could

 be used to send out for mailing list corrections and

 with the customer number column it then changes could

 be imported back into Jewelry Shopkeeper.

 (However, you should request more detailed instructions from

 Compulink before sending a list out for this purpose.)

 

From the Main Menu there is a "shortcut" method to access

 the Windows folders which contain your inventory and

 repair images. This might be useful if you want to copy

 or email some of the image files.

 From the Main Menu, choose "Options" then "Windows Features"

 then "Image Folders"

 

 

 [bktran:duplicate,srch;invstexcl]

Version 2.931-2                                                     07/18/2014

===============================================================

 

Miscellaneous

 

 [bktranv2/ttv2/lgrid/nsave]

 

Version 2.93                                                     07/16/2014

===============================================================

 

When receiving new inventory you can click the button

 "Extended Details" in case you need to add notes or

 information beyond the basics and this pops up the

 Inventory Status screen. In previous versions the

 inventory status screen would start out in the display-only

 (locked) state and you would have to unlock the padlock

 in order to make changes. It's fairly clear that accessing

 the details screen during inventory receipt implies that

 you want to add details, so starting this version the

 Inventory Screen will start out unlocked if accessed

 via the Extended Details button of Receive Inventory.

 

The "Initial Date" saved with a sale was previously the actual

 date the sale was entered. Going forward it will be set to

 the first date used on the sale - which could be altered

 if one is entering sales from a few days back.

 

The security setting needed to change the "Initial Date" used

 to be fixed at level 10. Now it shares the same security

 setting as "Override Date Restrictions on Sales."

 

When running the Repairs Reports, you can restrict the report by

 selecting a certain Trade Shop name or a Job Location.

 In previous versions, you had to remember the exact word you

 used in order to get the right results. Starting in this

 update the report screen offers a drop list. I.e. this way

 you can see if you have RONNIE in the trade shop list instead

 of RONNY.

 

If the pop-up calendar with two months displayed is used, in previous

 versions certain dates (already typed in) could cause the calendar

 to not display the correct months. This has been addressed in this update.

 Note that the one month calendar is the default pop-up. If you want

 the calendar that shows two months at a time, add the keyword

         CALENDARV2 in Miscellaneous Options (in Preferences, from the

         Maintenance Menu.)

 

From the Receive Inventory screen the Delete icon at the top can be

 used to erase the entire invoice. Starting this version, when you

 choose that option, the warning is much clearer that the *Entire*

 invoice would be deleted. This can help avoid the entire invoice

 being deleted when someone wants to delete just one line.

 

 

Version 2.922                                                     06/30/2014

===============================================================

 

The additional Pandora images for the pre-autumn / CZ

 lines have been added to the Pandora Catalog Import program.

 

If multiple people are entering inventory at the same time and

 two people add a new item in the same major code at

 the same and then both pop up the extended details screen

 the timing was possible in older versions such that the

 detail screen for the other person's item could appear.

 That possibility has been prevented starting this version.

 

If a sale is started as a layaway sale or a cash sale

 and then converted to a charge account sale, in

 rare cases the sale would remain as the old sale type.

 That has been addressed starting in this update.

 

When making in-house charge account sales, you can now

 adjust the customer's payment plan without accessing

 the entire charge-account profile.

 At the top of the sales screen choose Options,

 More Options, Change Payment Plan.

 

 

 [pmt/rc1]

 

Version 2.921                                                     06/27/2014

===============================================================

 

With the new option to transfer the sales screen description

 to the repair screen in different ways (see v. 2.82

 below) certain combinations could cause the description

 to re-transfer when editing the repair. That could be

 awkward if you had subsequently modified the repair screen

 description. With this update, that description transfer

 feature will function only when first adding a repair

 ticket - not during updates as well.

 

When you are recording new inventory, the entry grid requests

 just the basics (style, class code, decryption cost, retail_

 and if you need to access more details you can click the

 "extended details" button. By default that brings up

 the grid-style extended details page of "Inventory Status"

 or, for a loose stone, the stones details page.

 Now, if you prefer that the Notes (pre-appraisal) page

 appear first, you can add the key word EXTENDED2NOTES anywhere

 in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

 

Version 2.92                                                     06/23/2014

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 so that it will import the new destination charms for June 2014

 into Jewelry Shopkeeper.

 The destination images are also imported.

 

 In addition, approximately 250 other new Pandora styles

 (Drop 4 and Drop 5 for 2014) are imported. These styles

 may not yet have shipped and the pictures for those

 forthcoming items are not imported yet but will be added

 later.

 

 This will *not* need a new access code from Compulink.

 (There is no charge for the Pandora catalog import program

 if you have the Maintenance Plan.)

 

 

Version 2.911                                                     06/19/2014

===============================================================

 

The Excel XLS file created when doing the inventory export for

 websites previously did not include the retail price for

 items which were out of stock.

 In most cases jewelers don't choose to include such zero-quantity

 items but in some cases they are included - e.g. for items

 that you can easily special order for customer orders.

 In this update, those zero-quantity items will include the

 retail price in the export file.

 

When using the enter 'Existing Inventory' Screen, in case

 you ever add an invoice number (which is generally not the case),

 starting this version the invoice number is automatically

 entered as upper-case. This could help if one were to later

 do a search by invoice number.

 

 

Version 2.91                                                     06/17/2014

===============================================================

 

When adding new sales VJS can now automatically pop up a list of

 unused credit slips and gift certificates for that customer.

 This is before adding the Sku's because that might help

 the salesperson suggest an add-on sale if the customer knows

 they have more to spend.

 This is an option you can enable or disable via the Sales

 Screen defaults from Preferences.

 

The grid of time cards on the List page of the Time Card entry

 screen previously showed an error message when you chose to limit

 the date-range shown and this has been resolved in this update.

 [ The time card reports in previous versions were not affected.]

 

[Manager Override Adjustment.] [costrecolor-2] [gldist] [custhistemail]

 

Version 2.90                                                     05/24/2014

===============================================================

 

When you run reports, it's common to enter a range of

 vendors or major codes or expense codes, etc.

 In a great many cases you want a range of one - i.e.

 just one major code or one vendor code so when you

 fill in the first box with XXX the second box is

 filled in with XXX. But if you run the report again

 for a different vendor and you type CCC it wouldn't

 change the second box to CCC because CCC to XXX is

 a valid range. However, starting this version the

 assumption, when you run the report for a different

 range is that you want a range of one so the second

 box will always update to match the first. Of course

 if you really do want a range, you can update the second

 box.

 In case you prefer the previous behavior, you can re-enable

 that by adding the key word  DONTSYNCHRANGE anywhere

 in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

 

 In previous, the comment added to credit slips resulting from

 a customer return was "Refund From Sale" but from now on

 it will be "Credit From Sale."

 

 

[costrecolor] [cpic] [tagshapecolcc] [ccextratrack]

 

 

Version 2.89                                                     05/07/2014

===============================================================

 

The April Pandora catalog update for the NFL Dangles and Charms

 did not include the images files as of Update 2.87.

 This update includes the image files.

 

 If you *have* already imported the NFL charms catalog

 you merely need to open the Pandora Catalog import

 program and the pictures will install. (no need to re-import)

 

 If you have not previously imported the April 2014 NFL

 charms, import the new catalog with the usual instructions

 (ask for emailed instructions if needed.)

 

From the Add to Existing Sku number screen you can search

 by vendor style. However, in previous versions a style

 with zero quantity would not automatically show in

 in the pick-list. Starting this version, zero qty

 styles will show when searching by style. This is handy

 for Pandora when you first receive a specific style - because

 the quantity will be zero.

 [however, note that it's still easier to receive Pandora

 items by Part Number - where you scan the Pandora baggie

 barcode.]

 

In a small number of previous versions, when you retrieved a

 Wish List/ Quote sale, the X-Tra Search would not

 close (get out of the way). That is resolved in this update.

 

 

[invstyledups]

 

Version 2.88                                                     04/30/2014

===============================================================

 

The picture-storing options in VJS are principally designed

 for actual image files of type JPG, GIF, BMP and PNG.

 Starting this version, you can also store document files

 of type PDF, XLS (Excel) and DOC (MS Word)

 Note that VJS doesn't display these document types

 within VJS, but if you click (or double-click)

 the placeholder icon to get to the Picture Manager

 you can choose to open and view the file. They will

 open with the appropriate application if installed on

 your computer - e.g. Adobe Reader for PDF, Excel for XLS

 MS Word for .DOC. [however, you may install alternative

 programs such as PDF-Xchange, and OpenOffice]

 

 This way, you can store PDF, XLS or DOC document files that

 relate to customers or appraisals or inventory files.

 

On the Sales Screen Cont. page of Preferences there is the option

 "Warn users if they change the sale number by more than"

 Previously this option wasn't available in VJS (it was for JS-Classic)

 but now it is active. This can prevent you from accidentally

 changing the sale number sequence by a large number - e.g.

 from 2500 to 25000.

 

If you send an SMS/Text message and the message is very short

 you will now see a warning/question asking if you intended

 such a short message. This can help you avoid accidentally

 sending messages that hadn't yet been correctly written.

 

 If you haven't uses the SMS/Text message option, see

 Update 2.440 notes below for more details and ask Compulink

 for instructions if you want to try it out.

 

In the Adjustments list on the Activity page of Inventory Status

 previous versions didn't show the ID/Clerk initials of

 the person who made the adjustments. Starting this version

 the Login ID is shown by each adjustments.

 

 

[AltCurrBta]

 

         

Version 2.87                                                     04/28/2014

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 so that it will import the new NFL charms for April 2014

 into Jewelry Shopkeeper.

 Note that this is a pre-release update as the images

 are not yet available. You can run this import to help

 you check-in your merchandise into Shopkeeper. A follow-up

 update will add the image files.

 

 This will *not* need a new access code from Compulink.

 (There is no charge for the Pandora catalog import program

 if you have the Maintenance Plan.)

 

A new customer analysis by zip code is available. When you

 a customer report and set the Type of Report to Zip/Post code

 *and* also select a Dates Sold range *and* also select

 an Export option, the resulting Excel file will be a summary

 list of zip codes with the number of customers and the total

 purchases per zip code - with the highest purchases zip codes

 at the top. This will help you quickly identify the top

 zip codes.

 

The detailed layaway reports has had the option to select results

 based on sales Dept code, but in previous versions the selection

 results weren't quite right. ( Some additional customer names were

 shown even no unnecessary sales were included.)

 This has been resolved in this update.

 

In VJS Preferences there has been a security setting "Access Finalized Sales"

 however, it applied only within JS-Classic. Starting

 this version, this setting can be used to prevent retrieving

 finalized sales onto the sales screen. However, some sales details

 will continue to be visible in the X-Tra Search screen.

 

The GMROI report now lets you select results based on the age of the inventory.

 Of course, almost by definition, the results from items that are old

 would have a slower turnover and a lower GMROI, but by specifically

 selecting the older items you can get a report that clarifies

 for you how badly the old items are worsening the GMROI.

 

Resolved a benign error message that would appear if a Sku were

 deleted via the Inventory Status screen.

 

 

Version 2.860- 2.861                                     04/18/2014

===============================================================

 

The Time Card screen no longer shows Inactive clerks in

  the drop-list of clerks.

  [Clerks can be marked as Inactive from the clerk

  maintenance screen.]

 

By default, when you add a Time Card, the initials of

  login ID are pre-selected for Time Cards. In case you

  have several people who share a Login ID, a

  new option in Preferences allows you to NOT assume

  the login ID as the same for new time cards.

 

The Commissions / Sales Reports by Clerk now have the

 option to restrict sales to specific inventory location code.

 

Version 2.861:

 An adjustment was made to the upper/lower-case behavior

 for customer names for the case where you select

 names to be all upper-case.

 

Century Gothic Bold Italic is installed (if it's missing.)

 

 

The Main Menu instructions pop-up for when you drag menu items

 (to rearrange) has been made less sensitive for fewer

 unwanted pop-up messages.  See 2.830 update notes for

 more information on moving menu items.

 

[remote assistance added to main menu, options]

 

 

Version 2.850                                             04/10/2014

===============================================================

 

A new monthly summary report is available via the Itemized

 Sales Report screen. Change the Sort By option to "Month"

 and the report will show one line per month.

 

The Clerk Maintenance form has a page to show the sales

 for that clerk. In some previous versions the option

 to limit the sales by date did not work, and that

 has been addressed in this update.

 

When moving items from one invoice to another (usually from

 a memo to an actual invoice) you now have to option

 of also moving the freight charges.

 [As before, this is done by editing the memo, selecting

 the item, then choosing the Options button within that line,

 then selecting Move to Other Invoice.]

 

When adding customers, if you have the CapsLock key not set

 to your usual position, you might end up typing names

 in the wrong format like jOSEPH. Starting in this version

 those names will autocorrect to Joseph. (This does not apply

 if you have chosen upper-case only names in Preferences.)

 

When you run a Commission report, you can simultaneously create

 an Excel XLS file. The XLS file is not new, but starting

 this version the XLS file includes the sales Dept code column

 because that can help some jewelers in their analyses.

 

The new Loose Stones reports introduced in a recent update have

 been reformatted to allow more room in the size (mm)

 column. This reduced word-wrapping so that in most cases

 each stone will take one line instead of two in order to keep

 the report from being unnecessarily long.

 

One inventory report layout has been adjusted to make it compatible

 with PDF output (with pictures by Sku with 2nd description line.)

 

The 'Summary Tax' version of the Itemized Sales Report has been adjusted

 to make it compatible with PDF output.

 

In the Repairs screen in previous versions , the pink "zone" points did

 not all jump to the appropriate zone of the screen. This has

 been resolved in this update. [Press Alt- and the number of the pink

 dot, or press the Function-key on the keyboard - e.g. F4 for Completed

 Date.]

 

 [email address repairs ]

 

Version 2.840                                             03/31/2014

===============================================================

 

A report on Loose Stones / Diamonds details has been added in this

 version. This allows you to select by Material, Shape,

 Cut, Clarity, Color, Vendor, etc. This can help you

 better analyze your loose stones inventory and to search

 for matching stones.

 The report can also create a standard Excel export file of the results.

 Also, a special RapNet formatted Excel export is available.

 This includes extra columns that aren't in Shopkeeper, but

 this file format can be used to upload your inventory to RapNet.

 

The Accounts Payable / Cash Requirements Report now simultaneously

 creates an Excel XLS version of the report in case you

 or your bookkeeper want to do further analyses, sorts or

 extractions of AP.

 

The JS-Classic custom job screen has a place to add "hidden" Sku's but

 this was not previously compatible when also using VJS.

 VJS doesn't have this feature but starting this version

 it won't conflict with a JS-Classic custom job with

 hidden Sku's.

 

 [customer dbf import utility]

 

 

Version 2.830                                             03/25/2014

===============================================================

 

The Sales Payment Spreadsheet (Daily Cash Register Report)

 now includes additional performance metrics in the end-of-report

 summary. Principally they are "add-on" performances showing

 the number of tickets which include more than one Sku line

 and the overall average number of items per ticket.

 Return items and zero-dollar items are left out of these

 calculations. in addition, the number of finalized sales

 and the average dollars per sale are shown.

 

The ability to purposefully type in a non-existent sale-number

 in the sales screen in order to select from a list of

 sales has been re-instated (this was available in the past)

 Further, it has been made more key-board friendly as you

 can now press <Enter> from the list of sales to select one.

 

The sales comparison report previously had a formatting problem

 in the subtotal lines of the percent change in gross profit.

 (i.e. 100% would show as 1%)

 This has been resolved in this update.

 

There are two ways to organize the buttons / features on

 the VJS menu. You can choose options, Customize Menu where

 you can select the features and can change the order in

 which they appear. You can also drag the buttons. In previous

 versions the buttons could be dragged out of position a bit

 too easily. To reduce inadvertent moves, starting with this update,

 in order to drag buttons to a new position, you need to right-click

 before dragging a button.

 

 [dontinheritpix, upnp, logpath]

 

Version 2.820                                             03/13/2014

===============================================================

 

The Cash Register Journal Report is a simple listing of

 payment entries by type - without other sales detail.

 This version adds the column to identify the user

 who was logged in for each payment. This way, even

 if a layaway or repair was originally assigned to clerk AAA,

 you can track who record the payments on later dates.

 For example, this can help identify who delivered a layaway

 or repair.

 Necessarily, to make use of this, each person people will

 have to log in to VJS with his/her own initials.

 

The cash register Sales Payment Spreadsheet report will now

 print the Reference next to each payment. I.e. for a

 credit card this is like 'Visa' or 'Amex', for a check

 it could be the check number. (If a sale has a split

 payment such as a check and a credit card, there might

 not be room to print both references.)

 

 

When layaways are recorded, the date of the sale is updated each

 time a payment is made - until it is finalized with the last

 payment. The sale does remember the Initial Date and certain

 reports can be run based on this Initial Date. In previous

 versions, the Initial Date was filled in with the actual date.

 Starting this version if you record a new layaway sale today

 but date it yesterday then the Initial Date will be registered

 as Yesterday.

 On a related note, if you need to change the Initial Date of

 a previous sale, retrieve the sale, choose Options, More Options

 Change Initial date. (this is password protected.)

 

 

when recording a repair or custom job on a sales screen

 you might include one line for the job tracking and several

 other lines for parts.

 In case you prefer that the receipt not show the price next

 to each component, with this update there is now a

 new option to allow the sales receipts to NOT show the price of each

 line - but to show only the total at the end of the receipt.

 To enable this option for Sku's in certain major codes, edit

 the major class code description so that it contains (anywhere)

 N$  (think No dollars) This is experimental - and if found

 useful by several jewelers may be made a more standard choice.

 Note that just the *first* item on the sale needs to contain

 a Sku in such a major code. The remaining items can be any

 Sku in any major code.

 

 

When you recording a repair sale, it's possible to enter

 several different repair Sku's for different tasks

 and it's possible to add a repair tracking detail page to

 each of the lines. Or you can choose to add just One repair

 tracking detail page.

 What's new in this version is the ability to have the description

 of All of the repair Sku lines of the sale added to the one

 repair tracking detail page.

 This could be useful if you break down the pricing of the repair

 into multiple steps and so use several Sku's, yet you want all

 the steps listed on the envelope.

 It can also be useful if you combine several different jobs

 on one ticket.

 This option is selected in the Repair Defaults Cont. page

 in Preferences. The options are to put all the sale screen descriptions

 into the Repair Description box or Instructions box. Or you can choose

 Both where the first 3 will go into the Description box and the

 rest into the Instructions box.

 Or you can choose to Split, where of Sku on the sales screen the first

 description line goes to the Instructions box on the Repair screen and the

 second description line  goes to the Description box on the Repair screen.

 

If you use this option, you will likely want to *also* use the repair

 option to transfer the total price of all the Sku lines to the

 estimate box of the one repair ticket. This option has been in place

 for many months and is selected on the same Repairs Defaults Cont

 page in Preferences.

 

For both of the multi-line sale / repair ticket cases above, be sure

 to add all the repair Sku's to the sales screen before adding

 the single repair tracking detail page. The transfer of all

 the descriptions and the total price will only kick in when the

 repair tracking page is first added to that sale.

 

On the Vendor Profile screen in previous versions the preferred

 G/L (accounting ) code box was accessible even if security

 restrictions allowed only viewing of the profile. This has been

 resolved in this update.

 

 

 

Version 2.810                                             03/07/2014

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 so that it will import the new items for Spring 2014

 into Jewelry Shopkeeper along with the related images.

 The over 400 additions include 2014 MLB Charms,

 2014 Mothers Day, Essence Zodiac Charms and all

 the other new Spring 2014 styles.

 This will need a new access code from Compulink.

 (There is no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)

 

 

 

Version 2.800                                             03/06/2014

===============================================================

 

In some previous versions, the "Undo" button at the top of the

 Sales Screen could erase a new sale that was in the middle of

 being added without prompting for confirmation. Starting this

 version clicking the Undo button will prompt for further

 clarification - depending on whether you have

 made any changes to the sale on the screen.

 

The length of message available in the Text/SMS box

 from the customer screen or the repair screen has

 been increased from 30 to 250 characters.,

 (This 30-character limitation didn't actually

 apply in most cases because it's more usual to

 send SMS messages by creating a message template

 which did not have that length limit. This applies

 just to ad-hoc messages.)

 

Version 2.780 added the ability to show more than 15 payment

 types, but the associated click-to-scroll bar in that

 area remained optimized for up to 15. This update updates

 the scrolling among the payment types.

 

In the payment select scroll list, payment types can be associated

 with an icon. If you deselect the icon the payment type is

 shown in words. In this update, if you remove the icon

 the words can be clearer because they will be split into

 two lines in some cases. For example, what would previously

 have shown as CoChec  (for Company Check) will now show as

 "Co Check" on two lines. This can help make selecting the right

 payment type easier.

 

 

Various Adjustments to Accounts Payable and Checkbook:

------------------------------------------------------

 

When writing a check to pay invoices payable, previous

 versions could retroactively change the G/L code of the invoice

 to the vendor's standard G/L code - if it had

 been changed for select invoices. This update resolves that.

 

When entering a non-inventory payable, certain sequences

 of keyboard and mouse could let you save the payable

 without assigning G/L Codes. Other sequences could exit

 a new payable without saving it/ This update resolves those

 issues.

 

When changing a previously-entered non-inventory payable,

 if you make a change but then choose "Done" instead of

 "Save", you have the option to *not* save the changes.

 In previous versions the option to Not save was not

 active but starting this version it is.

 

 

Non-Inventory payables have always been accessed via

 the "Inventory Entry" menu choice - using the

 "Non-Invent Payables" tab.

 This version adds a dedicated "Add or Change Accounts Payable"

 button to the Accounting Menu. Some users will find this a better

 access method.

 

When adding an invoice of merchandise, the button "ADD/EDIT INVENTORY"

 is used to access the grid of merchandise items to add.

 In previous versions was not visible until after you had

 selected a payable. Some beginner user felt stumped with that button

 "missing." In this version the button is always visible, but if

 you click it before you have selected an invoice, a prompt will

 ask you to select an invoice first.

 

 In addition, the wording has changed to "Add Items to Inventory"

 and an icon is in the button.

 

If you add a payable (inventory or not) and skip the Due Date,        

 It will be set to 30 days.

 

If you add a payable (inventory or not) and enter a discount percent

 but do not set the Discount Date, it will be set to the same

 as the Due Date.

 

 

 

Version 2.790                                             02/28/2014

===============================================================

 

A new option in the Commission Reports screen allows you

 to mark the commission as having been paid. That

 way you can later run reports showing only items

 that haven't had their commission paid yet.

 [This is the last option in the report screen

 when you choose Full Selection. There is also a

 mark as Unpaid - in case you need to undo the action.]

 

 

The ability to drag n drop picture files has been in VJS

 for years - and this is a very quick and easy way

 of adding pre-made image files (either from your own

 still camera or images you received from a vendor.)

 When you drag and drop, the original image file is

 left alone and a copy is added to Shopkeeper.

 A new option in this version can move the original

 image out of the originating folder. This can be

 useful in order to keep a tidy "staging" folder

 with only the last one or two images. I.e. dragging

 from a folder with 1000 images might get tricky.

 This new option is on the Local Defaults page

 of Preferences. (Email Compulink for more details

 if you think this may be useful for you.)

 

In Previous versions, in order to delete a minor class code        

 you had to delete the minor code description. Starting

 this version you can click the Delete button at the

 top of the form.

 

On the Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks screen you are

 presented a list of payables from which you can select

 which ones to pay and how much. If you widen the screen

 you will see more columns of information on the payables.

 What's new in this version is that two columns were added

 to show the Description information from the Payables. This

 could contain information that is useful at the time of

 cutting checks such as terms or a note to wait for a credit.

 (remember, you have to manually widen the screen to see more

 the extra columns of information.)

 

When a sales ticket is changed, a memo indicating the time and date

 of the changes is now logged with the sale. To see a history

 of these changes, choose Options at the top of the sales screen

 then More, then Sale History.

 

The Non-Inventory payable screen now allows you to change the number

 or vendor of a previously entered payable. This is done in the

 same way as for Inventory Payables: by clicking the padlock

 next to the invoice number and vendor code.

 

When you locate a previously entered payable on the Non-Inventory payable

 screen by typing the number and pressing Enter or Tab, previous

 versions would leave the "pick-list" of vendors on screen which was

 messy. This version fixes that.

 

LogMeIn no longer offers a Free version of their Remote

 Connection program  (more details in the version 2.65 notes.)

 For those who decide not to get the LogMeIn Subscription

 Compulink is testing out some other remote-assistance

 options. This update adds another test with one called

 Screen Connect. From the initial VJS File Center, choose

 Options, then Remote Assistance. Then choose Screen Connect.

 The One-Time option will deactivate after one help session

 and you have to request a help session code ahead of time.

 The Install Screen Connect option keeps Screen connect

 available until you deactivate it.

 ( Either way, this would be in response to a request by

 Compulink to connect for technical assistance.)

 

[mod_second]

 

 

Version 2.780                                             02/18/2014

===============================================================

 

Clicking the "Save" button at the top of the sales screen

 previously offered some options such as cancel changes,

 save as quote, etc. Now it will simply save the sale

 and close the sales form.

 As before, the more common ways of saving a sale remain

 to click "Print Receipt" to save and print a receipt and

 get ready for the next sale, or "No Receipt: to save the

 sale and get ready for the next sale.

 

When increasing quantity using the Add to Existing Sku Number

 screen, records are added to the adjustment log. However,

 in previous versions the Inventory Adjustment Report

 would show 'dn' (for down) next to those items. Starting

 this version, addition adjustments will show in the log as "up."

 The report format has been slightly adjusted too so now

 it will show "-1 (dn)" instead of "-1 dn."  (the -1 dn

 might seem ambiguous - e.g. does -1 dn mean +1 up?!)

 

From the Payment Types page in Preferences, you can add any

 number of new payment types. However, the payment selection

 list (e.g. on the sales screen) was able to show just

 15 types in previous versions. Starting this version there

 is room to show 30 types.

 

From the Physical Inventory screen (and the screens Add to Existing Sku,

 Deduct from Inventory, Relocate Inventory and Return Inventory

 to Vendor) you have the option of importing a list of Sku numbers

 to help speed up larger actions.

 This version adds a prompt after you select the import file to

 show you how many items were in the list and asks you to confirm

 the import. E.g., if you were expecting 100 items and the count

 were 870, you might want to stop and check things out before

 importing.

 

 In addition, a new option allows you to Undo the last import of a

 list of Sku's by clicking the Undo button in the tool bar at the

 top of the screen.

 

 Both of the above improvements also apply to reading in a batch of

 Sku's with a RFID wand reader.

 

 [intentional jump from 2.670 to 2.780 ]

 

Version 2.670                                             02/10/2014

===============================================================

 

The first time VJS is started each day, some data verification

 steps are done. In this version those steps will

 take less time.

 

when you make changes in Preferences (from the Maintenance Menu)

 the saving step could take fairly long on certain network

 configurations with previous versions. That saving step will be

 faster starting with this version. The same change should

 also make the preferences data file more resistant to damage.

 

 

 

Version 2.661                                             02/06/2014

===============================================================

 

The Inventory Status screen has performance improvements

 in the Activity Page, such as when viewing sales for

 the Sku number. The improvement will be most noticeable

 if you have a large sales file There is also a bit of a

 speed-up when opening the Inventory Status screen from

 the Main Menu and when switching from one Sku Number

 to another within Inventory Status.

 

On the Extended Details page of Inventory Status most of the

 cost boxes were previously in code for lower-level logins

 but there remained some costs visible. In this update

 the remaining cost boxes are now converted to code

 (for lower-level logins.)

 

The Center Stone Clarity, Cut, etc. boxes have been widened

 so you can see all the text of longer entries without having

 to scroll.

 

The sales receipts will now print a "Taxable Amount" line in

 the totaling area.  However, to maintain a cleaner receipt,

 this will not print if the Taxable Amount is the same as

 the sale subtotal.

 You can force the Taxable Amount to print for *all* sales

 with the new Preference: "Print 'Taxable Amount' even when

 it's the same as the total or zero." This option is on

 the Receipts Defaults Continued page in Preferences.

 

The last update introduced an error message in the financial reports

 which is solved.

 

 

Version 2.66                                             02/04/2014

=======================================================

 

The "Incomplete Payment" warning option introduced in

 update 2.641 has been adjusted a bit so that it

 update 2.641 has been adjusted a bit so that it

 is now easier to purposefully decline a payment

 on a Cash Sale thereby converting it to a Layaway.

 

The Date Range version of the inventory Reports was not

 optimized in previous versions for the save-as-pdf

 output option and various column would not appear in

 the pdf file. That report layout has been updated now.

 

In previous versions the checkbook reports sorted by Expense Code

 sometimes gave a warning about out of balance expenses

 in cases where the warning wasn't needed.

 

The two-date-range sales comparison report, the one grouped

 by vendor, has been modified for the case where a vendor's

 sales increase from zero to a non-zero value. Mathematically,

 the *percent* increase is infinite but previous versions showed

 this as 0%. Starting this version such cases are represented

 by the number of units sold - e.g. zero last year to this year

 will show as 200%. This is not strictly mathematical, but it makes

 better sense from a business perspective than zero or infinity.

 This change was made to the report version grouped by major code in

 a previous update.)

 Such lines are marked with a double-asterisk as a reminder

 of the alternative percentage calculation for such lines.

 

 [memslog]

 

Version 2.651                                             01/24/2014

===============================================================

 

In previous versions if you activated the Manager Override

 feature to temporarily increase the security level

 (e.g. to discount more, etc.), then the Manager Override

 would remain in effect until the sales screen were

 closed or if the manager override option was

 explicitly selected.

 Starting this version, the Manager Override feature

 will self-cancel at the end of the current sale

 in progress. This can help avoid leaving the access

 in place indefinitely.

 

 

An error message problem with the zebra tag printing was introduced

 in the 2.650 update (it could be ignored safely) but

 that is removed in this update

 

Version 2.65                                             01/23/2014

===============================================================

 

LogMeIn no longer offers a Free version of their Remote

 Connection program which can be used for technical

 support or for accessing your office computers from home.

 If you currently have a LogMeIn account, you can convert

 it to the Premium account for a yearly fee in which case

 you don't have to reinstall LogMeIn and your account

 remains as-is. The subscription charge is reasonable and

 LogMeIn is well-proven.

 

For those who decide not to get the LogMeIn Subscription

 Compulink is testing out some other remote-assistance

 options. From the initial VJS File Center, choose

 Options, then Remote Assistance. Then you could

 try the TeamViewer option or the Send Invitation option.

 ( Either way, this would be in response to a request by

 Compulink to connect for technical assistance.)

 

The Accounts Payable / Cash Requirements Report now

 has two a further new sort option: Order by Due date

 within Vendor. This is in addition to the two new

 sort options added in the previous update.

 Further, a new option for this report is the Summarized

 version which will not show individual invoices, but just

 a total for each vendor and a grand total - for a quick

 overview of your payables position.

 

One version of the Sales by Clerk Reports was not

 optimized in previous versions for the save-as-pdf

 output option and the retail price column would not

 appear in the pdf file. This version (the

 "Clerk Summary" version") has now been updated.

         

The extended data check checks for unusual data and previously

 ignored the lower-case e-acute (驠and in this update

 the upper-case e-acute ( ɠ) is also now ignored. This

 is so that descriptions with pav頡re not flagged.

 

The ability to open a Charge Account can be restricted

 via the Security Settings in Preferences. In previous

 versions, when an attempt was made to open a charge

 account with too-low security, the warning message

 showed too briefly to be read easily. That is fixed

 in this update.

 

 

If you have a Genius credit card terminal by Merchant Warehouse

 VJS now does a communications check when you first

 start VJS each day to see if the Genius responds.

 

         

Version 2.642                                             01/18/2014

===============================================================

 

In previous versions the Detailed Layaway Report would

 not report Special Order sales that were not-finalized.

 Starting this version, you can have those included

 if you set the For Balance Over line to zero.

 

If you have more than one Genius credit card terminals

 from Merchant Warehouse, they each will need to have

 a unique IP (network) address. Previous versions of

 Shopkeeper had support for just one Genius terminal,

 starting this version, you can go to the Local Defaults

 Continued page in Preferences and set a different

 Genius IP address for each computer: i.e. for the closest

 Genius terminal.

 

One of the layouts for the itemized inventory reports in previous

 versions would not show the cost on the version

 that was used when creating a PDF file of the reports.

 That is resolved in this update.

 

The Accounts Payable / Cash Requirements Report now

 has two new sort options: Order by Date Received and

 Order by Due Date. (the previous sort options by vendor

 code and vendor name still exist.)

 

 

Version 2.641                                             01/10/2014

===============================================================

 

On the sales screen if you enter a payment amount, but

 don't actually complete the payment (e.g. by selecting

 cash or Visa or check) and then try to save the sale

 or print a receipt, previous versions would simply

 ignore the payment. Starting this version, you will

 receive a warning for incomplete payments.

 Of course, in such cases, the payment is still not

 saved unless you complete it - but at least the warning

 can help you avoid cases where you thought the payments

 were recorded when, in fact, they were not.

 

The Sales Reports by Clerk / Commission Reports        

 now have the activated options to select only or to

 exclude items based on whether they are special

 order items or memo inventory items.

 [these choices were visible before but not active.]

 

The Inventory Entry screen has a Delete button at the top

 to delete an entire invoice. Starting with this update

 this button can also delete an entire purchase order.

 As before, this is subject to security restrictions

 on deleting inventory.

 

 

Version 2.640                                             01/07/2014

===============================================================

 

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 so that it will import the new items for Valentines 2014

 into Jewelry Shopkeeper along with the related images.

 You can use the same access code as you used

 for the Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013 update.

 (no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)

 

You can open multiple copies of most screens in VJS, such

 as Sales, Repairs etc. Previous versions couldn't

 open multiple copies of Inventory Status which is now

 possible. This is useful as it enables side-by-side

 comparison of the details of different items.

 

When editing an invoice (of received inventory) some previous

 versions did not show the major code part of the Sku number

 until you clicked/selected that line. In this update

 that part of the Sku number will show up on all lines,

 not just the selected line.

 

When you enter a sale and instead of choosing to save it

 (with or without a receipt) you click the red [X]

 to close the screen, your intentions are ambiguous

 so VJS asks you whether to save, delete, or save as a

 Wish-List / Quote.

 In previous versions the default response (if you were to

 press <Enter>) was Delete and the action to take if

 you pressed Escape or click the red [x] on the

 prompt screen was to save as a Wish-List / Quote.

 Starting in this version the default action for any of

 these is to do nothing - i.e. stay in the sale. This

 makes you actively decided which action to take and can

 avoid accidentally deleting the sale or accidentally

 keeping it in the Wish List.

 As before, however, it's best to choose Receipt or No

 Receipt in these cases.

 

On the Physical Inventory screen, if you type in a bad

 or an incomplete Sku number, the inventory search screen

 appears to help you locate the right Sku.

 In this version there is a new checkbox option

 "Bad Sku Warning" that will cause a sound alert and

 an extra warning box to appear when a bad Sku is

 entered. This is help in situations when you are scanning

 many Sku's very fast and may not be paying much attention

 to the screen. Without the warning you may end up scanning

 without realizing that the program is not in the correct

 mode for scanning.

 

On the Physical Inventory screen there is a new option to export

 the physical count list to an Excel XLS file.

 

On the Physical Inventory screen, when you are starting to enter

  fresh new counts you have to confirm the deletion of

  the previous list by typing DELETE followed by the number

  of previous Sku's - e.g. DELETE 4517.  This number of

  Sku's is different from the quantity total at the bottom

  of the screen (because some items could have a quantity of

  2, etc.). Some users found this difference disconcerting so

  starting this version, both values are now the total quantity count.

 

 

 

Version 2.630                                             12/26/2013

===============================================================

 

When retrieving a previous sale, on rare occasions one

 might see a "2H" error meaning duplicate sale number.

 Starting this version, VJS will fix the duplication

 (possibly by adding a suffix to one of the sale numbers)

 and let you continue.

 

The Sales Report by Clerk / Commission report previously had

 problem when selecting the "Initial Date" option. This has

 been resolved in this update.

 

When viewing the images where an inventory item or appraisal

 has multiple pictures, there is a button to select which

 picture is "Primary" (the first one to show)

 Under certain conditions before the Primary button didn't

 take effect and this update resolves that issue.

 

When you are viewing an item in the Inventory Status screen

 you can switch the search option between Sku No, Style

 and Part Number. Starting this version, when you switch

 from say, Sku to Style, the contents of the search box will

 change from having the Sku number of the current item in it

 to having the Style number of the current item.

 (previously the search box was emptied when you changed

 the search method.)

 

When changing the number or vendor of a received shipment/invoice

 certain uncommon conditions (with other users on a network)

 could prevent the date update. This version update can bypass

 the conflict.

 

A new option from the repair screen allows you to change the

 Job Number of a repair. (Note that jobs entered via

 the sales screen have a Sale Number, not a job number, so this

 doesn't apply to all sales.)

 

If you retrieve a repair and make a change and do *not* choose to

 save it but instead choose X-Search in order to locate a different

 repair, previous versions would not save the change.

 Starting in this version, you will be *asked* at this point

 whether you want to keep or discard the changes.

 This can help prevent inadvertently losing data updates.

 

A certain sequence of 'jumping' back and forth between the

 repair screen and X-Tra search screen without saving could

 lead to entering two jobs with the same ticket number.

 A loophole has been closed to prevent those possible duplicates.

 

A 'cross-hatch' pattern now covers the part of the Inventory

 Entry screen at the times when it's not active. This helps

 you to know not to try to click buttons on it at those times.

 

[archive-quote; transcan; norepairxs,ipl,xchgrtntip]

 

Version 2.620                                             12/06/2013

===============================================================

 

The Repair Status Quick Update screen has a new feature

 for when you type a sale number which has multiple

 repair lines. Where previously it would select just

 the first job, it will now ask if you want to

 add all lines to the update list.

 As before, if you want to select just one particular

 line, you can type the suffixed repair number like

 456-2 for line 2 of sale 456.

 You can also now remove items inadvertently added

 to the repair list by right-clicking that line in

 the list.

 

When you move an inventory item from a Memo to a billed

 invoice payable, the item no longer appears on the Memo.

 This update adds the option, while editing the memo,

 to review all the items that were *originally* on that

 same memo - even if they have been subsequently moved to

 a different invoice. Choose Options at the top toolbar, then

 Review All Items From Original Memo/Invoice.

 Note that this feature can apply only to new memos added

 after this update - not retroactively to previous memos.

 

 

Shopkeeper now checks to see if the "Windows Print Spooler"

 is running while printing a report. It's extremely

 rare for it to not be running, but printing with

 the spooler off can crash a program.

 

An easy access to some handy Windows "utilities" has

 been added to the Options button at the top right

 corner of the VJS Main Menu. [e.g. direct access

 to printers, the My Computer screen, the Shopkeeper

 custom reports folder.]

 

A new remote assistance option is available in case

 you don't have LogMeIn. This uses the Remote Desktop

 program built-in to Windows. [You'd only access

 this feature if Compulink asked you to in relation

 to a technical support question.]

 

 

Fixes a picture problem that under rare circumstances

 could add a picture to a Sku number that has

 no picture assigned.

 

[The picture-check utility previously would look for

one picture matching the Sku number; now it will

check for additional ones with the suffixes A to G.

As before, this utility still also checks for pictures

matching the style number.]

 

[errscreen; bkupdeltmpfiles]

 

Version 2.610                                             11/21/2013

===============================================================

 

When you change the sales tax rate in Preferences this

 affects new sales entered afterwards. However,

 pending, unfinalized layaways and special orders and repairs

 are not changed. A new option on the sales tax page

 of Preferences allows you to update all of these

 outstanding sales so that they will have the correct

 rate for when they are paid off and finalized.

 

All report screens will now open up with the "focus"

 on the first selection line. This way you can more

 quickly navigate with your keyboard cursor keys to

 set your criteria without having to click with the mouse.

 

When running the Itemized Sales Report, an Excel XLS file

 of the results is simultaneously put in the VJS Reports

 folder on the Windows Desktop. What is new in this update

 is the addition of the sale location - i.e. the location of

 the inventory item from which the item was sold.

 

On the Customer Reports screen in previous versions, the option

 to calculate customer purchases by Sales Dept code (separate

 from major code) was not active. Starting this version, it is.

 

For situations where the total number of all pictures for all

 appraisals becomes very large, (e.g. over 10,000 or so) it

 is now possible for the pictures to be shared among

 more than one subfolder instead of just one folder.

 [If this is needed, ask Compulink for details.]

 

 

 [receivepo; apprpix; nccremxx]

 

Version 2.600                                             11/12/2013

===============================================================

 

Running the Inventory Adjustments Report now simultaneously

 creates an Excel XLS export file which is put

 in the VJS Report folder on the Windows Desktop.

 

The Customer Reports and Mailings screen has long had a feature

 to allow you to select customers based on key words that you

 add to the Notes or Comments are of the customer profile.

 This is powerful because you can unlimited different

 keywords to each customer - unlike the one customer type.

         What is new in this version is that you can now

 also *exclude* customers by keywords. E.g. you could flag

 customers as [NOCATALOG] and exclude those from a mailing

 even if you also give them another keyword such as [CHRISTMASCLUB]

 

When you make payments on layaways and special orders, the date

 of the sale is brought forward to the current date.

 There is now a simple way to see the original date of a sale

 by retrieving the sale and then positioning the mouse

 over the date at the top-right corner. A "Tool Tip" message

 will show the original date if it's different than the

 current date.

 

Related to the above, certain boxes in Shopkeeper display

  "Tool Tip" message when you hover the mouse over that

  box or area. This message can contain a mini help message

  or additional information. In previous versions, this

  message would show for up to 3 seconds. Starting in

  this version the message will remain for as long as

  you keep the mouse pointer stationary. This can make

  the messages much more useful.

 

 

When receiving merchandise previously on a purchase order

 (e.g. from a special order) where the retail price

 was previously known but the cost was not (and was

 initially zero) when you enter the actual cost

 previous versions would automatically assign a new

 retail price. Starting in this version, this will

 not happen. (however, for new items without an

 expected retail price, VJS will continue to suggest

 the selling price.)

 

Also when receiving inventory from a purchase order where

 the item was previously on a special order sale,

 previous versions of VJS would issue a warning that

 the Quantity appears wrong. This warning is needed

 for non-special order items, but for special order

 items, the quantity in stock is supposed to be already

 reduced to zero so starting this version that

 message in this instance is unhelpful and has been

 removed.

 

The checks printed from the Accounting Menu have the possibility

 to print the bank account name. (This requires customizing

 and would require additional information from Compulink.)

 

 

Version 2.59                                             11/08/2013

===============================================================

 

The Notes area of the vendor screen previously was an

 all-capitals area, but now allows upper- and lower-

 case which can be useful if you store vendor

 website passwords there for cut-n-paste.

 

For jewelers using the financial reports:

 If, somehow, you end up with a payable or a GJ entry

 or a checkbook record that is out of balance, a warning

 will appear when you run a financial report and a

 screen will appear allowing you to correct those entries.

 An out of balance entry is one where the total doesn't

 match the sum of each of the G/L code breakdowns.

 In addition, you can access this review screen via the

 Utilities area via the Options button at the top right

 of any Menu.

 

Addition of a utility to correct the city name in your

 customer records. The most common symptom is when you

 add a new customer with a certain zip code and the

 wrong city is selected. This means one or more of

 your customer records has the wrong city.

 This is accessed via the Utilities screen.

 

On the Customer Profile screen, the Mobile phone number

 has been moved into the first position - because it's

 more often a customer's primary telephone.

 For several versions, the word "Mobile" on the customer

 screen will be bold and underlines in order to make

 this change more obvious.

 The Mobile number has also been moved into first position on

 the Customer Xtra-Search screen.

 

In the Security configuration area of Preferences you can now

 permit view-only access to Preferences where in previous

 versions there was either make-changes access or

 no access.

 

When exporting the Itemized Sales Report to PDF file

 for a small number of items, previous versions

 would have resulted in the style number not printing.

 This update will reduce the chance of that occurring.

 

 

[Misc fix keycode/name resolution][magstripx1]

 

Version 2.582                                             10/29/2013

===============================================================

 

In previous versions it has been possible to merge the records

 of one vendor code with another, e.g. in the case of

 accidental duplicates or if one vendor buys another. The change

 in this        version is that additional warnings have to be

 acknowledged before the merge occurs. This is because merged

 records cannot be unmerged.

 FYI, to change a vendor code and/or to merge two vendors,

 retrieve the old vendor code in the Vendor Maintenance

 screen, then Ctrl-Click the vendor code.

 (You'll notice these instructions if you hover the mouse

 over the vendor code.)

 

 

Some areas of possible 'conflict' between two users have been

 resolved, such as when at one computer an accounts receivable

 credit memo is being entered at the same time at another computer

 a charge account sale is being entered.

 

 

[REPSKUTODESC ]

 

Version 2.581                                             10/23/2013

===============================================================

 

 

A certain sequence of entering sales and the sales

 clerk initials in a particular way could result

 in the sales items not being assigned to a clerk.

 A change in this program closes that loophole.

 

From the sales screen you can enter Wish List / Quote

 sales, however you can't print them using the

 usual "Print Receipt" button - because that means

 save as a real sale and print a real receipt.

 Instead, you can print a different Wish List / Quote

 ticket by choosing Options at the top of the sales screen

 followed by "Print a Quote Sheet / Wish List."

 In many previous versions, choosing this print option

 would work fine, but it would present a confusing

 message suggesting that the Quote  Wish-List had

 already been saved as a real sale.  This erroneous

 message has been removed in this update.

 

The utility programs area add the utility to force the

 Shopkeeper inventory quantities to match the last

 physical inventory. ( This isn't commonly used - only

 run this on advice from Compulink. )

 

 

[nomemsgnewdata, gl]

 

 

Version 2.580                                             10/17/2013

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 so that it will import the new MLB Charms list for

 November 2013 into Jewelry Shopkeeper. The related

 images are not yet available, but they will be added

 later.

 In addition, this catalog update includes the significant

 price and cost changes ( reductions) for the watch line

 so in addition to the Import step, you will first need

 to run the Update step.

 You can use the same access code as you used

 for the Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013 update.

 (no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)

 

The "More Details" page of the repair tracking screen

 includes additional fields to track the historical

 progress of a job through Waxing, Casting, Stock,

 General, Molding and Setting.

 

The Profit & Loss / Income Statement report has been

 adjusted to include a line identifying the Vendor

 Discounts Taken This Period. In previous versions,

 the value was deducted from the overall Cost of Goods

 Sold, but the discount line wasn't shown, which could

 have been mysterious.

 

 

Version 2.570                                             10/14/2013

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 with the new inventory list for November 2013.

 This will add the Essence Collection and two

 images per new style.

 You can use the same access code as you used

 for the Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013 update.

 (no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)

 

 

A somewhat recent update introduced an error in the

 calculation of the column called average inventory

 cost value of the GMROI report. This version fixes that.

 

[extra verification to prevent customer numbers lower than 0]

 

Version 2.561                                             10/10/2013

===============================================================

 

From the sales screen you can double-click

 the clerk initials at the top right in order

 to display the clerk profile screen. In previous

 versions this method of accessing the clerk screen

 did not check the required security settings, but

 starting this version it does. I.e. you may want

 to prevent access to the clerk profile screen.

 

The Detailed Layaway Report now includes the customers'

 phone numbers.

 

[bpenrldt, mgwnostatck]

 

Version 2.560                                             10/08/2013

===============================================================

 

From the Inventory Reports screen the normal layout is

 line-by-line showing each Sku, but there are various

 other styles. One other style is the Vendor Summary.

 In previous versions, this layout always included

 the value of layaway items even if you chose to include

 them. Starting this version, the vendor summary inventory

 report will respect the exclude-layaway option.

 

The commission report now has the option to select sales based

 on the date the inventory items were received. Previously

 this option was not active. For example you can use

 this combination to see what success sales people are having

 in clearing old merchandise.

 

On the Inventory Status screen you have the option (set in Preferences)

 to show the cost in code as opposed to digits. This is not a new

 feature and, FYI, you can double-click the cost-code to switch

 to digits (if you have security clearance.)

 Setting this feature on also hid the cost on the Extended Details

 page. Starting in this version, you can also double-click the

 extended costs in the right-most column of the Extended Details

 page to switch them to readable digits.

 

It should be vanishingly rare, but if you happen to end up

 with a repair that has no number, starting this

 version, if you try to retrieve such a job, you will

 be prompted to assign it a repair number at that time.

 (In previous versions such a job could not be retrieved.)

 

On the customer profile (name and address) screen there

 is a box called Mailing Label Name (aka Salutation).

 Typically, youwant to leave it empty and any receipt or label

 will use the first and last name (and spouse). But if you

 fill in Mailing Label Name, that will supersede.

 Because this box is frequently not needed, and because

 accidentally filling it in with the address is an

 easy mistake to make, you can disable this box

 in Preferences.

 The change in this update is that if you disable it

 the box will remain *visible* but not accessible.

 If you need to correct a mistake, you can temporarily

 re-enable it by double-clicking this box.

 In previous areas, disabling this box make it completely

 invisible so you could not access it to correct any

 mistakes.

 

A minor Credit Card Processing improvement helps avoid problems

 for those rare cases where the customer name

 includes digits or non-alphabet characters

 (such as /'s slashes )

 which can cause problems with processing.

 

The 40-column (roll of paper) layouts for the repair

 tickets        have been modified so that they do *not*

 print $0.00 for the estimate amount when the

 estimate has been left blank. This matches the

 other formats such as the 3-part tickets.

 

In Version 2.552 choosing the "Reset to Default" option

 in Customize Menu could result in menus with

 just one or two items. This update restores

 that feature to its normal setting.

 

Version 2.552                                             09/28/2013

===============================================================

 

The Simple Layaway Report now has the option to select

 a certain date range for the Date of Last Payment

 (e.g. to be able to run a smaller report of

 just those who have not made a payment in over, say,

 two months.)

 

When you un-attach a repair from a sales ticket, VJS

 needs to assign a temporary ticket number which

 is a random set of characters to be unique. Starting

 in this version, this temporary number is removed

 once you re-bill it to another sales ticket - resulting

 in a "cleaner" looking repair screen. Also, when

 you remove a ticket and later re-bill it, the original

 billing Sku number is now retained where in previous

 versions it was not.

 

[ret-mem-itype2-warn-optn; clncondsarecrelat; invckperf; addinvcapexh;

repenvpx4]

 

 

Version 2.550                                             09/17/2013

===============================================================

 

The Word Search option within the purple Inventory Search

 screen previously did not work if you used lower-case

 descriptions. Starting with this update, the word search

 is not-case sensitive.

 

During inventory entry, the maximum length of the invoice

 number is 11 characters (as before). However, in previous

 versions when you entered an 11-character (the maximum) invoice

 or memo number, the "Add/Edit Inventory" button did not

 activate immediately - it required re-clicking in the invoice

 number box and pressing <Enter>

 Starting with this version, this extra step is not needed

 for the "Add/Edit Inventory button" to activate.

 

For the Inventory Status page there are security options

 which can prevent the cost from showing at all, or

 which can make the cost show in code instead of digits.

 Starting with this version, the preference to show

 the cost in code on the inventory status screen, or

 the security option to not show the cost there at all

 will also apply to the add inventory screen that appears

 when you add a special order during a sale.

 

 I.e., you may not want the cost to show up at that point

 because the customer may be with you.

 

The Pandora Sales Analysis upload feature (see 2.530) below

 has been updated to work with Secure FTP so now you

 can both create and send the files in one step, where

 with previous versions you would have had to upload

 manually.

 

 

Version 2.543                                             09/13/2013

===============================================================

 

Corrections and adjustments have been made to the GemWhere RFID program.

 

Changes have been made so that the social security box

 in the charge account extended details page is compatible

 between JS-Classic and VJS.

 

The Equifax export utility is available now in VJS.

 

Version 2.542                                             09/10/2013

===============================================================

 

Adjustments to the Activity page of the Inventory Status screen

 to correct the interstore transfer list which would display

 incorrectly in some previous versions.

 

Version 2.541                                             09/09/2013

===============================================================

 

In previous versions, applying a credit slip payment to an

 outstanding layaway would not automatically bring

 the date of the layaway forward. Starting with this version

 the date will be automatically updated if you don't

 change it yourself.

 

After adding a credit, the Gift Certificate and Credit Slip

 screen will now return back to the XTra-Search screen

 (if XTra-Search is set in Preferences) instead of

 to the simple customer search box.

 

 

Version 2.540                                             09/04/2013

===============================================================

 

The Appraisal screen and the Notes page of the Inventory Status

 screen each have a spell check button. Starting with this

 update you can now choose to have VJS use the spell-checker

 of Microsoft Word. The advantage is that the Word spell-

 checker is significantly more sophisticated than the

 built-in spell checker. Also, sharing the spell-check

 with word means that any of your jewelry-specific words

 or abbreviations that you add to the dictionary in Word

 will also be referenced when you use VJS.

 

 To activate this feature, check the box "Use Microsoft Word

 Spell Check" on the "Local Defaults" page of Preferences.

 Note that this feature is only possible if your computer

 has Microsoft Word Installed. In the same vein, changing

 this option on Computer A, does not change this option

 on Computer B (other computers.)

 

 This is not guaranteed to work with all installations of

 Microsoft Word.

         

In previous versions, on the "Notes" page of the Inventory Status screen

 the values for the Reorder Levels didn't always immediately

 'refresh' so they might show zero even though they were actually

 saved. They would appear if you clicked in those boxes, but n this update

 those values will show immediately and this will avoid puzzlement.

 

In the Inventory Status screen, the "Print a Tag" button now appears

 only on the "Main" page because the other pages do not all leave

 enough room for it to show and in previous versions there was

 overlap.

 

The "Price-Point" markup is used to suggest selling prices

 when neither the major class code nor the vendor have

 a markup formula. In previous versions VJS allowed you

 to enter cents as dollars which would result in unexpected

 retail prices. This is resolved in this update.

 

The repair entry screen has additional verifications to detect

 any (very unlikely ) case of a job being saved without

 a job number.

 

Changes on the Activity page of Inventory Status may

 prevent extra lines showing on the Store Transfers list.

 

 

Version 2.530                                             08/15/2013

===============================================================

 

The Sales Report by Clerk and Commissions has a new

 sort option that can sort by sale number within clerk name.

 This takes the place of the date within clerk name sort option.

 However, the date within clerk initials sort is still available

 and is still the default sort option.

 

A new Preference for the sales screen allows you to automatically

 fill in the Dept code for any new sale with a pre-defined

 choice. E.g. you may want all sales to be assigned a Dept code

 of "REG" by default (unless explicitly overruled and changed.)

 

Another new Preference for the sales screen allows you to choose that

 the sales screen first stops on the Dept code box for new

 sales.

 

The Detailed Layaway Report has a new option to allow you to select

 by (or exclude by) the Dept code added to the sale.

 

 

A new utility is available for reporting Pandora sales and inventory

 to your Pandora rep. [ask for details if this is needed.]

 

 

Version 2.520                                             08/09/2013

===============================================================

 

The tag printing area also has the option to print "Product Cards" such

 as business-card sized hint cards. What's new in this area in this update

 is a new format to print four product cards per letter page. This is designed

 for Avery four-per page post-card size laser printer sheets. These

 could serve as inventory index cards, or you could print onto regular

 paper stock for a larger format inventory report.

 

The repair pages of Preferences let you specify whether or not you

 want to require that repair tickets have a clerk, a location and a due

 date. In some previous versions, these rules were not always

 enforce on new tickets. That has been corrected in this update.

 

When using the Repair screen directly (not via a sales ticket)

 after you save or clear the current repair and are returned

 to the Customer X-Tra Search screen, previous versions did not

 immediately highlight the most recently used customer (and didn't

 show the associated sales and repairs.) In this version, the

 most recent customer will be highlighted and her transactions

 shown. This is more consistent with the behavior from the sales

 screen and is convenient when reviewing several transactions

 in a row from the same customer

 

In the Inventory Report screen, when change the Itemized or Summarized

 option to "Snapshot Summary" a new addition is that simultaneously,

 VJS will create an Excel XLS file containing the inventory aging

 for each vendor. This XLS file, "InvSnapShotVen.xls" is put in the

 VJS Reports folder. The standard overall summary report continues

 to be shown on-screen or printed.

 

The Detailed Layaway Reports and Statements reporting screen

 by default excludes special orders and repairs, which is

 different than the Simple Layaway Reports which include

 them all. In this version the option to include them all

 has been moved from the Full Selection page to the

 Quick Selection page to make this fact more obvious

 and also quicker to change.

 

This same Detailed Layaway Reports and Statements previously

 systematically excluded sales tickets which contained any

 repair Sku's. Now this will not be the case unless you specifically

 choose Layaways only.

 

The Purchase Order reports in previous versions could not show

 totals over $1M and that limitation is removed in this version.

 

Entering a credit or debit memo against an in-house charge account

 does not have an option to print that memo. However, the adjustment

 goes into the payment file and it is possible to retrieve the

 "payment" entry and print a payment receipt. What is new in this version

 is that debit/credit memos printed this way will now show "Cr.Memo" so

 that it's clearer that they are not regular payments.

 

The Compare Two Date Ranges sales report now includes figures for

 Average price paid for each item.

 

The performance increase of Drop/lookup lists in version 2.51 had a

 side effect such that if you typed a word very fast that could at

 times prevent the lookup list from dropping-down. The lookup list

 at that point has been restored in this version - even with fast typing.

 

 

 

 

Version 2.510                                     07/24/2013

===============================================================

 

The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

 with the new inventory list for Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013. (Drops 5 & 6)

 This will add about 200 new item styles to your inventory

 file along with the associated pictures.

 A new access code is required (no charge if you

 have the Maintenance Plan.)

 

From the Vendors X-tra Search screen, you can now double-click

 an invoice number to pop-up the invoice entry screen with

 that invoice selected.

 

The performance of Drop/lookup lists has been optimized. In

 some areas, such as vendor invoice lookup this change

 can be very noticeable (especially on slower networks

 and where the data files are large.)

 

When entering inventory a new option allows you to cause VJS

 to not verify the manufacturer code that you enter.

 (this does not refer to the vendor code)

 This is for very special cases where you may use the

 Manufacturer code for purposes other than its intended use.

 To enable this option, add the keyword  NOMFGCK

 anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences.

 

 

Version 2.501                                             07/17/2013

===============================================================

 

The previous version 2.50 introduced an erroneous message

 relating to removing repair items from a sale when you

 exited a sale (with repair items) by clicking the red Close / [X]

 button at the top right corner of the sales screen. This update

 removes that message under those circumstances.

 

 

Version 2.500                                           07/16/2013

===============================================================

 

In some previous versions, the additional pages "Notes", "Extended Details"

 and "Stone Details" of the Inventory Status screen did not always

 immediately refresh for the current item and you may have had to click

 the boxes for them to refresh. From this version, the updating occurs

 immediately.

         

For users with very large data files, the "Activity" page of

 the Inventory Status screen could be slow in previous versions.

 This page has been optimized to work much faster.

 

In the Security area of Preferences is a setting called

 View Other Clerks' Profile which can restrict clerk

 AA opening the Clerk screen and viewing clerk BB's

 profile and sales.

 Starting in this version this setting will now restrict

 clerk AA to running the Commission Report for only her own sales.

 So, where previously you may have had to disallow access to

 the commission report screen, you can now allow it without granting

 access to everyone's sales results.

 

In previous versions, one layout of the GMROI report had the wrong

 margin calculation on the grand total line. This was the version

 by major class code, sorted by class (not group) This has

 been corrected in this update.

 

The version of the Commission report which subtotals by major code

 in previous versions had a problem with the subtotal lines even

 though the total was ok. That has been corrected in this update.

 

APG brand USB cash drawers (554 series) are now supported.

 (In addition to the previously supported brands:  

         MS Cash Drawer and MF Cash Drawer.)

         

When running the GMROI report, if any items have 'problem' cost or

 retail values, that can cause certain lines on the report

 to show as asterisks (****'s). Starting in this version if any

 such items are encountered a list of suspect Sku numbers is presented

 so that you can check or correct them.

         

In previous versions, when retrieving a Memo via the Inventory Entry

 screen and exiting without saving changes, under certain conditions

 the date box of the memo could be blanked out. This problem

 has been solved.

 

When you add (bill) unbilled repair jobs to a sale, you have the option

 (in Preferences) of having the repair instructions transfer to

 the description line of the sales screen. In previous versions, you

 would sometimes seen odd characters in the sale description in place

 of where there were line-breaks in the repair instructions. In this

 versions those stray line-break marks are no longer copied.

 

When you add (bill) unbilled repair jobs to a sale, the price estimate and

 cost estimate from the repair screen are usually transferred from

 the repair screen to the sales screen. A new change in this version

 is that if the unbilled job did not have a Sku number pre-assigned

 and if the unbilled job did not have an estimate, then when you bill it,

 the price and cost associated with the Sku number that you select (while

 adding the job to the sale) will be assigned to the sales line.

 

Similar to the above, a new option has been added to the Repairs section of

 Preferences for        when you add (bill) unbilled repair jobs to a sale. The

 option allows you to apply the price and cost of the repair Sku added

 during billing to *override* the price and cost estimate on the repair

 screen even if they are non-zero. This option, of course, is not active

 by default. On the Repair Defaults Cont. page of Preferences, locate

 the option "When billing unbilled jobs, override estimate with Sku

 Price and Cost?"

 

Some changes when deleting sales which have repair items attached: You

 may create a sale and add repair lines to it - each with a repair ticket

 screen, and then decide to delete the sale before saving it - by choosing

 Delete in the top tool bar. At that point you are asked what to do with

 the related repair detail: leave it unbilled r delete it.

 In previous versions in either case only the first repair

 line was being deleted or unbilled. In this update, if there are several

 such repair detail lines, they are all either unbilled or deleted (according

 to your choice.)

 

Similar to the above case where you start to add a sale with repair lines

 attached. If you exit the sale ambiguously by clicking the red [X] at the

 top right corner, you are asked if you want to Save or Delete or Ignore.

 If you choose Delete, in previous versions, you were not asked what to do

 with the related repair lines, so they would remain in the repair file but

 with an ambiguous state [they would seem to be billed, but the related sale

 would have been deleted.]  In this version you are asked what to do with

 the related repair items with the same choices and results as when you

 explicitly click the Delete sale button at the top of the sales screen.

 

 These changes should reduce the number of puzzling, orphaned repair lines.

 

 

 

 [ tjsnojavafx]

 

 

Version 2.490                                           06/25/2013

===============================================================

 

 Webcam imaging-taking now defaults to a newer method

         which has access to higher camera resolutions.

         However, ii case of incompatibility with certain computers /

         camera combinations, add the keyword ALTWEBCAM1 anywhere in

         Miscellaneous Options in the Preferences screen

         to return to the previous, simpler method.

 

 The general ledger account names can now be entered

          in mixed upper-lower case which can help to keep

          the chart of accounts matched with QuickBooks.

         

 The email message box (e.g. accessed via the customer profile screen

         previously would switch to upper-case only if you had

         selected upper-case only for customer names and addresses.

         Starting in this version the email message may always

         be mixed-case.

         

 The sales receipts can now have access to the Alternative /Web-

         Description and to the Style Notes. [if needed, request

         instructions from Compulink as these do *not* show

         automatically.]

 

 Support has been added for APG brand USB cash drawers.

         

 [ cleanup err 39 classes; recordstamp-off-zmisc, tjsnojava, zoverpmt]

         

Version 2.480                                           06/10/2013

===============================================================

         

 When you use more than one webcam to capture images

         VJS will now remember your resolution preferences

         for each one separately. In addition the list of

         available resolutions is now 'cleaner' in that

         only the resolutions applicable to the currently

         selected webcam will show - instead of the list

         for all of the webcams.

         

 An optional 'preview delay' option is now available

         for webcam image capture. This may help for

         certain computers / combinations of webcams.

         To enable this, add the key word OCXSTARTPREVIEWDELAY 500  

         anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences

         for a 1/2 second delay.

 

 Another change in the internet search of customers by phone

         has been added to match the change in results of the 411

         website. The First/Last name position were being switched

         but now that is resolved.

         

 If you remain on the Activity page of the Inventory Status screen

         while selecting different Sku numbers, the activity logs

         now update immediately. In previous versions, the sales

         logs would update immediately, but the other logs such as

         adjustments would not update until you clicked on the Main

         tab and then returned to the Activity page.

                         

 The Itemized sales report sorted by date has a Markup % column

         but previously this reported only for individual items, not

         for the daily subtotals or the report subtotals. In this

         update, those subtotal and total Markup values are calculated

         and reported.

         

 A change prevents a (benign) error message that could appear,

         under certain circumstances, after entering a payment

         on account on A/R accounts.

 

 A change prevents a (benign) error #3 message that could appear,

         under certain circumstances, when running a cleanup.

 

 

Version 2.470                                           05/20/2013

===============================================================

 

 The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

         with the new inventory list for Summer 2013. (Drops 3 & 4)

         This will add about 100 new item styles to your inventory

         file along with the associated pictures.

         (A new access code is required only if you have *not* already

         entered a Valentines or Spring 2013 code.)

 

 Several itemized inventory report layouts were not

         optimized in previous versions for the save-as-pdf

         output option and some columns of figures would not

         appear in the pdf file. Those reports have now been

         updated.

 

 Additional information is now available when exporting customer

         lists from the Customer Reports and Labels screen.

         When you choose purchase criteria and when you choose

         the Large export file option, the export file now adds

         columns including details of the most recent item

         purchased including date, Sku, description, price,

         style and manufacturer.

 

 To prevent accidental over-payment entries, previous

         versions did not accept over-payments on cash sales.

         However, this prevented you from accepting over-payment

         by check were you give cash-back.

         This version adds a new option on the Sales Cont. page

         of Preferences "Permit Over-Payment on Sales"

         This still doesn't permit a cash sale to actually have

         an over-payment as you will be prompted for the

         negative payment before you can save the sale.

         

 

 

Version 2.462                                           05/17/2013

===============================================================

 

 Includes the fix for a sales screen problem earlier

         today in V 2.461

 

Version 2.461                                           05/17/2013

===============================================================

 

 In previous versions, the Style / Alt Job Number box

         was pre-filled in with the same number as the

         ticket number. Starting this version, this alternative

         number box will *not* be filled in by default.

         

         [If needed, there exists an option to re-activate

         filling it in: Add FILLALTJOBB to Miscellaneous Options

         in Preferences to fill it in for Billed jobs,

         FILLALTJOBU for unbilled jobs.]

 

 In previous versions, retrieving an existing sale and changing

         the sale type (e.g. from Cash to Layaway) would change the

         default sale type to Layaway (in this example) until you

         exited the sales screen. That is no longer the behavior, i.e.

         the next new sale will revert to the preferred default

         sale type.

         

 This update includes a fix for the "Save and Clear Vendor"

         option from the Update Multiple Repairs screen. That

         particular option had a problem after the SMS/Texting

         feature was added in a recent update.

 

 FYI, you'll see additional small "list" icons on some of the

         buttons on the Main Menu. They don't do anything other

         than help you more quickly identify the buttons which

         take you to other menus.

         

 

 [graphics]

 

 

Version 2.460                                           05/13/2013

===============================================================

 

 When you run the Entire Customer History report, you now

         have the choice to limit the report to a date range

         that you select. This is useful when you need only

         a certain year of a for a customer with many years

         of activity.

 

 Another addition to the customer history is that it

         simultaneously creates a (very simplified) Excel

         version of the history in the VJS Reports folder

         on the Windows Desktop in the file Custhist.xls

 

 On the repairs page of Preferences you can record your

         usual lead-time in days to help estimate the due

         date of repairs. You can also mark which days are

         not to be suggested as due dates so you don't accidentally

         print, onto the customer's stub, a due date when you're

         closed. Those are not new, but the change in this version

         is that you have to option to increase the lead-time

         by the skipped days. E.g. If you're lead-time is three

         days and you accept a job on Saturday, but Sunday

         is a skipped day, previous versions would always

         suggest Tuesday as the due date. Now you can optionally

         choose to extend by any skipped days - e.g. in this

         case Wednesday could be pre-calculated.

 

 Version 2.42 added the ability to add vendor-specific

         messages to sales receipts (see below for more details)

         An unwanted side-effect was that if, for some reason,

         you had two vendor records with the same vendor code

         then the sales receipt could print the item twice.

         Of course, in such a case you'd want to erase the duplicate

         vendor entry, but this update, in the meantime, at least

         stops the items printing twice on the receipts

         

 Changing the name on a sales ticket in previous versions

         could leave repairs or appraisals previously linked

         to that sales ticket in the name of the original customer.

         This has been corrected in this version.

         

 Normally, the Assemble Disassemble screen is used to create

         a brand new Sku number from component Sku's that are

         already in stock - in which case Shopkeeper will add

         the component costs and retails and suggest them

         for the new Sku. In the new update, if you start

         with an existing (non-assembled) Sku and add a further

         Sku to it, you will be asked if you want to increase

         the cost and retail of the main Sku by the amount

         of the additions - not by the sum of the components

         alone.

 

 [commerr]

 

Version 2.451                                           05/07/2013

===============================================================

 

 It is important to bring inventory and sales analyses

         to tradeshows such as the upcoming JCK Show because

         this can help you retain focus on how much and

         where to invest among different lines and price-points.

 

 In the latest version of VJS (v2.451 or higher) a feature has been added to

         let Shopkeeper users anonymously combine their sales information

         with other participating Shopkeeper users.

 

 About a week before the JCK Show, Compulink will provide, only to participating

         jewelers, three different analyses of the merged data.

 

 The PDF documents will be different versions of  

         the "Return on Investment by price-point within vendor" report.

         - One report will show the combined totals of all participating stores.

         - The second will be  only stores that share your store's approximate sales volume.

         - The third will be combined by region (Northeast, South, Midwest & West)

 

 Here's how you can participate:

         At the VJS Main menu choose Options and select Utilities.

         Select the "On Web Site" tab. Select "Refresh List". Select "Share GMROI Info"

         and click Download. This utility may be updated from time to time

         so if you re-run it check the date of the Already Downloaded version

         before running it.

   

 Now select the Already Downloaded tab.

         Highlight SHARE_GMROI_INFO and click Run.

 

 Within about a day you should receive a confirmation e-mail that your

         uploaded file was received correctly.

         - If you don't participate you won't be eligible to receive the results.

         - This service is for jewelers with the Maintenance Plan.

         - Even if you don't plan to go to JCK this year, you can still participate.

         - The vendor phone numbers are used to identify vendors.

         If your vendor list doesn't have an identifiable vendor phone,

         the sales information for that vendor won't be included

         (regular, toll free, fax numbers are compared against a master list)

         - No identifiable store information is included in the reports.

 

 

Version 2.450                                           05/06/2013

===============================================================

 

 The Repair Reports have a new option to either exclude

         the unbilled jobs or to show only the unbilled jobs

         (jobs not yet attached to a sale.)

         Choose Full Selection from Repair Reports to see this

         choice.

 

 The repair envelopes have been changed so that if you

         have filed in the "Mailing Label Name" box on the

         customer profile screen, that name will be printed

         instead of the usual First, Spouse, Last format.

         (E.g. you might want the envelope to show John Smith

         and Mary Adams instead of the usual John and Mary Smith.)

         This change will not affect a your envelope layout

         if you are using a customized layout that you adjusted

         yourself.

 

 On the tag printing screen if you select a vendor code

         of just one letter or digit, in previous versions

         all items with all vendor codes starting with

         that character would be selected. Now only that

         one vendor code will be selected. [however, in

         general it is not recommended that vendor codes

         be just one character - three is preferred.]

         

 In version 2.40 the address area (zone 2) of the sales screen

         was changed to show the spouse's name (if present). For

         certain customers the Spouse wouldn't show if there was

         too much other information such as a charge accounts and

         many phone numbers. That has been reformatted in

         this update.

         

         [utils, sappv, sys2450, inexe]

 

Version 2.441                                           04/18/2013

===============================================================

 

 The web export option of the Inventory Report by Style

         now adds the Web Status and Web Category fields

         as available fields to be included in the export

         file. These fields are visible on the "Style Det."

         page of Inventory Status

 

 The Internet phone search, updated in version 2.440

         has been further adjusted because in a number of

         results the street address line could not be extracted

         and in this version the street address can be

         identified in many more cases.

 

 Some problems with the texting of multiple customers via

         the Update Multiple Repairs screen have been resolved.

         

 The formatting for the pick list of SMS-Text messages

         has been adjusted to make it easier to read -

         (especially the one on the customer notes screen

         which was the most awkward before.)

         This change will take effect after the first cleanup

         done with this version.

         

Version 2.440                                           04/12/2013

===============================================================

 

 You can now send Text / SMS messages to repair customers.

         From the Notes page of repairs, you can pick a message

         and send it if the customer has a mobile phone number.

         

 You can also send texts to multiple repair customers simultaneously

         via the Repair Status Quick Update screen. I.e. you might

         enter a list of 10 jobs and simultaneously mark them all

         as complete and send the customers a text.

         The "Txt" column shows a check-mark by customers who have

         a mobile number.

 

 You can also send Text / SMS messages to customers unrelated to

         repairs. This is from the Notes page of the customer profile

         screen.

         

 Currently the SMS feature requires you to create an SMS account

         with Red Oxygen (www.redoxygen.com) and you enter your

         user-id and password and email into Shopkeeper via Preferences,

         Security, Web Service Settings, Configure Accounts.

         You can start with a test account at first to test the

         service. After that you can choose the level of account

         that you need. (i.e. number of SMS's per month.)

         Messages sent with trial account will have Red Oxygen publicity

         that non-trial accounts will not add.

 

 You create a list of pre-made messages for repairs and customers

         by right-clicking the SMS message box and then you choose

         Edit Selections. There, you can add entries with a short

         name in the Selections column and the message at the bottom

         in the Text to Add box. Note that the message can contain

         merge codes that will be personalized for the customer.

         E.g. [First] becomes the customer's first name. [Job] becomes

         the repair number. Do include the [Square Brackets]

         Other merge codes are available, though less likely for SMS

         because the message should be short.

         [FullName]  [Address1] [Address2] [City]  [State]  [Zip] [Country]

         [Phone1] [Spouse] [First+Spouse] [Last]

         ( These other merge codes may be used in the email part of VJS )

         

 - - - - -

         

 The feature to search the Internet to find customers and vendors

         by phone number has been updated again due to a further

         change in the format returned by www.411.com

         which was causing the address and phone number to

         *not* be found.

         [As a reminder, if you search for a customer or vendor by

         phone number, first Shopkeeper will check your own list

         and then if it is not found, will do an on-line search

         for that phone number. If found, the new customer or

         vendor's name and address will be automatically filled in.

         This option can be enabled or disabled via the Customer

         page of Preferences.]

 

 From the Vendor Profile screen you can print mailing labels,

         envelopes and shipping labels [via 'Options' at the top]

         What is new in this version are additional formats which

         allow you to select from the three addresses of

         the vendor. Regular, Remittance and Service address.

         

 A new option allows you to search for customers by social

         security number. This feature only applies to customers

         with in-house charge accounts. It can be useful when

         you open a new account to first check if that SSN has

         previously been used in a customer record.

         

 The 'reconciliation' option of the checkbook report previously

         showed items that were already cleared so the report

         was not very useful. This has been corrected in the

         latest update.

         

 [Genius/MWsecure autoswitch ]

         

 

         

 

Version 2.431                                           04/09/2013

===============================================================

 

 The Physical Inventory by Location option (added in v 2.420)

         previously did not show items that you scanned as being

         in a certain location if those Sku's had no record

         of ever being in those locations.

         Starting this version, those extra items will show

         as exceptions along with the other exceptions.

 

 Fix for a problem introduced in last update that can

         prevent the Add to Existing Sku screen from closing.

         (also the Return to Vendor Screen and some others.)

         

 Fix for an error message in the physical inventory exception

         report (the regular version, not the by-location version.)

 

 Fix for a problem that could stop the new image web export

         option (see v 2.430 notes) with certain export configurations.

         

 A progress indicator has been added to the new image export option

         added in version 2.430. If your export has a large number

         of image files to copy this step could take a long time

         and without the indicator it might have seemed that the

         program had frozen.

         

 Added a "look-out" for Merchant Warehouse transactions processed

         if you have (accidently or otherwise) turned on their

         Demo Mode. If so, VJS will report NOT authorized.

 

Version 2.430                                           04/01/2013

===============================================================

 

 The inventory web export feature has a new optional choice

         to copy all the related images to a specific folder.

         For example if you were to create an export list

         of 100 items, just the related images would be put

         into the image-export folder. This would make it easier

         for your web person to copy those images to your website.

         

         The inventory web export feature is accessed from the Full

         Selection screen of the Inventory Reports by Style. The

         copies of the image files are put in the Image-Export folder

         which is inside the VJS Reports folder located on the Windows

         Desktop. This picture copy option is *off* by default.

         

 The Add to Existing Sku numbers feature which allows you to bump up

         the quantity of existing sku numbers now allows you to simultaneously

         change the cost and the retail. (This screen is sometimes used

         for low-value items that are not tagged. The normal received

         inventory sequence assigns new sku numbers for repeat styles.)

         You change the cost or retail in the grid/list of items at

         the bottom of the screen. (Access to the Cost is subject to

         security settings from Preferences.)

 

 The security settings area of Preferences has a new security

         setting which can restrict access to editing closed

         repairs ( ones that have already been picked up.)

         Look for "Make Changes to Picked-Up Repairs" on the

         Sales Security page in Preferences.

 

 Resolved an error message which could affect the Payment Spreadsheet

         Report under a rare combination of circumstances.

         

 If you retrieve a pending layaway and manually change the date

         then any payments you apply to that sale (at this time)

         will get the manually typed sale date. This can be useful

         for people retroactively entering layaway payments from previous days.

         

 Correction for the expense code registration with non-merchandise

         payables. In previous versions non-merchandise payables

         could result in checks not assigned to expense codes. (however,

         he official accrual reports were still correct in previous

         versions.)

         

Version 2.420                                           03/22/2013

===============================================================

 

 The Physical inventory exception report can now be run

         by location. For each count you enter you can enter

         a location and then you can run the report either

         for a single location or for all locations at once.

         From the physical inventory screen, click the "by location"

         box before running the report. (This option will not appear

         if you have not checked the Ask for Location When Entering

         Inventory - within Preferences.)

         You can also access this report via the Inventory Report by

         Location screen where you change the Report Organization to

         "Physical Inv Exceptions." This report shows just the exceptions,

         i.e. only the problems where the physical count        does not match

         the Shopkeeper count.

 

         As with the non-location exception report you can also

         run a Physical Inventory Comparison report. This has

         the same format, but instead of showing *only* the exceptions

         it shows all items in a particular location whether or not

         there are exceptions.

 

         Selecting *any* of the "summary" options on the Sort By line

         will cause the exception report to summarize by location.

         

 

 You can now make particular messages print on sales receipts for

         merchandise from certain vendors. In the vendor profile

         screen, add to the notes <<RCTMSG: Message Here >>, including

         the angle-brackets. The words you substitute for Message Here

         part will print. You can use this to remind customers of special

         vendor-specific warrantees, instructions, promotions, etc.

         If this feature becomes        popular this message area may be moved to

         a dedicated        sales receipt message are on the vendor screen.

         

         (Note that there is a similar option using <<MSG: Message Here >>

         which shows an on-screen message for the sales clerk when you

         sell items from vendors. See Version 1.700 notes further below. )

         

 [ccgeniusccmwvoid3]

 

Version 2.410                                           03/19/2013

===============================================================

 

 On the Vendor Maintenance screen, the vendor's markup

         information has been moved to the payment information

         page/tab. This way if the vendor screen appears

         while you record a special order, there is less chance

         of the customer seeing your markup policy.

 

 In previous versions, the Payment Spreadsheet report did not

         show cash register paid-outs if they didn't have a

         reference. Starting this version such paid-outs (and

         receiveds) will show on this report.

         

 The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report (introduced

         in version 2.360) has a version which shows Percent Change.

         Mathematically, an increase from selling zero of a category

         for zero dollars to selling 1 or 2 at $600 or $,200 is

         an undefined (infinite) percentage increase. However,

         it is common to "sense" these as 100% or 200% increases

         so this report now represents such increases from zero

         in this way.

         

 Pictures should be added via drag and drop or the Picture Manager

         but sometimes users create pictures and manually name

         them and save them in the picture folder. Even though

         that's not the recommended approach, the current version

         and beyond will officially link that picture if the Sku

         is retrieved in the Inventory Status page.

         This also makes it easier to remove/delete pictures that

         have been inadvertently created.

         

 [tageltchr13]

 

Version 2.402                                           03/12/2013

===============================================================

 

 

 The repair report with the "Brief" description previously

         also printed with a limit of 8 characters of the name.

         Now it can print more characters. (but long names may

         still be shortened unless you choose the Limited or Full

         Description.)

         

 [webservcredoxygen]

 [laystate security]

         

 

Version 2.401                                           03/05/2013

===============================================================

 

 The Pandora Import program for Spring 2013 now has

         image files.

         

 [dummy *** sku removed]

 

Version 2.400                                           03/04/2013

===============================================================

 

 The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

         with the new inventory list for Spring 2013 including

         rings and dangles and charms.

                         Note. The image files are expected to be available within

         a week but are not in this update. You can import the

         new catalog now so you can inventory your items and

         re-run the import when the update with pictures it released.

         Or, if you haven't yet received any spring 2013 items you

         might wait and choose to update once later on.

                 (A new access code is required if you have *not* already

         entered a Valentines 2013 code.)

 

 The address area (zone 2) of the sales screen now shows the spouse's

         name if there is one.

         

 The option to re-run a recap of Z-Reports for a range

         of dates will now simultaneously create an Excel XLS

         version of the report in the VJS Reports folder.

 

 If a dummy service/repair Sku has a standard image attached

         in previous versions adding a repair ticket (without

         an image) to that line would cause the sales receipt

         to not print an images. Starting this version the

         original picture will print if there isn't one with

         the repair record.

         

 In the "Major Class Summary" version of the inventory report

         previous versions would not exclude the value of

         layaway items when the Exclude option was selected.

         (All the other versions of the report would exclude them)_

         Starting with this update the major class summary

         version will also exclude them when requested.

 

 Some areas of the sales screen have been optimized for improved

         speed. The degree of improvement will be more or less

         depending on the size of your files and the speed of your

         network.

         

 For Eltron printers (i.e. certain Zebra brand printers that

         'Speak Eltron Printer Language) a change in this update

         will avoid an extra tag which could have printed under

         certain conditions.

 

 [improved detection of disconnected network drives

         and temporary reconnection option.]

         

Version 2.390                                           02/21/2013

===============================================================

 

 A new option in the Sales Defaults page of Preferences        

         allows you program the cash tendered and cash change

         screen to round the change to the nearest 5 cents

         (or other coin such as 10 cents, etc)

         This is useful in Canada, and states which permit

         or encourage rounding - reducing the need for pennies.

         This does not affect credit-card or check payments

         and it also does not affect the officially recorded

         sale totals or payment amounts - it simply suggests

         a rounding for the customer change. This rounds both

         down and up, it is not a purely round-up option for

         the change.

         

 Markup formulas can be entered by Major Code and by

         Vendor and by price-point. In previous versions

         the vendor profile screen did not let you correctly

         enter the number of cents for rounding the price

         and now it does.

         

 Some previous versions would report an (inconsequential)

         error during the Cleanup, and this has been removed now.

         

 VJS now tracks how long it has been since you have done

         a Cleanup and will prompt you to run a cleanup if it

         has been over a week. Similarly, there is a prompt if

         it has been over two weeks since the last "condense."

         Running these steps helps keeps the files correctly

         sorted and empties some "garbage,"

         

 

 

Version 2.380                                           02/19/2013

===============================================================

 

 The Repair Defaults Continued page in preferences has

         options to allow you to remove a number of fields

         from the repair screen in order to simplify it.

         While this page existed in previous versions, the

         options were not active for VJS - they were only

         active for JS-Classic.

         

         Important note. If you suddenly are missing some

         boxes from your repair screen, visit this defaults

         page in Preferences to activate those fields.

 

 The Repair Defaults page in Preferences has a new option

         to transfer the entire sales total to the estimate

         box in the repair details screen. If you activate

         this option then when you pop up the repair detail

         screen from the sales screen, the entire sale total

         for all lines and tax will be copied to the Estimate

         box of that repair ticket. You would only activate

         this option if you typically add several repair Sku's

         to a single sale but add just one repair envelope.

 

 The suggested markup formula previously had a problem that

         could surface in cases where the major code description

         started with a number such as 14K. Even if that were

         not major code number 14 it would use the major code 14

         markup formula. This problem is resolved in this version.

         

 The Repair Reports have several sorting options, a new

         one starting this version is to sort in order

         of the date they were logged in.

         

 The Time Cards Report feature now automatically creates

         an Excel XLS version of the results in the

         VJS Reports folder.

 

 The inventory report has always has always defaulted to

         not showing zero-quantity items and has had the

         option to include or only show zero-quantity options.

         This update adds the options to show only items with

         a negative quantity or to exclude items with a

         negative quantity. This can help either find problems

         or to specifically show non-received special order items.

                         

 The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report introduced

         in version 2.360 previously did not allocate enough

         space to display sales totals over $1M and that has been

         increased starting in this update.

         

 The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report introduced

         in version 2.360 has a new option to allow you to

         require that the archived sales file be included.

         The default Auto option searches archives sales

         only when sales over two years old are requested

         because by default sales under three years

         are in the current file. Skipping the review of

         archives sales speeds up the report.

         However, if you have manually purged more recent sales,

         you may want to force this report to also search the

         archive sales.

         

 The Inventory Adjustments report has an option to filter

         based on the explanation wording. Previous versions

         had limitations here if the explanation was not

         in all capitals and with this update the case doesn't

         matter. Previous versions were limited to filtering

         based on matching the first words. This is still the

         default, but if your search words(s) start with an

         asterisk, the report will search anywhere in the explanation,

         not just at the beginning.

         

 The itemized sales report can now include the vendor's

         invoice/memo number next to each item. This can help

         when handling memo billing discussions. This extra

         column appears when you choose to sort by Vendor.

         

         

Version 2.370                                           02/11/2013

===============================================================

 

 Two financial reports, Income Statement and Balance sheet

         are now available via the Accounting Menu.

         This is only applicable if you have the

         accounting module and use the checkbook within Shopkeeper.

 

 The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report introduced

         in version 2.360 has a new option to allow you

         to sort by the highest performing vendor. Using

         the "Organize By" line you can now sort the

         vendors by sales, profit or units.

         

 The Itemized Sales Report has an option to let you

         filter the report by department code. Previously

         it would only filter (include or exclude) for

         one department code even if you listed more than one.

         This update will now let filter by all the

         department codes you list.

 

 The customer Excel export XLS files now include the

         spouse's/secondary email address in addition to

         the primary email address. This occurs when you

         choose either the Small or the Large Export option

         from the Customer Reports and Labels screen.

         

 The Inventory Status screen previously would not exit

         if you changed the Quantity Received. This update

         solves that problem

 

 In case of a cash payment with change due, the cash drawer

         is opened before the receipt is printed. This can

         help you make change while the change amount is

         still showing on the screen.

         If you do *not* want this "early" open, add the keyword

         NOPOPONCHANGE anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in

         Preferences.

         

 [*msgdmyskusadd/uppclscod/spdtestV2]

 

Version 2.360                                           02/04/2013

===============================================================

 

 VJS has a new report option: Sales Summary Comparing

         Two Date Ranges. This report lets you report

         side-by-side comparisons of different date ranges.

         At every run, you can choose any two ranges, e.g.

         current month of this year vs. last year, or week

         before Valentine's this year vs. Last year. Unlike

         a similar report in JS-Classic, this version allows

         you to summarize by both Vendor and Major Class. Also

         it has a Percent Change version to calculate the

         increase or decrease per each line. There are also

         additional selection options such as Minor Code range,

         Exclude Memo, Exclude Special Orders.

 

 The inventory Status Activity page has a new option

         to let you see the wish-list / quote items. This way

         you can select a specific Sku number and see who

         is interested in it.

 

         

 * Misc. Correction to formatting of Cash Requirements Report

 and Sales Summary Report by Dept for the version sent to a

 PDF file.

 

 [bta.mwgenius]

 

 

Version 2.350                                           01/25/2013

===============================================================

 

 The sales screen will now open the cash drawer when you

         choose No Receipt. Previously it would open only when

         you printed a receipt.

         [As before, set up your cash drawer either in Maintenance/

         Preferences or in your Epson printer's Windows printer driver.]

         

 When you issue a refund as a credit slip, the payment spreadsheet

         report previously put that amount as a negative in the

         Credit Slip used column. Starting this version, it

         puts it in the Issued Gift / Credit Slip column.

         

 A new security setting allows you to restrict access to the

         Merge Customer Records feature. You can find this security setting on

         the Main Menu Security page of options within Preferences.

         

 Another new security setting allows you to restrict access

         to the Customize Menu feature. You can find this setting on

         the More Security Settings page within Preferences.

         Note that even if users have access to Customize Menu, they

         still cannot select options that they are not supposed to

         have access to.

 

 Under certain circumstances in previous versions  the activity page

         of Inventory Status could get 'stuck' on a certain name when

         scrolling the sales        list with the mouse-wheel. That has been

         resolved in this update. [ this situation would have been

         encountered very rarely - only with Sku's with many, many sales.]

         

 The Main Menu was previously limited to 1600 pixels in width.        

         This has been expanded to 2300 so that it can be expanded

         to cover the entire surface of today's larger monitors.

 

 The Return to Vendor screen now makes it easier to locate a

         previous return ticket. Now you can type a vendor code and

         when you drop the list of returns, the list will be limited

         to that one vendor. Further, the most recent returns will

         show at the top of the list.

         

 [storeidlen2]

 

Version 2.340                                           01/11/2013

===============================================================

 

 The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

         with the inventory list and pictures for the

         2013 Valentines Gift Sets, Language of Love Charms

         and Animal Dangles

         (An access code is required.)

 

 

         [add lspn,lcmb,ledt,capnexch / xmlsubst]

 

Version 2.338                                           01/08/2013

===============================================================

 

 From the Buying History page of Vendor Maintenance, the

         list of invoices now includes columns for the invoice

         description / comments. This can help you locate

         invoices faster when they special comments.

 

 Customizable access and customizable hiding of data fields,

         not just labels.

         [Also top-secret / ini ]

 

         [error trapping when running utilities]

 

Version 2.337                                           12/26/2012

===============================================================

 

 Customizable on-screen labels.

         [top-secret; need-to-know basis. / ini]

 

 [wish list duplicate check during cleanup.]

 

Version 2.336                                           12/20/2012

===============================================================

 

 Further improvements to the sales screen in terms of

         handling wish-list sales and actual sales when

         switching between different tickets. (This is related to

         and further to the changes in version 2.335, see below.)

 

         Further Additions to Options, About from the VJS File Center.

 

Version 2.335                                           12/19/2012

===============================================================

 

 In previous versions there were sequences users could run

         to inadvertently remove Wish-list/ Quotes. One could

         also cause an actual sale to appear in the wish list.

         This update addresses all known such sequences to

         minimize these risks

 

 [Changes for TJS / Java]

 [Addition of "About" option to the File Center]

 

Version 2.330                                           12/14/2012

===============================================================

 

 In the sales screen, once you have typed the first

         part of the Sku number (the major code) but have not yet

         selected a Sku number, previous versions would not allow you

         to make a correction. You had to delete the line by clicking

         the trash can and start again.

         Starting this version, provided you have not yet selected a

         complete Sku number you can make a change without having

         to delete the entire line.

         

 The Month-End warning previously popped up on the morning of

         the last day of the month. Now it will wait until the

         afternoon![The month-end procedure from the Accounting Menu

         is quite quick and you typically do just step 1 and step 3.]

         

 On the Notes page of Inventory Status is a new Search option

         with which you can search for items with certain words in

         the extended notes box.

         Click the Search Binoculars icon and then enter one or more

         words. The next item containing all of the words is sought.

         If you want to search for an exact phrase including spaces,

         enter that in quotes such as "Yellow Diamond"

         [but enter no other words outside the quotes.]

         

 At the bottom of the sales screen is a Payment box which is

         designed to for the net payment amount you are accepting, e.g.

         enter or leave it as $157.20 if that's the amount you are

         paying. In case of a cash payment you are subsequently

         asked how much is tendered - where you could enter $160.

         

         For cash sales, this initial payment box in previous versions

         has understood that an 'over payment' entered here most

         likely represented the cash tendered amount and transferred

         that to the cash tendered box. This feature is only activated

         when the amount is both 'too much' and a multiple of $10.

         (If you want change calculated for other tendered amounts,

         enter the Payment amount normally, and then enter the tendered

         amount in the Amount Tendered screen.

         

         For Layaway Sales, this is not the case and a too-large

         figure is assumed to be an 'over payment' as perhaps more

         items are expected to be added to the sale.

         

         This is all old behavior, what is new in this version is

         that if you specifically want an 'over-payment' for a layaway

         entered in this net payment box to be assumed to be the tender

         add the keyword ALLOWEARLYTENDER in the Miscellaneous Options

         box in Preferences.

 

         

 

 With a recent change to the inventory entry screen, changing

         the manufacturer code on a new line did not make subsequent

         lines default to that alternative manufacturer code.

         Now that will apply to subsequent lines.

         

         [TJS RFID change for Desktop Scanner]

 

 

Version 2.321                                           11/29/2012

===============================================================

 

 

 The last update could cause an error message during inventory

         entry. It's safe to ignore and continue - but was awkward.

         This update prevents that error message.

 

Version 2.320                                           11/28/2012

===============================================================

 

 Among other screens, the Inventory Status screen and the

         Repair tracking details screen show the first picture

         for the item or job. Double-clicking the picture

         takes you to the Picture Manager where you can see

         any other pictures for that item.

         

         New in this update is a button that appears in the

         main inventory and repair screens to indicate

         if there are additional pictures. This way you don't

         have to open the picture manager just to see

         whether or not there are other pictures.

 

 A recent version update added more safeguards against retrieving

         the same sale at two different computers simultaneously.

         but one of the side effects of those changes was that you

         could no longer        retrieve a wish-list/quote sale directly

         by typing a sale number. This update reinstates that

         ability.

 

 The email option from the customer screen now allows more than

         one attachment per email message. Separate each full

         filename with a comma or a semi-colon. (primarily this

         is for cases where you use the CDO direct II sending

         method.)

 

 From the VJS File Center, if you have a stray (or temporary)

         set of books in the list of Last Used Company Files, you ca

         remove it by choosing More, then Remove Company From List.

         Previously you could also remove an entry by right-clicking

         in the list. The right-click method was too often done

         by mistake so it has been removed. ( you have to use

         the button now.)

         

 A fix for a fairly rare error when saving an inventory report as

         an Excel XLS file.

 

 The Mercury Payment Systems daily credit card batch report

         now includes a total.

 

 In Preferences you can select logo files for receipts, appraisals

         etc. Some computers encountered errors when clicking

         the Browse button. This update has some changes expected

         to help those computers.

         

 

Version 2.311                                    11/16/2012

===============================================================

 

 Further needed adjustments to the Split Inventory change

         made in version 2.310 below

 

Version 2.310                                    11/15/2012

===============================================================

 

 In previous versions when running a customer report and exporting

         the list to a 'Medium' Excel file, VJS could export only up to

         65,000 names and now that limit has been lifted.

         Note, however, that many spreadsheet programs are unable to

         open files with more than 65,000 names. VJS now shows you

         a warning when exporting such a large list that you may have

         to use Excel 2010 or higher to read such a long list.

         

 Editing the same sale at two different computers is problematic

         so VJS doesn't usually allow that. A certain combination *did*

         allow that in previous versions but that combination now

         correctly prevents that in this update.

         

 Inventory screens such as Return to Vendor, Deduct from Inventory,

         Add to Existing Sku's have a Print a List button. However, you need

         to Save the list before printing. In previous versions the warning

         messages weren't very clear as to why you got an empty report

         if you printed before saving. In this version, the message is

         more clear that you have to save before printing.

         

 As you receive inventory where individual Sku's have a quantity of

         more than one, there is a Split button to let you distribute

         the quantity among several locations. In previous versions,

         certain situations would prevent the Split button working

         immediately after receiving an item (though they could be split

         later.) In this update, the immediate Split feature will work

         for all items.

         

 The web site export option for inventory (via the inventory by style

         reports area) now creates up to six separate picture file

         columns, from two in earlier versions. [the combined

         column 'AllImages' with all picture references still exists.]

         

 The invoices payable list on the buying history page of the vendor

         maintenance screen previously didn't reflect discounts taken

         and that has been corrected in this update.

         

 Improved workflow when adding a new clerk in the Clerk Maintenance

         screen. (In previous versions, the Clerk box didn't show the

         new clerk initials immediately making it possibly unclear

         whether the new clerk had actually been added.)

         

         

 Miscellaneous fix for when editing a return to vendor slip where

         some of the items have subsequently been removed from

         the inventory file.

         

 

Version 2.300                                    10/29/2012

===============================================================

 

 In some (rare) cases in previous versions, editing a previously

         saved sale and applying a minus number to change the discount

         and choosing to replace the old discount, could result in

         the wrong calculation. This has been resolved in this update.

 

 In the sales screen the Dept Code box is generally not used

         on a majority of sales, so to speed data entry, after

         you press Enter or Tab from the Clerk box, the next

         box selected is the Sku Number box.

         A new option in Preferences, "Jump to Dept Code After Clerk",

         allows you to make the sales screen always stop at that box

         before the Sku box when you use the Enter or Tab key. A separate

         preference (available in previous versions) allows you to decide

         whether the Dept Code box must be filled in before a sale can

         be saved.

 

 A new version of the Repair Report includes a new column

         showing the number of days a job was out a vendor

         along with an overall average number of days.

         To get this new version, choose to Sort By Vendor,

         do not include pictures, and do choose More Details/Columns.

         Note that to have this "productivity" column make sense

         you ought to choose only jobs sent "And Received Back",

         otherwise the figure would understate the number of days

         for jobs still out - because they'll take more days by

         the time they return.

 

 When printing layaway statements, previous versions would print

         the date that you last aged for the month-end. That has

         been corrected to print the actual date that you specify

         on the layaway printing report screen (which you'd normally

         set to the current day.)

         

 By default, the instructions and description boxes of the repair

         ticket screen accept only capitals - and those boxes may

         temporarily activate the Caps Lock button. If this behavior

         is bothersome, add the keyword  NOCAPSLOCK

         anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences.

         

         

Version 2.291                                    10/13/2012

===============================================================

 

 Fixes a Sku lookup problem from the previous version

         in which, when you type a partial Sku number, the

         Sku lookup list doesn't jump to the right part

         of the Sku list - making it harder to browse.

         

 

Version 2.290                                    10/11/2012

===============================================================

 

 The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

         with the inventory list and pictures for the

         October / Holiday 2012 Collection.

         This includes about 50 new items along with

         their images.

         (An access code is required. No extra charge if you have

         subscribed to the Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan. If you have

         Fall 2012 access code it will work for Holiday 2012 too.)

 

 The "Text" version of the Cash Register Hourly Activity

         report was previously not organized by time; now it

         is sorted by hour of day

 

Version 2.285                                    10/09/2012

===============================================================

 

 

 In Preferences, there is an option "Transfer Repair Screen

         Estimates and Cost to Sales Screen." This is not a particularly

         new option - but if checked, then for a un-finalized sale only,

         changes to the estimate on the repair screen will change the

         price charged on the sales ticket.

         In previous versions there were certain cases where, if this

         option were *not* checked then the estimate could still transfer

         back to the sale (but still only for unfinalized sales.)

         In this update, unchecking that box will prevent the transfer in

         all cases.

         Either way, you need to consider which preference you want because

         some jewelers really do want an estimate change on the repair details

         screen to be the price charged, where other jewelers consider this

         just an estimate and only the priced specifically entered on the sales

         screen is the price to be charged to the customer.

         

         

 

 [RF, Refck, xz, sales_pos, MWS4KeyMsg]

Version 2.280                                    09/30/2012

===============================================================

 

 On the "Other" page of the Customer Maintenance screen there is a

         box for Clerk. If that is filled-in, then starting in this version

         any sale for that customer will automatically be assigned to that

         clerk.

         If you have turn on the option Automatically Fill In Clerk from

         Preferences, then *both* the customer-assigned clerk and the

         user who is logged-in will be assigned to the sale.

 

 When printing receipts where you used integrated credit card

         processing, VJS allows you to add authorization and

         signature lines to the receipts. Previously there were four

         lines available, now there are six.

         These are set in the payments / credit card processing screen

         in Preferences

 

 When you add a repair via the sales screen, the short description on

         the sales line normally transfers to the Instructions box

         on the repair detail screen. A new option will let you prevent that.

         To activate this new option add the keyword

         NOSALEDESCTOREP in Miscellaneous Options

         (note that a similar option has been available in VJS for years.

         The keyword REPDESCTODESC will send the sales line description

         to the repair Description box instead of to the Instructions box.)

         

 If the Month-End Age and Month-End Reset steps have not been

         done before the beginning of the new month, a warning now prompts

         you to close the month.

 

 [Checkbook Setup Tidy-Up;        MW Report by Date Tidy-Up;        Mems Daily Save]

 

Version 2.270                                    09/18/2012

===============================================================

 

 The Accounting Menu now has the Checkbook Setup Screen

         to allow you set the bank names and next check number

         and view balances. Security settings in Preferences

         allow you to control access to viewing and making

         changes.

 

 The Inventory Adjustment Report now allows you to select

         the adjustment explanation starting word(s)

         If, for example, you do *not* want to record eBay sales

         in VJS but need to adjust the inventory, you could

         use Deduct from Inventory and start all such adjustments

         with the word eBay or Ebay Sales. You might use an

         explanation of Physical Inventory for adjustments following

         a physical. Then you would be able to run reports by

         any of those key words - along with date criteria.

         

 Under certain rare circumstances, new appraisals could be

         given the same number as a previous appraisal.

         That has been addressed in this update.

         

 

Version 2.260                                    09/14/2012

===============================================================

 

 Finally! Customer merge is available in VJS. This combines

         the entire customer histories of two customer records into one.

         By default, this is located on the Maintenance Menu.

 

 The spell check previously skipped over the first mis-spelled word

         and that has been prevented in this update.

         Note that there is a small side-effect of this which is

         that on the first mis-spelled word, moving the mouse

         over the spell-check area can make some of the buttons

         hidden until you move the mouse around. This effect disappears

         for the second and        subsequent words.

 

 Repair envelopes have a new option to allow you to not

         print the insurance value. This also removes it

         from sales receipts (if you include the repair details

         on sales receipts.)

         This option is on the Repair Ticket page of Receipt

         Options in Preferences, from the Maintenance Menu.

         This would not affect any customized repair envelopes.

         

 A small "loophole" has been closed on the Major Class Code

         Maintenance screen. Previously, a certain combination of

         clicks would fail to make a dummy Sku number when a

         new major code was added and that has been addressed

         in this update.

         

 

Version 2.250                                    08/31/2012

===============================================================

 

 There is an option to automatically show the cost of each

         item on the        sales screen. Of course, this option is

         normally turned off. To activate it open the second

         Sales Screen Defaults page in Preferences and check

         or uncheck the box Automatically show cost on Sales screen.

         You can also choose to show it only in code.

         

 A change in the backup program can now show a warning instead of

         an error message when certain temporary backup files

         cannot be deleted.

         

 The Itemized Sales Reports can now let you show sales based on

         the customer type codes recorded on the customer profile

         screen. Choose Full Selection to see the customer type

         option.

         

 In the email screen from the Customer Maintenance there is  

          Signature page where you can record some standard

          email body text.  In previous versions, if you had

          chosen (from Preferences) for customer names and

          addresses to always be upper-case, then the email

          message also would be converted to upper-case.

          Starting this version, the message can be mixed-case

          even if the customer are forced to be upper-case.

         

 

Version 2.24                                    08/20/2012

===============================================================

 

 The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

         with the inventory list and pictures for the Fall 2012

         Collection. This includes about 121 new items along with

         their images.

         (An access code is required. No extra charge if you have

         subscribed to the Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan.)

 

 All sales lines added to a sale which is classified as

         Special Order are also classified as special order.

         This can be useful for various sales reports

         so you can include or exclude special order sales

         and so they are exported to QuickBooks as

         special order items. It can be important to be able

         to separate them because special order sales

         show extremely short turn which can affect the

         GMROI calculations.

         

         However, in case you flag certain sales as special

         order so that they are not immediately finalized

         when paid off you might not want each item to be

         flagged as special order and that is now possible

         with this update

         

         To activate this new option add the keyword

         DONTFLAGSO in Miscellaneous Options

 

         Note that even with this behavior activated, any

         item that is an actual special order item - which

         is added to the sale by choosing Options, Add Special

         Order - will still be flagged as special order.

         

 If you use X-Charge / Accelerated Payments processing

         now when you run a charge, you can change from

         credit card to debit card processing.

         Once the X-Charge processing screen appears,

         choose Transaction, Credit/Debit then Debit Purchase

         or the shortcut (currently F4)

         You will need to check with your X-charge rep

         to verify you have the correct debit card reader.

         

 After you send (successfully) an email within VJS

         The email screen previously waited for you to click

         the Exit button to close the form.

         Now it will close automatically and return you to

         the customer profile screen - unless you click

         somewhere in the email form or press a keyboard

         key within 2 seconds.

         

         

         

Version 2.231                                    08/14/2012

===============================================================

 

 In Version 2.20 and 2.30 there were some reports of

         payments on account (for In-House Charge Accounts)

         not correctly reducing the customer account balance.

         

         That appears resolved in this update.

         If you have in-house charge accounts and have

         posted payments this month, it is suggested that

         you run the account audit utility in JS-Classic.

 

         Choose File, Miscellaneous Options, Utility

         Programs, CHGBAL.  This utility checks all

         accounts and shows you if any are out of balance.

         

 

Version 2.23                                    08/10/2012

===============================================================

 

 There is now an option to reassign a sale to a different

         customer if it was recorded under the wrong name.

         (In previous versions, there was a combination which

         could appear to do this but it did not actually

         change the name on a sale)

         

         Choose Options at the top of the Sales screen then

         Assign to a Different Customer to see the steps.

         

 On a related note, there is a new security setting in

         Preferences which can disallow changing the customer

         on a sale - based on the login security level.

 

         

 From the Repair Reports (Full Selection page) there has

         been a Keywords option which would search the repair

         Notes page for certain words.

         Starting in this version it will search the instructions

               and description boxes in addition to the Notes.

 

 The inventory report summarized by major code previously

         was not compatible with the option to show the replacement

         cost. I.e. that version could only show the actual cost.

         

         Starting in this version, the summary inventory report

         by major code can show the replacement cost if you

         choose that option. (this version of the report still

         cannot show the cost in code.)

         

 The Accounts Payable report has always had the options to:

         Show Rebates (Y/N) and Show Checks Paid (Y/N).

         However, these options were previously mis-labeled

         so it would have been hard to use these features before.

 

 When entering two invoices in a row via the Inventory Entry

         screen, on the second invoice, some recent previous versions

         would suggest the manufacturer code of the first invoice.

         This has been corrected in this version.

 

 When dates are entered with an unexpected range (e.g.

         if you type 12 and end up with year 1212) VJS has always

         attempted to correct the date. However, it is not always

         possible to guess.

         Starting with this version, if a date is entered anywhere

         in the program with a obviously incorrect date (e.g.

         a date more than a year in the future) you will be prompted

         to confirm. This can help reduce incorrect dates - but it

         can't prevent all incorrect dates.

 

 In previous versions, when you retrieved a Wish list/Quote sale

         the date would appear to be blank. The actual date

         saved with the sale was correct, but this confusing

         display has been correct in this version.

         

 The customer history report in JS-Classic previously would

         not show the clerk initials from sales entered via

         VJS but will now starting in this update.

         

 The JS-Classic utility CHGLOC now has the option to NOT

         change the location of items which have zero quantity.

 

Version 2.221                                    07/27/2012

===============================================================

 

 When you run the Itemized Sales Report, an Excel XLS version of

          the report is put in the VJS Reports folder on the Windows

          Desktop. That feature has been available for a long time,

          but what is new is that if you change the Report Organization

          to the Sales Tax or Tax Summary version, the resulting XLS

          file will include additional columns with the customer address

          and state and zip. This may help you with your sales tax returns.

         These additional columns will also be included when you choose

         to include or exclude a state.

         

 When you choose to include or exclude a particular state from the

         Itemized Sales Report you can now add an asterisk after the

         state name. This changes how the report interprets customers

         with an empty state box.

 

         If you choose to Exclude NY* this means don't show sales with

         a customer address of NY and also don't show sales with a blank

         state. I.e. you may want to infer that blank states are *not*

         out-of-state.

         

         If you choose to Include NY* this means only show sales with

         a customer address of NY and also included those with a blank

         state.

         

 

Version 2.22                                    07/26/2012

===============================================================

 

 The Pandora Catalog Import program adds the Sku's and pictures

         for the July 2012 additions of National Icons beads.

 

 The Entire Customer History report has an additional

         new layout which shows a tax-inclusive total for

         each sale and for the entire customer history.

         From the Print Options dialog, change the report

         layout to "Customer History - Sales (w/Tax)"

         In addition, this version is more brief in that it

         does not include details for repairs, appraisals, etc.

         

 The Outstanding Purchase Order Report was not previously

         very helpful because the value received tally was

         not being updated as items were received.

         

         In the current version the received value will

         be updated as you receive items.

         Also, to help with previous purchase orders,

         there is a Recalculate button in the Purchase Order

         Entry screen. This can recalculate a single Purchase

         Order or the entire collection of purchase orders.

                         

 In the Sales area of Preferences, you can specify the allowable

         date range for sales. E.g. you can prevent sales being

         dated later than today or more than x days ago.

         Previously this was enforced for new sales only, not

         when editing a sale but with this update, the date is also

         checked when editing a sale.

         

 In Preferences you can set an option so that the Inventory Status

         screen normally shows the cost in code. If you show a sku

         in inventory status you can double-click the cost code

         to switch (temporarily) to digits. However, in previous

         versions this combination would limit you to entering

         costs up to $10,000. Now this combination will not have

         that limit (i.e. the cost can be entered up to $10,000,000)

         

 A new option allows you to require that the clerk box on the

         repairs screen be filled in.

         You can find this option in the Repairs screen of Preferences.

         

 In previous versions, if you retrieved a repair by first opening

         the Customer screen, sometimes the repair image would not

         show unless you went to the Picture Manager. This extra step

         is no longer needed from this update on.

 

 When you retrieve a repair that already has extra details on

         the "Notes" page, an asterisk appears on the "Notes" tab

         at the bottom of the screen to alert you to this.

         

 On the Accounts Receivable Payments on Account screen, the

         "minimum payment" box previously showed just the new minimum

         payment due for this month. Starting in this version that

         box will add in any past due amounts and will subtract any

         payments already made this month. This can help to request

         the correct payment from a customer.

 

 In the cleanup screen, some options which should not generally

         be run unless requested by Compulink have been hidden

         (although you can un-hide them.)

 

 In previous versions, correcting the date on a credit slip

         payment wasn't, alone, enough to save that change.

         (i.e. you would have had to make other changes)

         Starting this version, you can change the payment

         date and exiting will save the change.

         

 A small numbers of users' computers would play the extended

         VJS sound effects even when that option was turned off

         in Preferences. That should be solved with this update.

         

         Some VJS warning sounds will continue to sound regardless.

         If you want even those turned off, add the keyword FEWERSOUNDS

         anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box        of Preferences.

         

         Note that certain warning message boxes may still play a

         beep sound. This is a computer-wide choice (for all programs)

         beyond the control of VJS. You can override via the sounds area

         of the Windows Control panel. E.g. you can find the "Critical Stop"

         entry and choose "(none)" for the sound.

         

                         

 [weas]

 

 

Version 2.212                                      07/02/2012

===============================================================

 

 Correction of a display problem introduced in version 2.210 in

         the appraisals area        of the Customer X-Tra Search screen.

 

         

 A change has been added which can help the font options of

         certain tag printers with imperfect Zebra compatibility/

         

         

 [voidmanualmsg]

 

Version 2.21                                       06/30/2012

===============================================================

 

 You can now widen the Customer X-Tra Search screen and

         each computer will remember the preferred width.

         This can let you see more columns of customer information.

         The repair list and appraisal list at the bottom right have

         been reorganized to take advantage of this to show you more

         details.

 

 Retrieving several previous sales in succession without clearing

         the screen first, could, in previous versions cause a copy

         of that previous sale to be kept in the quote/wish list

         file, which could hinder your ability to edit it later on.

         

         With this update the previous sale will either auto-clear

         if no changes have been made, or a warning will stop and

         ask you to either save changes or discard changes.

         

 A new security option can restrict the ability to make

         delete payments on previously recorded sales.

         See the Sales Security Page in Preferences.

         If this security setting is invoked, the user will

         still be able to delete a payment on a sale that

         is in the processing of being entered where the sale

         has not been saved or printed yet.

 

 The Pandora Catalog Import program adds the Sku's and pictures

         for the summer 2012 additions of Murano Glass Beads.

         

 The Relocate Major Code feature (choose Options from the Major

         Class Code screen now creates an Excel file of the results

         when the trailing five digits of the Sku Numbers are changed.

         The Excel file includes the quantity and the items with

         zero quantity are placed at the end of the list so that

         the items to be retagged are at the top.

 

 A slowness in the Relocate Major Code feature has been resolved.

 

Version 2.20                                       06/18/2012

===============================================================

 

 The inventory report with the picture option active was previously

         available only when sorting by Brand or Sku. Now you can

         include pictures when sorting by Cost, Price, Description, Date.

         

         Sorting by Part Number is also a new option on the inventory

         report is also a new option and is also available with the

         picture option.

 

 Some computers had a problem with the "File Selector" - such

         as when browsing for an image file to import or a physical

         inventory file of Sku numbers to import.

 

         This update includes an alternative File Selector option.

         If you have experienced this problem you can activate this option

         by adding the keyword GETFILE2 anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings

         box        of Preferences.

 

 In the Repair Quick Update screen there is now a Remove button

         at the top of the screen to remove a job from the update

         list.  This does not remove the job from the live

         repair list - only from the list of jobs to be updated.

 

 In the Repair Quick Update screen, next to each job is the sale "line

         number." For jobs attached to a sales ticket, you may have several

         jobs with the same repair number on different lines and this

         change can clarify things.

         

 In JS-Classic, the 40-column repair ticket will print more lines

         of the instructions or description. Previous versions were

         limited to 5 lines each.

         

 In JS-Classic a certain combination of options could result in an

         error message which has been fixed in this update.

         

 In JS-Classic, the accounts receivable payments screen will now

         show you a list of some recent payments.

         

         

Version 2.190                                       06/05/2012

===============================================================

 

 Repair (and sales) numbers are limited to nine characters.

         In previous versions you could sometimes not retrieve

         jobs with all nine characters used when you typed the number.

         (though you were able to pick them off the list.)

         That has been resolved in this version.

         

 A difficulty in retrieving previous sales may have appeared in the

         last update. This is resolved in this update.

         

 When pressing Enter or Tab on the customer screen, there are

         some boxes which did not highlight in the expected order

         (the email boxes for example.) This has been cleaned

         up to make that screen easier to navigate.

         

 When entering new sales, the first box to be active/highlighted

         is usually the Sku Number box. For a long time, there has

         been an option to make the Clerk the first active box.

         This version adds the option for the Date box to be the

         first box active. This would mainly be used by people

         who are entering the tickets for several days after-the-fact.

         To turn on this option, check the box "Jump To Date First For New Sales?"

         on the Sales page of Preferences.

         

 When you send an Email to a customer (from the Customer profile screen)

         you may have entered a standard message.

         This message may now include "Merge Codes" which are replaced

         by information from the customer screen. For example, adding

         any of these codes (including the square brackets) [FullName], [First]

         [Spouse] [First+Spouse] [Address1] [Address2] [City] [State] [Zip]

         [Phone1]anywhere in your message - will fill in the appropriate words

         from the customer screen for that customer.

         

 

 

 

Version 2.180                                         05/24/2012

===============================================================

 

 The commission report now calculates how many sales

         tickets per clerk had more than one item; i.e.

         how many sales tickets had add-on items.

         This is on the version which itemizes each sold item.

 

 The QuickSale option in previous versions sometimes

         repeated the previous customer - when you might

         have wanted to use the generic Cash Sale customer.

         This has been fixed in this version

 

 The Inventory by Location Report now has the option to

         show the Replacement Cost instead of the purchase cost.

         

 When running Inventory by Location reports, previous versions

         would show related locations to that requested.

         For example, selecting A would show locations A, A1, A15, etc.

         Starting in this version, selecting A1 will show just A1.

         To select All A's you can type A*  or to show all locations

         starting with A1 you can type A1*

         

 The image import feature will now accept image files

         with the extension .jpeg. However, those pictures

         will be saved with the more standard .jpg extension.

         [You can import images either by dragging them onto

         the No Image Saved icon on any inventory item.]

         

 When you choose "Company Check" as the payment method

         for negative payments this means you're issuing

         the customer a refund check. What's new in this

         update when you choose that option is that the Windows

         clipboard is filled with the customer name, address

         and refund amount in numbers and words. You may

         be able to paste this into a check program or

         word processor to print the check.

         

 If you need to change a customer name, you Ctrl-Click

          the last name from the customer maintenance screen.

          In previous versions if you had the unusual case of

          a last name starting with a space, this change customer

          tool would not recognize the removal of the leading

          space, but starting with this version it will.

         

 For the pop-up calendars for date fields, typically Sunday

         or Monday is the first column - which day can be

         affected by settings in your copy of Windows.

         Starting in this version you can chose which day

         to be the first column by adding the keyword FDOW anywhere

         in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.

         Follow FDOW with a number, EG FDOW1 or FDOW2 or FDOW7, etc.

         The best selection can depend on your Windows settings

         and whether you have CALENDARV2 activated (see below)

         [This stands for First Day Of Week]

         

         Not new, but on the same subject, if you add the keyword

         CALENDARV2 in Miscellaneous Options you'll get a

         different calendar - one with two months at a time.

 

         

 

         

Version 2.170                                         05/08/2012

===============================================================

 

 A new security option can restrict the ability to make

         changes to pending (non-finalized) layaways.

         See the Sales Security Page in Preferences.

         If this security setting is invoked, the user will

         still be able to receive a payment.

 

 Add the minor code description to the export file for

         the itemized sales report [often used by BIG

         buying group.]

         

 You can now print on sales receipts the data-entry time

         of each payment.

         To activate this option add the keyword

         PAYMENTTIME anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box

         of Preferences.

         

 The Hot Seller / Reorder report would previously show

         some items that were still in stock even if you

         chose to show only zero-quantity items.

         That has been fixed in this version.

         

 In some versions the Hot Seller / Reorder report would not

         show the sales retail total.

         This has been fixed in this version.

 

 The invoice "drill-down" from the Inventory Status Screen which

         was introduced in version 2.130 did not initially work

         for memo-type invoices, but now memos are supported for

         this feature.

 

         

Version 2.161                                         05/01/2012

===============================================================

 

 Prevent an unnecessary error message when backing up images.

 

Version 2.16                                         04/28/2012

===============================================================

 

 The Simple Layaway Report can now let you select only

         the special order sales - or to exclude them.

         Similarly, you can choose to show only those

         sales with zero balances. This is a report

         you can review to see if there are any paid-up

         special order sales that need to be finalized.

         

 The Assemble Disassemble screen now refers to the same

         security setting needed to delete inventory as

         does the Inventory Status screen; i.e. the

         Delete Inventory Items security setting in

         Preferences.

         This also applies to removing an item (or the

         entire invoice) via the Inventory Entry screen.

         

 The appraisals now include the $ sign in the value

         area. (This won't apply to any custom layouts

         you have previously created.)

 

 You can now reset the number sequence for the return to vendor

         memos simply by adding a new return memo with a manually

         entered number. Subsequent memos will continue on from

         the following number.

         

 Users of Mercury Payment Processing previously had to use

         the Mercury on-line screens in order to process a

         negative (return) credit card charge. Now, negative

         charges can be processed via VJS.

         Note that when you process a return, you can use

         only a previously used credit card. A list of previous

         payments for that customer are shown so you can

         pick the card to credit.

         

 The backup option previously did not backup images and

         that feature has now been activated. If you have a large

         volume of images files and backup to memory sticks,

         verify that your memory sticks have sufficient free space.

         

 

Version 2.15                                         04/19/2012

===============================================================

 

 When you receive an invoice of merchandise from Vendor XXX,

         the Manufacturer Code for each item defaults to XXX

         which you can change in case the seller of the item

         is not the same as the brand. In the current update

         if you change the Manufacturer Code for the first

         item to YYY (i.e., not the Vendor Code), the subsequent

         lines will assume YYY - instead of reverting back to

         the vendor code XXX.

         One area where this is especially useful is where you are

         invoiced by a buying group where you want all the items

         to have a different manufacturer than the vendor and would

         prefer to not have to manually change each line.

 

 The price code option previously did not accept the option

         for decimals and it now does. In addition, it allows

         the same option to put the decimal code *after* the

         price code if the character for the decimal is a non-letter

         and a non-digit (e.g. !@#%^, etc.)

         

 Sales can be assigned a "Department Code" so that you can run

         reports based on "something interesting" about the sale -

         other than the merchandise major or minor codes or the clerk,

         because reports based on those are already available.

         Some uses could be a bride's initials (so you could report

         all sales for that bride) or a Code representing response

         to a certain promotion, or a Wholesale code so you can

         separate those sales, etc.

         

         This feature has been in VJS all along. What is new is

         the option to automatically fill in the Dept Code on

         each sale where you can set a different code for each

         computer. If wanted, this feature can be activated on

         the "Local Defaults Cont." page of "Preferences."

 

 The Itemized Sales Report has a new "Qty Left" option.

         This is a type of audit report such that it shows only

         sold items that have a remaining quantity in stock. I.e.,

         for most sold items you'd expect zero remaining, so these

         are items you may want to check. Of course, there are valid

         reasons to have a remaining quantity such as adjustments,

         or offsetting return sales,        but these items are worth a look.

         Choose Full Selection from the Itemized Sales Report screen

         to see this option. ( Sort by Sku not vendor, etc.)

         

         

         

 [wpf]

 

 

Version 2.14                                         04/05/2012

===============================================================

 

 For those with the Maintenance Plan, the newest, second-

         quarter 2012 Chamilia catalog update is available.

         This time it includes the Chamilia UPC barcode numbers

         so you can scan the baggies when you receive them.

         Also this time, the entire picture catalog is downloaded

         and integrated.

         [email us to request this catalog]

 

 Addition of the Cash Register Journal Report to the

         Sales Report Menu. This is a simple list of payment

         activity shown in the order they were typed in.

 

 In the sales screen price box, if you changed the price

         and pressed Tab in the previous versions the price

         would not change - you needed to press Enter or

         click elsewhere. Now, you can press Tab or Enter

         and the change is saved.

         

 Most side-by-side receipts now print a zero price in

         red on the right-hand copy now. Previously

         zero prices were not printed on the right-hand copy.

 

 

Version 2.13                                         03/30/2012

===============================================================

 

 From the Inventory Status Screen you can now "drill-down"

         into the invoice on which that item was received.

         Click the new green arrow to the right of the

         invoice number box which will take you to

         the inventory receive (or edit) an invoice screen.

         

 Similarly, from the Vendor Maintenance screen, on the

         Buying History tab is a list of invoices. There

         you can double-click an invoice to drill-down

         into that invoice entry/edit screen.

 

 If you use integrated credit card processing at point of sale

         you can now choose to print an additional copy of

         the receipt - but only for those sales which include

         a credit card charge.

         From the Credit Card Defaults section of Payment Options

         in Preferences, there is a new line at the bottom

         "Print Extra Receipts After Credit Card Authorization"

         

 

Version 2.12                                         03/19/2012

===============================================================

 

 Addition of the Inventory Adjustment Report on the

         Reports Menu. You can select by vendor, date,

         adjustment type and you can choose whether or

         not to include pictures, costs and explanations.

                 

 The "small blue" Add Inventory Screen adds a single

         item at a time - typically for adding a single

         special order at a time. Normally this needs to request

         the cost so that the retail can be established.

         Now the cost box will be unavailable if security

         settings disallow access to the cost.

 

 The Credit Slip Report has long had the option to show

         only the slips which are not cleared. Now this version

         of the report will also        omit slips with zero balances.

         This can result        in a "cleaner" report [Of course, such

         slips should also be flagged as cleared, but some

         users zero slips out but don't clear them.]

 

 In some versions of JS-Classic, the Mid-Month

         accounts receivable statement would not

         itemize the payments. This has been corrected.

 

 An unnecessary SSL security notice previously appeared when

         processing via Mercury. This has been removed.

         

 Fixed an error message that could occur under certain

         conditions when exiting the Enter Existing Inventory

         screen.

 

 

Version 2.11                                         03/13/2012

===============================================================

 

 Added CC and BCC support when sending email using

         the "Direct II - CDO" sending method - both

         within VJS and in the standalone E-Mail Merge

         program version 2.2

                         

 VJS creates XLS versions of many reports. Previously

         it used a very old version 2 of XLS (for widest

         compatibility.) However that file type didn't

         correctly support 4-digit years so now VJS uses a

         more current version of XLS, which does.

         

 The Commission/Sales By Clerk report has a new version        

         which summarizes to one line per month per clerk.

         To run this version, choose Clerk Monthly for the

         Sort-By option.

         

 Running a standard inventory report by Sku number has

         always automatically created an XLS file. With this

         update the XLS file will include the image name.

         This can be useful if you prefer to send your

         inventory list to your web site by Sku number

         instead of by the more usual style number method.

 

 From the Major Class Code screen you can specify a G/L

         code to be used when sales are transferred to QuickBooks

         In many cases you do not want to specify a G/L code

         per each major code (because you'd use the standard

         settings in QuickBooks Link.) But, before it could

         be difficult to not specify a G/L code. Now it is

         easy to leave that blank.

         

Version 2.10                                         03/01/2012

===============================================================

 

 Improved support for USB point-of-sale pole displays.

 

 Improved network handling in the physical inventory

         exception report. (i.e. when two users have

         the inventory file open.)

         

 Similar improved network handling when updating the

         style number on existing Sku numbers.

         

 A formatting change on the accounts receivable can

         help identify charge customers without a full customer

         profile in the customer file.

 

Version 2.00                                         02/29/2012

===============================================================

 

 The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

         with the inventory list and pictures for the March 2012

         Collection. This includes about 250 new items and about

         400 cost and price changes which are mostly decreases.

         (An access code is required. No extra charge if you have

         subscribed to the Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan.)

 

 In the Report Center, the list of reports in the

         drop-list at the top (Zone1) is now sorted

         alphabetically to make it easier to navigate.        

 

 In previous versions, retrieving a old sale from

         the archive file and printing it could put a copy

         of that sale in the quote/wish list. There was a

         another (somewhat convoluted) way that you could

         previously retrieve an old sale and have a copy

         save in the quote/wish-list file.

         This has been stopped with this update.

 

 Some users were accidentally saving actual sales

         with payments as quotes and so they would not

         post to the actual sales files. With this update

         if you try to save a sale which has payments as

         a quote there will be a difficult to ignore

         prompt warning you that that is unusual and

         asking for confirmation.

         

 When processing credit cards via X-Charge, the sales

         screen is now "locked." This is to prevent

         accidental typing there or misdirection of

         the credit card reader card information into

         the sale screen.

 

 In the Interstore Transfer feature of JS-Classic,

         previous versions would send the inventory weight

         information only for items which were valued by

         weight. Now, the weight for non-weight-valued

         items will be sent. Because this is "descriptive"

         this weight will not *add* to the weight at

         the receiving store, but will replace the previous

         value.

 

Version 1.99                                         02/18/2012

===============================================================

 

 In the Sales Security Settings area of Preferences is the

         selection "Change Sales Clerk." Previously this

         pertained to the clerk setting on the customer

         profile screen. Now this same setting can prevent

         changing the clerk on an existing sale.

         In case changes are legitimately needed, see below

         for information on the Manager Override feature.

 

 The Hot Seller Report has not previously included sales

         figures for pending layaway items. Now it will

         include those pending layaway items if you choose

         to exclude from the inventory figures the layaway

         items (i.e. if you include the layaway items

         in the inventory count then you can't include

         the same item in sales.)

 

 When you record a cash payment and specify an amount

         tendered, both the amount tendered and the change

         are stored in the payment history and the cash

         register reports. If you prefer, you can now choose

         for the amount show as a single net amount figure.

         To activate this option add the keyword

         COMBINECHANGE anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box

         of Preferences. On-screen, however, you will continue

         to see the change amount as you make the payment.

         

 The X and Z Reports can now optionally *not* show the

         to-date        (previous) sales figures. If you want to

         omit that line you can set the security option

         'X/Z-Report To-Date Figures' to a higher number.

         This is set in the security settings area of

         Preferences. If you don't want that information

         to print even for a manager-level user, set this

         security requirement to 11.

         

         [js2vjs]

         

Version 1.985                                         02/06/2012

===============================================================

 

 The commissions report / sales report by clerk now

         includes the calculations for number of sales tickets

         per clerk (not just number of items) and the average

         number of items per ticket and the average total

         sales amount per ticket.

         This information can be used to gauge add-ons and

         and effort per sale.

         These calculations are included if you choose the

         version sorted by Clerk Initials & Date and the

         Clerk Summary

 

 When you run a customer report and choose the "Large"

         export list option, the mobile/cell phone column

         is now included (along with the Home and Work

         numbers, which were previously already included.)

         

 When you use "Add to Existing Sku Numbers" the report

         that you can print previously used a notation

         of negative numbers for additions. (This was

         because it shared the same layout as the deduction

         report.) However, that notation could be confusing

         so in this update positive numbers are used for the

         additions.

         (And the inventory deduction report still uses

         positive numbers to imply deductions.)

 

 In the Inventory Status screen it is now harder to

         accidentally change the valuation, by weight vs.

         by piece) of price and cost. Previously you could

         <Enter> or <Tab> into that box, but now you have

         to specifically click in that box to make a change.

         

 

Version 1.981                                       02/03/2012

===============================================================

 

 Some further adjustments to the option to enter inventory

         by cost code. In places, certain cost values were being

         shown in digits and now they are hidden - including

         the invoice total which was previously visible

         in some areas.

         

 The new decimal option for cost codes has been added

         to JS-Classic

         

 A problem printing an interstore transfer report in

         JS-Classic has been addressed.

 

Version 1.98                                           02/03/2012

===============================================================

 

 The inventory by location report where each Sku item is

         shown now includes the cents for retail and cost.

         The more summarized versions are as before and

         are more succinct, showing just whole dollars.

 

 You can now enter cost codes for new items in the

         Enter Inventory screens. This feature is active

         if the user's security level doesn't allow

         viewing the cost.

         This feature requires that the cost code mnemonic

         in Preferences have 11 characters so it can

         handle cents.

 

 Separate from the above, but related, the cost codes

         have a new option for handling decimals. Frequently

         the cost code mnemonic is entered as a 10-character

         code therefore the cost code on the tag is shown

         for the rounded whole-dollar value. If you have an

         11-character code, the 11th character takes the place

         of the decimal point. [So far, this is as before]

         What is new is that if your 11th character is a

         non-digit and a non-letter, such as:

                 * @ ) ] ; ,  /    etc

         then every cost code will be the cost value in

         cents followed by this 11th character. E.g.

         for a mnemonic of TOURMALINE*  then $123.45

         becomes a cost code of        TOURM*

         

         This new optional format might be more presentable.

         This feature is related to the above new feature because

         entering inventory with        cost codes requires cents and

         requires and 11-character cost code mnemonic.

         

         You can now enter cost codes for new items in the

         Enter Inventory screens. This feature is active

         if the user's security level doesn't allow

         viewing the cost.

 

         

 [memrel]

Version 1.975                                       01/27/2012

===============================================================

 

 The Itemized Sales report where you choose to Sort

         By Date and where you also choose the Summary

         version has been reformatted to take fewer lines

         so that it is tidier and easier to read.

         

 In Preferences there is the option "Ask for customers'

         mailing label salutation". Previously this worked

         only for JS-Classic, but now if you uncheck it

         the mailing label name box on the customer profile

         screen will not be available. (It's often a good

         idea to turn off this feature as a special

         mailing label name format is rarely needed.)

         

 

Version 1.974                                       01/16/2012

===============================================================

 

 The Repair Reports screen adds the option to print

         3-across mailing labels for customers. E.g., you

         might want to select all repair jobs that have

         been completed for more than two weeks but which

         are not yet picked up and print mailing labels

         for those customers to add to a reminder postcard.

         

         

 

Version 1.972                                       01/10/2012

===============================================================

 

 Some of the lines of the Snapshot Inventory Aging Report

         were repeating "24 Months" in previous versions and

         this is resolved in this update.

         

 The commission/clerk sales report allows you to specify a

         price range in case you want to highlight the higher-end

         items. Previously this selection was limited to 100,000

         now you can specify up to 10,000,000.

         

 [MW Open Batch Report Layout]

 

Version 1.97                                       01/04/2012

===============================================================

 

 A problem in deleting the old physical inventory counts

         has been resolved with this update. (Prior to starting

         a new physical count you need to erase the old counts.)

 

 It is now easier to correct the month-end tracking dates

         from the month-end screen. In previous versions,

         security options could cause this to not save.

 

 The time card entry screen can save a short comment of

         up to 15 characters. Previous versions allowed you to type

         more than 15 characters even though they couldn't all

         be saved. The update now restricts the typing to 15 to

         prevent confusion.

         

 Miscellaneous Update for Mercury Credit Card Processing.

 

 [traceunlock]

 

Version 1.96                                       12/29/2011

===============================================================

 

 A new report option is available. You can now run

         reports on purchase orders via the Reports Menu.

         You can select by date, buyer, vendor and you

         can select either pending or fulfilled orders.

                 

 On the Time Card screen you can normally change the

         time in case you couldn't clock in at the

         start-work or end-work time. However, the time card

         reports will show any adjustment.

         In this version, if you want to disallow any changing

         of the time, you can find the security setting

         "Able to change time on time-card entries:" in

         the Main Menu Security II page in Preferences.

 

 In case a non-related repair and a sale end up with the

         same number a change in this update will prevent

         the repair details from showing on the non-related

         sale.

         

 [xy118, mwrpt, myfx]

 

Version 1.95                                       12/28/2011

===============================================================

 

 The GMROI sales reports previously would only report

         sales from the Current sales file which is normally

         the past 2 to 3 years. Now you have the choice

         to run either on the current sales file or the

         Archives sales file (for older sales.)

         Choose Full Selection on the GMROI report screen

         to see the choice "Archived Data" (this choice

         may have appeared before but was not active.)

 

 The Commission Report(or Sales Reports by Clerk) now

         allows you to run the report for an individual

         customer. Choose Full Selection to see the choice

         "Customer Number."        (this choice may have appeared

         before but was not active.)

         Note that you may need to look up

         the customer number form the Customer Maintenance

         screen before using this option.

 

 In the sales screen where you want to record a returned

         item you choose either Options (in-line) then

         Return to Stock. Or you can manually type negative-one

         in the quantity. Previously, if you typed -1 and

         then clicked directly on the Payment box at the bottom

         the -1 would not "take", i.e. you had to tab and press

         OK or click OK.

         In the new version the -1 will register even if you do

         skip the OK and click directly in the payments box.

         

 When you save a cash sale where the payments don't

         match the total, you are warned and prompted

         to either "Go Back" so you can record the payment

         or to convert the sale to a Layaway. Previously

         the default response (if you were to simply press

         <Enter>) was to convert to a Layaway.

         In the new version the default response is to "Go Back."

         This can help prevent accidentally recording '

         Layaway sales. It can also help prevent accidentally

         saving a Wish-List/Quote sale as a committed Layaway.

 

 On the Extended Detail page of Inventory status, the cost

         box for the center and side stones were previously

         limited to $9,999. This has not been changed to

         a maximum of $999,000.

 

Version 1.94                                         12/10/2011

===============================================================

 

 A new 3-part receipt layout has been added. Certain

         combinations of detail on multi-part receipts

         can cause the last page to (inexplicably) not print.

         If you use the 3-part receipt and have this pagination

         problem you can try this new receipt layout

         "42 3-Part Receipt - Letter-Size - Raised Summary"

 

 The "Activity" page of the Inventory Status screen

         shows the adjustments for each item. If the

         wording of the adjustment includes the word "Cost"

         the new version will not show that wording for

         users who do not have access to the cost.

 

 Applying a payment to a layaway or special-order sale

         always brings the date of the overall sale forward.

         This is quite important for sales dating.

         However, if you have a special need for this to NOT

         occur, the current version has a way to override this

         which we don't recommend in most cases.

         To activate this option, go to Preferences and add

         the keyword DONTUPDATESALEDATE anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box.

         You can, of course, change the sale date manually,'

         as needed.

 

 The inventory Web Export feature can now create

         export files where the inventory details lines are

         created as multi-line fields. Note that many web systems

         cannot accept such data so the default behavior remains

         the creation of a separate field for each line of detail

         text.

         To activate this option, go to Preferences and add

         the keyword MULTILINEINVEXPORT anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box. You can also choose a

         special line-break marker instead of the usual carriage

         return/line-feed - by adding an extra character

         after the keyword. For example using a keyword

         MULTILINEINVEXPORT^ would make the ^ (caret) character

         the line-break marker.

 

 In previous versions, when running the Sales Payment

         Spreadsheet to cover a time greater than one day

         layaway sales with certain combinations of payment

         dates could appear as un-finalized even though

         they were finalized in that date range.

         This has been addressed in this update.

 

 The inventory Web Export feature can now export

         up to 30 lines of inventory detail - up from

         10 in previous versions. (see notes in V 1.79 to

         1.83 below for more information on that feature.)

 

 The portion of an in-house charge sale "paid" with an

         addition to the in-house account does not normally

         show as a payment on sales receipts.

         If you would like to be able to show that amount

         on a specific line on the receipt, that is now

         possible.

         To activate this option, go to Preferences and add

         the keyword PRINTONACCT anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box.

 

 

 A new option allows you to turn off the warning when

         you select from the sales screen a Sku number

         with zero quantity. This can be set by major code -

         perhaps for a category of items that you have decided

         to not track accurately and which you leave at zero.

         Open the Major Class Code maintenance screen

         and go to the "Other" page and type Z for

         the Alternative Type.

         Note that even without this setting, Shopkeeper

         does not give you a Zero Quantity warning when

         you select a repair Sku.

 

 It is now possible to add a repair tracking screen /

         envelope to a non-repair item.

         For major class codes that need this behavior,

         open the Major Class Code maintenance screen

         and go to the "Other" page and type R for

         the Alternative Type. This way, the sales

         screen will present a "Repair" button on sales

         lines for items in that class code instead of

         the usual "Appraisal button."

 

 

 Corrected an error message in the Relocate Inventory

         screen which appeared during a previous recent

         update.

         

 From the Picture Manager screen, the option to

         make a certain image the first-shown picture

         has been clarified visually to make it easier

         to see. The wording has also changed from "Default"

         to "Primary Image."  Also, previously, when you

         clicked the thumbnails at the top left corner

         the Default checkbox didn't change to reflect

         the currently selected picture - but now does.

 

Version 1.93                                         11/29/2011

===============================================================

 

 You can now disable any payment type from the payment

         options list. I.e. you could disable gift cards,

         personal check or even cash. You might do this

         in order to reduce the chance of selecting

         unsupported payment methods. In previous

         versions only credit cards could be disabled.

         This option is set from the Payment Types page in

         Preferences on the Maintenance Menu.

 

 If you create a new sale and add repair details

          or appraisal details, then, *before* ever having

          saved it you Delete the sale, previous versions would

          not delete the repair or appraisal details.

          In the current version you are asked if these

          related details should be deleted or not.

         

 Previous versions could allow you to retrieve the same sale

         at different computers on the network at the same time.

         This sometimes led to problems so the current version

         now prevents a second person from retrieving the same

         sale at the same time.

         

 Changes have been made to the receive inventory screen when

         unwanted items are deleted as you log in inventory.

         There was some 'odd' behavior in certain cases which

         has been improved.

 

 The Sales Report by Clerk / Commission Report can now create

         an XML file along with the XLS file when

         you choose the Export option and when you sort by

         Clerk and Customer. In addition to sales details, these

         export files contain customer details which could be

         imported into a shipping program or email program, for example.

         

 When printing repair envelopes, it is now possible to print

         the trade shop/vendor's address and phone number. At this

         time, none of the pre-made layouts include this information

         but you can request from Compulink the needed steps to

         add this to one of your custom layouts.

         

 From the Inventory Status screen you can add one or several

         different Sku's to a mini-list of items for which to print

         tags by clicking on the "Print a Tag" icon at the bottom right

         corner. For the past few versions, this list appeared to

         show many copies of the item you clicked (but it didn't

         actually cause multiple extras to print). This visual

         anomaly has been corrected in this update.

         

 

Version 1.92                                         11/15/2011

===============================================================

 

 When retrieving a layaway with a balance due, the cursor

         now jumps directly to the payment box. This can save

         some keystrokes or mouse clicks.

 

 The sales screen performs additional verification to

         prevent a blank sales date being allowed. On the

         same tack, the payment spreadsheet report will

         issue a warning if it detects any blank dates.

 

 Fixed is an error message that could occur when printing

         credit slips for customer returns.

 

 Managed lookup lists have a further change such that when

         users review a preview record (sale, repair, etc) which

         contains an entry that is no longer on the official

         list and where the user doesn't have Add privileges,

         the old item will not be added to the list.

         [see version 1.91 for more details on Lookup Lists.]

 

 The Customer Reports and Labels Report screen has the choice

         "Prices." Previously this wasn't very clear that it meant

         that while scouring the customer buying history, only

         consider items which were individually priced over a

         certain amount. The prompt now reads "Prices Over" and

         a mouse-over tool-tip explains this.

         

 

         [ftpsnd]

 

Version 1.916                                   11/04/2011

===============================================================

 

 The ability to change the date of a payment on a sale

         or on a gift certificate or on a payment on

         in-house charge account is now back.

         This used to be available, but disappeared

         in a previous update.

         

 

 

Version 1.915                                   11/02/2011

===============================================================

 

 * As with update 1.911 this update also requires a

         "Data Structure Update" - see 1.91 notes below

         for more details

 ------------

         

 The version of the Zip Code Report of customer

         purchases has been updated a) because previously

         the grouping was not correct b) to print in

         three columns for a more succinct report.

         

 Additional capabilities have been added to the

         Bonus Points feature. If you use Bonus Points

         email Compulink to request  more details.

         

 Changes necessary for inter-store inventory transfer

         following the changes in version 1.91

         

 

Version 1.91 (1.86 - 1.91)                         11/01/2011

===============================================================

 

 ** Important Note For Users of Shopkeeper QuickBooks Link **

         After running this update you will also need to

         update QB-Link to Version 3.50.  You can find

         the 20MB update (not the full installer) at this page:

         http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/qblink.htm

         

 * Note For All Users

         Unlike most updates, this update will require a

         "Data Structure Update" which means that a

         backup will be requested first. For those running

         a network version of VJS, all computers will need

         to be out of VJS while the first computer runs this

         backup and Structure Update. After this first computer

         runs the update, all additional stations must also run

         the update. However, they can run the update while

         others are in VJS.

 

 ------------

 

 Many data boxes in VJS are "Managed Drop-Down Lookup Lists."

         which allow you to create pre-made lists of choices.

         For example, customer types, repair locations, etc.

         You can manage the list by right-clicking the box

         and choosing Edit Selections.

         

         The important change in this area is that you can

         now prevent users from adding new entries to the list

         of available choices. Previously users found that they

         could end up with many unwanted variations of, say,

         customer types, repair locations, etc.

         

         To add restrictions, right-click any managed lookup list

         and choose Edit Selections, then enter a high required

         security level to the Add New Entries box and

         Make Changes to the List. You can even prevent yourself

         (the manager) from accidentally adding new entries by

         setting the required level to 11. However, you could

         still make changes when needed by either choosing

         Edit Selections or by choosing Lookup Lists in Preferences

         from the Maintenance Menu. The Make Changes to List

         security option refers to the ability to right-click and choose

         Edit Selections.

         

 Manager, deleting multiple lines

         (e.g. unnecessary duplications) is now more intuitive.

         [right-click any managed lookup list and choose Edit

         Selections, or choose Look-Up Lists from Preferences.)

 

         

 When using the Add to Existing Sku Numbers feature, at

         the top is a box to enter an inventory location

         which is optional. If it is left empty, then by

         default items are assigned to the existing location

         code of each item. If this is filled in, then this

         is where each added item will go without regard

         to where the Sku was previously (or still is.)

         If receiving a shipment of items destined for a

         particular location this will save time and increase

         accuracy over typing the location for each item.

 

 The notes/comments area on the vendor screen was previously

         limited in length to l50 characters. Now the

         vendor notes length is unlimited. As before,

         when you run vendor reports, you can choose to

         see only those vendors with certain key words

         in the notes/comments. E.g. you might choose to

         show only the vendors with the keyword

         DIAMOND-DEALER.

         

 The vendor screen has a new box on the Other Addresses

         page where you can record the service address.

         I.e. returns may need to be sent to an address other

         than the accounting offices. For now this is for

         on-screen use only; it doesn't print on labels.

 

 The commission report can simultaneously create an Excel

         file version with additional columns beyond those

         shown in the report - including the date the items

         were received and the number of days it took to sell.

         In        previous versions the date received column was not

         always accurate and this has been fixed in this update.

 

 VJS's X-Charge credit card processing now supports

         "Partial Approval." This occurs where a customer

         uses a card with a strict limit which may permit

         say, a $205 charge on a sale of $300. In this case

         you can accept the $205 on the card and the remainder

         by another means. Before "Partial Approval" VJS

         and X-Charge would simply issue a decline for

         a charge request over the limit.

         

         Related to this, note that the processing of certain

         pre-paid "credit" cards may return a card balance and

         it is required to print on the receipt so the customer

         knows how much joy is left on the card. This capability

         is in the new version.

         

         Together, the above confer certification to VJS for

         the "MasterCard Partial Approval Mandate" with X-Charge.

 

 Previously a single in-house credit slip or gift card could

         not be used twice on the same sale (e.g. a layaway.) This

         need should be very uncommon, but it is now possible

         for those rare cases.

         

 If you have selected "reduced graphics" the Main Menu will

         now appear more quickly and will "flash" less when it

         starts. This is applies principally for remote access

         connections and where the graphics setting is "Fewer"

         or "Lower".

         

         [bpv2]

 

Version 1.85                                    10/4/2011

===============================================================

 

 When you choose to Add a New Sale from the Customer X-Tra

         Search screen you usually are prompted for a sale

         number. If you choose Cancel at this point, the new

         version will remain in the X-Tra search screen whereas

         previous versions closed the X-Tra search screen.

         This also applies to adding Repairs and Credit Slips

 

 When you run the Itemized Sales report and choose to

         sort by Sku Number with the Summary option, the

         individual Sku's are not shown - just the totals

         for each major code. That's not new, but what is

         new is that now there are also subtotals by

         each group of major codes (e.g. a total for all

         Diamond major codes; a total for all ring major

         codes, etc.) Major code groups are set up on

         the Major Class Code maintenance screen.

         

 In the Entire Customer History report in previous versions

         in many cases, payments that were by Cash or Credit Slip

         were shown as Check. This has been corrected.

         

 In the Accounts Receivable payment screen, an extra warning

         shows if you try to make a payment of zero but enter

         tendered amounts of more than zero. (Just a warning,

         not a prohibition as it's possible that you're recording

         a payment type correction that balances to zero.)

         

 The narrow (roll of paper) version of the X and Z Reports

         have been adjusted because on some printers the first

         letter of each line could be cut off.

 

Version 1.84                                  9/28/2011

===============================================================

 

 When editing old (archived) appraisals of customers'

         own items (items they didn't purchase from you),

         you can now add        pictures to them. This is useful

         when updating old appraisal records.

 

 Adjustment to the position of the separator lines

         in one of the customer reports.

 

 [ref: xcpartv1]

         

 Version 1.832                           9/16/2011

===============================================================

 

 Correction of a side-effect tag printing problem

         introduced with version 1.83.

 

 The 6,2,G Sales Comparison reports in JS-Classic now

         create an Excel file simultaneously while

         the report is run. The filename is SALECOMP.XLS

         in the JSREPORT folder on the Windows desktop.

         (The column heading names are terse. To decipher

         them, compare to the displayed report version.)

         

         

 The 6,2,G Sales Comparison reports in JS-Classic now

         works when grouping by Manufacturer. In addition,

         when running this report for past 12 months sales

         the partial current month does not include the

         figures from the completed same month of last year.

         

 

         

 

Version 1.83                           09/13/2011

===============================================================

 

 This What's New button will now show you the What's New

         List of the newest update version posted to the website.

         I.e. it will show you what is available even before

         you have downloaded an update.

         Previously, this would show you the What's New list

         only of what you had already installed.

         

 The Inventory Reports have a check-box option to include

         the retail price on the report. In previous versions

         un-checking this option removed the retail column

         from some, but not all versions of the report.

         In this update all variations of the report can

         have the retail price column removed.

         

 The Inventory Report by Style web Export option added

         in version 1.79 (see below) now creates a Tab

         Delimited version. This is in addition to the

         previously available XLS (Excel) and XML (web

         database) export files.

         This increases the number of web platforms that may

         be able to import your inventory file.

 

 Quicker access to tag printing. From the Inventory Status

         screen if you press the Ctrl key while you click

         the Print-a-Tag button at the bottom right corner, VJS

         goes to the last confirmation step to print tags,

         skipping several intermediate steps. You can do this

         with just a single item or you could add several

         items to the temporary list with a regular click

         and Ctrl-click on the last item.

 

 The JS-Classic utility "period" was deactivated in August.

         It has been revised and is now reactivated. (This utility

         is only        for use in special circumstances when advised by

         Compulink.)

         

 [ref: libhpdf,iploc]

 

Version 1.82                           08/31/2011

===============================================================

 

 The checkbook report ("Register" version) previously didn't

         correctly report checks with multiple subpayments where some

         of those were credits. This is corrected in this update.

         

 The inventory web export file and the inventory report by style

         can now select only those items which have an Alternative

         Description. The Alternative Description and the Alternative

         Notes are on the Style Det. page of the Inventory Status form.

         These are often used to phrase the description in a way that

         is suited for a web page - i.e. more so than the basic tag

         description. From the Inventory By Style report screen

         choose Full Selection and choose Only w/Alt.Desc.

         You can also run the report excluding those items in case

         you need to see which items do *not* yet have such

         a web description.

         

 The Hot Seller Report is often run to show you only those styles

         which have more than a certain number of repeat sales, e.g. more

         than 3 or 10. A new option allows you to show only those items

         which have zero sales ( i.e. a Not-Seller Report!)

         Enter -1 (minus 1) for the sales greater than line to show

         the no-sellers. As before, entering 0 (zero) means show items

         whether or not they have had a certain number of sales.

                 

 Previously the itemized sales reports and commission reports wrapped

         very long sale numbers onto a second line. Now such long sale

         numbers will fit on one line.

 

Version 1.81                           08/19/2011

===============================================================

 

 The report reprinting previous Z-Reports now has a

         recap version which shows one day per line so you

         can see several weeks per page instead of just the

         one-day-per-page version previously available.

         At the Print Options box that appears before the preview/print

         change the layout to Z-Report Multi-Day Recap.

 

 The optional Pandora Import program has been updated

         with the inventory list and pictures for the Fall 2011

         Collection. (no extra charge if you have subscribed to the

         Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan.)

         

 In previous versions the inventory entry screen could sometimes

         be impeded if another user were adjusting an item on

         the Inventory Status screen. This version resolves that

         possible conflict.

 

Version 1.80                           08/11/2011

===============================================================

 

 The Layaway Statements area has a new report option

         which yields a more standard *report* of layaways.

         Unlike the statements which have one customer per

         page and are designed for mailings, the new report

         shows multiple customers per page. Unlike the Simple

         Layaway Report, this one includes all the details of

         the sale including the items and the payments.

         [when you access the Print Options box for the

         Layaway Statements, change the Report type

         to Layaway Report (not Statements.)

         

 Further, the Layaway Statements (and reports now) area

         can now allow you to select Layaways Only, Special Orders

         Only, Repairs Only, or all types together. Previously

         Layaways and Repairs together were the only choices.

         This means the statements can now exclude repairs and

         you can run more detailed reports to follow-up on

         special orders.

         Note that Repairs are identified by whether you choose

         Repair type at the top of the sales screen - not based

         on whether you specifically add repair details to a sale.

         

 The inventory report by style web export option added

         in version 1.79 (see below) now creates an XML

         (web database format.) This is in addition to the

         previously available XLS (Excel) export file.

         This increases the number of web platforms that may

         be able to import your inventory file.

 

Version 1.79                           08/9/2011

===============================================================

 

 VJS adds the new, Inventory Report by Style from the

         Reports Menu. This report combines different Sku

         numbers which share the same style into one line.

         Previously you were able to able to get a similar

         report by choosing the Hot Seller report. However,

         the new report is more succinct and faster because it

         does not include sales information.

         

         In addition it offers a customizable Web Site

         export file option. Using the Web Export Configuration

         option, you can select the inventory columns you want to

         export and you can change the export file column names used

         in the resulting Excel XLS file. You can choose to select

         only those styles that you have recently received or sold so

         you can create a small file of just those items recently

         received or updated.

 

 In JS-Classic when you merge two customers together, the sales

         quotes / wish list sale items of both customers will be merged  

         together. In previous versions the quotes of the deleted customer

         name were not kept.

         

 

 

 

Version 1.78                           08/02/2011

===============================================================

 

 On the Gift & Credit Certificates screen you can now

         specify / change the next default slip number.

         From the top of this form choose Options, Set

         Next Slip Number.

 

 The commission report XLS export file will no longer

         report negative discounts for items sold at higher

         than the regular price.

         

 The appraisal print-outs can now include the appraisal

         number. By default most appraisal formats do not

         include the number; only the layout called

         "Appraisal with No Template, Smaller Picture"

         will include it. However, it is possible to use

         the designer to customize any of the other formats

         and add a text box with the expression AppNumber.

         [Customizing is an optional feature for advance

         users who can ask us for a guide.]

 

 In JS-Classic the Equifx utility is now active.

         [only relevant to those users who have subscribed to this

         optional feature.]

 

 In JS-Classic, from the Edit Customer profile screen (8,1,2)

         there is an option to press PageUp for References if the

         customer has a charge account. The first page of References

         shows the previous month's balances and previous versions

         had no security restriction on that page. This page is

         now linked to the same security setting for Edit Charge

         Account Balances (8,1,4)

         

 In JS-Classic when you merge two customers together, the longer /

         extended notes area of both customers will be merged and

         together. Previously the extended notes of the deleted customer

         name was not kept. The shorter notes were merged in previous

         versions and they still are in this update.

         

         

 

Version 1.775                           07/21/2011

===============================================================

 

 If you select a QuickSale code from the Sales screen

         previous versions created a brand new sales ticket

         with a new number. With this update, if you have

         already selected a customer and a sales ticket

         number, VJS will add the items from the QuickSale

         code to the sales ticket on the screen.

         [QuickSale codes are set up in Quick Sale Maintenance

         from the Maintenance Menu. They allow you to 'pre-package'

         several Sku's, or just one, into a two-letter code.]

                 

 In previous versions if you restricted access to view the

         cost, the Inventory Status screen would show the

         cost in code. In this update, you can make the cost

         nor cost code show at all with a new security option

         in Preferences "View Cost Code on Inventory Status Screen."

         

 Some suppliers provide image files for their items where the

         image file names are the same as the style number except

         that the image filenames contain underscores in place of dots.

         The current update will match up those picture files for

         you when you run the Picture Check option from Cleanup.

         E.g. If you have a style 1.2.3 and your supplier gave you

         a picture file 1_2_3.jpg, this will now match up.

         [See notes under Version 0.948 below for basic folder and image file

         naming requirements.]

         

 

Version 1.77                           07/13/2011

===============================================================

 

 The "Entire Customer History" Reports now add an extra

         entry next to each sold item to show you the clerks

         for that sale. There are four versions of this

         report and the Standard version and the version with

         Pictures include the clerks.

         

 If you have a point-of-sale cash drawer, you can now

         make it pop open only when you have just received a

         cash payment. Some people have cash drawers with

         slots for credit card slips and checks and prefer

         that the drawer pop open as little as possible.

         To activate this option, go to Preferences and add

         the keyword POP4CASHONLY anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box.

 

 The data verification option in Cleanup will now *not*

         consider 頡 problem letter so that pav鬠for

         example, will not show as a potential problem.

 

 Version 1.74 added the option allows you to update the retail price

         and description of many related items quickly using the Inventory

         Search screen. This version adds the ability to additionally

         update the cost of many items, but only for level 10 users.

         See the Version 1.74 notes below for more details.

         

         

Version 1.762                           06/30/2011

===============================================================

 

 The Tag Printing area now allows you to select tag

         to print by Par Number. From Tag Printing, choose

         Full Selection then you can type a range

         of Part Numbers to include.

         

 When you re-stock styles that you have had before you

         might need to enter a cost different than the suggested

         cost (the previous most recent cost). In such cases

         VJS will prompt you about the possible need for

         a new price and a suggested price is offered.

         Generally, this is an important warning to consider

         but if your particular situation is such that a warning

         is unhelpful, you can remove the warning by adding the

         keyword NONEWRETAILWARN anywhere in the Miscellaneous

         Settings box of Preferences. If you'd like the warning

         but not a suggested retail use the keyword NONEWRETAIL

 

 One figure in the summary area of the Payment Spreadsheet

         report is the total of the new layaway deposits. In

         certain cases where two separate deposits are received

         on a layaway on one day, the total might not reflect

         the second one. This has been corrected. [in previous

         versions the total of the sales and the total of

         each money received was correct; the problem was only

         with this particular "new layaway" deposits recap.]

         

 RapNet allows you to list your diamonds on the Rapaport

         website. A program is being developed for

         Visual Jewelry Shopkeeper to help automate the

         posting of your diamond inventory.

         Email us if you are interested in this. Let us know

         if you currently use RapNet, how you use it, how many

         items you might expect to upload and how frequently.

 

 [ref: sahchk;salecommtoreal,pmtssopenlay]

 

 

Version 1.76                           06/23/2011

===============================================================

 

 When backing up data from the VJS File Center, the new

         version now backs up your image files to help prevent

         them being lost after a hard drive problem.

         Note that if you have many thousands of pictures you

         should verify that your backup memory stick has

         enough space. The first time you backup to any individual

         backup stick it will take extra time. Subsequent backups

         to any individual memory stick will be quicker as only

         the new pictures will be added.

         If needed, you can disable this option from the backup screen.

 

 In Customer X-Tra Search if you type a 10-digit phone

         number VJS will now show you all customers with

         that phone number - and only those matching customers.

         This whether it's a home, work or mobile phone number.

         In previous versions just the first        match was shown so

         you might not know if there are duplicate records

         with that same phone number.

 

 The data verification ignores some accented characters

         to avoid unneeded warnings.

         

 New Inventory Sku's can be added directly from the Inventory

         Status screen. This would not be used for the addition

         of standard inventory (which should be added via

         Inventory Entry) but may be useful for "dummy" repair

         or service Sku numbers.

 

 [ref: ipcity; jsrepairnotes;locqty1]

 

         

Version 1.75                           06/13/2011

===============================================================

 

 The Inventory Aging Snapshot Summary report has been added.

         This report gives you a concise summary of your inventory

         separated into six-lines aged by 3, 6, 12, 18, 24 months

         and older. Not only does this report give you the shortest

         report to get your inventory totals, it gives you an

         important overview of how old your inventory is. This

         may prompt you to act on shedding too-old stock.

         [Select Inventory Reports and change the Itemized or

         Summarized line to Snapshot Aging Summary.]

 

Version 1.742                           05/31/2011

===============================================================

 

 The feature to search the Internet to find customers and vendors

         by phone number has been updated again due to a further

         change in the format returned by www.whitepages.com

         which was causing the address and phone number to

         be somewhat scrambled.

 

 

Version 1.741                           05/27/2011

===============================================================

 

 If you choose "Canadian Options" in Preferences the

         clerk profile screen will no longer show State and

         Zip, but instead will show Province and Post Code.

         

 The option to allow lower-case inventory descriptions

         (see 1.73 below for more details) has been refined

         so that you can allow lower case inventory descriptions

         even if you require upper-case customer names and

         addresses.

         

 If you accidentally enter a number of blank lines in

         an inventory description or a receipt extra message

         (e.g. for the class code) the current version will

         do a better job removing unnecessary blank lines

         printed on the sales receipt.

         

 

Version 1.74                           05/25/2011

===============================================================

 

 The feature to search the Internet to find customers and vendors

         by phone number has been re-enabled.

         (This is an old feature, but has not been available for

         some time because the Internet search systems change periodically

         requiring reprogramming)

         If you're not familiar with this, when you search for a customer

         by their 10-digit phone number, VJS will search your existing

         customer list first, but if not found it will search

         www.whitepages.com

 

 A new option allows you to update the retail price and description of

         many related items more quickly - such as updating all

         items from one vendor or from one major code. From the inventory

         status screen you can click the drop-arrow of the Sku

         number box to see the Inventory Search box. In this list

         you can check the box to allow editing. If you choose to

         Search by style and typed in a vendor code you would see

         all the items for that vendor and you could adjust the

         prices and descriptions to match the new catalog.

         By default this feature is available only when logged in

         at level 10. You can adjust the required security setting

         by choosing Preferences form the Maintenance Menu, then select

         Enable Editing Price and Description in Inventory Search Screen.

         

 

Version 1.73                           05/20/2011

===============================================================

 

 Previously, inventory descriptions were always upper-case

         only. Now there is the new option "Require Upper-Case

         Inventory Description?" in the Inventory Defaults

         area of Preferences. Especially for the longer appraisal-

         type of inventory notes, allowing  mixed upper and

         lower-case can be more presentable for appraisals,

         receipts or web-pages.

         

 In the Vendor X-Tra Search screen, the list of items

         at the bottom right (inventory items, returns, etc)

         previously did not always refresh quickly when you

         typed or select a different vendor name. This area has

         been improved in this update.

 

 Each major class code can have an additional message

         that will print on the sales screen. That part

         isn't new, but a change in the new update is that

         this message will print on receipts even for

         items sold with a quantity of -1 (returns or

         trade-ins or credits) This may be important if

         you have a particular gold trade-in Sku or

         a special coupon Sku in certain major codes and

         you need additional wording to print when they

         are added to sales.

         [You can add this message from the Major Class

         code screen from the Maintenance Menu.]

 

         

 The Inventory Status screen has a page called

         Style History. This page shows other Sku's that you

         have received for the same style of item. (This part

         isn't new)

         The change in this version is that now this page

         will no longer show the cost of the other Sku's if

         the access to cost has been turned off from the

         Security Preferences, where in previous versions

         it did.

 

 When you run inventory reports you can select a range

         of prices or costs to be included on the report.

         Previous versions allowed a selection value

         of up to $99,999, but now you can select based

         on the full range to $9,999,999.

 

 The Simple Layaway Report adds the new option to sort

         the list by the original take-in date.

         

 When you receive inventory the items are assigned to your

         default inventory location code (which you can change,

         of course.) New in this version is the option for VJS

         to check if that style was previously stocked and to

         use the same location that was most recently used. That

         way if different lines are usually stocked in different

         locations they will automatically be remembered.

         To activate this option go to Preferences and add the

         keyword USELASTLOC anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings

         box. This applies to both JS-Classic and VJS.

         

 If you don't need to enter a location code when adding inventory

         go to Preferences and on the inventory defaults page

         uncheck the box Ask for Location Code. Note: If you *do*

         need to enter location codes but no longer see the location

         option, check this option in Preferences. Previous versions

         may have shown you the location box even if this option

         were unchecked.

         

 The Vendor Profile screen has a page showing activity such

         as invoices and checks. A new security option allows

         you to restrict access to this page. In the Preferences

         choose More Security Settings and set the required level

         for 'View Vendor Profile Activity Page.'

 

 In version 1.541 a new option was added such that when a

         change in the estimate on the repair screen would be

         copied to the sales ticket. In the case where the sales

         screen line for that job had a quantity of 2 or more, the

         result could be a doubling of the sales price. This has

         been corrected in this version.

                                         

 Improvements for two-across barcode tags. Resolves

         a problem that could occur under some circumstances

         where selecting a Join-With didn't work correctly.

         

Version 1.72                           03/28/2011

===============================================================

 

 Various changes to help with the new requirements of

         Merchant Warehouse in processing negative credit

         card charges / returns.

         If you use Merchant Warehouse please contact us

         for details on what to look for and what to

         look out for.

 

 

Version 1.71                           03/23/2011

===============================================================

 

 

 If you right-click a picture in the Picture manager

         (for inventory, repairs, customers, or clerks)

         VJS will now pass the picture to Windows view.

         This can help with viewing large pictures such

         as scanned documents, certificates, etc.

         Note that VJS will not decide which program opens

         the picture; Windows will select its default

         viewer.

 

 Improved correction of mis-entered dates. For example

         if you change a date 03/01/2011 by typing 032511 it

         will show as 03/25/1120. The current version will

         correct that to 03/25/2011.

         

 In Js-Classic, when you edit a previous repair detail

         screen via the sales screen the first box to edit

         will now be the location box as this is more

         likely to be updated than the description. In

         addition this yields easier access to extended custom

         job tracking detail screen by pressing PgUp.

         

 In version 1.541 a new option was added such that when a

         change in the estimate on the repair screen would be

         copied to the sales ticket. In this update an extra

         warning is given to the salesperson when the final receipt

         is printed that the price has changed. This is helpful

         where different people are entering revised estimates

         from those who are collecting payments and printing receipts.

         

 The Physical Inventory screen allows you to add items to the

         physical count list by typing a Sku, scanning a Sku or

         importing a text file list of Sku Numbers. A new feature

         is that the when using a text file list, the new version

         accepts a quantity next to each Sku.

                 [E.g. a line could read        01510007, 5 which would be imported

         as quantity 5 of Sku 15-10007. The quantity can be separated

         from the Sku by a comma or a space or a tab.]

                 [If there is *not* a quantity included, then each line will

         be assumed to be one.]

                 [This same capability also applies to the features: "Add to

                 Existing Sku Numbers", "Deduct from Inventory", "Relocate

                 Inventory", "Return Inventory to Vendors"]

         

 The repair screen has been slightly enlarged in order to add room

         to show the customer's phone number(s) in the address box

         near the top right corner.

 

 In the sales and repairs screens, when you hover the mouse over

         the customer address the customer number will appear.

         

 [ref: viscom]

 

 

Version 1.703                           03/07/2011

===============================================================

 

 

 JS-Classic now includes the 10K utility which will

         give you a list of customers who spent more

         than $10,000 in cash within a year.

 

         

 A change in the VJS update routine that will help

         for future updates. Most VJS updates can be

         downloaded and installed even while other users

         are running VJS. Also, while other computers on

         the network *should* run the same update quite

         soon in order that everyone have the same

         version, it is not required immediately.

         

         However, on rare occasions an update might require

         that all users on the network be out of Shopkeeper

         after you download the update (so that the data

         files can be updated)

         

         However, previously you wouldn't have known until

         after you ran the update and then you might have

         found it was an inconvenient time. With 1.703

         and above, when such an update is available you

         will be informed *before* starting it.

         

 [ref: iploc]

 

 

Version 1.700                           03/03/2011

===============================================================

 

 The Hot-Seller / Reorder report is the report which

         summarizes inventory (and optionally sales) to

         one line per style even if there are multiple

         Sku numbers for certain styles.

         what's new in this update is that you can select

         a single invoice number. Choose Full Selection

         to access this choice.

 

 In previous versions, adding an appraisal via the sales

         screen in JS-Classic (DOS Shopkeeper V.10) could result

         in the picture file not being linked to the appraisal

         when the appraisal is viewed or printed from VJS.

         This limitation        has been removed in the new version.

         

 You can now make particular messages appear when you sell

         merchandise from certain vendors. In the vendor profile

         screen, add to the notes <<MSG: Message Here >>, including

         the angle-brackets, and the "Message Here" words will

         appear on screen. You can use this to remind staff

         about special carry bags, freebies such as polishing

         cloths, promotions, etc. If this feature becomes

         popular this message area may be moved to a dedicated

         sales area message.

 

 The Physical Inventory screen was previously sharing the

         security access level of the Return to Vendor screen,

         but now it uses its own separate security setting which

         is in Preferences.

 

 In the Drop-Down Pick-List Manager, deleting multiple lines

         (e.g. unnecessary duplications) is now more intuitive.

         [right-click any managed lookup list and choose Edit

         Selections, or choose Look-Up Lists from Preferences.)

 

 The White Pages customer lookup by phone number previously

         could indicated Found! even when the result was an

         empty name. This has been corrected in this version.

 

 Previously the last few letters of very long style numbers

         previously were not visible in the Inventory Status

         Screen. This is corrected in this updated.

         

 If you have repair Sku Numbers, you can add text to

         the Notes area of Inventory Status. This creates

         a template that is automatically transferred

         to the Description and Repairs boxes on the

         repairs detail screen.

         The first five lines of notes are transferred to

         the Description box and the next five lines are

         transferred to the Instructions box.

         

         For the particular repair Sku's with such notes

         this supersedes the overall Repair Template that

         you can record in Preferences.

 

 When printing layaway statements you can now select

         by customer number. When printing a statement for a

         single customer, in cases where a large customer list

         has many similar names the customer number approach

         can be quicker / more precise. (This option was visible

         before but not active)

         Access Layaway statements from the Sales Reports Menu.

 

 When printing archived (several years old) receipts

         for sales with repair detail attached, previous

         versions didn't print the repair details, but

         starting with this version those details will

         appear. As with current file sales, you can choose

         to *not* print repair details on sales receipts

         if you prefer that they be printed only on

         the actual repair envelope / ticket.

         

 In Preferences, on the Inventory pages, you can

         set a standard (store-wide) markup for the MSRP value.

         This is separate from the markup options that

         are normally entered separately for each major

         class code. These values were visible in previous

         versions but they were not active before.

         Now they will be used to fill in the MSRP as

         you receive merchandise.'

 

 When you make a quantity (or price etc) adjustment in

         the inventory status screen then immediately go

         and check the adjustment history, previous versions

         would show only the most recent adjustment and you'd

         have to exit the status screen before it would refresh.

         Now the inventory adjustments will all show immediately.

         

 When receiving a new merchandise invoice VJS sometimes

         would show an erroneous error message indicating

         that the invoice was a non-inventory payable

         or a return credit payable. The message would disappear

         but it has been removed in this update.

         

 A problem in JS-Classic with the Physical Inventory by

         location report has been resolved.

         

 The Bonus / Loyalty Points Report in JS-Classic now

         automatically creates an Excel file as the

         report is run. Beyond the report, it also includes

         the mailing address fields, telephone numbers and

         the customer type.

         

 

 [ref: z_*; download util delfxp]

 

 

 

 

Version 1.693                                           02/02/2011

===============================================================

 

 A needed change/fix  was for the Pandora Catalog Update

         for Shopkeeper DOS 9.x

 

         

Version 1.692                                           01/28/2011

===============================================================

 

 Miscellaneous

         Repair re-finalizing prompt removed

         Better avoidance of negative quantity items from

                 the inventory search window.

         Removed delay of Sales Notes appearing in Zone 7

                 of the Sales screen.

         Change in Inventory Audit Report (of JS-Classic)

                 to better handle Adjustments.

         Easier viewing of sales notes, Zone 7 of sales screen.

 

 

Version 1.691                                           01/24/2011

===============================================================

 

 

 Some computers were unable to use the new White Pages

         reverse lookup by customer phone number.

         (see Version 1.680 below.)

         This minor update add some Windows support files

         which some computers were missing, which should

         help in those cases. [msvcp71.dll]

         

         

 

 

Version 1.690                                           01/21/2011

===============================================================

 

 

 A new Pandora Jewelry program has been added to address

         the overhaul of 1000's of items in the catalog

         effective February 1, 2011. Most items have new

         costs and prices, and 1000's of the rings have

         new styles, barcode numbers and descriptions.

         In addition there are many brand new styles. The

         updated program retroactively makes all the changes

         in the inventory file, and previous sales (

         style numbers only for previous sales). In addition

         the new pictures are also imported.

         You can request an access code from Compulink for this

         program (free if you have a Maintenance Plan.)

 

 The Itemized Sales Report feature to either include

         or exclude sales by the state in the address

         field of the customer has been activated.

         This can help when running sales tax reports

         or other analysis by state.

 

 Speed increase when importing large files into the

         Physical Inventory count screen.

 

 The Physical Inventory Exception Reporting area has

         a new comparison option by Part Number. Since

         the Part No. in Shopkeeper is often used to

         store the manufacturer's UPS or EAN barcode

         this is effectively a comparison by Manufacturer's

         Barcode.

         You can import a text file of manufacturer Barcodes

         by right-clicking the Import a List Button.

         When you have finished the addition of items and

         continue to the report screen, you will select

         the option "Physical Inv Except by Part No" on

         the "Itemized or Summarized Line."

         The results will be sent to an Excel File

 

 Speed increase showing the Repair Billing screen

         from the sales screen. (perhaps only noticeable

         for customers with huge numbers of repairs.)

         

 Improved verification that you *not* retrieve an existing

         non-inventory invoice (a regular payable) in

         the inventory invoice screen (which can cause

         a duplicate and confusion.)

         

 Added ability to manually assign a sales period number

         to a sale. Press Ctrl-Click in the period number

         box near the top right corner of the sales screen

         to enable changing of that. This is not recommended

         in most cases and it is available only to users

         logged in at level 10.

         

 (ref: Utility call; Picture Re-Link by Sku.)

 

Version 1.680                                           01/10/2011

===============================================================

 

 When you search for a customer by phone number and that

         customer is not found in your existing customer list

         VJS will search the internet and create a new customer

         record with the name and address.

         The previous search method used Google - which has now

         reduced its search results. So recently this feature

         has not been working.

         VJS now uses www.whitepages.com which results in

         many more matches.

 

         The same thing applies to vendor lookups by phone

                 and adding new vendors.

 

 When you run the inventory report summarized by major class

         code the figures are rounded to whole dollars - for an

         easier to read report. A new option allows you to show

         cents. On the Inventory Reports screen change the line

         "Itemized or Summarized" to read "Major Summary w/Decimals."

         

 If there are any declines for Merchant Warehouse or X-Charge charges

         more details on those transactions are now stored in a log file

         in the CCAUTH folder in case further review is needed.

         

 

 

Version 1.672                                           12/27/2010

===============================================================

 

 Miscellaneous:

         Some changes were made to the year-end steps to reduce

         the chance of network traffic/weakness causing

         errors while old sales are purged - which is a sensitive

         time to encounter network errors.

 

 

Version 1.671                                           12/21/2010

===============================================================

 

 In the Sales screen the Ctrl-R keyboard shortcut to pop up

         the repair billing screen is now available from almost

         anywhere in the sales screen instead of only from the

         Sku Number box. [for more details on this new option

         see the notes in 1.660 below]

         

 In the sales screen an extra warning appears if you enter an

         an item with a non-zero price but the total amounts to

         zero. This is either if you leave the quantity as zero for

         items priced by the unit or if you leave the weight as zero

         for items priced by the weight.

                         

 When receiving inventory with no style where you use style

         N/A (not applicable) previous versions could inherit picture

         items from previous instances of N/A styles. Now such

         pictures, if they exist, will not be applied to the

         new inventory item.

 

 The posting report column headings Credit Slips and Gift

         Certificates have been changed to better reflect what

         the column represents: Gift & Credit Slips Used (as payments)

         and Gift & Credit Slips Issued (to customers). The

         information and figures in the column have not changed.

 

 The Interstore Transfer Reporting feature (in JS-Classic)

         adds a new Summarized option to produce shorter, summarized

         reports. The report also creates, in the JSREPORT folder, an

         Excel XLS file of the results of the report.

         

 

Version 1.660                                           12/16/2010

===============================================================

 

 Similar to the change in 1.650 below concerning intermittent

         pagination problems, most of the other sales receipts

         have been modified to reduce such printing problems -

         not just layout #11.

         If you encounter pagination problems on multi-page receipts

         but you have a custom layout, you would need to create a new

         custom layout based on the new *Original Version*

         

         Note that in general, pagination problems are related to

         very long end-of-sale receipts so reducing that message

         can also help

 

 Several restrictions (protections) have been activated regarding

         the dates on sales.

 

 If you encounter any warnings or difficulties with dates on sales

         please see the options below and make any changes to Preference

         and security to customize VJS to your needs.

 

 In the Sales Defaults page of Preferences

         there is a line "Restrict Sales Screen Dates to xx days

         before and yy days after entry date" For example, if you

         enter 2 days before and 0 days after, then when entering a

         sale on July 5 the sales screen will only allow dates of

         July 3,5 and 5.        If you frequently enter sales from previous

         weeks or months then you should enter a larger number than

         2 for the Before box.

         

 When you edit a previously finalized sale you cannot change the date.

         

 Both of the above protections can be overridden if you are

         logged in at a high-enough level. Within the Security section

         of Preferences there is a setting "Override Date Restrictions

         on Sales" If you set this at, say 9, then only level 9 or 10

         users can override the date restrictions. If you set it to 11,

         then no-one can override the date restrictions.

         

         If you are log in at a high enough level and also do not want to

         be warned about possible date problems go to Preferences and anywhere

         in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword NOSALEDATEWARNING

         

         

 Separate from the above, note that now when you edit a previous

         layaway        and *without* making a payment (e.g. you reduce the

         sale total to match the down-payment) now the sale date is

         automatically brought forward to today. In previous versions

         without making a payment to finalize the layaway the sale date

         wasn't automatically brought forward.

         

 When the Sales Screen is waiting for a Sku Number, a new

         keyboard shortcut is available, Ctrl-R which pops-up the

         Repair Billing screen. The usual methods of choosing

         Repair Billing from either of the Options list are

         still available. (Repair Billing is used only when you

         enter repairs.

         

         Another new shortcut Ctrl-N (think N for Net price) in

         either the Price box or        the first description line

         actives the Backout Tax option.        

         

         

Version 1.650                                           12/08/2010

===============================================================

 

 

 Under certain circumstances a multi page sales receipt

         that almost fits on one page but the totals print

         on the second page could have this second page not

         print. One of the sales receipts layouts has been

         modified to prevent this. If you experience this you can

         select the layout "11 Side-By-Side Laser, Raised Summary"

         Note that this may not be exactly the same format you

         have used before but it should be a good format.

         Note that if you have already created a customized

         receipt layout and want to benefit from this change, then

         you will need to create a new custom layout based on

         the *Original Version* of this Layout No. 11.

 

 

 If you have certain lines of merchandise that should always

         be assigned to a particular location code, add LOCATION=XXX

         anywhere in the notes box for the vendor in the vendor

         profile screen and then new merchandise for that vendor will

         default to that location. Change XXX to the preferred

         location code.

         

 When you enter Physical Inventory counts and you specify a location

         for each item, the new version will assume that location

         for the subsequent items (unless you change it) That can save

         typing in the location for every single item in the physical

         count list.

                 

 The side-by-side layout of the Payment Received on Account receipt

         will now print the logo file - the same one selected within

         Preferences for        sales receipts.

         

 In previous versions when you create a Quote / Wish List sale in

         a certain month and then convert it to an actual sale in a

         subsequent month, the sales period number could remain as

         the previous sale period number. Now such a sale will

         have the sales period number changed to the period number

         of the month in which it was converted. This can help with

         the organization of certain reports.

                         

         

 In the customer profile screen when you tab through the entries for

         name and address, the cursor now lands on the Zip/Post Code box

         before that of the city. That way, if you fill in the zip code

         the City will be suggested (provided it is a zip code you have used

         before)

         

 When you add inventory for a received invoice, if you delete a certain

         stock number line, that Sku number is zeroed out and removed from

         the invoice. However, the Sku number is not completely removed;

         you can look up that Sku from the Inventory Status screen and can

         view the history of the item. However, if you prefer such removed

         items to be permanently removed as if they had never been added,

         go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box

         add the keyword PERMDELINV]

 

 In a recent update, the appearance of the text entry fields/boxes was modified

         to be cleaner and flatter. If anyone preferred the old look which has

         a more defined 3D style border, you can revert to that

         [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the                        

         Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword TEXTBORDER3]

         In addition, there are two other styles you can apply by adding either

         the keyword WHITEBEHINDTEXT which will make the backgrounds always

         white or BLACKTEXTBORDER which will make the edges black. The white

         background option is compatible with either of the edge styles.

         

                 

         

 

Version 1.640                                           11/30/2010

===============================================================

 

 A Cash Register report graphing the activity by each

         hour of every day has been added to the Sales Reports

         Menu. This can help you plan staffing and opening

         hours.

         Choose Cash Register Hourly Activity Reports.

         If you have an Internet connection, the results

         can be graphed, otherwise a text report is available.

         Also, unlike the JS-Classic version the report

         with the number of transactions per hour can show

         the dollar figures per hour on the same report.

         

 The Inventory Search box has an improved response

         when searching for a partial Sku number. For example

         if you type 900 to select a repair Sku and do not

         type the rest of the Sku, the previous version would

         jump to the top of the list where the new version

         will jump to the first Sku near 900.

         

 

Version 1.635                                           11/18/2010

===============================================================

 

 

 

 Miscellaneous

         A new option allows you to change the location of the

         VJS Reports folder. (Instructions on request.)

         

         In case of difficulty for those computers with two or

                 more webcams or other USB-connected cameras

                 an alternative picture-capturing method has been added.

                 [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the                        

                 Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword ALTWEBCAM]

 

 

Version 1.63                                           11/15/2010

===============================================================

 

 

 Improved behavior when you search for inventory items

         by brand and style or by part number or Pandora barcode.

         It is possible to have multiple Sku numbers for a single

         style and of those Sku's there may be various combinations

         of zero and non-zero quantities in stock. This update

         improves the selection logic to speed up finding the

         appropriate item.

         

         Related to these changes is a new option in Preferences

         on the page Sales Screen Cont: FIFO - Sell Oldest Sku of Style Number

         If you turn this option on, then in the sales screen

         when you search by Style or Part Number the oldest matching

         item will be selected with fewer confirmation steps.

         

 

 The Layaway Statements have been improved to omit layaways

         that have been paid off. Also, for those statements with

         multiple layaways, a Total line is added for the sum

         of the amount due on all layaways.

 

 Miscellaneous

         On the Repair screen a newly available tab

         "More Details" has several new detail fields

         that you can fill in to classify the usage op

         Metals, Stones and findings.

         Currently these fields are not used in reporting.

 

         When clicking on the down-arrow for the major code of a

         new item when entering inventory, sometimes the message

         "that class number does not exist" would appear

         unnecessarily. This has been addressed.

         

Version 1.62                                           11/10/2010

===============================================================

 

 The Repair Reports now allow you to search and filter report

         by keywords or numbers that you enter in the long Notes

         box. For example, if you have a number of different jobs

         that are all related in some fashion to job 1518 you could

         enter SEE1518 in the Notes box.

         On the repair reports screen choose Full Selection to

         find the Keyword option. Note that you can search for

         multiple different keywords for one report by entering

         them separated by a column, e.g.: SEE1518,SEE1213

 

 

 For Zebra-language tag printers, VJS now adds control

         over the heat setting to control the density 30

         the text. The range is 5 to 30. If you leave it

         blank then the printer's default setting is used.

         This setting is adjusted on the Tag Layouts screen.

         

         

 Miscellaneous

         The previous version caused an (harmless) error message

         to appear when printing Sales Quotes and that has

         been resolved.

         

         In a few situations, when creating a customer list export

         a message could erroneously indicate that the export file

         was        already open in Excel. This has been resolved.

         

         When you add a special order item to a sale, using

         the "Add an Inventory Item", a new option allows you

         to *require* printing the associated purchase at

         that time. This in order to prevent forgetting this

         step.

         [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword SPECIALORDERPRINTPO]

 

         In JS-Classic, you can now change the vendor on an existing

                 Purchase Order. Edit a purchase order, and on the Style

                 line, press Enter and choose Vendor.

                 

         In JS-Classic, depending on your security settings, it could

                 have been difficult to add a preferred clerk to a customer

                 profile screen. This has been made less restrictive

                 for a new customer while retaining the restriction on

                 a pre-existing customer.

                 

                 

         

 

Version 1.61                                           10/22/2010

===============================================================

 

 A new "Add to Existing Sku Numbers" option has been

         added to the Inventory Menu. This is similar to

         editing Sku numbers        individually and manually

         increasing the quantity on-hand, but this is much

         quicker when working with several items at once.

         In addition it allows you to print reports - with

         and without pictures.

         Note that this is *Not* the normal method or

         receiving inventory; it is typically used for

         low-value items where you don't want precise

         inventory tracking. E.g. this method does not

         fully track the dating of each item, the separate

         invoice        numbers and different costs that you have

         for a new shipment. The normal method for receiving

         a shipment of inventory remains        Enter Inventory which

         creates a new Sku number for the restocked existing style.

 

 The A/R Past-Due Aging reports adds a new optional report layout

         with the mailing address.

         You can choose this layout from the Print Options

         box that appears just before the report prints.

         (NB, v.1.60 added the address option to the A/R Balance

         Aging report whereas this pertains to the A/R Past-Due Aging

         Report.)

 

 The customer Special Events report now includes

         the spouse's first name.

 

 The simple layaway report can now be set to exclude repair

         sales or to show only repair sales. Note that this

         criterion is based only on the type of sale shown

         in large letters at the top of the sale. (e.g. Cash Sale,

         Layaway, Repair, Special Order). This does *not* depend

         on whether or not the sale has a repair Sku or an

         attached repair tracking screen. Note that repair sales entered

         via JS-Classic would not be classified as repair sales

         for the purposes of this selection criterion.

         From the Simple Layaway Report screen choose Full Selection

         to find this selection criterion.

 

 The Excel file created by the inventory report now includes

         a field with the full description of the minor class code.

         This is used by B.I.G. and you may find it useful yourself.

         

 Sometimes the sales screen would show the message

         "Job Order No. 123  Has Disappeared." which could be annoying

         even though it was harmless. That message should mostly be

         eliminated now. (inform us if you encounter it in particular

         situations.)

         

 The Take-In date on the repair screen was previously not editable.

         Now you can set a security preference to select which login

         access levels can change this date. This setting is on

         the Sales Security page in Preferences.

         

 

 

Version 1.607                                           10/20/2010

===============================================================

 

 

 The Pandora Fall 2010 catalog additions and changes are now

         available to be imported.

         

 

Version 1.605                                   10/15/2010

===============================================================

 

 

 

 Miscellaneous

 

         You can now require that a sales dept code is entered for

         all new sales. This option is turned on or off from

         the Sales Screen Defaults page of Preferences from the

         Maintenance Menu.

 

 

         Quicker refreshing of the list of options in

         the Drop Down Pick List Manager in Defaults.

         Also a clarification of the entry for "Repairs

         Vendor / Trade Shop" (previously "Outside Repair Shop")

         

         

         If you add the keyword VERIFYCUSTOMERONREPAIR to Miscellaneous

         Settings in Preferences, then when you add a repair

         to a sales ticket the customer profile will appear

         so you can't forget to verify you have the current

         contact information.

         

         The computer name is now marked in the backup.ini file to help

         identify which computer performed the last backup.

         This is useful in case data needs to be restored.

         

         The inventory audit report (only in JS-Classic) has a correction

         to a mis-calculation that could have occurred with items

         having miscellaneous adjustments.

                 

 

 

Version 1.60                                   10/08/2010

===================================================

 

 

 The A/R Aging reports adds a new optional report layout with

         the mailing address and some other columns.

         You can choose this layout from the Print Options

         box that appears just before the report prints.

 

 

 The Itemized Sales Reports adds the option to run

         reports for a single location code.

         Choose Full Selection to see this choice.

         Note that if you select Location Code AA

         you will see just those sales from AA and

         not AA1, AA2 etc. If you want to see sales

         from all locations beginning with AA, enter

         location code AA*. Similarly if you want to

         see sales from all locations beginning with

         A (such as A and A2 and AA3, etc) select

         location code A**.

         

 Miscellaneous

         In order that the Save & Clear Vendor function on

         the Repair Quick Update screen *not* clear

         the Rec'd back from vendor date, add the keyword

         RQUSAVERECD to the Miscellaneous Options box

         in Preferences.

         

         When receiving merchandise and a zero cost is entered

         previous versions would not permit that. the new version

         issues a warning but will allow it if you confirm.

         

         In the previous version when receiving merchandise,

         the drop list for the major and/or minor codes would

         sometimes not appear when clicking the drop arrow

         with the mouse. This has been corrected.

                 

                 

         

Version 1.59                                   10/01/2010

===================================================

 

 

 In Preferences there is an option to require that

         either the Vendor or the Location be filled in.

         Previously turning this option on required that

         both the location *and* the vendor be filled in

         but now it's just one or the other - although,

         of course both can be filled in.

         

 From the sales screen a line-item linked to a repair

         ticket will show the repair picture if there is one.

         In the new version you can bring up the full-size

         image and the picture manager by clicking on this

         image. In previous versions you had to first

         pop-up the full repairs detail screen.

         

 The Credit Slips and Gift Certificates Report has been

         added to the Reports Menu. This feature was

         previously available, but only by opening

         the Gift Certificate screen and then choosing

         Options, Gift Certificates Reports.

         

 In previous versions, accounts receivable credit memos

         could adjust the layaway figures on the X and Z

         reports instead of the accounts receivable figures

         and that has now been corrected. (This did not

         previously affect any official accounts receivable

         or layaway figures or reports - just the X and Z

         reports.)

         

 When making a new sale, the notes area (one of the options

         available in the bottom left corner) was sometimes

         in accessible until after the sale was saved and

         then re-edited. Those cases have been solved

         and it's always directly editable.

         

 Adjustment to a possible problem in the discount /

         manager override feature added in Version 1.580

         

 Additional verification steps for tag layouts

         case of some data problems.

         

 

 

Version 1.58                                   09/29/2010

===================================================

 

 

 The sales screen adds the Manager Override feature to

         let a manager temporarily login to allow, for

         example, a higher than normal discount.

         From the top of the sales screen choose Options,

         Manager Override. The override status stays

         in effect until you choose Options, END Manager

         override or until you close the sales screen.

         [Important Note: If you activate the manager override

         feature the manager capabilities apply to ALL

         screens in VJS. So if you enter your manager

         override password and walk away, the user could

         switch to a different screen in VJS and access

         higher-level functions. Be sure you choose END

         Manager Override or close the sales screen before

         you walk away.]

 

         

 When you record a sale, a *copy* of the inventory information

         is added to the sales files so, for example, changing

         the retail price or description of a certain Sku does not

         change the price of an existing sale. The same was

         previously the case for the inventory cost.

         The new version adds a change so that if you change the

         cost of an inventory item, then that cost will automatically

         be updated in the sales files for any pending (unfinalized)

         sales. This commonly occurs when entering special order

         sales and the correct cost isn't know ahead of time.

         Also, if you change the cost on a Sku and there are finalized

         sales for that item, you will be asked if you want to retro-

         actively update the cost in those sales records.

         [if you do NOT want to update and do not want to be prompted

         for the update to the cost for finalized sales, you can

         prevent that by adding the key-word  DONTUPDATEOLDSALESCOST

         to the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.]

         

         

 In the inventory entry screen there were certain combinations

         of keyboard, mouse entry and certain selections of

         major codes that would cause unnecessary warnings of

         invalid or empty major codes. Those combinations should

         mostly be better-handled now.

         

 When entering new inventory items via the Purchase Order

         screen there were cases before where the new item

         would not inherit the picture from the previous

         time that same style had been stock. This sequence

         has been improved in this update.

         

 The entry sequence when entering returns to vendor has

         been simplified. E.g. since you normally don't need

         to assign your own return number, if you type

         the vendor code and Enter or Tab it'll jump

         to the Ok - Edit List button which is normally

         the next step. This should make entry a bit

         faster and some errors can be avoided.

         

 When editing a previously received invoice of incoming

         merchandise        previous versions highlighted the last item

         on the list. With the update the first blank line is

         selected first which should feel smoother and more

         intuitive.

         Ditto for editing a previous sale where you Unlock

         the padlock to edit the sale.

 

 

         

Version 1.57                                   09/21/2010

===================================================

 

 The Repair Reports feature now creates an Excel XLS file

         of the report so you can review or reformat the

         results in different ways.

         

 The Repair Reports now allows you to select the results

         by Including or Excluding lists of Customer Type.

         For example this could let you separate the repair

         list by Retail or Wholesale customers or you might

         have a customer type indicating a trade customer

         who picks up on Mondays, or VIP type customers, etc.

 

 

 In previous versions on the Return to Vendor Report

         certain figures were not shown in the subtotal and

         grand total lines and those are now all        included.

         

 

 The inventory Excel XLS output file that gets created

         when you run an inventory report now includes an extra

         column for the purchase order number.

         [output XLS files are put in the VJS Reports folder

         on the Windows Desktop.]

         

 When you change the major code of an existing item in

         inventory a new Sku number is assigned. What's new

         is that a reference to the old Sku number is added

         to the adjustments activity history of that item.

         [To change the major code of an item, open and

         unlock the Inventory Status screen, then Ctrl-Click

         the Major Code box. To see the adjustments history

         use the Activity page of this screen and choose

         Adjustments.]

         

 When applying a miscellaneous credit memo to an in-house

         charge account, previous versions applied the credit

         to the Current aging bin. The new version applies

         the credit starting with the oldest aging bin followed

         by more recent bins as needed.

         Further, the on-screen confirmation message after saving

         the adjustment previously would in some cases show the

         incorrect balance in the message. (But the actual balance

         was        actually updated correctly.) This has been corrected.

         

         

 Miscellaneous:                

         An occasional (inert) error message would appear

                 in previous versions after a successful backup

                 from the File Center. This message no longer appears.

                 

         The A/R credit-debit memo screen now has access to

                 the Edit Customer Profile screen via the Options

                 button at the top of the screen.

         

 

 

Version 1.56                            09/16/2010

===================================================

 

 Some computer systems had conflicts with the new PA-DSS certified

         X-Charge. This version has a new X-Charge method which

         should help in those cases.

         [ in Preferences, Payment Options, Credit Card Defaults,

         change the Authorization Type to XCSECURE3 ]

         

 The repair reports screen now lets you select by

         customer number. This can help if you have some clients

         who send in many jobs and you need a report for just

         that one client.

         [Choose Full Selection from the Repair Report screen to

         find the Customer Number option.]

         

 The inventory status screen will show you which user originally

         entered a new inventory item.

         Currently this shows on the Picture tab (for space reasons)

         Note that this information will show only for items added

         after this version update.

         

 The accounts receivable aging reports (introduced in 1.55)

         can now let you select customers by a date range

         for the last payment date.

         

 

         

 

Version 1.55                            09/14/2010

===================================================

 

 This version has the addition of accounts receivable

         aging reports and past due aging reports. These

         are accessed via the Accounts Receivable Menu.

         Note that unlike JS-Classic, both the past-due

         aging report and the balance aging report are accessed

         from a single report screen; the selection between

         the two layouts is the first choice.

 

 Previous versions would not print month-end accounts

         receivable statements for A/R accounts with negative

         balances. This is now possible in but it is not the

         standard setting. Choose For Balances Less Than Zero

         or Any Balance to include the negative balances

         

 

 The B.I.G. (Buyers International Group) sales report export

         Excel files now include columns        to identify memo and special

         order sales. This export file is created when you run

         the Itemized Sales Report.

         

 

Version 1.542                         09/08/2010

===================================================

 

 Entering a payment on account now updates the Last Payment

         Amount field which previously was not updated.

 

 The Major Class Code editing screen now allows you to

         make changes directly in the listing page. This can

         help speed up changes if you need to change many

         classes at once. E.g. you could copy and paste the

         Group name into many lines, and more quickly update

         markup rates on many major class code.

         Only the inventory type cannot be changed in the grid;

         That has to be changed in the first (Description) tab.

 

 Miscellaneous

         The Repair relocation log (see notes in Version 1.54 and 1.461) now

         also stores        with the update log the initials of the clerk

         who made the change.

 

         

 

Version 1.54                         08/31/2010

===================================================

 

 A new option can sort the inventory reports by invoice

         number. This will sort primarily by vendor and

         within vendor by invoice number. Change the Sort By

         line to Invoice in the Inventory Reports screen.

         

 The Return to Vendor reports now have an extra column:

         Original Cost. This is useful for items where

         the return cost value/credit amount is different

         than the original cost. It's especially useful

         for Memos which area always listed with a return

         credit of zero (so they don't add a credit slip

         in the payables.)

                 

 The Repair Status Quick Update screen now has the option

         to clear the Vendor/Trade Shop name and date and save

         it to the Notes area for future reference or for a

         job movement audits. (This is similar to the feature

         added in Version 1.461 below but for multiple jobs

         at a time.)

         In addition, when you choose this Clear and Save

         feature from either        the Repair Status Quick Update

         screen or the individual job update        screen, the date

         and time of each update is added to the notes.

         

 When you enter a repair via the sales screen, the initial

         price entered on the sales screen is copied to the

         Estimate box on the repair screen. However, when you

         change the estimate or cost on the repair screen that

         has NOT previously updated the price or cost on the

         sales screen (in order to avoid corrupting sales figures.)

         However, for those who prefer to enter repair prices

         from the repair        screen, there is a new option (in the

         Repairs screen of Preferences) to allow the repair

         screen cost and estimate to be copied to the sales screen.                

         Even if you do activate this feature, it applies only to

                 sales that have NOT yet been finalized.

         This feature works from both the individual repair update

                 screen and the Repair Status Quick Update screen.

         

 In previous versions when you add an appraisal to a sales

         receipt        where you had discounted the item, in some cases

         the appraisal value would default to the discounted price.

         Now in such cases the higher of the regular selling price

         or the MSRP will be used as the value.

         

 There has long been an option to 'stamp' sales activity with a

         cash register code. This can be used, for example, to run

         separate cash register reports for different workstations.

         [This can be entered from the Local Defaults Continued page

         within Preferences.]

         The new option is to present the option to type a Cash

         Register Code each time someone logs in. In addition, you

         could make it required - i.e. as a separate option you can

         disallow logging-in if a cash register code is not selected.

         [To do that, add the keyword REGISTERREQUESTED or

         REGISTERREQUIRED anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box

         in Maintenance/Preferences.]

 

 The itemized inventory reports now allow you to show the

         Replacement Cost instead of the standard cost.

         From the Inventory Reports screen, select the Show Cost

         option and change it to Replacement.

 

 In the Charge Account section of the customer profile screen,

         there are numerous tabs of information and some of them

         previously did not show the customer's information

         until you clicked the Edit Account Balances button. Now

         the information there will show without clicking that button.

         

 Miscellaneous

         Removed have been some unnecessary security warning

                 errors have could sometimes appear on some inventory

                 screens such as Relocate Inventory Return Stock to

                 Vendor, Physical Inventory, etc.

                 

 

Version 1.53                         08/16/2010

===================================================

 

 

 Miscellaneous

         Change relating to X-Charge credit card processing.

 

         Correct error message that could sometimes appear when

                 running the VJS Update button.

 

Version 1.52                         08/12/2010

===================================================

 

 Improvements to the data-entry steps when adding customers

         via X-search. For example, if you type Smith, then see

         the name you want is not there and click Add, then

         Smith is added to the new customer record. Or if

         you type Smith, Tom and click Add or Press Enter (if

         there is no Tom yet) then both Smith and Tom are added

         to the new customer record. This (and other adjustments)

         help speed-up entry of new customers.

         

 

Version 1.51                           08/10/2010

===================================================

 

 When opening a company file from the VJS File Center the

         data verification step can be a bit slow for some

         users with slower computers or slower networks.

         This step will now be done just once per day and

         not every time you start VJS which can save a lot of time.

 

 Previous versions could have required that the Customer Type

         field be filled in on the customer profile screen for

         users logged in at lower sign-in levels. [if you clicked

         or tabbed into that box it wouldn't let you leave without

         assigning a customer type at levels 1 through 3]

         This requirement has been removed.

         [In a future version, it is expected that this will be a

         security setting that you can control.]

         

         

Version 1.50                           08/05/2010

===================================================

 

 When entering repair jobs it is possible to enter an

         alternative repair number (which could be used to

         record the job number of jeweler who sent it to you.)

         There is also the possibility of a separate in-house

         repair number different from the final sale number.

         When you search for a repair by number on the sales

         screen, all three number sequences are searched.

         However, if you have duplicate numbers (because different

         jewelers sent you jobs with the same numbers) only the first

         match was retrieved.

         In the new version if you want to view all jobs with that

         number, open the Repair Browser by clicking the down-arrow

         in the Job Number box of the repair screen, then at the bottom

         type in the job number and press Enter and all matches will

         be shown from which you can select one.

         

 In this same area, when in the Job Number box in the repair

         screen the keyboard shortcut, Alt-Down-Arrow, will replicate

         clicking the down-arrow to show the Repair Browser.

         

 

Version 1.49                           08/04/2010

===================================================

 

 When entering inventory via the multiple-item grid of the

         Inventory Entry screen, there is now direct access to

         the extended inventory notes box which is often considered

         to be a pre-appraisal description.

         In the bottom left corner of the inventory entry screen

         choose the Notes button.

         [This Notes button was previously visible but was not an

         active feature.]

 

 The inventory Excel file that is created when you run an

         inventory report has two extra columns, Replacement Cost

         and Minor Class Code. These columns are often used by

         B.I.G. - Buyers International Group.

         

 In previous versions, editing a layaway sale and simply removing

         an item and making no other changes wouldn't always "take."

         This combination has been addressed in this update.

         

 Credit card size (and other size) "Hint Cards" (aka Product Cards)

         can be printed from the Inventory Status screen by clicking

         the Print a Tag icon at the bottom-right corner, then you choose

         print, then from the tag printing screen choosing Product Card.

         This has been available for many versions, but what is new is

         that Right-Clicking the Print a Tag icon is a short-cut to more

         quickly print a single product card and avoid several steps.

         

 

 

Version 1.48                           07/26/2010

===================================================

 

 When looking-up customers by phone number, if the customer

         is not already in your customer list, VJS can search

         Google for that number and in many cases the name can

         be added to your customer list without needing to type

         the name and address.

         This feature has been in VJS for years - it is an option

         in the Customer section of Preferences]

         However, periodically Google formatting changes and this feature

         has not worked for a while. This feature has been updated in

         Version 1.48

         

 Miscellaneous

 

         When you print a report or a sales receipt or a repair ticket, etc.

         you have the option to use the designer to customize the layout

         (reserved for users experienced with databases and/or design

         software) When you create a custom layout you give it a name and

         a change in Version 1.48 is that you can use spaces now which can

         help create more understandable names for the different layouts

         you might create. E.g. You might create one sales receipt called

         "No Discount" and another "Discount Option"

 

         When taking physical inventory and you don't check the box

         to Ask for Location, when you scan an item in multiple locations

         the program will no longer stop to ask which of the multiple

         available locations to use. It will just pick the first location

         to make it easier to quickly scan the inventory without interruption.

         (In this case the location may not be correct, but in this case

         you're not wanting to verify separate locations - just the total

         count per Sku.)

 

Version 1.47                           07/21/2010

===================================================

 

 Previous versions did not correctly handle using credit slips

         as payments on in-house charge accounts. The credit slips

         were not automatically marked as used. You had to edit

         the slips and manually mark them as used.

         This update corrects that.

 

 Appraisal printing offers the ability to enter different profiles

         (different names, along with credentials, etc.) If you enter

         more than one name then when you print appraisals you can

         select the name to use for that particular appraisal.  

         To enter different profiles, choose Options from the top

         of the Appraisal screen, then Appraisal Print Layout.

         If the Select Appraiser screen appears when you print

         appraisals but you do Not want that choice/prompt, then

         choose Appraisal Print Layout as above and delete the entries

         you don't want so that you have just one appraiser in the list.

 

 Miscellaneous

         Changes to the option to change style of items via the

         Inventory Status screen.

 

         Add the Weight column to the inventory Excel export

         file (created when you run an inventory report.)

         

         The Hot Seller Report will now, by default, include in

         the remaining inventory the quantity on layaway.

         

         USB-connected Cash drawers by MS Cash drawer are the primary

         supported draws and USB-connected MMF brand draws are the second

         choice. Some program changes have been made so that some other

         drawers        may be accepted, such as those using serial ports. This

         feature        is not guaranteed but may give some non-supported drawers

         an extra lease on life.

         [In Windows create a Generic/Text-Only printer driver associated

         with the serial port of the drawer. In VJS Preferences choose

         Local Settings, choose Other Drawer, select the Printer Driver

         and enter the ASCII code which opens the drawer -e.g. something

         like 007,007]

         

 

Version 1.461                           07/13/2010

===================================================

 

 

 The Entire Customer History reports now include the

         appraisal value along with the appraisal text and date.

 

 The Simple Layaway Report now includes the cents figure instead

         of rounding to a whole dollar figure.

         

 The repair screen has a Notes page for unlimited miscellaneous

         notes separate from the Description and Instructions areas.

         Now you are able to drag and drop text into this box.

 

 Also pertaining to this Notes page, there is now a button on

         the repair screen which will copy the vendor/trade shop name

         along with the date to and from this vendor to the notes area

         and will then clear this vendor box. This way you can maintain

         a history/audit trail of which vendors the job has been to and when.

         The button to click is the small green right-arrow just by

         the Vendor/Trade shop box.

         

 Miscellaneous

         Changes to the backup routine error reporting.

         

         Changes to the repair details page of the X-Tra Search screen.

         

         Formatting improvements to the additional details pages of in-house

                 charge-account customers.

         

Version 1.45                            06/29/2010

===================================================

 

 Addition of support for the new Secure method of processing

         credit cards via Merchant Warehouse.

         

 When entering purchase orders, there is a two-line area for

         description / notes. This box has been made a bit wider

         for ease of reading. In addition these notes now print

         on the purchase order printout, near the top . (note, that

         if you have made a customized version of the purchase order

         printout you would need to use the *original version* or create

         a new customized version based on the *original version* in

         order to print these notes.

         As before, the standard purchase order notes that apply to

                 all purchase orders print at the bottom of the printout.

                 These notes are entered via the Payables page in Preferences

                 from the Maintenance Menu.

 

 When entering physical inventory you can choose to enter items by

         Sku number or by manufacturer code and style number or by

         part  number. When you choose by style, a new option will

         pre-fill in the manufacturer code so that you need only

         type the style number. This is for the case where you are

         taking physical inventory of a particular manufacturer and

         want to save time. Check the check-box Same Mfg to enable

         this option.

                 This feature also works for the similar screens such

                 as relocate inventory, deduct inventory, assemble-

                 disassemble, etc.

                 

Version 1.441                            06/24/2010

===================================================

 

 Minor (but important) change for X-Charge credit card

         processing

 

 

Version 1.44                            06/23/2010

===================================================

 

 

 A new Wish List / Quote report is available to show you

         all, or a subset of the Wish List or Quote sales.

         This report is available via the Sales Report by

         Clerk because it could be common to follow-up with

         customers by salesperson.

         Choose the Sales Report by Clerk, then Full Selection,

         then Change the Wish List or Sale option to Wish List.

         Note that it would be common, but not required, to change

         the Sort By option to Clerk and Customer so that you

         see the customer contact information.

 

 The Return to Vendor reports now show the full vendor

         name in addition to just the abbreviated vendor code.

         

 When you receive and invoice of merchandise and record it,

         there is a report available to print a copy of what

         you just entered.

         A fifth new layout has been added that includes, the

         cost price, the retail price and the pictures of the items.

         

 

Version 1.43                             06/22/2010

===================================================

 

 

 Addition of another security setting for sales. The new option

         can disallow editing finalized sales with a prior date.

         You can separately allow editing finalized sales with

         the current date if that option is still needed even if

         you disallow it for older sales.

         

 The Repair Reports now will include the Alternative Job Number

         in addition to the primary Job Number. (The Alternative Job

         Number is sometimes for the repair number of jobs sent to

         you from other jewelers.)

 

 In JS-Classic the Archive (purge) checkbook feature previously

         would show error messages and those have been removed now.

         These didn't cause any problems nor stop the archiving from

         working but they were bothersome.

         

 Miscellaneous        

         Adjustments to the date column when receiving inventory

         from a purchase order - in the case where you use

         both JS-Classic and VJS.

         

         Corrected a potential error message that could occur

         during month-end closing.

         

         When selling an item priced by weight, previously when you

         changed the weight sold you had to press Tab after typing

         the weight or click Ok or fill the weight in with 3 decimal

         places - but Enter didn't work. Now the Enter key works there.

         

 

 

         

 

Version 1.42                             06/17/2010

===================================================

 

 In previous versions the estimate did not print on

         the 40 column version of the repair tickets and

         that is fixed in this update.

         

 The tag layout screen allows you to design more than

         one layout this could be because you print different

         information on the tags for different merchandise or

         because you have more than one printer each with a

         different type of tag.

         In this update, VJS now remembers the different printer

         selections you make for different printers. E.g. it can

         remember that Tag Layout A should go to Printer X and

         Tag Layout B should go to Printer Y.

 

 Miscellaneous.

         Prevent an (innocuous) error message when retrieving customers

         who have an in-house A/R account and who have extremely long

         notes on the customer profile.

         

         On-screen message when uploading an error report to Compulink

         that if the error if blocking you, that you'd want to email

         Compulink to look at the error then instead of at some later date.

 

         Corrected an error when sorting a Cash Requirements payables

         report by vendor name (instead of by vendor code)

         

         In the Inventory Entry screen you can type a vendor code and

         then click the down arrow next to the invoice number box to

         see a list of invoices for that vendor. The list now has the most

         recent invoices at the top which may make it easier to

         access them.

 

         In JS-Classic, screen 3,4 to edit Archived repairs would often

         show you the Current file, instead of the Archive file. That has

         been corrected.

 

Version 1.411                            06/07/2010

===================================================

 

 The sales screen and gift certifiate screens now show the account

         balance for any in-house charge account customer.

         [This is shown under the name and address in 'zone' 2]

 

 Many reports (e.g. inventory and sales reports) automatically

         create an Excel spreadsheet file of the results at the same

         time the report is displayed or printed.

         A new option allows you to turn this off.

         Open Preferences from the Maintenance Menu, then find

         "Option to Save Reports to a File."

         

 You can choose to print the cost-code on tags and to have some

         inventory screens and reports show the cost code. The cost code

         is a substitution of letters (or other numbers) for each digit.

         (This has always been available.) The update adds two options

         for the cost code. The cost can optionally be the month in

         two digits followed by the cost to the nearest dollar followed

         by the year as one digit. E.g. The cost code for an item costing

         129.50 received in June 2009 would be 061309.

         The second option is the same as the first but with the cost part

         encoded in letters. E.g. the costcode could be 06ACJ9 if your cost

         code word were ABCDEFGHIJ

         [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword CCMETHOD2 or CCMETHOD3]

         

 In JS-Classic, the customer history feature (option 6,A or 4,9)

         has an option to restrict the customer history to a certain

         date range. Previously this option worked only with the older,

         archived sales. Now it works with both the archived and

         current sales.

 

 Miscellaneous

         In the inventory and sales screen when you look up inventory

         by part number and then scan a Pandora EAN barcode you don't

         need to press Enter to complete the entry

 

         In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the balance for

         Accounts Receivable shows in the Cust Details square

         at the bottom-right. Previously this figure wasn't

         correct for certain customers and this problem is fixed now.

         (The official balance and all other screens did not

         previously have        a problem.)

         

 

 

Version 1.40                             05/26/2010

===================================================

 

 The Pandora catalog import program has been updated with all

         the new items for Spring 2010, Summer 2010 and the White

         Gold LovePods. Includes pictures.

         

 

 In the sales screen you can set the preferred default type of sale

         (Cash, Layaway, Special Order, etc.) Certain combinations in

         previous versions could make it revert to Cash Sale even if

         that was not the default. This update better enforces the

         preferred sale type in those cases.

 

 

Version 1.39                             05/24/2010

===================================================

 

 A new appraisal format has been added which will print your

         logo file at the top. This is designed to print on plain

         paper where you specify a logo file that includes your

         business name, address and insignia - with dimensions

         up to 7 1/4" wide by 1 5/8" tall.

         You should save the logo file (normally jpg) in the CUSTOM

         folder which is inside your data folder (e.g. typically

         something like \VISUALJS\DATA\MAIN\CUSTOM)

         You specify your appraisal logo filename in Preferences in

         the same Half Page Receipt section where you specify your

         logo files for receipts and credit slips.

 

 When you use the Inventory Status screen to search by style

         previous versions presented the first occurrence of that

         style (in those cases where there were multiple instances.)

         The current version will retrieve the instance which

         is still in stock. Or, if there are multiple Sku's of

         that style in stock, will show you a pick list.

         

         Also in the Inventory Status screen, there are new keyboard shortcuts:

                 Alt-S to search by Sku

                 Alt-Y to search by Style

                 Alt-P to search by Part Number.

                 

 When receiving an invoice of merchandise and you enter a restocked

         item - an item that was previously in the inventory list -

         the details from the previous item are copied to the new Sku

         (this has always been the case) A change in the new version is

         that the program will jump directly to the        Quantity box, bypassing

         confirmation of the major, minor codes, description which saves

         keystrokes and time. If needed (if you usually received just 1)

         you can make the program wait directly on the OK box of that line

         to further speed things up. (to do this enter the keyword

         OKWHENRESTOCK in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences)

         In any situation, you can always adjust the description, cost,

         price and quantity by simply clicking in the appropriate box.

         

         

 When you restock a previously received style, the picture is also

         inherited from the previous item. This has always been the case,

         however, previously        the picture didn't immediately show for that

         item - it would show once you accepted the new item and if you

         went back to that line. Now the picture will appear immediately,

         which:

                 a) can help immediately verify        that you received the corect

                         item or

                 b) inform you immediately whether or not you already have a

                         picture for        that style and if he picture on file is correct.

                         

 

 If print a receipts including the integrated credit card authorization

         the message and lines you print can now be wider than in previous

         versions. (If nothign else you can print a longer underline on

         which the customer signs.)

         Previously the message lines were limited to just 38 letters.

         However, if you print receipts using the roll-of-paper 40-column

         reciepts, you should limit the message length to avoid wrapping around.

         

                         

 Miscellaneous

         In Preferences, you can now enter a standard expected repair

         turnaround of ten or more (nine being the previous upper limit.)

 

         The Return to Vendor screen shows the current weight in stock

         of the item you are returning. (if it's an item which is valued by weight.)

 

 

 

Version 1.38                             05/13/2010

===================================================

 

 A new security option is available in Maintenance, Preferences

         to restrict access to the Delete Sale option from

         the sales screen. This feature does not apply to sales that

         have not yet been saved, nor quotes nor wish list entries.

 

 The additional gift receipt option (see notes from

         version 1.37 below) now has a side-by-side layout

         

 Under certain situations, changing a report or a receipt layout

         style would not retrieve the preferred customized version

         in previous versions. That has now been addressed.

 

 In JS-Classic the 6,2,1 Sales Comparison Report previously

         reported only on the current file so sales over two year

         old may not have been include. Now both the current and

         archived sales files are included so the report will

         go back further.

         

Version 1.37                             05/07/2010

===================================================

 

 The sales screen has a further gift receipt option.

         If you use a 40-column printer it was previously

         a bit awkward to print gift receipts because it required

         printing a regular receipt, retrieving the sale, changing

         the receipt format to Gift then printing the new one, then

         changing the receipt format back to regular for the

         subsequent sale.

         The new option for 40 column receipts is much easier: from

         the sales screen choose Options at the top then Print Gift

         Receipt. In addition to the 40 column receipt this approach

         also supports the full-page receipt.

         (the other side-by-side receipt formats didn't need any such

         addition because there was already the option to print a

         regular receipt and a gift receipt side by side simultaneously.)

         As with the previously available gift receipts, this format

         does not print the customer name, date of purchase, price, etc.

         Note that you would want to check that you have a suitable

         gift receipt message which you can specify in Preferences

         from the Maintenance Menu.

         

 

 The Pay Invoices Payable/Cut Checks screen has the option to sort

         the list by either Vendor Code or Vendor Name. Previously

         the Vendor Name option wasn't available but it is now.

 

 For Accounts Receivable customers, the Charge Account Setup

         screen has the optional settings for special interest

         rates. Previously these values were entered as fractions

          - e.g. 0.12 which was confusing. Now these are entered

          as percentages - e.g. 12.00%

          [note that you should leave these special interest rates

          blank for most A/R customers so that they get the standard

          store rate. Only fill in these values for customers who

          must be charged a different rate than then usual rate.]

         

 Miscellaneous

         In JS-Classic the sales summary report by vendor

         (6,2,2,Standard) previously showed the vendor code but

         not the vendor name. Now it shows both.

 

         The Pandora catalog import program has a new option to

         more quickly assign Shopkeeper Class Codes to Pandora

         Class Codes.

         

         Adjustment to the 1,7 layaway report in JS-Classic.

         

 

Version 1.36                             04/28/2010

===================================================

 

 The sales screen expects to find items by Sku Number, but

         you can also search by Style Number or Part Number

         by clicking the down-arrow by the Sku box then selecting

         either Style No or Part No

         What's new here is that pressing keyboard shortcut Ctrl-P

         will directly switch to Part Number lookup mode.

 

         This is particularly useful for Pandora where the 13-digit

         Pandora EAN barcode is stored in the Part Number.

         I.e., if you have a Pandora booklet containing a picture,

         description, price, style and barcode you can ring up sales

         by scanning the EAN barcode

 

         (A similar shortcut Ctrl-S, for style, was added previously;

         see the 1.108 update information below)

         

 A new 40-Column sales receipt format has been added.

         The new layout is "24 40-Column Gift Receipt" which contains

         no price, customer or date information which your customer

         can include when presenting the gift. The gift receipt

         can include a special Gift Message (exchange, sizing options,

         etc) which you can customize in Preferences from the

         Maintenance Menu.

         

 The Layaway Statements now assume you want to see only those

         layaways with a balance over $1. Previously, if you didn't

         fill in a value there then you would have seen all layaways

         both with and without a balance which would have been

         far too long.

         

 Miscellaneous

         In JS-Classic the Assemble & Disassemble Reports will create

         an Excel version in the JSREPORT folder.

         

         Miscellaneous Z report changes in JS-Classic.

 

         

 

Version 1.35                             04/22/2010

===================================================

 

 The Accounts Receivable Payment-on-Account screen

         has a new receipt format - for full-page, invoice

         style receipts.

 

 An available option in Preferences it to NOT ask for a minor

         code when you receive new inventory (the minor code will

         default to 10. However, turning off this feature previously

         caused the inventory entry screen to show an unnecessary

         reminder/warning about the cost being zero.

         Now this extra prompt will not be there if you uncheck

         this option in Preferences, Inventory, Inventory Continued.

         

 Miscellaneous

         In the list manager for customer types you can

         no longer add entries with more than two characters.

         (previously the lookup list allowed them, but the

         customer type could only accept two characters.)

 

         The repair reports will now add to the job number the

         line number of the repair. This applies only to sales

         tickets which have multiple job tracking lines which

         all share the same job number. E.g. for job R888

         the first line will show as R888 but the subsequent

         jobs will show as R888-2, R888-3, etc.

         

 

Version 1.34                             04/08/2010

===================================================

 

 In the Customer X-Tra search screen, the payments list

         (bottom right corner) now has an extra column to

         show the initials of the clerk who was logged in

         when the payment was taken. This is independent of

         the initials assigned to the sale as the salesperson.

 

 There is an option in Preferences to turn off the printing

         of pictures on sales receipts. Previously, unchecking this

         option did not remove the pictures (there was a different

         option which controlled it) but now unchecking it will

         remote the pictures.

         [So, if your pictures suddenly don't print, be sure

         to check this option in Preferences.]

         

 When repair jobs are entered (or edited) you can now require

         that the Location box or the Vendor/Trade shop box be

         filled in.

         [Choose Maintenance, Preferences, Repairs, Repair Defaults

         Continued, Require that Repair Location or Vendor be Filled-in]

 

 

 Miscellaneous

         In Preferences, in the Drop Down Pick List

         Manager it is now much quicker to remove many

         entries at once. Just check each item using

         the checkbox in the trash-can column.

         [previously available but slow for deleting

         multiple items at once]

 

         The cash requirements report previously didn't always show

         all three letters of the vendor code in the subtotal lines

         for each vendor and now they should fit completely in

         all cases.

         

         In the Inventory Status screen you can select the Style History

         tab to see other Sku's with the same style. From there

         you can double-click one of the other Sku's to retrieve

         that Sku. Previously the Activity Page was not being

         refreshed (for the new Sku) when you selected a new Sku

         in this way, but now it is updated.

         

         JS-Classic index cards now saves its printing defaults.

 

         Other misc.

 

         

Version 1.33                            03/31/2010

==================================================

 

 In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the summary

         profile of the customer (bottom right corner)

         now includes the e-mail address. This can alert

         you to missing e-mail addresses without having to

         retrieve the full profile screen.

         

 Miscellaneous

         Adjustments to the rounding of prices when receiving items

                 priced by weight with several decimal places of weight

                         or cost.

         In JS-Classic, the vendor profile screen now

                 has the website box available. (this was

                 previously available only in VJS)

         Changes to index cards in Js-Classic

         Adjustments for particular cases in 4,9 sales & payments

                 histories in JS-Classic.

         Adjustments for particular cases in month end statements

                 in JS-Classic.

                 

                 

 

Version 1.32                            03/24/2010

==================================================

 

 The Repair Status Quick Update form now adds the option to update

         the Due Date. As with the other updateable fields, you can either

         update them individually or in bulk.

         

 + Miscellaneous other additions, adjustments and fixes for

         both JS-Classic        and VJS.

         Previously couldn't completely delete a layaway sale

         Vendor labels weren't available in JS-Classic

         Inventory Audit report changes for items which had been

                 transferred in by interstore-transfer

         Posting report change for the unlikely case where a sale

                 had a blank date.

         Improvements to the import from old DOS Shopkeeper to VJS.

         Improved on-screen help/wording when changing the style number

                 of an item from the Inventory Status screen

         Etc.

 

 

Version 1.31                            03/17/2010

==================================================

 

 When running the Z-Report to clear out the cash register figures

         for the shift it is now required for other copies of Shopkeeper

         to exit back to the VJS File Center (or, quite JS completely

         for JS-Classic) for the few moments it takes to run a Z report.

         This is to address issues that arose when others had sales

         activity in the sales screen while the Z report was run.

 

 The printed return to vendor screen now makes it easier to type a longer

         message and the printed copy will print the entire message typed in

         instead of the abbreviated version that previous versions printed.

         

 The option to select a date format other than American-standard Month/Day/Year

         was previously in Preferences, but didn't take effect. You can now

         select DD/MM/YY or DD-MM-YY, etc.

 

 If you often print two different receipt formats for the same sale (e.g. printing

         to a printer, then printing to a PDF print driver) a new option makes that

         somewhat easier by showing the receipt Print Options dialog box twice for the

         same sale. To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword 2XRECEIPT.

         Note that if you activate this option you should NOT check the box

         Skip This Setup Box for this Printing Task for receipts - otherwise you won't

         be able to select the different layout.

 

 The option to select a date format other than American-standard Month/Day/Year

         was previously in Preferences, but didn't take effect. You can now

         select DD/MM/YY or DD-MM-YY, etc.

         

 When receiving inventory and you type a style number, Shopkeeper uses the most

         recent copy of that style to fill in the details for the new item. If you

         stock many styles where there are different variations (different description,

         picture, etc) for the same style number, then you may want to be able to

         pick a particular Sku to copy -not just the most recent.

         To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword INVENTORYEXACTLINE

         

 + Miscellaneous

 

 

 

Version 1.30  - 1.301                   03/11/2010

==================================================

 

 Further changes to the Pandora program. previously the Pandora

         program would just update and correct *existing* items in

         your inventory and sales files.

         You can now Import from the new catalog all the items you

         have not yet stocked. This way, when you next receive Pandora

         you can type the style or scan the barcode of the items

         received and all the information will be filled in for you.

         

 + Miscellaneous

         clarification of text and messages in the Hot Seller report screen.

 

 

Version 1.292                           03/08/2010

==================================================

 

 Further change to the Pandora program so that you can save

         the results list (of your items which could not be found

         in the Pandora catalog) to an Excel file for further review.

 

         Also, the results page shows an R next to each Retired item

         in the Pandora catalog (just for your information.)

         

         Added the Barcode numbers to various Retired items which

                 previously did not have this EAN /Part Number available.

                 (you can choose Download Pandora Catalog and re-run the

                 update if you had more un-matched results than expected

                 the first time around.)

 

         

 + Miscellaneous

         Fix possible sales screen problem if you had turned off

         X-tra Search

 

 

Version 1.291                           03/05/2010

==================================================

 

 A Further change to the Pandora program so that it will

         also verify and update if needed, items in your

         inventory list that already have the new Pandora style.

         The previous version would have skipped those items

         and so would not have assigned them the Pandora

         EAN / barcode number nor assigned them a picture.

         

         I.e. this works better for the case where you have a

         mix of old and new Pandora styles.

 

 

Version 1.29                            03/05/2010

==================================================

 

 

 Addition of a new program to update your Pandora inventory

         list to match the thousands of new style numbers, costs

         and prices. It corrects the style numbers for existing

         and prior inventory along with existing sales records.

 

         In addition it adds the Pandora EAN (barcode) number to

         the inventory file to the Part Number entry in Shopkeeper

         inventory. With this barcode number filled in, when you

         receive new merchandise, instead of typing the style

         number, you can scan the barcode.

 

         Further, this program has the option to download, install

         and link pictures for the entire catalog.

         

         NOT included with this version is the option to add to your

         inventory list (with zero quantity) items which you have

         NOT previously stocked. That option will be available

         soon.

         

         You access this program by choosing Options, Pandora

                 from the initial File Center screen.

 

 + Miscellaneous

                 

 

Version 1.28                            02/25/2010

==================================================

 

 When receiving merchandise the vendor's style is one of

         the first entries after which Shopkeeper looks up that

         style. This helps when restocking inventory as all the

         previous details are pre-filled in for you on the new item.

         Entering a style is required. However, if you have a significant

         number of items without        a style such as estate jewelry this

         look-up feature can be counterproductive because you might

         make up a style such as TIFFANY RING and you would not want the

         details from the previous item with that style to be added to

         the new item. For such cases, you can now type N/A, or any words

         beginning with N/A into the style and it will not be looked up.

         You can select a different prefix if you like via the Inventory

         defaults in Preferences.

 

 

 The "Style Hist" page of the Inventory Status screen

         shows all the different Sku numbers with the same

         style number. This list has a new column showing

         the location of each of those Sku's. If any of those

         Sku's is split between locations it will read: Split

         and you can double-click Split to see the breakdown.

 

 The end-of-day cash register report "Sales Payment Spreadsheet"

         has a new optional layout in a summarized format with one

         line per day with the total of each type of payment (cash,

         check, each card, etc.)

 

         

 When you receive merchandise you can print a copy of the

         received shipment. A new optional layout includes

         both the retail price and the cost.

         

 

 Miscellaneous

         (JS-Classic venchg utility has the option to not

         change manufacturer code)

 

         + Other

         

 

Version 1.27                            02/19/2010

==================================================

 

 New option to run Checkbook Reports in Accrual basis in order

         to match the P&L (For this you need to choose All Accounts

         and GJ Entries, sort by Expense Code, choose Accrual option.)

 

         This version does NOT include checks which were paid against

         invoices-payable, but it DOES include values of invoices-

         payable in full as of the date they were received, regardless

         of when, or whether, they were paid. This is the same approach

         taken by the P&L in JS-Classic.

         

 The Simple Layaway Report has a new option to allow you to choose

         how it is sorted: Last Name, Customer Number, Balance Due,

         Date, Sale Number.

         

Version 1.262                           02/18/2010

==================================================

 

 Remove benign error message when running the Accounts Payable

         report when sorted by vendor name.

         

 Adjustments to Checkbook Reports when sorting by Expense Code.

 

 Remove brief flashing on screen the inventory location selection

         box when a selection of an inventory location is not needed.

         

 + Miscellaneous other adjustments and fixes, including to

         importing text files in Physical Inventory

 

Version 1.26                            02/18/2010

==================================================

 

 VJS has the addition of Checkbook Reports. This report screen

         also can report General Journal entries. As with any

         report screen, the first "Quick Selection" page of report criteria

         contains the most common options, but you will want to take

         a look at the "Full Selection" page to know what other

         selections you can make. Also as with any report screen, you

         can save certain combinations of selection criteria as

         Memorized Reports.

 

 

Version 1.25                            02/16/2010

==================================================

 

 On any report screen there is a button "Clear Selections." In previous

         versions is cleared the selections so much so that the combination

         was sometimes not useful. Now this button clears back to the

         usual default settings. This is particularly useful if you have set

         up a preferred memorized report combination as a default (so all

         the selections are filled in with a pre-saved combination) - but

         if you want to run a more generic report you would have had to

         undo each of the pre-saved settings. The "Clear Selections" button

         will now save you the trouble in that case.

 

 In JS-Classic you can override / more directly assign a particular

         image file for an inventory item from the 2,8,E Edit Inventory screen.

         [double-click on the Memo box next to the Picture File box. This will

         show you the list of image files associated with that item. VJS can

         show several pictures for one item but JS-Classic can only show the

         first. However, this list of picture files will be the entire list if

         there are more than one.]

         [However, it is  best when possible to manage and view pictures via VJS instead

         of JS-Classic.]

         

 In VJS and JS-Classic, negative payments (refunds) on A/R Account previously

         where showing on the X-report as a negative charge sale as well as a

         a negative payment on account. Now they will appear only on the

         negative payment on account line.

 

 + Miscellaneous other adjustments and fixes.

 

 

 

Version 1.241                           02/12/2010

==================================================

 

 The Return-to-Vendor packing sheet will now exclude the cost columns

         for those whose password doesn't allow access to the cost information.

         [From the Inventory Menu you can add or retrieve a return-to-vendor

         list and from within that list you can print a sheet for just that

         one list.] [This option is distinct from the "Return to Vendor Reports"

         option available from the Reports Menu. That creates reports on all

         several returns over a time period.]

 

 In JS-Classic the sales report 8,6,E "Cash Register Usage by Time & Day"

         now simultaneously creates an Excel copy of the results in the

         JSREPORT folder (on the Windows desktop)

 

 In JS-Classic when printing sales receipts for a customer with in-house

         charge accounts sometimes the customer's outstanding balance did

         not print and with this update it always will. [ Provided you have

         turned on this option in page 15 of Store Information Defaults]

         

 Normally the Current sales file is expected to contain the previous two years

         plus the current year. Sales older than two years old are automatically

         archived when you close December. If for some reason you have too many

         years in your Current file and want to move them to the Archive file,

         JS-Classic has a new option to make that easier.

         The Archive Sales option is menu choice 8,E,1 which is the same as before.

         However, before you could only purge one period for one year at a time.

         Now, if you choose period -1 you can purge an entire year at a time.

         

 

         

Version 1.24                            02/10/2010

==================================================

 

 When looking up a Sku with the Inventory Search screen and its

         list of Sku's. By default it shows all inventory Sku's in stock

         and all repair Sku's. Under certain conditions it may not have shown

         all repair Sku's unless you choose Repairs or Zero Qty items.

         Those conditions have been identified and addressed.

 

 An additional 3-part repair envelope layout has been added,

         "04 3-Part Repair Env. No-name on part 2, Msg Left & Right."

         The other repair envelopes do not print the repair message

         disclaimer on the in-house copy, but this one does. This can

         be useful if you have the customer sign the disclaimer and you

         want to keep a copy. Also, as with the others, the customer

         copy also has the same disclaimer.

         

 For those who process credit cards via Merchant Warehouse, VJS has

         a "Merchant Warehouse Transaction Report." This report recently

         stopped working due to a software change at Merchant Warehouse.

         This VJS update re-enables those reports. (Those reports are

         also available directly via your on-line virtual terminal account with

         Merchant Warehouse.)

 

 In Js-Classic the 6,2,G Report is "Sales Comparisons by Timeframe"

         Previously the option to group / Subtotal by Manufacturer

         didn't work and now it does.

         

Version 1.231                           02/02/2010

==================================================

 

 When you start entering a sale and delete it or if you retrieve

         a wish-list/quote sale and delete it, the sale number is

         recycled. That's not new but what is new is that if you retrieve

         a fairly old wish-list/quote sale (one older than 25 sales tickets

         back) and delete it, now that number is NOT recycled. This is to

         avoid unnecessary and large jumps in sale number sequences.

 

 Not actually a change, but an observation: If you have a very long sales

         receipt message, that can cause pagination problems on the printed

         receipts. What can work in some cases is to create a custom copy

         of the receipt and shrink the receipt message font to a very small

         size such as Arial Narrow 4pt or 5pt.

         As an example, the *Original Version* of the new 11 Side-By-Side

         Laser, Raised Summary receipt has the message printed at 5pt.

 

         + Miscellaneous other adjustments.

                 

Version 1.23                            01/28/2010

==================================================

 

 A new 2-part side-by-side sales receipt format for laser / inkjet printers

         has been added. The new layout positions the sales message / total area to

         just after the last item (not all the way at the bottom of the page.)

         This may help those jewelers where a long receipt message can intermittently

         cause formatting problems.

         [when printing sales receipts, the new format is:

         "11 Side-By-Side Laser, Raised Summary" ]

         

 In Both Js-Classic and VJS, on the customer profile screen both the

         Assigned Clerk and the Notes / Comments areas can be password-

         protected even if access to the remainder of the profile is

         changeable.

         [for the clerks, the same security setting as Change the Clerk on

         a sale is used. For the Notes, use the setting  Edit Customer

         Profile Notes ]

 

 + Miscellaneous other adjustments.

 

 

Version 1.22 - 1.221                    01/21/2010

==================================================

 

 A (fairly rare) combination of events on the sales screen

         could cause a new sale to be given sale numbers

         with a different sequence number. That has been addressed.

 

         Related: If you ended up with a new sale actually added to the

         Archive file, there's a utility to move it to the current file.

         [open Js-Classic and choose File,  Misc, Utilities, SALUNA]

         

 The inventory report XLS export file will now include a column

         with the vendor name. This is particularly useful for reports

         intended for the B.I.G. buying group.

         [When you run an itemized inventory report, an XLS copy is

         created simultaneously in the VJS Reports folder which is on

         the desktop.]

 

 When opening the price tag layout designer with a non-standard tag

         shape, the tag proportions on-screen could have appeared

         incorrect temporarily until you clicked somewhere. This has

         been resolved.

 

 Change to repairs in JS-Classic. When entering a repair via

         the sales screen the description in the sales line will now

         transfer to the Instructions box in the repair screen

         (similar to how previous DOS versions behaved)

 

 The 'Half-Page' repair ticket in JS-Classic would previously not

         print all the description or instruction lines in certain case.

         This has been addressed

 

Version 1.213                                                01/18/2010

==================================================

 

 The Physical Inventory screen now makes it easier to enter

         quantities over 1000.

 

 In Physical Inventory, the list of items normally displays in

         the order they were scanned in. You can sort the list by Sku

         by clicking the Sku No. column heading. If you sorted but

         then want to UN-sort, double-click the column heading.

 

 In Physical Inventory the Auto-Add option is enabled by default

         to make entering the list quicker. You may turn if off if

         you often have quantities other than 1. Turning it OFF previously

         didn't work well - but that has been addressed.

 

 Choosing the Picture-Check option when doing a cleanup

         previously could result an error message (there was

         no real problem but it showed an error message anyway)

         [this is the utility to re-scan the picture files and

         inventory list. Usually it's used when you copy the entire

         catalog of picture files for a particular vendor. e.g.

         see notes below under Version 0.948

         

 

Version 1.211                                                01/14/2010

==================================================

 

 Minor Adjustments

         Physical inventory process. Clarification on the

         report header. Change where previously it was

         possible that a few old physical counts were not cleared.

         

         Miscellaneous other adjustments.

 

 

Version 1.21                                                01/13/2010

==================================================

 

 Addition of Physical Inventory entry and Reports.

         You can find the Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu.

 

         You can enter physical counts by typing them, scanning

                 them or by reading in a text file list of Sku numbers.

         You can enter counts from multiple computers at the same time

                 and all counts go into the single physical counts list.

                 You can enter physical counts in a single or multiple sittings.

                 When you do your next physical inventory, down the road, you'll

                 want to delete the previous physical count list.

 

                 You can do all inventory or focus on one major or vendor code.

 

         When you run the report, there are two main versions:

                 The Physical Inventory Exception Report shows just

                 the problem items

                 The Physical Inventory Comparison Report shows all

                 inventory and compares the expected and physical values.

 

         The Exception report has the option for showing pictures,

                 but the comparison report does not.        Both reports sort only by

                 Sku number.

         

         Currently the physical inventory reports are not organized

                 by location codes - that option will be available later.

 

         By default, the physical inventory reports assume you have

                 not entered counts for layaway items - but you can

                 override that.

         

         Dummy Sku numbers are excluded (those ending in -0001)

         

         These reports are based on quantities only, not weight. So, if there

                 are some items valued by weights, the cost figures may not

         

         Physical inventory entry or reports do not adjust your inventory.

                 They just show possible problems that you may need to research

                 or correct.

         

Version 1.207                                                01/12/2010

==================================================

 

 + Minor Adjustments

         Previously it was difficult or not possible to remove payments

         on gift certificates / gift slips. That has been corrected.

 

         

Version 1.206                                                01/12/2010

==================================================

 

 Sales and repair numbers are usually numeric-only, but it's possible

         to add other letters or characters (e.g. 1001A, 1001/B, etc)

         You now have the option to allow *only* digits. This can

         avoid some unintended changes to sale numbers.

                 mv.restore_public("Z_*")                        && formerly        RESTORE FROM &zz_Path_DATA.SYS_VAR ADDITIVE

                 [technically, if you already have a letter at the beginning

                 of the repair number sequence, e.g. R1011, the exiting

                 letter may stay, but the user may not add further letters.]

 

Version 1.205                                                01/11/2010

==================================================

 

 + Minor Adjustments

         In the Inventory Entry form, on the Purchase Orders page

         when you click the drop down arrow to see the list of

         purchase orders, two additional columns show: Date and

         Notes. This extra information can help you more easily

         find the right P.O.

         

         Further, when you add special order items via the sales

                 screen and create a purchase order at the same time,

                 the customer name and sale number will be copied

                 to the Notes box of the purchase order.

         

         Related: when you add special order items via the sales

                 screen and create a purchase order at the same time,

                 you have the option now to make the purchase order number

                 the same as the sale number. (prefixed with the letter S)

                 [To do that, add the keyword SALENO2PO anywhere in the

                 Miscellaneous Options box in Maintenance/Preferences.]

         

         In Js-Classic, the 'Half-Page' format of the repair envelope

                 and the Description and Instructions were previously

                 mis-aligned and this has been corrected now.

                 

 

Version 1.20                                                01/06/2010

==================================================

 

 Change to itemized sales tax report: previously, taxable

         items on even-exchange sales (zero total sales totalling

         to zero tax) would be included in the Non-Taxable-Only

         selection. Now, choosing non-tax will exclude those items.

         [affects both JS-Classic - option 6,2,3 and VJS -

         Itemized Sales Report ]

         

 When adding sales, the next available sale number is suggested

         but you can select another number. You can now set a

         security level so that for some users the next available

         number will        be assigned without the chance to change the

         sale number.

         [See the Sales Security page of Preferences - "Able to

         Select Next Sale Number"]

 

 + Various Adjustments

         When retrieving the repair details screen directly from

         the X-tra Search Screen that pops up from the sales screen

         (not via the line item of the sale and not from the repairs

         screen) the customer name didn't appear on-screen (though it

         would print on the ticket) This has been changed to show the

         customer name immediately.

         

         An improved utility is available to link inventory items to a

         catalog of inventory pictures - if your vendors supply such a

         list of picture files to you. [If needed, ask us for details.]

         

         Misc.

 

Version 1.19                                                01/04/2010

==================================================

 

 You can now make VJS notify you with an un-ignorable alert

         when you retrieve customers who have been assigned

         special customer types.

         [Customer Types are added to the customer on the

         name and address form. The list of customer types which

         should show the special alert is put in on the Custoer page

         of Maintenance, Preferences. Issue Warnings when Pulling up

         Customers with the Following Customer Types"]

         The Alert screen does not show you want teh customer type

         means - but it could be a 'good' alert (perhaps VIP) or a 'bad'

         alert - BC 'Bounced a Check.']

 

 Changing the customer on a sale was previously problematic but is

         now reliable. [ To change the customer on a sale, while you're

         editing the sale either click on X-Search at the top, or select

         a new customer from the customer drop list in Zone 2]

         

 The Accounts Payable report previously showed an error message when

         you selected to show just a single vendor. This has been fixed.

         

 + Various Adjustments

         An improved utility is available to link inventory items to a

         catalog of inventory pictures - if your vendors supply such a

         list of picture files to you. [If needed, ask us for details.]

         

         The current Bonus / Loyalty Points level can be displayed on the

         customer lookup screen right as you record new sales or lookup

         old ones. [Add keyword SHOWBP to Miscellaneous Options in

         Prefereces. If needed, ask us for details.]

         

         If you sometimes use a PDF print driver to print sales receipts

         to suggested PDF name will be slightly improved - by including

         the customer name and sale # as part of the PDF filename.

         [tested with PrimoPDF - but may also work with CutePDF]

         

         The position of the buttons on the Main Menu (and other menu)

         can be adjusted by dragging them. You can now prevent those

         buttons from beeing dragged accidentally. To do that, add

         the keyword FREEZEMENU anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box

         in Maintenance/Preferences.

         

         The Main Menu buttons are designed to be single-clicked. Double-clicking

         them can cause the selected form (sales, repairs, etc.) to be

         opened and then minimized. If you prefer to double-click the main

         menu buttons, add the keyword DBLCLICKMENU anywhere in the

         Miscellaneous Options box in Maintenance/Preferences. With this option

         on single-clicking will not effect a selection. [the choice to both

         single- and double-click is not currently possible.]

         

 

         

Version 1.180                                                12/16/2009

==================================================

 

 If an invoice was entered under the wrong vendor code or with

         the wrong invoice number you can correct it by retrieving the

         invoice on the Inventory Entry screen then clicking the padlock

         just to the right of the vendor code or invoice number.

         But... there were cases where that didn't work and a correction

         has been made in that area.

 

 Fix for a problem that could have occurred if you edited a layaway

         sale and make a payment by credit slip (and made no other changes)

         and the payment might not have stuck.

 

 Selection of a credit slip payment on a layaway or special order sale is

         now easier. Previously you used to have to select a payment amount

         before selecting the credit slip. Now you can leave the payment

         amount as zero and just click Credit Slip to bring up the list

         of credit slips. This helps because you might expect to use an

         entire credit slip as a deposit but might not know in advance

         the exact value of the slips.

                 

 An alternative technique of reading credit cards is available

         for those with occasional problems in swiping credit cards - such as

         the card swiping screen freezing up.

         [ask us for details if this concerns you]

         

 A change in the sales tax report - which can help when you

         run reports for taxable sales only - and where you have taxable

         refund/return sales.

 

 The sales total figure on the Sales page of the Clerk Maintenance

         is back. (it disappeared after a recent update.)

 

 There had been a small number of cases where the payments details

         wouldn't print on the sales receipts - mostly if there was a

         sale number duplicated. This has been addressed.

                 

 A fifth format for printing Purchase Orders has been added. It

         shows the Sku Number, the picture and NOT the cost.

 

Version 1.178 - 1.179                                                        12/04/2009

==================================================

 

 Correct a possible quirk in the inventory entry screen

         when you receive merchandise with a style similar

         to a previous style it could find the wrong item

         (instead of assuming an all-new never-before-stocked item)

         

 If you like to often fill in the Dept Code box on the sales

         screen and don't want to click on that box with the mouse

         you can make the Dept box automatically be the next box

         highlighted after you enter the clerk.

         [You can activate this option by adding the key-word  SALEDEPT

          anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Options" box in "Maintenance",

         "Preferences", "General" ]

 

 Payments on Account (on in-house charge account balances)

         Correction to a problem in previous versions where entering

         a cash-payment and then using the cash-tendered feature to

         calculate change would cause an account balance problem by

         the amount of the change.

         

         In previous versions on the Payment on Account screen, retrieving

         a previous payment and then deleting it would delete the payment

         but the account balance would not be changed. Now the balance

         will be adjusted.

 

         On the Payment on Account screen there are two new shortcuts

         in the Payment Amount box You can press B (for Balance) or

         you can double-click the Payment Amount box to fill in the

         remaining outstanding balance.

 

 + Various Adjustments

         Adjustment to the 01 Side-by-Side receipt layout where previously

         printing both a clerk and a Dept code could cause text to overlap

         the next line.

 

         A change to how items are found when searching

                 by manufacturer code and style number.

                 (only makes a difference for certain obscure combinations)

                 

 

         

Version 1.177                                                        12/02/2009

==================================================

 

 The Itemized Sales Report now allows you to select sales

         by Department code. You can include or exclude certain

         lists of department codes. These optional department codes are

         assigned to the sales screen and have nothing to do with

         the inventory major class codes.

         [this report choice was visible before but was not active.]

 

 The behavior of the X-Tra Search screen for customers has been modified

         for those times when you type a name that is not found. Previously

         the list of customers would be positioned at the end of the list

         (sorted a particular way) and it might not have been clear to the

         user if the name was found or not.

         Now, large "Not Found" message is shown and the list of customers

         is positioned at the last "match". E.g. If you type BOBX, and BOB

         was not found but BOB had been, the list goes back to BOB.

         This should make the search for customers somewhat clearer.

         

 When receiving merchandise from the Enter Inventory screen, typically

         the first box you fill in for each item is the Style number.

         If the style has been stocked before the remaining information

         is filled in for the new Sku.

         A change in this area is that you can now type in either the item's

         Style or the item's Part Number. This can be useful if you receive

         merchandise        pre-tagged by the manufacturer with a number that's

         not the style. E.g.        the tag could be the UPS or EAN number -

         which you can enter into each Sku's Part Number box.

         [think Pandora, Troll, Chamilia, watches, etc]

 

         Important Note: If you type or scan into the style box a Part Number

         that has NOT previously been stocked then the inventory screen will

         continue to let you add the new item. However, it cannot know for

         sure if the number was the style or part number of the new item

         and it will assume that the number is the style. In this case you

         should erase the part number and type in the style number so that

         the style is correct. You should, later in the item entry process,

         enter the part number in the part number box so that it will be

         available for future restocking of that style.

         

 + Various Adjustments

         The ability to enter repair descriptions and instructions in

         both upper- and lower-case had been thought added previously

         in Version 1.171 - but wasn't actually available until 1.177.

         For details - see notes 1.171 below.

 

 

Version 1.176                                                        11/30/2009

==================================================

 

 Accounts Payable Reports have been added.

         Find this option on the Reports Menu or the Accounting

         Menu. Note that there are currently three variations.

         Standard, 'Canadian' and 'Rebate'. You select the variation

         you want from the Print Options box (after you choose Start)

         The selection you make remains in effect for later runs

         of the A/P report - until you change it.

         The 'Canadian' version adds the Taxes column which is typically

         run to show the GST tax paid on incoming merchandise.

         The 'Rebate' version adds the columns to show the rebate points

         you earn when buying merchandise from certain vendors in

         your buying group [add the rebate percentage on the vendor

         profile screen.]

         

 

 The Return Stock to Vendor screen allows negative quantities

         for the cases where items sent back to vendor for

         repairs are received back after repair or replacement.

         

 The carrier Route box was added to the customer profile page -

         in the "Other" tab/page.

 

 The Sales Tax Report was adjusted slightly for the rare case

         where you have a second sales tax applicable only over

         a certain amount. The sales tax report previous showed

         the items flagged as taxable for this second tax even if

         they were not over the required amount. Now those items

         will not show on the 'taxable only' report. [in either case

         the actual tax calculation is the same]

 

 The Inventory Status screen has a page/tab showing various

         possible inventory activity including Assemble-Disassemble

         activity. The cost figure now does not show in the assemble-

         disassemble area for users without access to the cost and

         also if you have chosen (in preferences) to not show

         the cost on the Inventory Status screen.

         Also on the Activity Page of Inventory status, the sales

         activity grid now shows the sales clerk for each item sold.

         

Version 1.174-5                                                        11/16/2009

==================================================

 

 The sales screen makes it easier to find open layaway sales

         with a balance due. From the sales number area at the top-right

         of the sales screen, click the Drop-down arrow to pop-up

         the sales search windows. There is a new option at the

         the bottom "Open Sales Only?" If checked only sales with

         a balance due will show.

         [This check-box is available if you choose the 'Current File'

         option or 'Quotes/Wish List' or 'Archived' selections, - but

         not yet        with the 'Recently Viewed' selection.

 

 The Hot-Seller reports previously had some problems on the

         grand total lines which is now fixed. (the subtotals

         for each vendor had always been ok.)

         Also in the Hot-seller / Reorder report area, if you

         choose zero for minimum quantity sold, that means you

         want to see your inventory and sales figures, summarized

         by each style within each vendor; ALL of your inventory,

         not just the items which had sales. Previously, if you

         chose zero for sales but did *not* modify the turnover

         speed criterion (i.e. left it 270 days), then you would

         have results more limited than you expected.

         Now, if you select zero for the minimum quantity sold

         the turnover speed criterion is implicitly ignored.

         (e.g. , before you would have had to explicitly indicate

         turnover speed better than 9999 to get the full results.)

 

 The Credit-Card Payments Report now has the option to be

         run to match the X/Z report. Previously it was just

         a selection by date (which is still available.)

         That way, for example, if you Z-out the register at the

         end of a shift at 2pm, and then Z-out again at 6pm

         you can run a credit card detail report for just the

         afternoon.

         

 Adjustments which can significantly speed up receipt printing

         for        some users (with lower network performance.)

         

 + Various Adjustments

         Mostly related to easing the import of old Shopkeeper

         for DOS data, attaching workstations to an existing VJS

         network, etc.

 

Version 1.173                                                        11/03/2009

==================================================

 + Various Adjustments, including

         The minimum payment for accounts receivable statements was previously

         limited to 99% but now has room for 100% of the balance.

         The same applies to the interest rates, though that would rarely

         be needed. (These settings are found in the Accounts Receivable section

         of the Preferences screen found on the Maintenance Menu.)

         

         Some users had seen a few sporadic instances of items receiving no

         commission. Some changes in that area should help to address that.

         

         When you run a reorder report, an Excel file called INVSTYLE is

         added to the VJS Reports folder (this is not new) what is new

         is the additional column QtyOnOrder which has the remaining

         outstanding ordered quantity for each style.

         

         The receipt formatting for some receipt layouts has been changed to

         reduce the chance of words being cut at line breaks. (this can make the

         receipt marginally taller, but is usually preferred.)

 

Version 1.172                                                        10/30/2009

===============================================================

 

 The month-end closing steps can now be done in VJS (instead of having

         to use JS-Classic). Choose this from the Accounting Menu (or you

         can customized the Maintenance Menu and add it there.)

 

 The Chart of Accounts Defaults section of Preferences is easier to

         fill in now because the list of accounts and account numbers is

         visible. [From Maintenance, choose Preferences, then Chart of

         Accounts, Assets, etc. You can select an account for any particular

         entry by double clicking the account in the list]

 

 Related to the above, Chart of Accounts Defaults is now available as

         a standalone option from the Accounting Menu.

 

 In the Chart of Accounts screen (not Chart of Accounts Defaults) when you

         are on the Balances screen, the figures for the current month are

         not normally up-to-date unless you've just run a balance sheet or

         P&L. The new version has a Recalculate button so you can see

         the current month figures without having to run those reports.

         

 The Inventory Report by Location has a number of different layouts.

         The "Location Summary" version previously has problems in the

         cost column for each location which is now fixed. The "Class

         Summary" version has improved formatting now.

 

 VJS now has the option to adjust the To-Date figures on the

         X / Z Reports without having to open JS-Classic.

         [Choose Sales Reports, X / Z Report then To-Date Figures]

         

 When you enter the final payment on a layaway you need to type

         in the total balance due to close out the sale. Since the amount

         will not usually be a round figure (e.g. 192.17) VJS has

         always had the shortcut of double-clicking the Payment Amount

         box to fill in the balance due (or by clicking a small arrow

         by the words Balance Due.) One more shortcut has been added:

         you can press the letter B (for Balance) on the keyboard so

         you avoid using the mouse.

 

 Some users occasionally encounter garbled reads of credit cards which

         hangs the credit card processing screen. Some changes *may*

         help in that area. Let us know if you still encounter that.

         

 + Various Adjustments, including

         The month-end accounts receivable statements can now print your

         preferred statement date. Previously they would always print the

         date the accounts were last aged.

         

         

 

         

Version 1.171                                                        10/19/2009

===============================================================

 

 Some VJS users were not able to locate the Repair Reports feature. If you

         had that issue, then after the update open the Reports Menu, then

         choose Customize Menu, then Reset to Default.

         

 If you have some vendor codes with just two characters then running

         an inventory report for just a single vendor code could have shown

         all items from all vendors which start with those two letters.

         e.g. choosing AB to AB could show AB and ABA and ABC etc.

         That will not happen now.

 

 The commission report (or sales report by clerk even if you don't

         work with commissions) has an extra column for 'Profit' per clerk.

         There are many variations on the commisson report but the one

         where there was room to add this extra column is the one

         you get when you choose to Sort Report by Clerk Summary.

 

 The Customer Details tab (bottom right corner) of the customer

         X-tra Search screen now includes a line showing year-to-date

         purchase and previous years' purchase totals. This gives you

         useful information at the point of sale witout having to retrive

         the full customer profile.

         

 + Various Adjustments, including

         The instructions and descriptions area of the repair screen

                 were always intended to be upper-case only. There was a period

                 of time where they allowed upper- and lower-case but that

                 has        now been fixed. But... In case you need mixed case, go to

                 Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box

                 add the keyword MIXEDCASEREPAIRS

                 

         If you have a cash drawer connected and functioning with VJS it

                 pops automatically when you print a sales receipt. If you want

                 to leave it connected but don't want it to pop automatically

                 add the keyword POPDRAWEROFF anywhere in the Miscellaneous

                 Settings box in Preferences. You might not need it to open

                 for checks or credit cards (using the slots) but you can

                 choose to click on the No-Sale option when you have cash.

 

         Adjustment to the layout of the 3-across mailing labels using

                 5160-Avery style labels (or equivalent). The positioning

                 should be better now on the 2nd and 3rd columns.

                 

         The daily posting spreadsheet now shows the payment number for

                 payments on account (on in-house charge accounts.) Previously

                 it would show just PAYMENT.

 

Version 1.170                                                        10/05/2009

===============================================================

 

 In the sales screen you can add detail to any line-item

         by clicking the "Apprais" or "Repair" button. Now, speedy

         POS users can also use the keyboard shortcut of Alt-R.

         (You'll see letter R in the button underlines to remind

         you that Alt-R is the shortcut.)

         

 The Customer X-tra Search screen will now remember the last-used

         selection for the detail list at the bottom right.

         I.e. if you select the customer detail option, then the

         next time you open X-tra search, it will default to

         customer details. If you select sales items details, it will

         remember that, etc.

 

 + Various Adjustments, including

         The instructions and descriptions of repairs are now made to

                 be all upper case. Previously these areas followed your

                 selection for the customer profile: (whether you allowed

                 customer names to be mixed-case or upper-case only)

         The inventory "web site" export file (from JS-Classic) now

                 includes additional columns with the extended notes formatted

                 in an alternative way. Instead of the notes being cut into

                 sections of 50 letters the additional columns cut them into

                 sections of 254 letters - so the formatting may be approved.

                 [The original 50-letter sections still exist as well - in case

                 your website depended on that formatting.]

                 

         + Various Adjustments

         

Version 1.169                                                        09/30/2009

===============================================================

 

 Sales receipts can now print either the Sku number or the

         vendor's style number or both.

         [From the Maintenance Menu choose Preferences, then go

         to Receipts, then General, and find the option Print the

         Style instead of the Sku or Both. Previously this option

         was listed - but it applied only to the Full page receipt

         in VJS or to JS-Classic.]

                 [If you have a customized version of any receipt and want

                 this option, you would        need to recreate it based on

                 the *original version*  to have this change take effect.]

         

 + Various Adjustments, including

         Remove the zero-quantity inventory warning on the sales

                 screen when selling a special order item.

         The Return to Vendor report creates an Excel file (that's

                 not new) - what's new is that the XLS file now includes

                 the        vendor style column.

         Z-Report adjustment in JS-Classic (previously under [unusual]

                 circumstances early sales from the day could be skipped from

                 the Z-report.)

         Backup adjustment. Previously the backup would not work if any

                 of the data files was damaged. Now it'll give you a warning

                 but will at least backup the other files.

         If you want the commission report to show sales both with and

                 without Dept ZZ, choose !!! for the Dept Code.

         A few users have experienced unusual delays printing receipts.

                 The current version can gather some clues on that, so if

                 you have oddly slow receipts, let us know so we can look

                 at the clues.

 

 + Various Adjustments

 

Version 1.168                                                        09/24/2009

===============================================================

 

 When you run an Entire History for a customer account, there is

         a new report layout which includes the cost and profit

         figures for all sales and an account total.

         [From X-tra Search for customers, click on "Entire History"

         then from the Print Options dialog box change the Report Layout

         to Complete Customer History w/Cost & Profit.

                 If you use passwords these figures will not appear for

                 users who log in below the level needed to view cost.]

                 

 The Return Stock to Vendor reports now has a new column for the Vendor Style.

 

 The Commmission Report / Sales Report by Clerk now has a column for

         Profit. Previous reports have shown both the selling price and the

         cost so the information was there before, but not it's more explicit.

         [Note that for space reasons, this column is available only on

         the version of the report Summarized by Clerk.]

 

 + Various Adjustments, including

         When several sales are entered in a row, successive sales no

         longer default to the clerk of the previous sale, but instead

         have no clerk initials pre-filled in.

                 [Unless the Automatically Fill in Clerk option is set in

                 Preferences, in which case the clerk for a new sale is

                 pre-filled in with the initials of whomever is logged-in.]

         

         Prevent warnings on in-house charge accounts being over the

                 credit limit if you leave the credit limit as zero.

 

         Adjust the colors on the "Cash Tendered" screen for easier reading.

         

         Adjust the behavior on the Inventory Status screen when typing a

                 new Sku; the previous Sku is completely cleared if you type

                 a 3-digit major code or a 2-digit major code then dash or <Enter>.

         

         The "Assembled-From" list on the Activity page of Inventory status

                 has the added column for the retail value. [this may help

                 if you need to quickly estimate a revised selling price of

                 an assembled piece where the customer wants to switch a component.]

         

         Etc.

 

 

Version 1.167                                                        09/21/2009

===============================================================

 

 Receipts for on-account payments for in-house charge accounts

         now have a 3-part side-by-side receipt format (letter

         sized paper with two perforations)

         

 + Various Adjustments, including

         The Assembled-From list on the History page of the

                 Inventory Status screen has the added column of Price.

         Possible error message on commission report.

         Hyphen possible in picture catalog files by manufacturer.

                 [see catalog feature in 0.948 below]

         Remove quantity warning on sales screen if you select a sku

                 with zero quantity in stock - IF you select Options,

                 Return to stock before selecting the sku.

                 

Version 1.166                                                        09/18/2009

===============================================================

 

 The time-card report adds the day of week in words (Mon, Tue...)

         next to the date in numbers (05/05/2011)

 

 JS-Classic has option "Report Payments Made on Invoices" (5,2,3 )fixed.

 

 The sales screen will now warn you when trying to sell a Sku that is

         recorded with zero in stock.

         [This is mostly to give a warning which might appear after typing the

         wrong Sku. If you do NOT want a warning for all or some users,

         you can remove the warning by setting a higher level for the security

         question "Automatically Show Quantity Remaining" in the Sales Security

         page of Preferences.]

 

 The month-end accounts-receivable statements can now be selected based on

         how past-due the accounts are. This can let you print and send your

         statements separately depending on deliquency. I.e. you might use

         different paper for the very past due accounts and add an extra

         insert.

         [ This option appeared previously, but was not active in VJS before.]

         

 + Various Adjustments, including

         The option to export the vendor list to an Excel file previously

                 was problematic. It will now work ok on most computers.

                 [Choose Reports Menu, Vendor Lists, Type of Export File.]

         

         If you do NOT want credit limit warnings (added in 1.165) on A/R

         sales you can add the key word NOCLWARNING to Miscellaneous Options

         in Preferences.

                 (of course, the warnings would not appear for customers without a limit.

         Also, for users with security settings the warning and block still

         appears.)

         From Zone 4 (the sale number area) of the sales screen you can click the down

                 arrow to get lists of sales from which you can retrieve them. One of

                 the lists is that of the Quote (wish-list) sales. Previously, you could

                 not retrieve quotes sales by this method and then continue to convert

                 them to a standard sale, but now you can.

                 [previously it WAS possible to retrieve and convert to standard, a

                 quote/wish sale from the X-search screen.]

                 

         

Version 1.165                                                        09/10/2009

===============================================================

 

 Fix a problem (introduced with ver. 1.164) with the description

         printing on sales receipts.

 

 For in-house accounts-receivable sales, the sales screen will now

         enforce the credit limits when you save the sale.

         [A customer's credit limit is set on the Charge Acct page

         of the customer screen. In Preferences you can set the security

         level needed in order to override the credit limit warning.

         Below that security setting, users will have to go back to the

         sale and either reduce the sale total or increase the down-payment.]

         

 The customer selection options for Layaway Statements

         (see v 1.164) to filter the customers by Zip, Customer Type

         and Last Name are now active. In addition you can filter customers

         by the total amount due on outstanding layaways. Further, the

         message at the bottom of layaway statements is active.

         

 If you use gift-cards with pre-printed numbers you will likely

         want VJS to NOT automatically suggest the next credit slip

         number - so you can type or scan in the pre-assigned number.

         You can do this by adding the word NOAUTOCREDITNO anywhere in the

         "Miscellaneous Settings" box in        "Preferences". This was added in

         version 0.998 - see below.

         What's *new* is that it is now easier to switch between pre-printed

         gift-cards and internally generated paper credit slips - which should

         have a completely different sequence. Now, with NOAUTOCREDITNO

         when you add a credit slip, if you leave the credit slip blank,

         the next internal sequence number will be suggested  (and the

         sequence updated.) But, if you type or scan in the gift card number

         the internal sequence will not be affected.

                 Make sure the internal/paper sequence number is significantly

                 different from the gift-card sequence to avoid any possibility

                 of overlap.

         

         + Various Adjustments, including

                 a fix for printing pictures on appraisals for appraisals

                 entered using a "dummy appraisal sku number"

                 

         

 

Version 1.164                                                        09/09/2009

===============================================================

 

 Addition of Layaway Statements.

         By printing and sending these official layaway statements

         you will speed-up the completion of layaway sales and

         increase turnover by reducing the time merchandise lies

         dormant.

         [Choose Sales Reports Menu, Layaway Statements. Select a date

         range to include too-old layaways and to exclude layaways

         where the customer made a payment recently.]

         

 

         + Various Adjustments, including

                 a fix for the Js-Classic Assemble-Disassemble report.

                 

Version 1.163                                                        08/27/2009

 

===============================================================

 

 The 3-part sales receipts can now print a Logo image file (jpg)

 at the top.

         [Other sales receipts have had this option for a while. If you

         want a logo file, save it in the CUSTOM folder which is usually

         inside the MAIN folder which is in the DATA folder in the VISUALJS

         folder on the drive where the VJS data is stored - i.e.

         \VISUALJS\DATA\MAIN\CUSTOM   - then select the file by opening

         VJS then Maintenance Menu, Preferences, Receipt Options,

         Half & 40-Col Receipt options.] [If you have a customized version

         of the 3 part receipt, you would need to recreate it based on

         the *original version*  to get the new option.]

 

 

 + Various Adjustments, including

         If you edit a sale in JS-Classic where the sales clerk is

         no longer in the system, previously you were prompted to

         change the clerk. That won't happen now when editing

         an old sale.

 

         On the appraisal screen text area you can switch between

         the (usual) proportional font (Arial) and non-proportional font

         (Lucida Console) by right-clicking the font increase (A+) button.

         This also applies to the pre-appraisal (notes) area of

         the inventory status screen.

                 [this may be useful if you try to align text on appraisals

                 which is hard to do with proportional fonts. This would

                 also imply that you customize your appraisal printing

                 format to use a non-proportional font.]

 

         Sales can now be ZZ'd by putting ZZ in the Dept code.

         (unlike JS-DOS you can't ZZ a sale by putting ZZ in the payment reference.)

         

         Fix for a problem in JS-Classic when creating a mail merge file from

         the Customer Sales Reports [choice 6,2,5 ]

                 

                 

                 

Version 1.161-2                                                        08/24/2009

===============================================================

 

 Add Spell-Check to the Appraisal screen and the pre-appraisal

         screen (the Notes page of Inventory Status)

         [The spell checker will be refined at a later date.]

 

Version 1.160                                                        08/14/2009

===============================================================

 

 Fix a (harmless) error message that occurs when running a

 cleanup with the "Condense Files" option.

 + Various Adjustments

 

Version 1.159                                                        08/14/2009

===============================================================

 

 Addition of Return to Vendor Report.

         [Find this option under the Reports Menu.]

 

 + Various Adjustments

         

Version 1.158                                                        08/13/2009

===============================================================

 

 All the reports (and other print jobs such as Check-Printing

         Statements printing) now have customizable security settings.

         From the Maintentanace Menu choose Preferences, then go

         towards the bottom of the list of options on the left

         and choose Reports Security settings.

 

 VJS has always allowed you to add or change the list of possible

         payment types that appears when you make a payment. You can also

         select the icon that appears for each type but you can't make

         your own icons. If you add a payment type for which there's

         no suitable icon - such as Wells Fargo, you can erase the icon and

         the name itself        will apear. This option was sort of available before

         but the resulting text was not clearly readable; now it is.

         [These preferences are set in Maintenance Menu, Preferences,

         Payment Options, Payment Types.}

         [To remove an icon for any payment type, RIGHT-click the selected

         icon immediately to teh right of the name of the Payment Type

         in the Payment Types Preferences screen.]

 

 + Various Adjustments

 

Version 1.157                                                        08/07/2009

===============================================================

 

 You can change the major code of an existing Sku using the Inventory Status

         screen. Note that you'll get a new Sku and may have to retag.

         [ From Inventory Status you'll need to make sure the screen (padlock)

                 is unlocked, then Ctrl-Click the Major Code box to the left

                 of the picture. Then select a new major code. At this time only

                 the exact Sku in question is changed - not all Sku's of the same

                 style. ]

 

 Appraisals in VJS have always allowed multiple pictures per item, but

         only one was available to print out. Now you can print out multiple

         pictures. All the appraisal layouts have been changed to have room

         for three pictures - except the layouts with the words

         "smaller picture" in the name.

         Note that if you are using a customized version of the appraisal then you

                 your custom format won't have the 2nd or 3rd pictures. Only the

                 *Original Version* will. If you want more pictures on your custom layout

                 you can either create a new custom layout based on the *Original

                 Version* and re-modify it or you can do a tricky cut and paste.

                 To do that, create a new customized version based on the original

                 (you'll erase this later). Go into the Report Designer and shift-click

                 both the 2nd and the 3rd picture boxes to select them both. Then press

                 Ctrl-C to copy them to the clipboard. Then exit, then go back and select

                 your previous customized appraisal and bring up the Report Designer

                 then press Ctrl-V to paste them. Then move & size them.

 

 The GMROI Reports summarized by Vendor or Manufacturer have a (possible) formatting

         change. Previously, if there were sales or inventory items coded with a vendor

         or manufacturer code which was not in the official vendor list, all such items

         were grouped under one entry called "Vendor Not Found".

         Because this sometimes caused confusion and time trying to decipher, now in such

         cases a vendor is automatically added to the vendor list and a separate line

         is added to the report.

         [This change won't affect the report if your inventory and sales record are all

         already linked to a valid entry in the vendor list.]

 

 When you add a new repair from the Repair screen (bypassing the sales screen) you

         can now choose whether or not the clerk box should be left empty or pre-filled-in

         with the initials of the user currently logged on.

         [See the Repair Defaults Cont. page of Preferences from the Maintenance Menu.)

 

         + Various Miscellaneous, including

                 Some cosmetic changes for Canadian users.

                 Obscure technical printing situation RB80.

                 

 

Version 1.156                                                        08/04/2009

===============================================================

 

 A further layout has been added for printing purchase orders: the new

         layout option includes pictures.

         [At the Print Options window when printing a purchase order, change

         the layout to # 04 - "W/ Pictures".]

 

 

 Correct an issue that occurred under some circumstances with automatic discounts

         set up in the Major Class Code screen.

         [select a category from the Major Class Code maintenance screen and

         select the Pricing page.]

                         

 

 Correct an issue with integrated credit-card processing that could occur with

         certain non-standard American Express Cards.

 

 

Version 1.153 - 1.155                                        07/30/2009 - 07/31/2009

=============================================================================

 

 When adding appraisals, the Value box was previously left empty.

         Now the Value will be filled in with either the MSRP or the usual

         selling price of the item being appraised.

 

 When running commission reports with a cost column, Shopkeeper usually

         will show the Replacement Cost instead of the Standard Cost.

         (but, of course, if there is no Replacement cost - the majority of

         items - then the Standard cost is used. The replacement cost is

         a value you can fill in to represent the 'real' cost value of an item

         in case you bought it at considerably below market price)

         The change is that you can now select whether you want to use

         Replacement Cost or Standard Cost.

         (from the Commission Report screen, choose Full Selection then

         'Cost to Use.')

 

 The Major Class Codes maintenance screen now has a way to update

         the markup formula for many (or all) major codes at one time.

         [At the top of this screen choose Options, "Update markup formulas

         globally"]

 

 The Major Class Codes maintenance screen now has a way to update

         the taxable status for many (or all) major codes at one time.

         [At the top of this screen choose Options, "Update taxable status

         globally"]

 

 Deleting a payment on a sale is a bit easier. Previously it could take

         several clicks of the delete icon in the grid of payments before

         it responded with the Delete confirmation prompt. Now you

         click on the check-box in the payment list - in the column headed

         by a trash-can icon.

         

 The Picture page of Inventory Status has a 'Picture Show' option which

         cycles through all your inventory and shows the picture of each

         one for a few seconds. You can adjust the time of each picture

         from 1 to 99 seconds. This isn't particularly useful; it's more like

         a screen-saver.

         

 The sales screen has an option to temporarily prevent the customer

         X-tra search screen popping up after every sale. While there is an option

         in preferences to turn it off ALL the time, it's handy to keep

         X-tra search on usually, but then there are times, such as when

         you are looking up several invoices in a row by date or by

         invoice number, when you want to turn it off temporarily.

 

 Ditto for the repairs screen.

 

 Several adjustments to the Drop-Lists for looking up previous merchandise

         and non-merchandise accounts payables invoices. (sort order by date,

         more room for the date and value columns for non-merchandise invoices.)

         

 + Various Miscellaneous

         Minor code list on the Add Inventory screen (from sales) shows only

                 the used minor code list (instead of both the used and not-assigned

                 minor codes)

         Changing a sale type from layaway to repair previously could (under

                 certain conditions) leave the sale-type set to layaway.

         A change to the live (webcam) method of adding pictures to inventory

                 has been adjusted to make the use of Dino-Lite digital microscopes easier.

                 Previously the first time you used them the preview screen was so large

                 you couldn't see the controls. Now you'll be able to select 'Resolution'

                 and select 640x480. Also - you should download from dino-lite.com drivers

                 dated June 2009 or later.

         If you have two live (webcam) cameras attached and you switch between

                 the two, the extra step of confirming the resolution for the new

                 camera has been removed. This makes switching quicker - though if

                 the two cameras don't work well at the same resolution then you'll

                 have to click the 'Resolution' button after switching cameras.

         When a repair/layaway sale with repair tracking detail is paid in full

                 usually you'd want to be prompted for the pick-up date and the name

                 of the person picking it up. This is an option that you set in

                 Preferences, Repair options. Previously, under some circumstances

                 the prompt box for the pickup information didn't appear even with

                 this preference set to Yes. That has been addressed.

         A change to entering inventory to reduce the (already low) chance that

                 two invoices would be give the same pro-forma P.O. number (which isn't

                 harmful but can        make different invoices        show together on a printout.)

         + others

         

         

Version 1.152                                                07/22/2009

=============================================================================

 

 In the customer profile screen where you enter the dates for special-

         events (anniversary etc), you can now leave the year part

         of the dates blank

         (previously - if you left it blank it would have defaulted to 2000)

 

 The repair envelopes now have the option to print a logo file at the

         top. Also, there is an option to print or not print the company name

         and address. You can print both either the logo or name or both

         [see Preferences, Receipt Options, Repair Ticket. Note that the changes

         would not be applicable if you have your own customized version. ]

         

         * Also see these same preferences if f you have unwanted changes in

                 terms of the logo or name at the top of the repair tickets.

         

 In JS-Classic the feature where you can search for customers by phone

         numbers is much faster.

 

         + Various Adjustments, including:

                 The statement date is on the quick-selection page of

                 the statement-printing screen (instead of on the full-selection

                 page.)

                 Etc.

                 

 

Version 1.151                                                07/10/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Correction to a problem when running reports by date.

         Related to the change in dates on memorized reports - see v. 1.150

         below.

 

Version 1.150                                                07/09/2009

=============================================================================

 

 When you recall a memorized reports which has dates saved,

         those dates will now be re-evaluated based on today's

         date. For example, if you specify today's date for a sales

         report and save it, then when you retrieve that report

         tomorrow it will fill in tomorrow's date

                 [the dates that will be 'dynamic' are Today, Yesterday,

                 beginning and end of this month, beginning and end of

                 last month, beginning and end of this year, beginning

                 and end of last year. All other dates will be stored as-is.]

 

 In the Inventory Search screen you can now search for certain words

         anywhere in the Description or Style.

         Anywhere you are prompted for a Sku Number (inventory status or

         sales or relocate, etc), you can click the Down-Arrow

         or press Ctrl-DownArrow to show the Inventory Search Box.

         There you can click the Word Search box to activate the

         search box. You can type more than one word separated by spaces.

         At each search only the very next item (down, not up) is located.

         You can        repeat the search.

                 

 + Various Adjustments, including:

         Security setting problem with the Time Card screen.

         Changes relating to the automatic discounts set up in the

                 Major Class Code screen.

         There's a separate security setting for viewing an item's cost

                 on the sales screen and changing an item's cost on the

                 sales screen. See the sales security settings page in

                 Preferences. Note that this is separate from the settings

                 for access to the cost in the inventory file.

 

Version 1.149                                                07/02/2009

=============================================================================

 

 This "What's New" log opens in a separate, easier to review window.

 

 When running a GMROI report by Price-Point you will see the new prompt

         "Do you want to view or change the price-points levels?"

         which let you define the different price-point levels to be analyzed.

 

 Some of the export files for the customer list contain the special-event

         dates (anniversaries, etc.) Previously the date was presented as

         4-digits like 0701 for July 1. Now that data is presented with a

         slash like 07/01. We expect that to be more compatible with

         mailing houses.

         (If you have come to depend on the older format, let us know)

         

 + Various Adjustments, including:

         The Chart of Accounts screen will now follow the selection in

                 Preferences "Do you want screens to start out Un-Locked?"

                 Previously it was always starting out locked even if

                 you'd set that choice to Yes.

         Addition of a utility in JS-Classic APTOT to check the invoice

                 totals compared to the cost of each item

         The point-of-sale credit card integration now accommodates non-standard

                 credit card readers which add an extra number at the beginning

                 of the credit card number.

 

Version 1.148                                                06/26/2009

=============================================================================

 

 On the Inventory Entry screen to locate a previous invoice or memo you

         would typically type the vendor code then an invoice/memo number

         or drop the pick-list. The pick-list has changed such that by default

         it is NOT sorted by invoice number. Instead it is shown in the order

         in which they were typed-in with the most recent at the bottom.

         Open the pick list by clicking the drop-down arrow, or by pressing

         Alt-DownArrow.

                 But, note that if instead of dropping the pick-list, you start

                 typing the first few characters of an invoice number, then the

                 pick-list WILL be sorted alphabetically        and/or numerically.

         Also note that there are more columns in the pick-list now. The

                 Invoice pick-list includes the Notes. The Memo pick-lists adds

                 the Date, Total, and Notes.

         These changes make it easier to retrieve invoices and memos.

         

 On the sales screen you can change the type of sale (Cash, Layaway, etc.)

         by clicking the big sale type word / drop down at the top of the screen.

         You can also change the default sale type (the type you want all

         new sales to assume unless you choose otherwise) by clicking the

         check-box next to each selection. In this update, those check-boxes

         to change the default sale type will not appear unless you are logged

         in at level 10. This is to prevent unwanted changing of the default

         setting.

         

 If you retrieve a previously recorded Quote / Wish List sale and make

         a payment on it, the date of that sale will be brought forward

         to today's date even if you don't manually change the date to today.

         

 

 + Various Adjustments

         

Version 1.146-1.147                                                06/25/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The new Style History page (see 1.145) now lets you choose whether to

         hide or Sku's that are no longer in stock.

 

 The Product-Cards / Credit Card sized "hint cards" now have the option

         of adding a message line such as "This is the Best!" or "Goes Well

         With the Pearl Necklace". You can make a list of several commonly

         used messages so you don't have to type them from scratch each time.

                 From Inventory Status, choose Print a Tag at the bottom right of the

         screen, add one or more items to the mini-list, choose Print Tag

         Then from the Tag Printing screen, if you put the mouse over the button

         to print Product Cards, the message line box will appear.

                 [Note: Most people who use the credit card size reminder cards have

         to create a "customized" version in order to set make the printer

         respect the paper size. Only the *Original Version* has this

         extra line added. If you have a customized version, either make a

         new customized version based on the Original Version, or add an

         extra field-line in your customized one with an expression of

         MESSAGELINE ]

 

 The Activity page of Inventory Status adds a column to show the comments

         on any Return Stock to Vendor entries.

 

 + Various Adjustments, including:

         In the VJS Inventory Status screen after you delete a Sku number, previously

                 the "ghost" of that sku would still appear immediately after confirming

                 deletion. So, even though the item had already been deleted it might

                 have appeared that it had *not* yet been deleted.

         JS-Classic Accounts Payable Cash Requirements report will now sort

                 by date recorded within vendor instead of by invoice number within vendor.

         JS-Classic now has the utility COMDIS that previous versions of

                 Shopkeeper for DOS had.

         + misc.

         

Version 1.145                                                        06/19/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The Inventory Status Screen has a new page which shows you a list

         of all Sku numbers associated with the style that you are looking at.

         When you restock a style numerous times you get a new Sku each time

         and this helps you get the bigger picture.

         [From the Inventory Status screen, locate any item and then click on the

         tag "Style Hist" at the bottom right. It doesn't matter if you locate the

         first item by Sku or stype or part number. You can double-click any Sku in

         the list to see all the details on that specific Sku.]

 

 Repairs called "unbilled jobs are initially entered without a sales ticket,

         directly from the repair screen. Later you bill them by adding a sales

         ticket and choosing Options Repair Billing where unbilled repairs for

         that customer are listed.

         A change is that now you could type in the repair number of a job

         for someone else. I.e. you can charge a sale to Bob to pickup Mary's

         repair. Of course, you'd be given a warning in such case.

                 

 + Various Adjustments, including:

         More space to enter the Merchant Warehouse "RPnum" account ID because

         they can now be longer than the previous limits

         + other.

 

Version 1.143 - 1.144                                        06/17/2009

=============================================================================

 

 When adding new sales you are usually shown the next expected sale number

         to accept or change. If all your sales are retroactively typed in from

         hand-written sales slips you may prefer that the sale number NOT be presented

         pre-filled in - which is now an option.

          You can activate this option by adding the key-word  NOAUTOSALENO

          anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Options" box in "Maintenance",

         "Preferences", "General"

 

 A new Sales Report by Clerk / Commission report will automatically separate

         each clerk on to different pages. This way each clerk can easily get his

         or her own copy without having to run the report multiple times - once

         for each clerk. This is the format that also includes the customer contact

         information.

                 [From the commission report choose 'Clerk and Customer w/Page Breaks.'

                 from the Sort By option. This version does NOT have a grand gotal but

                 it does have totals for each clerk.]

         

 + Various Adjustments, including:

         JS-Classic adds the Inventory Export option which creates an Excel

         file in a format suitable for web site importing or catalogs. Includes

         picture files.

         [From JS-Classic Main Menu choose 6,5 for inventory reports, then change

         line B to 'Export w/Pix' then Start.  The resulting files will be put

         in the INV folder inside the JSREPORT folder from the Windows Desktop.]

 

         

Version 1.142                                        06/11/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The Itemized Sales Report will now create the B.I.G. sales Excel spreadsheet

         with the vendor details columns. In addition to any date range you

         might select, change the Sort-By option to Vendor.

         [the resulting file, SALEREP2.XLS is put in the VJS Reports folder off

         the Windows Desktop.]

 

 Repair ticket printing has a new format to print on two perforation letter-sized

         paper that has three equal sized sections. While this is slightly large

         to fit a normal repair envelope, you can fold an inch or two and fit

         in a clear poly envelope.

         This is useful for those of you who use the 3-part paper for sales receipts

         so you can use the same paper for repairs as well. [the 3-part sales

         receipt is handy as it has a store copy, a customer copy and a gift

         copy all printed on one sheet - with easy tear perforations.]

 

 When you open the repair screen from the Main Menu, you can make the Job Number

         box the first active spot. This could be useful if you frequently use

         this screen to look up job tickets by number.

         [This option is on the Repair Defaults Continued page of Preferences.]

         

 Related to the above, you can now make the repair screen NOT immediately open

         the Customer X-tra Search screen. Previously this option was the same as

         that for the sales screen, now you can make the sales screen default to

         X-tra Search and the Repair screen not (or vice-versa)

         [This option is on the Customer Defaults page of Preferences.]

 

 Repair ticket printing has a new format to print on two perforation letter-sized

         paper that has three equal sized sections. While this is slightly large

         to fit a normal repair envelope, you can fold an inch or two and fit

         in a clear poly envelope.

         This is useful for those of you who use the 3-part paper for sales receipts

         so you can use the same paper for repairs as well. [the 3-part sales

         receipt is handy as it has a store copy, a customer copy and a gift

         copy all printed on one sheet - with easy tear perforations.]

 

 A further repair ticket - almost identical to the above using the same 2-perf

         paper has been added but this one uses the full height; i.e. it's not designed

         to be folded to put in the poly bags.

 

 + Various Adjustments

 

Version 1.140, 1.141                        06/05/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The commission reports (or sales report grouped by sales clerk if you don't

         need commissions ) now include the customer phone numbers to help clerks

         follow up on their customers.

 

 The repair screen now shows the customer address and phone number so you can

         verify if you have the correct address without having to check the

         customer profile page. [with a small font, of course, as there isn't

         much room on that form.]

 

 Both the repair screen and the sales screen can show the customer notes

         without having to view the customer profile screen.

         [Move the mouse over the address - under the customer name - to

         pop up a window with the notes. This will be the larger notes box

         from the second tab of the customer profile screen - not the shorter

         comments from the first page.]

 

 The date an item was received can be coded and put on price tags. Normally

         the date is coded in letters  using the price-code word (in Preferences)

         but there have been options to simply abbreviate it. E.g. for the date

         01/31/94 can become 1049 or 0194 or just 94. The last one with just the

         year is the newest option there. To use these options, add the keyword

         DATECODE2 or DATECODE3 or DATECODE4 in the Miscellaneous Options box

         in Preferences. Of course, you also have to format the price tags

         so that the date-code is on the tag.

 

 The drag n drop method of adding pictures (to inventory, repairs, etc.) has

         been improved and some steps have been removed.

         (for more on drag n drop, see Version 1.127 and 0.991 notes below.)

         

 Shopkeeper remembers which printer you use for each type of print-job, but

         the first time you print a particular report (or ticket) combination

         it used to default to the blank printer. That was by-design so you

         specifically had to select the desired printer. That's changed so that

         any not-yet printed combination will now default to the default

         printer for that computer.

                 

 + Various Adjustments, including

         When prompted, on closing out a sale, for the pickup date and name

         for repairs, you are no longer forced to add a name and date.

         [but in almost all cases you should - as finalized sales normally

         means the repair is picked up]

         

         When receiving merchandise from a prior purchase order the columns

         to check off the items to receive and the items to delete have been

         switched. Having the 'Select' column on the left is more intuitive,

         but watch out in case you got used to the previous layout!

         

         The clerk lookup list on the repair screen is now sorted by initials

                 (or code) where previously it was an unsorted list.

         

         When searching for a customer by phone and then adding the new customer

                 if it wasn't found, the last name box used to give you one chance

                 to type the last name correctly and then became protected. If you

                 mis-typed the last name it was a bit awkward to correct. Now, for

                 a new customer added that way the last name remains open to easy

                 correction.

                 

         

         + Other

         

Version 1.139                                05/22/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Addition of a Sale Label. Sale labels could be used to stick on a layaway

         or "hold" envelope. From the sales screen, with a sale on-screen, choose

         Options at the top then Print a Sale Label.

                 [These are designed to print on 2" x 4" shipping labels using

                 a small label printer. They include the customer name, address,

                 phone numbers, email address and item details. Note that if the

                 sale contains more than one item, more than one label will print.]

 

 When you run customer reports based on type of purchases (e.g. for Pandora

         or purchases last year) you need to specify a dollar range - e.g. $100

         and up. But users sometimes forget to specify a value and so you get

         ALL customers! Now, if you forget to specify a dollar figure, a range

         of $1 and up will automatically default to prevent you from getting

         the entire list.

 

 Fix for check-preparation for paying invoices-payable. Previously

         the options to restrict the list of payables by due-date or

         discount date were not working - now those criteria can be used.

         That way you can get a more concise list of just the payables

         due, say, by next week.

         [from the Main Menu, choose Accounting Menu, Pay Invoices Payable]

 

 Adding items in the Enter Inventory screen:

         Warning f the retail is lower than the cost.

         When restocking items and the cost changes a new retail price is

         suggested based on the markup formula, but if the new suggested

         price is unreasonable it won't be suggested.

 

 Fix for printing inventory index cards in JS-Classic.

 

 + Various Adjustments.

 

Version 1.138                                05/14/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The Hot-Seller report and Reorder Report by style now allow you to select

         results based on the Minor Class Code.

 

 You can now specify that new repairs start out in the Quick-Fill boxes.

 That will save you a step on new repairs if you use the Quick-Fill wizards.

         [This option is on the the Repair Defaults Continued page of Preferences.]

 Also an improvement in the Quick-Fill areas for for keyboard users is that

         you can Tab or Enter to the green "Go" arrow instead of only being able

         to click it with the mouse.

 

 The Assemble Disassemble screens adds a Print Tag option. Choose Options

 (from the top tool-bar) then Print a Tag.

 

 The X-tra Search screens for the lookup of customers and vendors now shows

 the e-mail address (which, of course, always showed on the full profile screen,)

 Given space limitations, you need to scroll right in the list to see the e-mail

 column. As before, you cab shrink the size of columns less important to you and

 so you could make the email appear without scrolling right.

 

 You can now select Company Check as the payment method for refunds on

         sales or refunds to in-house charge accounts.

         (Note that the check itself is not added to your Shopkeeper checkbook

         file nor exported to QuickBooks. You would record that in the checkbook

         file as a separate step.)

 

         

Version 1.137                                05/08/2009

=============================================================================

 

 + Various Adjustments, including

         Check preparation and printing: Check layout corrections

                 and removal of an extra step between preparing and printing

                 checks.

         Enter Existing Inventory previously could sometimes skip Sku numbers

                 (e.g. from -00001 to -00003, etc) in cases where you added pictures at

                 take-in time. That no longer occurs.

 

 

Version 1.136                                05/06/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The sales screen Sku number entry is improved for barcode readers

         (There was a previous extra step encountered when reading barcodes

         for Sku's where the major code was 99 or lower.)

         Also - when you have typed a full Sku, it now no longer requires

         that Tab or Enter be pressed.

         

 The Appraisal screen previously had a Delete button, but it could only

         delete the most recent changes. Now it will either delete the

         entire appraisal or just the changes or give you a choice.

         

 Adjustment to 3-part repair envelope formatting. Due to the non-standard

 size of paper for the repair envelopes, some printers were selecting

 an inappropriate paper size which caused a layout problem (error 1298.)

 The change should prevent that from happening. (please note that any printing

 change made by Compulink cannot update any *Customized* layouts that you

 may have made)

 

 Automated import of Pandora inventory list. Add to Shopkeeper's inventory

 list 1000's of Pandora items complete with description, style, price, cost.

         (Instructions available on request for certified Pandora resellers.)

 

+ Various Adjustments, including        

 Improvements of the Quick-Fill boxes. These are the drop lists of pre-

 canned text (wizards) you can add to repairs, appraisals, inventory

 notes, customer notes. The improvements are that when you add new text

 entries they are now available immediately. Previously, new additions

 would be available the next time you re-opened that window.

 Also, in the Repair screen (the screen where the Quick-Fills are most

 useful) the buttons the click on to activate the fill-in are made

 larger so easier to click. Further, if you fill in some Description

 Quick-Fill Boxes then some Instruction Quick-Fill boxes, you can

 click just one time on the Instruction "Go" button and both Description

 and Instructions will be filled in. (previously you'd have to click

 separately on the Description Go and the Instructions Go.

 

 Adjustments to the Pay Accounts Payable screen including using the

         requested next check number instead of the previously expected

         next check number

 

Version 1.135                                05/01/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Much improved performance of the "Add an Inventory Item" screen that

         pops up from the sales screen when you choose Options, Add Special Order.

         

 The Special order / Add an Inventory item now creates a proper purchase order

         record (previously the item was on the on-order list, but the an actual

         purchase order wasn't made so the purchase order printout wasn't complete

         an the purchase order could not be retrieved from the Enter Inventory

         screen.

 

 + Various Adjustments, including        

                 Correct a typo on the posting report - "Non Taxable Merchandise

                 instead of "Taxable Merchandise"

 

Version 1.134                                05/01/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The customer email screen makes it easier to attach pictures.

 *) When you click on the "Browse" button to find attachments the file-finder

 screen will now go directly to the folder which contains all your inventory

 pictures

 *) A small picture box will show the picture that has been selected

 *) You can drag and drop picture files. E.g., if you have an inventory status

 window open showing the details and picture of an item, you can drag the

 picture from the inventory screen and drop it on the picture box of the

 email screen.

 

 Addition of Pay Invoices-Payable / Cut Checks to VJS

         Previously the "Print Checks" option was available in VJS, but the

         actual preparation of them was only in JS-Classic

                 Choose "Accounting Menu" then "Pay Invoices"

                 Most payables and checkbook reports are still only on JS-Classic

                 but will be added to VJS.

                 

 The X-tra Search screens for the lookup of customers and vendors now shows

 the fax number (which, of course, always showed on the full profile screen,)

 Given space limitations, you need to scroll right in the list to see the fax

 column. Also note that unlike before when you scroll right, the left columns

 with the customer or vendor name remain visible.

 

 + Various Adjustments, including

         On the Add Inventory screen for special        order items from the sales screen

         Bonus Point Calculation (previously available in Shopkeeper 9.x) has been

                 added to JS-Classic

         Check printing formatting improvements.

         3-Part Repair envelope formatting improvements (removed excess spacing

                 between address lines.)

         On the sales screen when typing in the Sku, for Sku's with a two-letter

                 or two-digit major code (e.g. AB) you can type AB-Space then the

                 rest of the item instead of having to type AB-Dash or AB-Enter.

                 (some people may find this easier as the space bar is larger.)

         On the sales screen, when you want to add or exclude tax you check

                 or un-check the tax box. This can only be done when that sales

                 Sku line is "active" but previously the screen would appear to

                 let you change the tax status before "activating" that line - which

                 could cause you to think you changed the tax status. Now, the check

                 boxes for tax are clearly un-selectable until you "Activate" the

                 sales line.

         On Repair Screen when you add a new repair, the blinking cursor

                 normally starts in the Description box. You can now make it

                 jump initially to the Clerk box. [This option is on the

                 Repair Defaults Continued page of Preferences.]

 

                 

 

Version 1.133                                04/27/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Customer Special Events reports now have new layout options to include

 details from all the items on the customer's wish-list and previous sales.

         This is a significant tool for salespeople as they can now run reports

         of customer with, say, Anniversaries or Birthdays in May, and under each

         name you can see items to suggest along with previous purchases.

                 Note that "Wish-List" items are the same as Sales Quotes items. To

                         add items this this list, create a sale in the sales screen, but

                         do NOT save it. Instead choose, at the top tool-bar, Options, then

                         Save as a Sales Quote.

                 To Run these reports choose Customer Special Events Reports (or Customer

                 Reports and Labels then choose Full Selection) then select the special

                 events month then for the Report Type select Special Events+Wish List

                 or Special Events+Wish+Sales

                 

 A correction to the previously added Special Events report feature.

 (see V 1.123 below.) Previously, selecting a year would remove the month criterion,

 and selecting a month would remove the year criterion. Now you can select both a

 month and a year.

         However, the most frequent selections is just a single month as it's not

         often important the year of the anniversary or birthday.

         

 The 3-part point-of-sale receipts are very handy because, on a single sheet,

 they include a file copy, a customer copy and a gift receipt copy which does

 not show the selling price or payment information.

         The gift receipt copy has been corrected to NOT show the "regular price."

         for discounted items.

 

 JS-CLASSIC: The repair templates are now active similar to the way

 they were in Shopkeeper 9.9 and before. i.e., you can enter a repair

 templates which pre-fill in the repair Description and Instructions with

 standard wording, leaving just some details to be filled in at take-in.

         You can enter a standard template for all jobs on page 16 of

         Store Information Defaults.

         You can enter different templates for each repair Sku by editing

         the Sku from Edit Inventory (2,8,E) and accessing the 2nd page

         with the Notes. That way, for example, a watch repair Sku could have

         a completely different template from a Resize Sku.

 

         + Various Adjustments

 

 

Version 1.132                                04/17/2009

=============================================================================

 

 When adding a special order item during a sale there is now an option

 to print or fax the purchase order at that time. Otherwise, to print

 you would have to later to go the Enter inventory Screen and retrieve

 and print the purchase order from there.

         From the sales screen, within a new line for an item, choose Options,

         Add Special Order, then a blue Add an Inventory Item screen appears

         The button is called "Print of Fax Purchase Order." Note that if

         you want to fax the item, you would have to have a "fax printer driver"

         installed in Windows.

         

 VJS: When assembling components into another piece, VJS used to mark

         each assembly record with the date the component originally came in.

         VJS now matches JS-Classic where the assembly record is marked with

         the date the item was assembled.

 

 JS-Classic: For components that have been assembled into another

         finished piece, the item history (from 2,6 Inventory Status) was not

         showing the items into which they went. That history now shows.

 

 + Various adjustments

 

Version 1.131                                04/16/2009

=============================================================================

 

 A new option allows you to choose whether or not appraisals will be

 made all-upper case. Previously they were upper-case if you chose

 to make names and addresses upper-case only. Now you can continue

 to have names and addresses upper-case but can independently allowed

 appraisals to be mixed-upper-lower-case.

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Inventory",

                 "Inventory Defaults", "Should Appraisals be Made Upper Case"

 

 Resolve a problem when you type in a very long invoice or purchase order

 number for a payable or P.O.

 

 When receiving merchandise from purchase orders, the list of items on

 order now shows the vendor's style numbers. That's important as the

 packing list/invoice used to check of the item would normally list

 them by style.

         To receive merchandise from a previously typed in purchase order

         choose Add Inventory, Invoice, from the inventory entry grid

         (After entering invoice number, date, shipping etc) at the bottom

         choose P.O.'s. The list of outstanding ordered items pops up and

         you can select the items being received. You can also add items

         to the invoices in addition to those showing on the purchase

         order list.

 

 New option for adding pre-canned notes/text to customer notes fields.

 (similar to the quick-fill options for repair descriptions, appraisals,

 extended inventory notes, etc.)  This could be used to add standard

 notes to record when you mailed or called a customer or if there's a

 standard request template you often use.

         this is on the Notes page of the customer profile screen.        

 

 The credit slip report from VJS has a column for the Sale # the slip

 was used on. Previously this column was only filled in when VJS was

 used to record the sale. Now it will be filled in even if JS-Classic

 was used to record the sale where the slip was used.

         To report Credit Slips in VJS, open the credit Slip screen and choose

         Options, Report Credit Slips.

         

 

Version 1.130                                04/10/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Fixed a problem when adding special orders. For a never-before received

         style VJS could have suggested a description from a different item from

         that same vendor.

         

 + Various

 

Version 1.129                                04/10/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Various minor adjustments

 

Version 1.128                                04/09/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Easier to retrieve prior payments on account (e.g. to reprint them)

         To retrieve a prior payment on account you need to type in the

         payment number. However, the payment number was hard to locate.

         Now the Xtra-Search screen and the Entire Customer History will

         show the payment numbers.

         

 Invoice Printouts: After receiving an invoice of merchandise you can

         print an item list. A new optional format for this list prints

         the pictures of each item and includes the line number of each item.

         Another change is that the format with the cost now adds lines to

         show the freight (and other expense, if any) along with the grand

         total (previously only the total of the inventory items was shown.)

 

 Performance increased significantly when accessing VJS over the internet

         using Windows Remote Desktop or Terminal Services. There may be a

         bit of flickering but the screens changes will be much faster.

         

         + Various adjustments

 

Version 1.127                                04/07/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Ability to drag n Drop text into the notes areas of Inventory, customers,

         appraisals. (i.e. you can drag text from an email or a website into

         those notes areas). You can also drag n drop text *from* those areas

         but be sure to right-click drag n drop out and choose Copy not Move

         because Move would remove the text from VJS.

 

 Added ability to import and Drag n Drop picture files from Firefox web

         browser into inventory items, appraisals, more in addition to

         the usual dragging from a Windows folder - See 0.991 below.)

                 (Doesn't seem to work with Internet Explorer built-in to

                 Windows - which, anyway, isn't a particularly good web browser.)

 

 Customer purchase reports for "Top n" Customers: previously if you selected

         a number of customers larger than the number who purchased the items

         you were considering (e.g. if you picked Top 200 customers with

         purchases within the past week) you'd get the entire customer report.

                 Now in such a case you'll get only those who had $1 or above

                 and you'll get fewer than the number requested.

         (This doesn't affect the usual situation where you pick a reasonable

         "Top n" count.)

 

 Customer Special Events Reports let you exclude the long customer comments

 in case they take up too much space.

 

 Fixed problem printing credit slips where option to print entire payment

         histories on sales receipts had been turned Off.

 

 + Various adjustments, including

         Improved reliability in the Drag n Drop method of adding pictures

         (see notes under version 0.991 below)

         

 

 

Version 1.126                                04/03/2009

=============================================================================

 

         Various adjustments, including

                 Address formatting corrections on the printed Return to Vendor slips;

 

                 A/R Statement formatting correction when you choose NOT to show

                 the sales detail.

 

                 The inventory Entry screen displays the vendor address and has

                 a button to access the full vendor profile screen.

 

                 Sales screen behavior - sometimes when clicking on a line in the

                 sales screen the cursor went one-line higher

 

                 Etc.

 

Version 1.125                                03/31/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Some printing tasks, have different layouts available. For example, receipts

         have Side-by-side, 40-Column, 3-Part, etc. If you have a multi-computer

         network and want different stations to default to different layouts

         (e.g. 40-Column at Station A, and Side-by-Side at Station B) you can

         now do that by assigning each computer a Cash Register Code

                 Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Local Defaults",

                 "Local Defaults Continued", "Cash Register Code"  Enter a two-letter

                 or two-digit code.

         Also Note that the cash register code can also help produce separated

         cash register reports. See notes under version 0.944 below

         Also see notes further below on "Local Settings"

 

         +Various adjustments, including problem clicking on the "Archive"

                         button on the Credit Slip screen

                 

Version 1.124                                03/26/2009

=============================================================================

 

 The sales screen will now issue a warning, or disallow, prices that are

         too low.

         If you use passwords, each clerk from the Login screen can be assigned

                 a maximum Discount. From the Login screen choose "More" then pick a

                 name from the list and set the Maximum Discount. (zero implies no

                 limitation has been set.)

         On any individual item you can set a minimum selling price which is

                 available on the Inventory Status screen

         You can set a store-wide minimum markup from "Maintenance", "Preferences",

                 "Inventory", "Inventory Defaults", "The Minimum Allowed Sale Markup"

                 E.g. if you set this at 1.2 then a 100 item cannot be sold for less

                 than $120 (even if the usual price were $150 someone were allowed to

                 discount 30%)

         Normally the sales screen will give a warning on a too-low price but let

                 you continue. If you want to disallow too-low prices, set the security

                 level needed to override the warning from "Maintenance", "Preferences",

                 "Security Settings", "Sales Security", "Able to Override Discount

                 Limitations"

         

         

 Correction to the layout of the Inventory Report by Location With pictures,

 which previously had the position of the cost and retail totals switched.

 

 Correction to the format (address) of the Return to Vendor printed sheets.

 

 + Various adjustments.

         including adjustments to the sorting of appraisals in the appraisal

                 lookup lists from Zone 3 of the appraisal screen.

         etc.

         

         

Version 1.123                                03/23/2009

=============================================================================

 

 Addition of Customer Reports by Special Events. Choose "Reports Menu",

         "Customer Reports and Labels", "Full Selection" and towards the end are

         the new options "Spec. Events" and "Month / Year". You do not have to

         select all three of the choices. Very commonly you'll choose only the

         month - e.g. April, to get a list of all customers with any special

         event in April. You could combine that with an Event code such as

         ANN to get only customers with an Anniversary in April. You could

         further combine that with a year - such as 84 to get just silver

         anniversaries.

                 Note that the resulting report shows all the special events for

                 matching customers - not just the one you were looking for.

                 Change the Report Type (line 1) to Special Events to see the version

                 of the customer list showing the special events. Choose report type

                 Spcl Events w/Purchases to also show the calculated purchase totals

                  - but only if you select purchase criteria.

                 

 There is a separate menu choice "Customer Special Events Lists" -

         which is a much simplified set of choices. For any additional choices

         including purchases or zip codes you need to use the main "Customer

         Reports and Labels"

                 

 

 + correction of a typo on the customer report screen: The choice

 to select the top X (100, 500, etc) customers previously had

 the caption "For Prices" (i.e. there were two lines showing "For Prices")

 

 + Various adjustments.

 

 

Version 1.122                                03/19/2009

=============================================================================

 

 In more cases, the most recently used customer will be remembered for the

 next customer lookup. (e.g. if you retrieve an appraisal from customer A,

 then open the repair screen, the X-Search screen will default to customer A)

         [this feature was partially available before - it's now expanded]

 

 The Entire Customer History previously did not print the Instructions for

 repair jobs but they will now print.

         You can access this from several screens (sales, customer profile,

         repairs,credit slip, etc.) - Choose Options from the top tool-bar then

         Entire Customer History.

 

 When entering repair Description and Instructions, a previous update made

 the screen interpret extra 'Enter' key-strokes to mean 'jump to the next box.'

         That helped some users familiar with old Shopkeeper but was awkward for

         others. The behavior has been adjusted to be less intrusive but if you

         find this behavior awkward you can remove it by adding the key-word  

         NOREPAIRENTER in the "Miscellaneous Options" box in "Maintenance",

         "Preferences", "General"

 

 + Various adjustments including work on file lock messages

         

Version 1.121                                03/18/2009

===================

 

 Improvements to the layout of the Daily Cash Register Posting Report.

 (tidier - fewer extra lines for customer name, etc)

 

 Reduced chance of duplicate repair numbers when adding repairs simultaneously

 from multiple computers on a network.

 

 JS-Classic: When restocking inventory styles which already have a picture file

 the new Sku will share the picture with the previous Sku. (this was already

 the case in VJS)

 

 + Various adjustments

 

 

Version 1.120                                03/13/2009

===================

 

 Adjustments to the "Return to Vendor" feature added in the prior update.

 

Version 1.117 - 1.119                03/12/2009

===================

 

 Addition of Return Stock to Vendors feature. This prepares a list of items

 to be returned, deducts them from inventory, creates a credit-invoice in

 your payables list and prints a return slip to accompany the items. There

 are two return slip formats: One with the inventory pictures and one without.

         By default this feature is on the Inventory Menu.

         

 

 Relating to printing Credit Slips, new options in "Preferences" let you

 choose whether or not to print the store name and address on the slips.

 Also you can choose a different logo file than the one selected for sales

 receipts.

 Choose "Maintenance", "Defaults", "Receipt", "Receipt Options", "Half Page",

 "Credit Slip Logo" and "Print Store Name and Address on Credit Slips"

         As with the receipt logo, the suggested location to store the logo file

         is in the folder CUSTOM which is under your main data folder (often 'MAIN'

         but you may have selected another name) in the folder DATA which is in

         the VISUALJS folder.

 

 When you run an itemized inventory report, an Excel copy is usually

 created in the VJSREPORTS folder on the Windows desktop. (This is not new)

         An extra column - the second description line - is now included in

         that Excel export file.

 

 + Various adjustments including,

         The full-page printed customer profile sheet now includes the email

         addresses.

         + other

 

 

 

Version 1.116                03/03/2009

===================

 

 Various Adjustments, including

 

 Correct the data organization in the sales activity tables

         in the activity page of the Inventory Status screen.

         (the columns had been switched in version 1.115)

 

         Correct problem saving the new alternative email address

         (see V1.108 below)

         

         When using JS-Classic with Merchant Warehouse credit card processing

         the receipts will indicate the type of card used (Visa, etc) instead

         of just 'Swipe.'

         

Version 1.115                02/27/2009

===================

 

 The Inventory Report adds a new choice to select only those items

 withOUT an attached picture, or Only those items WITH a picture.

         From the Inventory Report screen choose Full Selection and

         change the selection for the prompt "Only Items With Pictures"

 

 Improved keyboard behavior for the Enter key in the "description" box

 of the repair details tracking screen,

 

 Normally repairs are given an "Alternative Job Number" which is the same

         as the primary job number. If you want the Alt Job No. to start blank,

         add the keyword BLANKALTJOB anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Settings" box

         in "Preferences."

 

 In the Inventory Status screen - Activity page, if you highlight a sale

 and right-click it or press Ctrl-C, the sale number is copied to the

 Windows Clipboard. That can help if you then wanted to paste that

 number into the Sales screen to look up the entire sale.

 

 + Various Adjustments

         including possible error 12 in the JS-Classic sales screen)

         The Right-Click option indicated in Version 1.108 below wasn't

         previously active - it is now.

         + misc.

 

         

Version 1.114                02/25/2009

===================

 

 Clearer indication on screen when you retrieve a voided sale

 (both JS-Classic and VJS)

 

 The receipt "23 40 Column Receipt - Narrower" has been adjusted

 to be even narrower since some POS printers (e.g. Epson 220) have

 very limited printing width.

 

 + Various Adjustments, including a sometimes present problem

 running a Cash Requirements report in JS-Classic.

 

 

Version 1.112-3                02/23/2009

===================

 

 Resolves a problem that sometimes occurred in printing archived

 (old) appraisals.

 

 Resolved warning message on screens assemble disassemble, deduct

 from inventory.

 

 The (purple) Inventory Search lookup form now includes the second

 basic description line if you scroll to the right for additional columns.

 

 + Various Adjustments

 

 Version 1.111                02/20/2009

===================

 + Various Adjustments (incl. error opening vendor profile screen)

 

 

 Version 1.110                02/19/2009

===================

 

 New sales receipt format for laser / inkjet printer. 3-part receipt using

 letter size paper with two perforations. Each part is 3-2/3" x 8-1/2".

 The customer gets a standard receipt and a gift receipt and the

 store keeps a copy of the standard receipt.

         You can buy plain paper with two perforations by the ream.        (such

         as from  http://www.lintonlabels.com/lasercutsheet/cut_sheet.html

         and others)

 

 Alternative Pop-Up Calendar. You may choose it either because you prefer

 its appearance or if your computer doesn't work with the original style.

         To use the new style, add the keyword CALENDARV2 anywhere in the

         "Miscellaneous Settings" box in "Preferences"

 

 Previously added was the ability to drag and drop image files

 *into* inventory, appraisals, repairs and customers (see notes under 0.991 below)

 Now you can also drag and drop pictures to copy *from* those areas.

         E.g. you can drag n drop copy a repair picture to an inventory item or

         appraisal. You can also drag n drop copy a picture from an inventory item

         to an email message (such as Outlook) or into a word processing document.

 

 Improvements to the option to move inventory items from one (incoming )

         invoice or memo to another invoice. (Relates to addition made in

         version 1.106 -- see below.)

         

 + Various Adjustments

 

Version 1.109                02/16/2009

===================

 Various Adjustments

 

Version 1.108                02/12/2009

===================

 

 Addition of a further option to speed up selling by style on

 the sales screen: Press Ctrl-S in the Sku number box

 (see v 1.106 below for more on this subject)

 

 Changes to the sales screen in JS-Classic to reduce the chance of

 duplicate sale numbers if you have both JS-Classic users and VJS

 users making sales at the same time.

         -Note that for this to take effect you'll need to run, one time,

         the 'Update Data Files' option from the VJS File Center.

 

 Addition of a Spouse's E-Mail field on the customer profile screen.

         

 + Various Adjustments, including addition of the Part Number on

 the invoice printouts (after receiving inventory);

 reduction in some network file lock situations; etc.

 

 

 

 

Version 1.107                02/12/2009

===================

 

 The receive payment on account screen (for a/r customers)

 can now accept credit slip payments

 

 + Various Adjustments including a warning notice that the built-in

 Shopkeeper data backup does NOT backup your picture files; you have

 to back them up to a CD/DVD or memory stick

 

Version 1.106                02/10/2009

===================

 

 On the sales screen, if you wish to select an inventory item by style

 number (instead of by Sku) you were able to click the drop-down arrow

 the choose to search by style from the resulting Inventory Search window.

         For those who do this frequently there are some key-saving changes:

         In the Sku number box you can type the Vendor Code followed

         by a few letters of the Style and press Enter to bring up

         the Inventory Search Window already in search-by-Style mode and at

         the right part of the list.

         Since that works only if the style start with a letter, the other

         shortcut is to *Right*-click the drop-down arrow.

         If you prefer not to use the Mouse you can fake out the first approach

         by entering an A for the style - e.g. ABC-A will at least bring up

         the inventory search window already in Style mode and at the correct

         vendor.

 

 On the invoice (receive inventory) screen, the option to move an item from

 one invoice to anther (or from a memo to an invoice) has been activated.

         Select the line item, choose the Options button then choose "Move.."

 

 Interstore transfers of inventory now transfer copies of picture files.

         Interstore transfer is done via JS-Classic screen 2,C. Note that

         if using a memory stick you should make sure you have enough room

         for the pictures.

         Since picture files may be large and since you may already transfer

         pictures another way, you may turn off the picture export/import

         to save time. Those options are on the Change Transfer Defaults page,

         Option 2,C,6 from Js-Classic

         

 + Various Adjustments

 

Version 1.105                02/06/2009

===================

 

 Various Adjustments

         

         

Version 1.104                02/05/2009

===================

 

 You can now link a repair screen with a Sku number and jump between

 the inventory screen, the assemble-disassemble screen and the repair

 tracking screen. (there was previously a Sku number on the repair

 screen but that was only for transfer to the sales screen)

         This is principally for custom jewelry where you need a unique

         Sku number but may also want to track job progress.

                 From the Inventory Status screen choose the Notes page then,

         click on the Repair Tracking button at the center bottom.. This

         button is visible only if there is already a repair job with this

         inventory Sku.

                 From the Assemble Disassemble screen click on the Repair Tracking

         button near the top right, under the picture. This button is visible

         only if there is already a repair job with this inventory Sku.

                 From the Repair Tracking screen click the green right-arrow button

         near the Sku Number.

         

         A new sales receipt format - 23 40 Column Receipt - Narrower has been added

         in case your printer doesn't support the other 40 column receipt formats.

         

         + Various Adjustments

         

         

Version 1.103                01/29/2009

===================

 

         An additional format has been added for credit card sized Product Cards

         The new format "Credit-Card Size Product Card For Stones" includes

         all the information from the loose stones details page of Inventory Status.

                 To print, locate an item in the Inventory Status page, select Print Tag

                 then select Print the select Product Cards.

                 As with all Credit Card size printouts, this requires special paper stock

                 and a printer that can print on small format paper - such as Canon iP90.

 

                 + Various Adjustments including

                         A fix for a previous problem where some of the GMROI reports had incorrect

                         values for the Profit Per Item and ROI % in the Subtotal and Total lines.

                         (though each line was individually correct)

                 

 

 

Version 1.102                01/27/2009

===================

         Better separation of pictures for different appraisals which share

         a common appraisal Sku number.

                 Retrieve the appraisal class in the major code screen to

                 verify that it is set as an Appraisal Type of class code.

 

         The Inventory Status screen, "Activity" page now has the option to show

         you the components from which an item was assembled.

                 Choose "Assembled From" at the top of this page

                 This can save you the step of bring up the item in the Assemble-

                 Disassemble screen to see the components.

 

 

 + Various Adjustments including

         smoother activation of the "Style" page of inventory status

         JS-Classic 6,2,5 report previous worked only with the current

         sales file but now it also searches the archived sales file.

 

 

Version 1.001                01/23/2009

===================

 

 Improvements in customer lookup by telephone number via the internet

 

 + Various Adjustments

         

Version 1.000                01/21/2009

===================

 

 The appraisal screen Options button adds options for

 "Edit Customer Name & Address", "Mailing Label or Profile",

 "Entire Customer History"

 

 The appraisal screen can now retrieving older archived appraisals

 (previously, access to archived appraisals was quite limited)

 

 The inventory status screen - "style" tab has a new alternative

 description box (but this does not print anywhere.)

 

 + Various Adjustments                

 

Version 0.999                01/15/2009

===================

 The itemized sales report - the type where you set the Report Organization

 to "Sales Tax" will now include a column with the Department code.

 This can be handy if you code certain non-taxable sales with a Dept code

 on the sales screen (e.g. WS for Wholesale, or SOS for Shipped Out of State, etc)

         From the Main Menu, choose Sales Report Menu, Itemized Sales Report,

         Report Organization.

 

 You can now customized the layout of the list of customers in

 the X-tra Search Screens for Customers and for Vendors.

         i.e. you may want the Address column to be before the phone numbers.

         You can move columns by dragging them.

         You can resize columns by dragging the separator bar between

         column headings.

         To reset to the standard layout, right-click anywhere on the list.

         

         + Various Adjustments                

 

Version 0.998                01/13/2009

===================

 

 If you check the tax-exempt box on the customer profile screen

 the sales screen will automatically exclude sales tax.

         See the "Other" tab from the Customer profile screen.

         You can override the sales tax setting on any individual

         item on any sale.

 

 On a store-wide basis, you can set the sales screen to Not charge

 sales tax for any out-of-state customer.

         See the "Sales Screen Cont." page in "Maintenance", "Preferences"

         

 When recording a gift certificate/ Gift card you can now select

 the number of the certificate.

         From the "Sales" Menu choose "Gift Cards/Certificates"

         If you do NOT want Shopkeeper to suggest the next number (e.g.

         because you have pre-printed numbers) add the keyword

         NOAUTOCREDITNO anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Settings" box in

         "Preferences"

         Note that gift cards starting with a letter will NOT increment the

         sequence number.

 

         + Various Adjustments                

         

Version 0.997                01/06/2009

===================

 

 A Print option has been added to the Deduct Inventory screen to

 print a list of the adjustments you've recorded.

         Choose "Inventory Menu", "Deduct Inventory"

         The lists are printed a combination of the Reference and date so deductions

         with a reference of "PHYSICAL INV ADJUSTMENT" with a date of 01/07/2011

         won't mix with "PHYSICAL INV ADJUSTMENT" with a date of 01/07/2009

 

 + Various Adjustments                

 

Version 0.996                01/06/2009

===================

 

 Inventory reports (versions with pictures) add the Part Number information.

 

 When entering previously stocked styles, the part number information from the last

 received item will be copied to the new Sku record.

 

 Customized logo image files for receipts are easier to share on a network.

 Place an image file in the CUSTOM folder under your main data folder

 (something like \visualjs\data\main\custom) and then select the logo

 file from "Maintenance", "Defaults", "Receipt", "Receipt Options", "Half Page", "Logo"

 

 + Various Adjustments

 

Version 0.994-0.995                12/31/2008

===================

 

 Larger font size for the short customer notes area on the customer

 profile page. (separate from the re-sizable font change added to version 0.993

 for the *extended* customer notes)

 

 Addition of Inventory Relocation in batches of multiple inventory items.

 From the "Main Menu" choose "Inventory Menu", "Relocate Inventory"

 You can review relocation activity of individual items by choosing

 "Inventory Status", then choose the "Activity" tab then choose

 the "Relocation" radio button.

 

 The Relocate Inventory (mass update) screen can now accept a text file

 list of Sku numbers.

         This could be useful if you've created a list of Sku numbers to

         be relocated with a portable data collector or by typing it

         into a text file (e.g. with Notepad)

         Choose "Inventory Menu", "Relocate Inventory", then after selecting

         a reference number and a destination location you can click "OK-Edit List"

         then click "import a list."

 

 You can choose to NOT print inventory pictures on sales receipts

 Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipts", "Do you want to print pictures on the receipts?"

 

 + Various Adjustments including,

         X/Z reports now deduct Paid-Out amounts from the Depositable Receipts figure.

 

 

Version 0.993                12/29/2008

===================

 

 Several "Notes" areas have been enlarged and have been given Font Size buttons

 so you can size the notes text to a more readable size.

         The Customer Notes

         Inventory Notes

         Appraisals

                 Changes that you make are computer-specific and are remembered.

 

 The option for a mailing label for an *individual* customer previously had an

 Envelope option - which included a return address. A new option is an

 envelope format without a return address - for pre-printed envelopes.

         From the Customer Maintenance screen, retrieve a customer and choose

         Options, Mailing Label and Profile, then select the desired Layout.

         

 

 The mass-mailing / Full customer report screen previously did not have an

 envelope option. The envelope choice is now available.

 From the Reports Menu choose Customer Reports and Labels, then select

 Type of Report where you can find Envelopes, labels, standard reports etc.

 

 The repair instructions and description boxes are "edit boxes"

 which can be any length like a mini-word processor.

 Normally pressing Enter adds an extra line and to exit you have to press

 Tab or click with a mouse.

 However - users familiar with the Shopkeeper DOS method of pressing Enter several

 times to get out sometimes end up with inadvertent blank lines or the actual

 description pushed down.

         The keyboard behavior there now allows pressing Enter a few extra times

         to get out. It might be slightly non-standard but is there to help users.

         

 + Various Adjustments including

         The data verification part of Cleanup will ignore some harmless entries

         formerly reported as suspicious.

 

 

Version 0.992                12/23/2008

===================

 

 Many screens in VJS start out in "View-Mode" (Unlocked) to reduce

         the risk of changing data before you're ready. You click the

         Unlock Padlock (or press Alt-L) to unlock the screen to enter

         "Edit-Mode" in order to make changes.

         A new preference allows you to make most screens start out in

         Unlock / Edit mode. Choose "Maintenance Menu", "Preferences"

         and on the first page find "Do you want screens to start out unlocked."

                 This does Not supersede any security settings you have set, so for

                 users who do not have rights to make changes to a certain screen,

                 the screen will remain in View-Mode.

 

 The Login screen has had an option to store the preferred login-name

 and the choice to Auto-Login.

         A change in that area now makes these selections computer-specific

         so that different stations can be set to default to different

         login names.

 

 The itemized sales report adds the selection choice "Only Items Still on Memo"

         I.e. this lets you see memo sales where the associated inventory item has

         not yet been billed to you.

         This choice was available in JS-Classic before

         

 Debit and Memo miscellaneous adjustments to in-house charge accounts

 now have a box to enter a small reference or explanation.

         From the Main Menu choose "Accounts Receivable Menu", "A/R Credit and Debit Memos"

 

 + Various Adjustments

 

         

Version 0.991                12/23/2008

===================

 

 Improved Picture Drag-n-Drop Importing.

         Using a webcam is the most direct way of adding a picture to

         inventory or repairs or appraisals, but VJS has previously allowed

         Importing an existing picture file which is needed if you use a digital

         camera or pictures from another source.

         The new improvement allows you to add a picture by dragging a picture

         file to the picture area in VJS.

                 This works in inventory screens, repair screens, appraisal screens,

                 customer screens and clerks screens.

 

         + Various Adjustments, including improvements to the Merchant Warehouse

         credit-card reporting.

 

Version 0.990                12/18/2008

===================

 

 The customer "Extra Search" screen now searches by the

 spouse's first name.

         In the Extra Search screen type a name and if the name

         is NOT located as a Last Name or a First name, the Spouse's

         name list will automatically be checked.

         If you *specifically* want to search the spouse's name

         you can change the "Search By" box to "Spouse"

                 (This can be helpful, if, say, "Christa" were found

                 in the first name list but the customer you wanted had

                 Christa in the Spouse name list.)

 

 Addition of a Merchant Warehouse transaction report.

 If you use integrated point-of-sale credit card processing

 using Merchant Warehouse a new report retrieves and reports the

 official account tranactions details directly from the Merchant

 Warehouse computer.

         Choose "Sales Reports Menu", "Merchant Warehouse", "Credit Card Report"

         (or if it's not there, choose Customize Menu and add that option to

         your menu)

 

 

Version 0.989                12/16/2008

===================

 You can require that at least one telephone number be added

 to the customer profile page for repair customers. (so you can

 contact them.)

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Repair Defaults",

                 "Repair Defaults Cont." "Require...phone"

 

         Credit card payment report includes authorization number

          (if you use integrated credit card authorization)

                 

 + Various Adjustments, including:

         Improvements to the repair billing selection screen

         Improvements when adding non-Sku'd items to sales screen

                 (either by entering a Sku in the form at xxx-99999 or

                 pressing Options, Add New Item.

         Etc.

 

Version 0.988                12/13/2008

===================

 

 Addition of a 3-Part Sales Receipt. This format is arranged to enable

 printing receipts (often Layaways, special orders or Quote Sheets) on

 the same double-perforated 3-part tickets used for 3-part repair

 envelopes. This way you can put such items in an envelope and organize

 them in repair-like boxes.

         When printing receipts, at the "print Options" screen change the

 "Report Layout" entry to "3-Part Receipt"

 

 Addition of the ability to add sales notes to the sales receipts.

 The sales notes are the optional notes on the bottom left corner

 of the sales screen. By default, these notes do NOT print on receipts

 due to space limitations, but they are accessible if you customize

 receipts using the field RECEIPTDATA.SALESNOTES.

 The new 3-part receipt *does* include these by default - but only

 on the middle copy of the three copies.

 

 Receipts for payments on-account by credit card for in-house charge

 accounts will print the authorization number and credit card

 signature message lines  (if using integrated credit card processing.)

 

 + Various Adjustments.

 

Version 0.987                12/11/2008

===================

 

 Addition of the Chart of Accounts report listing

 Choose "Accounting Menu", "Chart of Accounts", "Options"

 "Report Chart of Accounts"

 

 Addition of the Credit Card Payment Report

 Choose "Sales Reports Menu", "Credit Card Payment Report."

 

 Correction of the 3" x 1" mailing label when printing a label

 for just one customer (presumably on a small label printer)

 From the Customer Maintenance screen, retrieve a customer, choose

 Options (at the top) then Mailing Label & Profile, then change

 the Report Layout to "Small Customer Mailing Label 3 x 1"

 

 + Various Adjustments (credit slip usage, etc)

 

 

Version 0.986                12/10/2008

===================

 

 The Itemized Sales report now creates an Excel version of the results

 of the sales report. This file is in the "VJS Reports" folder which is

 on the Windows desktop.

 

 + Various Adjustments including the addition to JS-Classic of

 the SALTOT utility

 

 

 

Version 0.985                12/08/2008

===================

 

 Sales Quotes can now be printed. Previously Sales Quotes could

 NOT be printed and printing a sale automatically committed the sale

 to the sales files.

         Reminder: Quotes are not in the sales files and do NOT affect

         inventory levels or cash register reports in any way (unless/ until

         they are subsequently saved as a sale.)

         To Print a sales quote choose Options at the top tool-bar in the

         Sales screen and choose Print Quote Sheet.

         Be sure to add an appropriate message to print so that the quote

         validity is clear and to be clear that the quote sheet is not

         mistaken for a sales receipt.

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipt", "Receipt Messages",

         "Quote Sheet"

 

 Repairs due dates can now be set to skip certain days of the week.

 For example, if you are closed Sunday and Monday you wouldn't want

 to suggest those days as pickup days.

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Repair Defaults",

         "Repair Defaults Cont." Here, as before, you can set the usual repair

         completion time if you want VJS to suggest a due-date. Below that you

         can check the days of the week you do NOT want to be suggested as

         due-dates.

         

 If you choose NOT to print the payment history for repairs and layaways

 previously some sales would print only the payments from the initial date

 and not the new payment. This problem has been fixed.

 

 When you print receipts, reports, etc you usually see the "Print Options"

 box which lets you change the printer or report layout etc before

 the print-job previews on-screen or print.

 You have always the option to turn that off - perhaps to speed up

 receipt printing. However, that's a problem if you need to change the

 printer because now that option won't appear!

 There are two ways to make that Print Options box temporarily re-appear

 1) At the top of the screen in the Tool-Bar choose Options, then

         "Show Hidden Prompts"

 2) Instead of left-clicking the "Print" button, Right-Click the print button.

         both of the above settings will re-enable the print options box

         until you exit VJS.

         

 

 

 + Various adjustments.

 

Version 0.984                12/05/2008

===================

 

 An additional month-end A/R account statement

 format for pre-printed forms is available

 "Statement for Pre-Printed Forms B", which may be required

 depending on how the printer made your forms.

         However, when your statement forms run out, you might

         consider using blank statement paper and letting VJS

         print the entire form.

 

 The repair screen for a previously billed repair will show

 the billing Sku number.

 

 Improvements in the address formatting for customers found

 by an internet search using the phone number.

 

 Improvements in the payment posting spreadsheet. Sometimes there

 were unnecessary additional subtotals even for a report of just one day

 

 JS-Classic customer profile screen. Previously the only way to reliably

 exit the Comments box at the bottom of the form was to press Tab. Now

 you can Tab or PageDown or Esc.

 

 + Various adjustments.

         

Version 0.983                12/04/2008

===================

 

 Various adjustments.

 (printing, payables, payables, repair report, etc)

 

Version 0.982                12/03/2008

===================

 

 Addition of sales tax reports - itemized and summarized

 to the "Itemized Sales Reports". Improved formatting

 of the Summarized version of the sales report.

 From the Main Menu choose "Sales Reports", "Itemized Sales Reports"

 Then set the "Report Organization" to "Sales Tax" or "Summary"

 or "Summary Tax"

 

 Improved formatting for the 3-across customer mailing labels

 

 Option to add customer comments to the sales receipts.

 

 Various adjustments.

 

Version 0.981                12/01/2008

===================

 The Hot Seller Report - and related reports which summarize

 inventory sales by Vendor Style number (instead of by Sku) have the

 option to select an individual style number.

 In addition there is a new option to exclude from the sales figures

 those items sold as a special order - so that you can see the sales

 figures and turnover based on showcase items without the skewing effect

 of "instant turnover" special order sales.

 

 The customer screen will show Wholesale customers

 as Business Name ("Firm") and Contact instead of the usual

 "Last" (last name) and "Spouse"

         Add something to either the "Resale No." box

         or the "Wholesale Level" box to identify a customer as Wholesale.

         Or - if you want the customer screen to appear in Wholesale View

         for *all* customers, set that option in the Customers page of

         "Preferences" from the "Maintenance Menu"

 

 The Repair Status Quick Update screen now has a report

 to print a list of all changes in repair status that

 are being recorded.

         From the Main Menu, choose "Sales Menu", "Repair Status Quick Update"

         Note: If you print the list but then choose to

         Cancel the proposed updates you'd have a list of

         changes that were not actually saved.

 

 Various adjustments.

 

Version 0.980                11/26/2008

===================

 

 The Commission Report adds a Price Range option to

 help clerks follow-up with significant customers.

 

 Correction for the entry of assigned QuickBooks G/L code

 for each major class code.

 

 Room for larger cost on the Extended Details page of

 Inventory Status

 

 Correction for the checkbook reconciliation report in

 JS-Classic.

 

  Various adjustments.

 

Version 0.979                11/24/2008

===================

 

 The spouse's name is now included on repair tickets.

 

 Repair reports can now be filtered by Clerk (Which you might

 choose be the take-in-clerk or the clerk-in-charge.)

 

 + Various adjustments.

 

 

Version 0.978                11/21/2008

===================

 

 Addition of a 2-Part Side-by-Side Repair Ticket. This format

 is arranged to enable printing repair tickets on the same perforated

 paper used for Side-by-Side Sales Receipts.

 

 + Various adjustments.

 

 

Version 0.977                11/20/2008

===================

 

 JS-Classic Interstore Transfer will now transfer the inventory

 Style-specific page (additional style-specific notes and

 wholesale pricing)

 JS-Classic Interstore Transfer also now offers the choice to transfer

 the sender's wholesale price as the receiving store's cost value to

 reflect the price at which Store A sells items to (owned) Store B.

         Select which Wholesale price will be used from 2,C,6 "Change Transfer

         Defaults"

 

 Fix problem when receiving inventory where the manufacturer code could

 not be set different than the vendor code.

 

 Extra room on inventory details screen for over 9 center stones.

 

 Improved default settings for Eltron tag printers (Zebra TLP

 printers without Z in the model number)

 

 Various adjustments.

 

 

Version 0.976                11/14/2008

===================

 

 Fixed a problem with the "Delete Sale" option from the Sales Screen

 

 Ensured that new items received inherit the previous Reorder Levels

 for that same style.

 

 Various adjustments.

 

 

Version 0.975                11/14/2008

===================

 

 Addition of Credit Slip / Gift Card Reports. Run for Used or Unused

 or for All for One Customer or History of One Slip, etc.

 From the Main Menu choose "Sales Menu", "Credit Slips"

 Options, Report.

 

 Credit Slips - Directly on the credit slip entry screen without

 running a report, you can view a list of previous slips for that

 customer.

 

 Addition of printing actual Credit slips. (the Print button

 existed before, but the Print Slip feature was not active.)

 

 Sales Receipts. New option to print total number of items

 anywhere (e.g. at the top of every page "20 Total Items")

 This is mostly for wholesale type of invoices. Instructions are

 available on request.

 

 When accepting a cash payment on a sales screen, the expected

 sequence is to accept the net payment amount in the payment box

 then select Cash, then type the amount tendered. Now, if you

 enter the amount tendered a bit early (in the net payment

 amount box) the payment will auto-correct to save you from

 recording an overpayment.

 

 Changes made to reorder levels for a single Sku on the screen

 Inventory Status will now be copied to all items with the

 same style (because reorder levels are supposed to be Style-specific

 not Sku-specific.)

 

 

 Addition of Sort by Retail Price to Inventory Report.

 

 Addition of more Appraisal Printing Formats.

 

 Removed the duplicated retail column from the Hot Seller Report

 by Style.

 

 

Version 0.974                11/7/2008

===================

 

 The Inventory Hot-Seller report now lets you restrict

 the report by vendor or brand.

 

 The repair screen previously had some "jumpy" cursor

 movement that selected the Description box - that behavior

 is gone.

 

 JS-Classic - adds support for USB cash drawers from

 MS Cash Drawer company. (you need to install this program

 on each computer that has such a cash drawer:

 ftp://jsclient:123456ab@ftp.jewelryshopkeeper.com/hardware/setupms10.exe

 

  + Various adjustments.

 

 

Version 0.973                11/6/2008

===================

 

 Addition of a third Accounts Receivable Month-End Statement.

 The new format is designed to print on pre-printed forms.

 (the previous formats were designed to print on plain paper

 so they printed all the wording, boxes, etc.)

 

 Security option to disallow deletion of an inventory item.

 Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Security",

 "Inventory Security", "Delete Sku in Enter Inventory Screens"

 

 Corrections to the appearance on the Tag Layout screen

 including a top margin indicator for Datamax tags.

 (text should generally be below the dotted top margin line.)

 

 + Various adjustments.

 

 

Version 0.972                11/5/2008

===================

 

 The total customer count is now always shown on the customer profile

 screen. "Maintenance", "Customers."  Also - when running a customer

 report        ("Reports", "Customer Reports & Labels") after you select

 your criteria (zip code, etc) and choose start - before you run

 the report you can see the total number of matching customers in

 the title of the "Print Options Dialog." This removes the need

 to review the entire report just to see the count of the matching

 customers.

 

 You can now change the customer of a sale. Retrieve a sale in VJS, then

 click X-Search, then double-click a different customer and you have

 the choice to reassign the sale to the new customer.

 (This choice appeared to be available before but wasn't active.)

 

 In JS-Classic, the utility SALCST is now present (previously available

 in older versions of Shopkeeper for DOS). This lets you reassign a

 sale from the wrong customer to the correct customer.

 

 

 + various

Version 0.971                11/3/2008

===================

 

 On the sales screen when Billing a previously unbilled job,

 the Cost from the repair ticket is added to the cost details in the sales file.

 Also, the Estimate from the repair ticket is now added to the sales file as

 "Regular Price", (in addition to being added as "Price" which was always the

 case.) This means that if you discount the selling price on the sales screen,

 the sales receipt will also show the original estimate to reflect the discount

 that you offered. Of course, it won't show the original estimate if the final

 selling price is higher.

 

 + various adjustments - including better behavior when selecting a customer from

 the repair screen via X-tra Search.

 

 

Version 0.970                10/31/2008

===================

 

 The Repairs Quick Update Screen now lets you directly

 edit the cost and estimate of each repair.

         "Sales Menu" "Repair Status Quick Update"

         The cost and estimate are available if you enable

         the "Direct Editing" option.

 

 The ability save sales as Quotes has been restored.

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.969                10/29/2008

===================

 

 Activation of Reorder Reports.

         From the "Main Menu" choose "Reports Menu",

         "Hot-Seller & Reorder Reports", change the "Re-Order Report By"

         option to "Below Low" or "Below High or "Any Reorder Item"

         (by default this will remove the requirements for Repeat Sales and

         Turnover Speed - but you can reimpose them.)

                 Reorder levels are assigned on the Notes page of the

                 Inventory Status screen.

 

 Improvements to Inventory Reports by Location.

         The Brand and Style Cross-Tab reports are tidier,

         more succinct and add the item description

         (The Cross-Tab report is the one which shows the

         quantity of each style across the page - up to

         six locations per line.)

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.968                10/28/2008

===================

 

 Further options on the commissions reports.

 

 Correction of problem when entering the expense-code

 breakdown of invoices payable.

 

 

Version 0.967                10/28/2008

===================

         

 Check printing fixes needed for printing checks

 from *other* than the primary checking account.

         Choose "Accounting Menu", "Check Printing"

 

 Improved picture linking to vendors' picture catalogs.

         Previous updates could link Shopkeeper inventory items

         to picture catalogs from vendor websites or CD's.

         The linking was done only at the time you viewed individual

         items in the VJS inventory status screen.

         While the JS-Classic program would display such linked pictures,

         JS-Classic would not implement the link. Also, if you hadn't

         previously linked a picture, the picture would not show on a picture

         inventory report.

         The JS-Classic utility FINDPIX will check all items in inventory

         for a linkable picture. You may want to run this utility each time

         you install on your computer a new set of pictures from a supplier.

         To run this utility start JS-Classic and choose "File",

         "Miscellaneous Options", "Utility Programs", "FINDPIX"

         See notes under Version 0.948 below for folder and image file

         naming requirements.

                         

 Clearer Payment-type Buttons (Cash, Visa, etc)

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Payment Options",

         "Payment Types" then click a payment type word on the list

         on the left, then click an icon on the right.

 

 Enabled Hot-Keys for Payment-type Buttons (Cash, Visa, etc)

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Credit Card Defaults",

         "Payment Types" then click a payment type word on the list

         Then you can assign a letter such as C for Cash, K for Check,

         A for Amex, etc.

                 On any payment screen when the list of payment types is

                 showing, you can press the hot-key on the keyboard to

                 select that payment type. Of course, you can still arrow

                 down through the list and press Enter, or scroll down

                 with the mouse and click.

 

         

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.966                10/27/2008

===================

         

 + various adjustments, including further commission

 reports changes.

 

 

Version 0.965                10/25/2008

===================

 Addition of Commission Reports.

         From the Main Menu choose "Sales Reports",

         "Sales Reports by Clerk - Commissions"

         You can also add this menu choice to any Menu by clicking the

         "Customize" button.

                 A quick sales and commission tally was previously available

                 from the "Clerks" screen - but that was just on-screen and

                 just one clerk at a time.

                 The new reports are full-featured and the summarized versions

                 are much tidier and concise compared to the ones in JS-Classic.

 

 Security setting available to grant or restrict access to printing checks

 by bank account.

 Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Security", "Bank Accounts",

         

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.964                10/24/2008

===================

 

 Fixed Problems encountered when searching for inventory items by

 manufacturer and style number.

         Various screens with a Sku No. lookup - sales, inventory status, etc.

 

 X-tra search from sales screen - show line-item details

 initially instead of showing customer details initially.

 

 Sales screen - show taxable status for non-currently selected line

 for quicker overview of the status of all lines without selecting

 each line separately.

 

 + various adjustments

         

         

Version 0.963                10/23/2008

===================

 

 Problem fixed in Js-Classic Appraisals for loose stones

 with extended loose-stone detail.

 

 The Inventory by Location Report now has the option to print

 the picture of each item.

         From the "Main Menu" select "Reports Menu",

         "Inventory by Location Reports", "Show Pictures"

         This works only in combination with the report organized by Class & Sku.

         (This was previously indicated as having been added in a prior

         update but it actually wasn't.)

 

 

Version 0.962                10/22/2008

===================

 

 Clicking on the "New" button in the customer sales screen allows

 you to add several customers in a row - without the customer screen

 closing after each customer. Useful for entering a long series

 of customers from a list.

 

 Fixed a problem with data-entry in grids. For example, when printing

 tags, when you changed the Quantity, previously you had to hid

 Tab or Enter to save that change. Now it will save even if you click

 directly on the "Print" button after typing a new quantity.

 Another example is the entries in the Look-Up List Manager.

 

 Fixed a check printing error when checks contained a return credit.

 

 + Adjustments to Z report in JS-Classic

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.961                10/21/2008

===================

 

 Addition of two more side-by-side sales receipt formats.

 

 New Cash Register Paid-Out & Cash-Received entry screen.

         Choose "Sales Menu" from the Main Menu the "Paid-Out"

         For a report, choose "Options" from within the Paid-Out screen.

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.960                10/20/2008

===================

 

 Adjustment to X/Z-Report. (There had been a problem with the in-house

 charge sale figures [though they were affecting official sales report figures.])

 

 Posting Report includes a Total With Tax Line (previously the subtotal

 and tax total were shown only separately.)

 

 JS-Classic can now display vendor-downloaded pictures; the ones that

 were made possible for VJS in a previous update. (See 0.948 below)

 

 

Version 0.959                10/17/2008

===================

 

 Adjustment to X/Z-Report. (There had been a problem with the layaway

 figures. [though they were affecting official sales report figures.])

 

 Major Class Code Report. An additional format has been added which

 is much more compact so you may be able to review the entire list

 in a page or two

         Choose "Options" from the Major Class Code screen and when

         the Print Options box appears you'll have choice of Full-Size

         or Compact.

 

 Change to Time Card Reports.

         (previously it was easy to accidentally  select the 'blank' clerk )

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

         Version 0.958                10/13/2008

===================

 

 When the Inventory by Location report is run, simultaneously

 an Excel file copy of the report is created an put in the folder

 VJSREPORTS which is on the Windows Desktop.

 

 Tag layouts change allows you to select the wording for

 the MSRP on the tag (e.g. "MSRP", "Regularly", etc)

 

 + various adjustments to VJS

 + various adjustments to JS-Classic

 

 

Version 0.957                10/08/2008

===================

 

 New complete Consolidated Customer History Report, viewable        and

 printable. There are versions with and without pictures of items

 bought and repairs and with and without customer notes.

         Choose "Entire Customer History" from the "Options" toolbar

         entry of the screens for Customers, Repairs, Sales and

         X-tra Search

 

         

Version 0.956                10/08/2008

===================

 

 You can use a graphics logo file at the top of repair envelopes

 instead of your company name and address in text.

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipt Options",

         "Half and 40 Col.", add/find a logo file and also UN-check

         the box "Do you want your store name on the receipt"

                 [under the 40-column section - not at the top - as this

                 selection applies to both 40 column receipts AND repair

                 envelopes]

         

 On-screen progress meters for the GMROI reports.  

 

 + various adjustments to VJS

 + various adjustments to JS-Classic

 

 

Version 0.955                10/02/2008

===================

 

 You can now change vendor code, manufacturer code, P.O. number

 from "Inventory Status" screen.

         After unlocking the page, those boxes are still

         protected, but you can Control-Click them to

         change them.

 

 

Version 0.954                09/30/2008

===================

 

 Additional customer search. When you search by customer number

 you can append a letter or two of the customer surname. E.g. you

 can type 9145A for customer Adams with No. 9145

                 Customer searches by account number are often done when processing

         accounts receivable payments accompanied by a payment coupon.

                 This new search helps when the customer number looks like the

         beginning of a phone number. E.g. after typing 9145 VJS could show

         you customers with a phone number starting with (914) 5xx-xxxx but

         with the A appended it would switch to customer number search. It will

         accept up to 3 letters, however no more than 1 will ever be needed.

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.953                09/29/2008

===================

 

 Security change required in order to continue to receive

 VJS updates and to submit error reports.

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.952                09/25/2008

===================

 

 Negative sales taxes are permitted. This is often needed

 for sales tax rates that taper-off at higher sales values.

 

 + various adjustments to sales and inventory screens

 

 

Version 0.951                09/24/2008

===================

 

 Fixed A/R Received-on-Account receipts.

 

 Repair Envelopes print the date the item was received.

 

 Calculated / suggested repair due-dates will Skip Sundays and

 Mondays. Of course, you can override and specify any due-date

 you like.

         Enter the standard due-date lead-time in "Maintenance"

         "Preferences", "Repair Defaults Cont."

 

 Easier entry of time-card records and option to change and save

 the "message o' the day."

 

 Purchase Order printout will no longer truncate long style numbers.

         Choose "Print Order" from the P.O. page of "Inventory Entry"

 

 Improved navigation of the Major Class Code screen

 

 Improved navigation of the Minor Class Code screen

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.949-0.950   09/22/2008

===================

 

 Removal of an ignorable error message from sales screen.

 

 Add impcst Utility (only for use in special cases with

 instructions from Compulink)

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.948   09/22/2008

=============

 Addition of his log file to the VJS File Center.

         Identify VJS and JS-Classic program changes

         by choosing "More", "What's New."

 

 The Inventory by Location Report now has the option to print

 the picture of each item.

         From the "Main Menu" select "Reports Menu",

         "Inventory by Location Reports", "Show Pictures"

 

 To make the Sku number on price tag print at the same size

 as the retail price add the keyword "SKURETAILFONT" anywhere

 in the Miscellaneous Settings box in "Maintenance", "Preferences",

 "General"

         This helps if you choose a larger font for retail price

         and want a similarly large font for the Sku number.

         This has been available in JS-Classic previously.

 

 The Cash Register "Sales Payment Spreadsheet" Report will now show

 finalized repairs and special orders even when no final payment was

 received that day.

         From the "Main Menu" select "Sales Reports Menu",

         "Sales Payment Spreadsheet"

 

 You can download your vendors' picture catalogs to your hard drive

       and VJS will link the picture automatically.

         Save the picture files in the folder

         \visualjs\data\main\images\inv\XXX

         where you might be using a different folder for "main"

         and where XXX is the a folder of the same name as the 3-letter

         Vendor/Mfg code.

         The picture names have to be the same as the style number

         - but only letters and digits - no spaces or punctuation.

                 E.g. AB78W.JPG for style AB-78/W

                 The pictures will link either when you receive

                 new merchandise or if you check an item in

                 "Inventory Status."

                 Later there may be a utility to retroactively

                       link items that are already in your inventory list

 

         Remember that the VJS daily backup does NOT backup

         any of your picture files,

 

         You need to establish your own backup routine to safeguard

         all your images in the entire

         \visualjs\data\main\images\ folder - and subfolders.

         (Again, you may use a different folder name other than "main")

 

         E.g you could backup to DVD, to an external hard drive,

         to an on-line internet backup service etc.

 

         A Daily backup may not be necessary, weekly may be fine

         or Monthly at the longest.

 

 

 You can control the suggested down-payment percentage for special orders.

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Sales Defaults",

         "Sales Screen Cont."

         Typically this could be 33.33% or 50% or 0% (if there is

         no standard for the deposit.)

 

 More standard entry of accounts receivable interest rates and minimum

 payment amounts (percentages instead of fractions)

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Accounts Receivable"

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.947        09/19/2008

=============

 Non merchandise payables receive an automatic G/L code

 distribution suggestion as per the merchandise payables

 as in 0.946 below.

 

 + various adjustments

 

 

Version 0.946        09/19/2008

=============

 After entering accounts payable        invoices for merchandise

 or non merchandise you will be automatically prompted to

 distribute the payable total among the correct G/L account

 codes.

 For merchandise invoices an initial distribution is suggested

 based on the vendor's usual G/L code and the usual Freight and

 Additional Taxes G/L Code.

 

 Addition in JS-Classic of the utility APOBAL. This utility

 checks if there are any accounts payable invoices which have not

 been expensed and then helps you expense them all correctly.

         [payables which are not expensed will not show on

         financial reports.]

 

 + various adjustments

 

Version 0.945        09/18/2008

=============

 

 Addition of the option to print in-house copy of received

 invoices of merchandise.

         Choose "Inventory Entry" Enter a new or retrieve an

         existing invoice then choose "Print List"

 

 Addition of the Preference whether or not to suppress Due Date

 and Estimate Amount on Repair Tickets.

         Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipt Options",

         "Repair Ticket Options"

 

 Automatic Discount options now apply to VJS sales screen.

 You can apply automatic discount options on the customer

 profile screen, the minor code screen and the major code

 screen. The order of priority is Customer, Minor, Major.

 

 

 + various adjustments

 

Version 0.944        09/11/2008

=============

 Addition of "Deduct Inventory" feature from "Inventory Menu"

         Quickly lower the in-stock levels of multiple

         inventory items.

                 This feature is primarily used for those users who

                 have not ordered Sales features

 

 Addition of "Register Codes"

         If you stamp different workstations to stamp payments

         and sales with a different register codes then you can

         run separated cash register reports to help balance them.

                 Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Local Defaults",

                 "Local Defaults Continued", "Cash Register Code"

                  Enter a two-letter or two-digit code.

                 * See notes below on "Local Settings"

         To run separated reports, choose "Sales Reports" then

         "Sales Payment Spreadsheet" or "X & X Report"

         

                 

 Addition of Sales Prefix Letters per Computer

         This feature adds a letter to the beginning of each

         sales number. E.g. W so you would have sales numbers

               such as W1012, W1025, etc

         This Code is computer-specific so Computer 1 could have

               W and Computer 2 could have X.

         This may be helpful to more quickly identify which

         computer a sale was rung up at

         This does not affect the number part of the sales number

         So you might have a sequence such as W1001, X1002, 1003

         X1004, X1005, W1006 etc.  Note that some computers may

               have No prefix while others do.

                 Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Local Defaults",

                 "Local Defaults Continued", "Prefix Letter For Sale Numbers"

                  Enter a one-letter code (no numbers)

                 * See notes below on "Local Settings"

         There are no reports which use this prefix.

                 

 + various adjustments

 

Previous Recent Updates

=======================

 Print Purchase Orders

         From the "Inventory Entry" screen, Choose Purchase Orders

         Then either add a new or retrieve an existing purchase

         order. Then Click the "Print Order" button.

                 There are two pre-made layouts: One with

                         01 Without Sku No. and with Cost

                         02 Without Sku No. without Cost

                         03 With your Sku No. and with Cost

 

 Addition of Print Checks

         From the Main Menu select Accounting Menu, Print Checks

         * note that entry of checks is still done in Js-Classic for now

 

                 

 Addition of Quick Repair Update

         From the "Main Menu" select "Sales Menu"

         "Repair Status Quick Update"

         Enter a list of repairs, then enter the items(s) to be update

         (e.g. Location), choose "Preview" to view the proposed changes,

         then chose "Save Changes" to update the master repair list.

 

 

Notes on "Local Settings"

=========================

 

Essentially all choices you make in "Maintenance", "Preferences"

affect ALL computers on a network - if you have a network.

 

Local settings are preferences that you choose that affect only

the computer at which you enter those settings.

If you enter a Cash Register Code FR at the front computer, that

will not affect any other computer.

 

These settings are stored in the .INI file C:\VISUALJS\VISUALJS.INI

folder of that computer. If you reformat or replace a computer

your local settings will have to be re-done. (or you can

save then restore this .INI file to the new or newly formatted computer.)

 

 

Notes on "Local Settings" and Remote Desktop

=============================================

 

These Notes apply only to Windows Remote Desktop or

Windows Terminal Services. These notes do Not apply to other

remote access solutions such as LogMeIn or GotoMyPC.

 

When you use Windows Remote Desktop you access a "virtual"

computer inside the Remote Desktop host computer.

 

Several different people from several locations may access

this same computer.

 

In order that different people accessing the same computer

can maintain different local settings, local settings

for Remote Desktop sessions are store separately for each

Windows User Name who logs in.

 

That way JOE can access Remote Desktop specifying a

a 7% sales tax rate (for Town A) while SUE  can specify

a 5% sales tax rate for Town B - even though they

are both running VJS from the same computer.

 

Note that if both JOE and BOB from Town A log in

with different Windows User Names, they Both have

to establish the correct local settings. BOB will Not

get any of JOE's local settings even if they connect from

the same Computer X in Town A.